UC-NRLF 
 
 B 3 &^y 2SD 
 
 m 
 
 ^^ 
 
 \imL 
 
LieR.ARV j 
 
 oi- Tin: j 
 
 University of California. | 
 
 OIKT OF" i 
 
 PACIFIC THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY. I 
 
 zAccessiou 
 
 Class 
 
 pacific theological ^gminai^H 
 ALCOVE, SHELF, 
 
 "S PRESENTED BV 
 
EXPOSITION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 MOYEMENT-CUPiE. 
 
 \ 
 
AN 
 
 EXPOSITION 
 
 SWEDISH MOYEMENT-CURE. 
 
 EMBRAOLNTx 
 
 THE HISTORY AM) PHILOSOPHY OF THIS SYSTEM OF IfEDICAL TREATMENT, 
 
 WITH EXA3IPLES OF SINGLE MOVEMENTS, AND DIRECTIONS FOR 
 
 THEIR USE IN VARIOUS FORJIS OF CHRONIC DISEASE, 
 
 FORMING A COMPLETE JLAJfUAL OF EXERCISES : 
 
 TOGETHER WITH 
 
 A SUMMARY OF THE PRINCIPLES OF GENERAL HYGIEXE. 
 
 BY 
 
 GEO. H. TAYLOR, A.M., M.D., 
 
 PBINOIPAL PHYSICIAN TO THE EEMEDIAL HYGIENIC INSTITUTE OF NEW YORK CITY 
 
 Nrtu ¥orU: 
 Fowler and ^Vells, Publishers, 
 
 No. 308 BEOADWAY. 
 
 1 SCO. 
 
,u^: 
 
 ft 
 
 f^^^ 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by 
 
 GEO. H. TAYLOE, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
 District of New Yorli. 
 
 Da VIES & Kext, 
 
 STEREOTYPEES AND ELECTIIOTTPERS, 
 
 113 Nassau Street, ]V. Y. 
 
3lo t)is JFricntis, 
 PROF. GABRIEL BRANTIXG, 
 
 FOR FOETT-FIYE TEARS DIRECTOR OF THE SWEDISH CENTRAL 
 GYMNASTIC INSTITUTE, 
 
 AND 
 
 HERMAI SATHEKBURG, M.D., 
 
 PROFESSOR OF OETHOPOEDIC SURGERY IN THE CAROLINIAN MEDICO- 
 CHIRURGICAL INSTITUTE, STOCKHOLM, 
 
 AS A TESTIMONIAL OF GKATITUDE 
 
 FOR 
 THEIR KIND PERSONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND GENEROUS HOSPITALITY, 
 
 ^Ijis matli, 
 
 BEING AN ATTEMPT TO CARRY OUT, IN A NEW DIRECTION, 
 
 THOSE PRINCIPLES 
 
 TO THE ELUCIDATION AND PRACTICE OF WHICH THEY HAVE SO 
 ASSIDUOUSLY AND SUCCESSFULLY DEVOTED THEMSELVES, 
 
 IS 
 
 AFFECTIONATELY AND RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED 
 
 BY 
 
 _ 84551 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 To do what he can to encourage and assist 
 people in a rational endeavor to acquire and 
 maintain an intelligent control of their entire 
 physiological being — to bring into and keep in 
 healthful and effective play all the complex 
 machinery of their organism, has been the sole 
 aim of the writer in this work. The importance 
 of the agency proposed to effect this is conceded 
 in general terms by all ; it never was disputed, 
 indeed. But this admission, so freely and so 
 gi^acefully rendered, amounts to very little ; it is 
 not much better, really, than a virtual confes- 
 sion of inability to rebut the arguments directly 
 or indirectly advanced in every sound physio- 
 logical treatise. 
 
 The plan of the present work, so far as I am 
 
Vlll PEKFACE. 
 
 aware, is quite new, no attempt having been 
 hitherto made to analyze single movements^ with 
 a view to the production of such a combination 
 of effects as are wanted to meet the various 
 pathological needs of the system. This object, 
 I am quite certain, has been, at best, very imper- 
 fectly accomplished ; but I would feign indulge 
 the hope that I have at least done the work of 
 a humble pioneer, in breaking the ground and 
 throwing out some hints and suggestions that 
 may prove useful to the future laborer in this 
 wide and fertile field. 
 
 The Author can not but hope, too, that he 
 has furnished to his medical readers some food 
 for thought that may lead to results in their prac- 
 tice that shall more than compensate for the 
 time and strength expended in the work. 
 
 To a thorough understanding of all the prin- 
 ciples of the MovEMENT-CcTEE, au intimate ac- 
 quaintance with Anatomy and Physiology^ and, 
 indeed, with medical science generally, is abso- 
 lutely essential. Of course, skill in diagnosis^ 
 and in the practical application of these princi- 
 ples in the treatment of the countless ills of hu- 
 man flesh, can be acquired only by long and 
 patient training and study. I do not expect, for 
 I know it would be quite impossible in the nature 
 
PREFACE. IX 
 
 of things, to turn every good-natured person wlio 
 may do me the kindness to peruse these chapters 
 into a good doctor. I should be entirely satis- 
 fied — the height of my ambition would be reach- 
 ed — could I but prevent a few hundreds of my 
 Christian fellow-men and women from maldng 
 had doctors of tJiemselves, 
 
 I have not endeavored to shake my reader's 
 faith in the wise, prudent, conscientious, and 
 learned physician. No one honors him more 
 than does the writer. Blessed, say I, is the 
 man or woman who has a good doctor^ but more 
 blessed he lolio can do ivithout him ! To enable 
 my reader so to do has been my main aim in the 
 preparation of this manual. 
 
 In Part I. is given what I conceive to be the 
 more important principles upon which is based 
 the practice of the Movement-Cure. These prin- 
 ciples are mostly simple deductions from phys- 
 iological science, and the cui^e is only the prac- 
 tical application of demonstrated jDhysiological 
 truths 
 
 In Fart 11. are given a number of examples of 
 the method of carrying these principles into 
 practice. 
 
 In Part III. the pathology of various common 
 chronic affections is briefly discussed, and certain 
 
 1^ 
 
PKEFACE. 
 
 means of preserving the healtli and improving 
 the strength are noticed. 
 
 Part IV. contains a concise statement of some 
 of the relations of the system to temperature^ air^ 
 foocl^ lights lieat^ etc., with observations upon the 
 superior advantages of obeying the laws of life, 
 with a view to the maintenance or the restora- 
 tion of health and vigor, over irrational and in- 
 discriminate drug dosing. 
 
 GEO. H. TAYLOR. 
 No. 67 West SSth Steeet, New Yoek. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PEINCIPLES CONNECTED WITH THE USE OF MOVEMENTS. 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 PAGE 
 Physical Self-Training, and the Classes of Persons for whom it is specially 
 
 needful 17 
 
 1. After Duplicated Movements \ 19 
 
 2. Those who are but Slightly AflFected by Disease 20 
 
 8. Sedentary Persons ' 21 
 
 4. Persons Enoaged in Mental Toil 21 
 
 5. Young Students of both Sexes 22 
 
 6. Tendency to Diminish the Drug Practice 24 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 
 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 Movements among the Chinese 32 
 
 Movements in India 39 
 
 Movements among the Greeks and Romans 41 
 
 Biography of Ling. 47 
 
 'Ling's Statements of Principles 53 
 
 The Movement System in Stockholrfi 59 
 
 Testimony of Philosophers— Dally, Hoffman, Rousseau, Pliny, Galen, Plato, 
 
 Bacon, Georgii 62 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE RELATIONS OF CHEMICAL AND MOLECULAR CHANGES TO THE 
 ORIGIN OF FORCE IN THE BODY. 
 
 Importance of First Principles 68 
 
 These Forces a Product of Vital Action 71 
 
 Different kinds of Motion 77 
 
 Reciprocity of Actions 80 
 
 The System as a Reservoir of Force 82 
 
 Description of Muscle. 83 
 
 Physiological Effects of Exercise 85 
 
 Effects of Musculay Contraction on the Local Circulation 86 
 
 Effect on Respiration 87 
 
 Effect on the Secretions 88 
 
 Effect on the Excretions 89 
 
 Effect on Absorption 89 
 
 Effect on the Quality of the Blood 90 
 
 Effect on the Digestion 90 
 
 Effect on the Organizing Process 91 
 
 Movements Stimulate the Vitalizing Processes , 92 
 
 Co-ordination of Motions by the Nerves 93 
 
 The foregoing Effects 96 
 
 84551 
 
Xll CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTEK IV. 
 
 MOVEMENTS, AND THE PEINCIPLES GOTEENING THEIE APPLICATION. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Definition 9T 
 
 Different kinds of Movements, Active and Passive 93 
 
 Single and Duplicated Movements 99 
 
 Concentric and Eccentric Movements 102 
 
 General and Localized Movements 105 
 
 Influence of Movemen's in Regulating the Forces of tlie Body 109 
 
 Relations of tiie Action of the VVill and of the Muscles in Movements 112 
 
 Movements as a Specific Medical Agency 116 
 
 Movemeots ms related to Pathology 120 
 
 Province of Movements 121 
 
 Morale of Movements 122 
 
 CHAPTER Y. 
 
 MOTEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 
 The Muscles a Medium of Language, and of the Manifestation of Character . . 129 
 
 CHAPTER YI. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR PRESCRIBING AND APPLYING MOVEMENTS. 
 
 Time Considered 135 
 
 Manner 136 
 
 Pvhythm 136 
 
 Exertion 137 
 
 Number 137 
 
 Order 13S 
 
 Eelation to Diseased Parts 139 
 
 Eegions of the Body 140 
 
 CHAPTER Yn. 
 
 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 Importance of System 142 
 
 Positions and Movements 144 
 
 Commencing Positions 145 
 
 Principal Positions of the Trunk 145 
 
 Standing Positions— Erect, Fall, and Bent Standing 145 
 
 Kneeling Positions — Erect and Fall Kneeling 146 
 
 Sittina: Positions— Sitting, Short, and Long 146 
 
 Lie-Sitting, Half-Lying.^Fall and Stride Sitting 147 
 
 Lying— Forward. Backward. Sidewise, Trunk, and Leg 147 
 
 Head-and-Heels, Elbows-and-Toes, Sidewise and Balance Lying 148 
 
 Hanging 148 
 
 Positions of the Arms and Legs 14S 
 
 Arm Positions seen in a Front View of the Body 150 
 
 Arm Positions seen in a Side View of the Body 152 
 
 Leg Positions 154 
 
 Lower Leg Positions 155 
 
 Stride, Walk, Step-Standing, and Foot-Support-Standing 155 
 
 Squat and Leg-Angle Positions 156 
 
CONTENTS. XUl 
 
 fart ®to0. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF SINGLE MOVEMENTS. 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 EEGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Kemarks on Movements of the Feet 157 
 
 Examples of Movements of the Region of the Feet 160 
 
 1. Standing, Feet-Extinding IGO 
 
 2. Toe-Support, Half-Standing, Ileel-rressing 161 
 
 3. AVing-Walk, Toe Wall-Standing, Foot-Eending 162 
 
 4. Long Sitting, Feet Sidewisc-Bending 16i 
 
 Long-Sitting, Feet-Kotation 163 
 
 Foot-Percussion 164 
 
 Foot-Eotation (Passive) 165 
 
 Support Half- Standing, Leg-Swinging 166 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 EEGIOX OF THE LEGS. 
 
 Eemarks on Movements of the Legs 167 
 
 Walking 167 
 
 Examples of Movements of the Legs 170 
 
 Wing-Stride-Standing, Curtseying 170 
 
 Half-Standing, Curtseying 171 
 
 Balance-Standing, Curtseying 172 
 
 Wing-Kneeling, Knee-Stretching 172 
 
 Half-Standing, Alternate Twisting 173 
 
 Wing- Walk, Forward-Fall-Standing, Knee-Bending 374 
 
 Leg-Angle, Half-Standing, Leg-Clapping 174 
 
 Region of the Hips 17o 
 
 Eemarks on the Region of the Hips 175 
 
 Wing-Stride, Short-Sitting, Leg Outward-Stretching 176 
 
 Leg-Angle, Half-Standing Knee-Stretching 177 
 
 Wing-Recline, Support-Sitting, Knees-Raising 177 
 
 Half-Standing, Leg Forward-Raising 178 
 
 H;df Standing, Leg Backward-Raising 179 
 
 Half-Sianding, Leg Sidewise-Raising 179 
 
 Forward-Fall, Head-Support-Standing, Leg-Raising ISO 
 
 Half-Standing, Leg-Rotation 181 
 
 Wing-Sitting, Double Leg-Twisting ISl 
 
 Legs- Angle, Lie-Sitting, Knees-Stretching 182 
 
 Shelter Trunk-Backward -Lying, Legs-Raising 1-^3 
 
 Kick Backward-Lying, Legs-Separation 184 
 
 Sidewise-Lying, Lt*g-Raising 184 
 
 Backward-Lying, Legs-Rotation 185 
 
 W^ing Leg-Angle Half-Lying, Knee-Stretching 185 
 
 Thigh-Rotation 186 
 
 Chine-Knocking 187 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 EEGIOX OF THE TEUXK. 
 
 Remarks on the Region of the Trunk 183 
 
 Movements of the Digestive Organs 189 
 
 Movements of the Respiratory Orgaiis ; . . . . 193 
 
 Stretch-Stride Short- Sitting, trunk Forward-Sidewise Falling 198 
 
 Stretch-Stride Short-Sitting, Trunk Backward-Sidewise Falling 199 
 
 Stretch-Sitting, Trunk Backward-Falling 199 
 
 Half-Stretch, Half-Wing, Stride Short-Sitting, Trunk Si lewise Bending 200 
 
XIV CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Ilalf-Stretch, Half-Wing, Stride-Sitting, Trunk-Twisting 201 
 
 Shelter Stride-Sitting, Cliange-Twisting 202 
 
 Yard-Sitting, Arms Swaving 203 
 
 StrL-tcli-Stri(K'-Knceliiig. "Trunk Backward-Bending 2n4 
 
 Half Strttcli. Ilaif-Wing. Keclined Stride-Kneeling, Trunk-Twisting 206 
 
 Ilalf-Sirctcli, Il.iir-Wiiig, Walk-Kneeling, Trunk-Twisting 206 
 
 Arm.— Anirle, INclincd Kneeling, Arms Stretching 207 
 
 Rark-K.clinr.l Stride-Kneeliiig, Arms Backward-Striking 208 
 
 WiiiLC Stridf-lviK-rliiig, Ringing 208 
 
 Yar.i Stride Jviieelinir, Swaying 209 
 
 Stride-Sitting, Arms Sidewise-Kaising 210 
 
 Stretch Half- Walk, Half Krietling, Trunk Backward-Bending 211 
 
 Ilalf-Wing, Half-Curve (weight held) Step-Eeclined-Standing, Trunk Sidewise- 
 
 Bending 211 
 
 Half- A ing, Half-Stretch, Step Standing, Trunk Sidewise-Bending 212 
 
 Half-Stretch, Half-Wing, Half-Kick, Eeclined Standing, Trunk Sidewise-Bend- 
 ing 213 
 
 Half-Stretch, Eeclined Kick-Standing, Trunk-Twisting 213 
 
 Shelter Long-Sitting, Trunk Forward-Bending 214 
 
 Arms-Angle, Half-Kick (foot supported) Eeclined-Standing, Arms-Stretching. . 214 
 
 Yard-Eeclmed, Half-Kick Standing, Swaving 216 
 
 Half-Stretch, Half-Wing, Walk, Trunk Sidewise-Bent, Standing, Trunk-Twist- 
 ing 216 
 
 Yard Walk-Standing, Trunk Backward-Bending 21T 
 
 Upward-Sidewise Stretch Doorway-Standing, Walking 217 
 
 Shelter, Sidewise-Bent Stride-Standing, Trunk Eotation 218 
 
 Head-aiid- 1 1 eels Lving, Holding 219 
 
 Elbow-and-Toes Lying, Holding. 220 
 
 Elbow-and-Leg Sidewise-Lying^ Hips Eaising 221 
 
 Shelter Baek-Lving, Head-and-Legs Eaising 222 
 
 Back Lying, Holding 222 
 
 Wing-Suide Leg-Angle Standing, Trunk Vibration 223 
 
 Operations upon the Digestive Organs 223 
 
 Kneading, Snaking, Stroking, Circular Stroking, Point Pressure, Clapping 224 
 
 Agitation of the Abdomen and Diaphragm 226 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 EEGION OF THE AEMS. 
 
 Eemarks on this Eegion 227 
 
 Stretch Backward-Lying, Weight-Holding 229 
 
 Eack Grasp, Forward Fall-Standing, Arms Angling 230 
 
 Stretch-Grasp Standing, Hip Eotation 231 
 
 Half Stretch Grasp Standing, Arm Twisting 232 
 
 Yard Stride-Sitting, Arms Twisting 232 
 
 Standing, Arms Eotating. 233 
 
 Hanging, Swinging 234 
 
 Swing-Hang-Standing, Trunk Eotating 236 
 
 Trunk Forward-Fall Hanging, Holding 237 
 
 Backward- Fall Elbows Support Lying, Holding 238 
 
 Half-Stretch Support Half Standing, Stretching 239 
 
 Stretch-Stride Standing or Star-Standing, Stretching 240 
 
 CHAPTER Xn. 
 
 EEGION OF THE HEAD AND NEOK. 
 
 Eemarks on the Eegion of the Head and Neck 241 
 
 Head Turnin 
 
 242 
 
 Head Forward Bending 242 
 
 Head Backward Bending !...!!!.'.!.'. 243 
 
 Head Backward Bending and Twisting (Screw-Raising).*. .....'........'.'.'. 
 
CONTENTS. XV 
 
 fart %\xtt 
 
 THE PATHOLOGY OF SEVERAL FORMS OF CHRONIC DISEASE. 
 CHAPTER Xin. 
 
 THE EELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Kemark 246 
 
 Indigestion, Dyspepsia 247 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 Nervousness 262 
 
 Seminal Disease 271 
 
 Neuralgia 273 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 Scrofulous Aflfections 277 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 Pulmonary Affections— Consumption 286 
 
 CHAPTER XVn. 
 Paralysis of the Nerves of Motion 300 
 
 CHAPTER XVin. 
 
 CONSTIPATION, DIARRHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 Constipation 808 
 
 Diarriiea 315 
 
 Piles 31T 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 Deformities of the Spine 320 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 Female Diseases 323 
 
 CHAPTER XXL 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 MoTements to Kemove Fatigue 340 
 
 To Stop Nose-Bleed 341 
 
 To Induce Vomiting 342 
 
 To Remove Chilblains 348 
 
 To Relieve Headache 344 
 
 Worms in Children 345 
 
 Hernia 346 
 
 Prolapsus of the Womb and Bowels — 347 
 
 To Relieve Backache 347 
 
 Amenorrhea 347 
 
 To Excite Action of the Lower Bowels 347 
 
XVI CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XXn. 
 
 DIFFERENT EFFECTS OF VAEIOIJS COMMON EXEECISES UPON PEESONS 
 IN HEALTH. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Walking 348 
 
 Running 348 
 
 Dancing 349 
 
 Sewing 349 
 
 Agricultural Labors 350 
 
 Painting, etc 351 
 
 Study 351 
 
 CHAPTER XXni. 
 
 MOVEMENTS ADAPTED TO THE USE OF SCHOOLS. 
 Order of Command for Free-Sitting Movements 355 
 
 !art imx. 
 
 HYGIENE. 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 Food 36S 
 
 Quantity 353 
 
 Quality 360 
 
 Salt 362 
 
 Preparation of Food— Cooking 363 
 
 Proper Times for Eating 364 
 
 Drinks 366 
 
 Milk 366 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 TEMPEEATUEE. 
 
 Physiological Effect of Heat and Cold 36S 
 
 Origin of Colds 371' 
 
 Effect of Continued and Great Extremes 373 
 
 Importance of Cold 374 
 
 The Water-Cure 374 
 
 The Cold Bath 375 
 
 The Warm Bath 376 
 
 The Hot Bath 377 
 
 Local Baths 377 
 
 Effect on the Nerves 378 
 
 Compresses 379 
 
 The Air Bath 879 
 
 The Cold General Bath 880 
 
 Eeaction 3S1 
 
 Shower and Douche Baths 3sl 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 Light 383 
 
 CHAPTER XXVn. 
 Mental Hygiene 3S6 
 
A MANUAL OF EXERCISES 
 
 PART I. 
 
 PEINCIPLES COXKECTED WITH THE USE OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 Physical Self-teaiotng, aub the Classes of Persons 
 FOR WHOM IT IS SPECIALLY JSTeedful. — ^Therc are not in 
 nature nicer or wiser adaptations of means trends, than 
 are exhibited in the arrangements* of the miman sys- 
 tem for the maintenance in perfect order and health of 
 its functions. Such provision implies the reverse of 
 chance or accident as its controlling cause, and in fact 
 intelligence in the arrangement of its activities and 
 relations, if indeed safety and perpetuity be the object 
 contemplated in it. That all may have to a certain 
 and sufficient extent the control of their own physical 
 systems, will scarcely be denied ; for it is on this fact 
 that human actions and human responsibility are based. 
 The acknowledgment of this evidently throws the 
 responsibility for his health, efficiency, and happiness 
 upon his own shoulders, where every man should feel 
 that it belongs. 
 
 . 84551 
 
18 INTEODUCTOEY. 
 
 The moral and intellectual natures of man have ever 
 been regarded as proper subjects for training and de- 
 velopment, in order to secure their due healthful 
 exercise. The physical system is manifestly a subject 
 for corresponding attention ; and its right to this ad- 
 vantage should be recognized, and receive in civilized 
 communities no less regard. That physical culture 
 should claim the precedence, would seem to be indi- 
 cated by the fact that the physical is prior in the order 
 of development, not only as respects the individuals 
 who is, through the physical^ fitted for his destiny as 
 an intellectual being, but also in the progressive un- 
 folding of the powers of the race. 
 
 Physical culture, then, should be promoted both as 
 a science and as an art. in all the numerous applica- 
 tions of which it is susceptible, till it assumes a posi- 
 tion in the public esteem commensurate with its im- 
 portance. The particular form it shall ta]?:e, and the 
 modes of carrying it out, will long remain a matter of 
 abstract md experjmentaj investigation; each person 
 interested contributing something of his experience 
 and thought toward the realization of the grand objecj^ 
 — the highest efficiency and well-being of mankind,, 
 physical and moral. 
 
 This subject is one that receives much superficial at- 
 tention. It is one concerning which an abundance of 
 "vague and glittering generalities" have been ex- 
 pressed, but only a very few practical precepts or defi- 
 nite directions given. While all seem familiar with 
 the subject of exercise, in its relations to the health, 
 but very few admit that they are prepared to meet, 
 with suitable applications, any given case requiring 
 treatment- The feeble person and the invalid are con- 
 stantly advised to take exercise. The popular lecturer, 
 
INTRODUCTORY. 19 
 
 books, friends, physicians unite in confirming the dic- 
 tates of his common sense in this respect; but the in- 
 quirer looks ahnost in vain to all these sources for any 
 definite and satisfactory information based on physi- 
 ology and the laws of life, such as will tell him liow the 
 remedy operates, and also liow it should he applied. 
 
 The i:)resent treatise, it is hoped, will assist in sup- 
 plying the needs here referred to, in the several direc- 
 tions now to be named. 
 
 1. The class of persons who will best understand 
 the meaning as well as the method of the present 
 treatise, consists of those who have been, or are, under 
 my medical direction. Indeed, this is the class that 
 loudly call for the work, and who have constantly 
 spurred me on to its completion. After receiving for 
 a while a full prescription of duplicated movements, 
 until their health has become much improved, such 
 persons require, at every stage of their progress toward 
 the goal of perfect health, directions for self^eatment 
 — for a continuation, in a modified form, of the measures 
 previously employed. I have felt, as others have and 
 will, the need of such particular directions as each 
 patient may require, and which this treatise is an 
 attempt to furnish. In this way, the purposes of both 
 physician and patient are equally served, and the desired 
 object of extending the practice of movements in a do- 
 mestic way is to a limited extent realized. But the 
 reader must understand at the outset, that the move- 
 ment-cure can be practiced in this way (/lily to a limited 
 extent, both on account of the obscure nature of the 
 diseases for which it is applied, and also from the kind 
 of processes which it employs. 
 
 The present treatise is therefore confined to the dis- 
 
20 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 ciission of a few single movements. With those who 
 have had a previous training with the duplicated move- 
 ments^ the directions herein contained will be of the 
 greatest service, not only for the purpose of carrying 
 on the curative processes to results of greater perfec- 
 tion, but also for preventing a recurrence of the com- 
 plaint, since it is the prime object of the treatment to 
 secure to the invalid the intelligent and permanent 
 command of himself. 
 
 2. There is in the community a very large class of 
 persons who might be called half-invalids — ^persons 
 who do not possess a satisfactory amount of health, 
 but who at the same time feel that they are not the 
 proper subjects for medical care. Such persons feel 
 that they are forewarned of disease, and would gladly 
 attempt to avert it, could they obtain such directions 
 for doing so as would meet the approbation of their 
 reason or instinctive sense of physiological propriety. 
 Current ^edical practice takes no cognizance of these 
 cases ; or if it does, it is in such a way as often to confirm 
 the subject in serious and prolonged disease. Aware 
 of this fact, many keep aloof from medical advice of 
 any kind, and insist that suffering in any of the more 
 moderate forms is less a misfortune than the habit of 
 gulping drugs for the palliation they afford. For per- 
 sons of this class, it is evident that it is not drugs, but 
 such easily performed self -training as that of which 
 examples and directions are here given, that is i-e- 
 quired. By this means, the abundant latent powers 
 which they possess are developed into activity and 
 harmony, and they soon rejoice in health, while the neg- 
 lect or continued misdirection of these would eventually 
 have degenerated into grave, and perhaps fatal, disease. 
 
INTRODUCTORY. 21 
 
 3. Besides these, there are many whose avocations 
 are sedentary, yet such as require the continued and 
 often severe employment of a part of their muscles. 
 /This tends to an undue and disproportionate activity 
 of some parts of the body to the detriment of others. 
 Such avocations constitute in many constitutions a 
 potent cause of ill health; but the ill effects of them 
 can, in general, be easily counteracted by a recourse 
 to such means as are prescribed in this treatise. Per- 
 sons suftering from the causes here alluded to, will be 
 enabled to remove fatigue and congestion from the 
 parts of the body that have been abused by too con- 
 tinuous exercise, and thus to prevent the occurrence of 
 the grievous symptoms so commonly resulting from 
 such causes. 
 
 4. Persons of literary and of husiiiess habits require 
 a similar aid to preserve them from falling into habit- 
 ual ill health. The habit of this class of persons is, to 
 employ all the available forces of their ^organism 
 through a particular channel — the brain and nerves, 
 and of course to excite nutrition chiefly in a single de- 
 partment of their organism. This is contrary to the 
 laws of the system, and ill consequences are necessa- 
 rily ere long felt. This disproportionate use and un- 
 balanced nutrition, whereby one set of functions is 
 heightened, is, of course, to the detriment of another 
 set of functions, which, becoming reduced in power, 
 are, at last, literally starved out. Examples of this 
 class of persons are met with everywhere, and gener- 
 ally recognized at sight. It is to be hoped the time 
 will come when such physiological abuse will meet the 
 general reprehension it so much deserves. 
 
 The principles advocated, and the practical examples 
 
22 INTRODUCTORT. 
 
 afforded in this work, are adapted to obviate all such 
 unfortunate results. Persons whose tastes or necessities 
 lead them to employ the nervous department of their 
 being chiefly, may^ if they choose to learn how^ counter- 
 act any disproportionate nervous wear, and by attend- 
 ing to its cultivation, maintain their physical vigor. 
 
 5. As a necessary element in the education of the 
 young, 2)1iysical culture should hold a place co-ordi- 
 nate with that of the intellect — 'it should be a part of 
 all academic training. For the want of this culture, 
 educational means and appliances too often defeat their 
 own 2)urposes ; for the due co-ordination of the powers 
 of the body, under the order of civilizational develop- 
 ment, can not with safety be left to chance. If we are 
 to judge of the utility of institutions of learning by 
 many of the specimens of manhood which they turn 
 out, our decisions respecting them can not be unquali- 
 fiedly favorable. Sadly true will this appear when we 
 come to set against the fulfillment of the highest hopes 
 of parent, teacher, and friend, in regard to intellectual 
 advantages, the destruction of the power to use them. 
 "With physical health broken down, and stamina de- 
 stroyed, we are led to inquire if the advantages are 
 not quite counterbalanced. "We are at least justified 
 in making the inference, that the irrocesses tending to 
 such results are radicaUy defective. The hardy team- 
 ster or plowman, with few intellectual resources, has, 
 with nothing to boast of, in fact, besides an excellent 
 physique, in the comparison, plainly the best of it; for 
 though the college youth has satisfied the ambirion of 
 his friends in the matter of intellectual culture, his 
 success j^roves of little avail as a source of rational 
 enjoyment, or as contributing to the world's advance- 
 
INTRODUCTORY. 23 
 
 ment ; since he lias at the same time acquired a fear- 
 ful drawback in the form of the life-lease of a narrow 
 chesf, shrunken and flabby muscles, and a general dys- 
 peptic or consumptive habit. While learning was 
 being put into him, his natural i^luck was driven out 
 of him — an exchange of very questionable advantage. 
 
 With females, the case is even worse. The girl is 
 sacrificed to society's conventionalisms, senseless and 
 even vicious though they may be ; while the boy may 
 rudely thrust these aside. Many of the world's lead- 
 ers have acquired the power to be such, by shocking 
 their friends in their boyhood. But, her parents or 
 teachers knowing nothing nor caring for vital laws, the 
 girl is restrained in the opportunities for bodily activity 
 that nature would seek ; and by the time that her edu- 
 cation is ''finished," she is rendered, physically, 
 thoroughly useless, both from want of powder and of 
 disposition to be otherwise. Regardless of the neces- 
 sary physical conditions, her intellectual powers can 
 not be sustained ; and, in too many instances, she is ren- 
 dered incapable of reaching or appreciating the higher 
 ends of life, and becomes satisfied with a merely senso- 
 rial existence. 
 
 We may conclude, then, that the prevalent amount 
 of disease among females is not a sacred birthright de- 
 rived from the providential constitution of things, but 
 that it is acquired^ and follows as the necessary conse- 
 quence of the inharmonious action of the organism, 
 imposed by the customs of society and the neglect of 
 bodily cultm-e. It is thus that the chlorosis, the ner- 
 vousness, the dyspepsia, the deformity of spine and 
 chest, the loss of the attractions that should belong to 
 the sex, and divers other afSictions, so common with 
 females, are fully accounted for. 
 
24 mTEODUCTOKY. 
 
 It may be said that physical training, when subjected 
 to rules, is unnatural, and that this matter is better 
 left to the spontaneous suggestions of nature. 
 
 I would reply to this, that if so, all education, any 
 training, is equally " unnatural." The object of all true 
 culture is to aid the designs of nature ; and our plans 
 must be carried out conformably to her laws, in order 
 that we may attain satisfactory results. We are pur- 
 posely so constituted as to be susceptible of improve- 
 ment in every department of our being ; and such im- 
 provement becomes a duty we owe ourselves. Civili- 
 zation proceeds by steps ; and when any custom or 
 mode of life exists that is attended by unwholesome 
 effects, it is an indication that further knowledge is re- 
 quired for their counteraction ; for that civilization is 
 faulty which does not prevent the evil results of any 
 habits that cultivated society may impose. 
 
 The prmGi2Jle of cultivating the body along with the 
 mind, so as by preserving the health to render mental 
 culture available, is far from being new. It has been 
 often recognized and put in practice ; and laudable and 
 successful examples have existed both in ancient^ and 
 in modern times. But it has been culpably overlooked 
 or slighted by us, the American people ; and for such 
 neglect we, as a nation, are now receiving the castigation 
 necessary to correct our short-comings in this respect. 
 
 6. It need not be concealed that the influence of the 
 principles of physical culture, such as it is my present 
 
 * The Greeks made the education of their children of boih sexes an affair of state 
 —it -was done at the public expense. In this way they became the type of the hu- 
 man race in its best characteristics. In form they were all but perfect ; in courage 
 unequaled ; they excelled in the arts and sciences ; in polite literature, in poetry and 
 history, they are still our masters. Their theory of education, and the practical re- 
 sults of it, ^vere better than ours at this day.— De. CHAPiiAS. 
 
IXTRODUCTORY. 26 
 
 purpose to inculcate, is to a considerable extent inimi- 
 cal to the interests of the current medical practice. 
 So far as this influence is based upon the timth^ it 
 must inevitably prevail, and to a certain extent will 
 enable us, eventually, to dispense with the old style of 
 medication. 
 
 It must be conceded, upon a little reflection, that 
 current medical science does not answer the require- 
 ments of the age. Its scope is too narrow — it does not 
 attempt to supply the most pressing wants of a civilized 
 community. For the chief want is, not some mighty 
 cure-all^ much less the faltering, unsatisfactory attempts 
 at curing, so exhausting to the limited vital resources 
 — but to be kept well. In spite of the antiquity and 
 respectability of the medical art, the community is 
 not restrained througli its influence from wasting 
 in the most prodigal manner its precious boon of 
 health. 
 
 The popularity of the received medical practice de- 
 pends on the common belief, that there really exists a 
 connection, yet not well understood, between the drug 
 and certain curative results. It is plain that the im- 
 plied promise to cure thus furnislied, so far as credence 
 is given it, in eflTect lessens the fear of the pain, which 
 is the penalty of physiological misdeeds ; and thus the 
 barrier to the perpetration of such acts is taken away. 
 Such credence is palpably demoralizing in its influence, 
 for it not only countenances the infringement of physio- 
 logical law, but discourages the desire to understand, 
 and to practice according to the dictates of a correct 
 physiology. 
 
 It behooves us to look more closely than is the gene- 
 ral habit, to the principles involved in drug-practice. 
 Suppose all the expectations and hope held out by the 
 
 2 
 
26 INTEODUCTOKY. 
 
 administrator of this means of cure to be completely 
 fulfilled, would it not discourage inquiry in regard to 
 physiological relations, and really offer a premium to 
 indulgence and the consequent physiological crime? 
 Does not the assurance of delivery from danger anni- 
 hilate the fear of it, and are not men ready to rush in- 
 to danger in proportion to their belief in speedy and 
 complete delivery? To what else are we to refer the 
 general ignorance and misunderstanding of the laws 
 of health, but the indifference to such knowledge, 
 which medicine, indirectly, to be sure, bnt powerfully, 
 inculcates ? 
 
 Let us contrast this princij^le with its opposite, viz., 
 that there is no scape-offering for physiological sin, but 
 that suffering and diminished power are its due, direct, 
 and inevitable consequences. Must not this stimulate 
 to such inquiry as would lead to exact knowledge, 
 rigid care, and correct practice? Self-preservation 
 and self-interest, which it is impossible to despise, 
 would tend directly to this result. 
 
 It is apparent that the true physician has a higher 
 duty resting upon him than those who bear that name 
 are accustomed to acknowledge, namely, that of carry- 
 ing instruction to the popular mind in regard to the 
 natural capabilities and requirement-s of the body, so as 
 to enable men to preserve their powers, and to repel 
 the first insidious approaches of disease. There is 
 scarcely any discreet physician or well-informed person 
 who will not admit that the department of hygiene that 
 is here advocated and rendered practical, is the most 
 powerful of agencies in securing this desirable result. 
 Upon the physician rests plainly a duty in this matter, 
 because the duty confessedly exists, and it can fall to 
 no one else. Here is opened a broader field for his 
 
INTEODUCTOKY. 27 
 
 labor than he now enjoys, and one compatible with the 
 dictates of a noble and generous mind. 
 
 7. The importance of the special hygienic system of 
 movements^ for the recovering invalid, for the weakly, 
 for those whose position requires too little or improper 
 kinds of exercise, for youth of both sexes, and for pre- 
 venting disease, must be manifest to all. But that the 
 subject is invested with an interest which is strictly 
 medical, in the highest sense of that term, will not be 
 so readily admitted. It is conceived by the author, that 
 the importance of movements as a curative resource is 
 hardly second to that of any other heretofore brought 
 before the public. 
 
 It is the purpose of the present treatise only to 
 supply some hints toward a practice based on the 
 phenomena of motion in the body. And in order to 
 render it useful for the purposes above indicated, it is 
 restricted to Avhat I have denominated single move- 
 ments. This limitation, while it fits the treatise for the 
 use of a larger number of individuals in the commu- 
 nity, renders it, at the same time, imperfect as a medical 
 guide^ and confines its applications to a limited number 
 of diseased conditions. In short, the w^ork aims to do 
 nothing more than to introduce the idea of the remedial 
 application of movements, which, to be complete, must 
 employ also, and perhaps chiefiy, the duplicated move- 
 m^ents^ of which there is an account here included. 
 
 Movements have incontrovertible remedial effects, 
 and may therefore be considered a legitimate remedial 
 agent. The application of this system has been 
 known and practiced to a limited extent in all ages ; 
 and in modern times it has been much extended, and 
 has received the appellation of the Movement- Cure. 
 
28 INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 This practice is not pretended in any quarter to be a 
 universal panacea, nor to include all that is valuable 
 in the present domain of medical art. It is an in- 
 valuable contribution to a system of practice based on 
 physiology, which, to be complete, will embrace, by 
 separate and distinct methods, every avenue through 
 which the health of the body is influenced, either from 
 external or internal causes. The tendency of current 
 medical practice is to narrow down medical means to 
 the use of drugs; whereas these are but o?ie of the 
 many kinds of agents that affect the health of the 
 body. All the variations and perturbations of the 
 health are a true record of the effects of the slighter 
 variations in the use of the materials and of the forces 
 that are adapted by nature to functional employment, 
 and that, acting together in appropriate adjustment, 
 23roduce that condition which is termed health. 
 
 An enumeration of these elements available to the 
 restoration as well as to the maintenance of the health 
 would include many forces and agents that have to do 
 mainly with man as an animal^ such as heat, cold, 
 •food, drink, labor, recreation, rest, and all the inter-re- 
 lations and adjustments of these, considered both in 
 reference to their effect upon the vegetative life, and 
 the animal functions of the body. 
 
 This system regards man as a spiritual being — recog- 
 nizes all the various influences that operate upon his 
 intellectual and moral life flowing from physical 
 causes, and the power of the mind over the exercise 
 of functional acts of the body, of every kind. The fact 
 that man is subject to these relations, and that they 
 directly modif}^ and control his health, is undoubted. 
 How this control is to be exercised as a remedial means 
 has not yet been shown ; except, perhaps, in such a 
 
INTEODUCTORY. 29 
 
 fragmentary way as does not admit of any organic 
 construction. The practice of duplicated movements^ 
 wherein the mental powers of "both the invalid and 
 friend co-operate to the production of certain effects, 
 afibrds many new facts and interesting illustrations of 
 the control of the mental and nervous states over those 
 functional acts of the body that constitute the health ; 
 and such as may lead to higher results than have yet 
 been conceived — in building up, indeed, what may be 
 called a system of moral medicine. 
 
 But the Movement- Cure, as a specialty of medical 
 practice, depends entirely on purely physiological 
 oneans for the accomplishment of its purposes. It may 
 be considered as a means of enabling the natural ten- 
 dencies of the system toward health to act more power- 
 fully and effectually. It points out the means of di- 
 recting tlie corporeal energies into just those channels 
 in which they are most needed, in order to perfect the 
 balance of the physiological processes. It enables the 
 system to develop and maintain its forces in greater 
 amount, because it employs them naturally and w^ith- • 
 out undue waste. And because the Movement-Cure 
 thus limits itself to a realm of facts concerning which 
 there is no question, it has a right to expect the ap- 
 proval of physicians of all the different schools, even 
 of those advocating opposing theories. It requires as- 
 sent only to the plainest and most obvious facts and in- 
 ferences of physiology. In the Movement-Cure, all 
 physicians meet on common ground and blend their 
 differences. This proves, we hold, that the practice is 
 founded in common sense^ as well as upon the rigorous 
 deductions of science and experience ; and that the 
 rapid dissemination of its principles and practice may 
 be prophesied with a degree of certainty. 
 
30 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE PRACTICE OF MOVE- 
 MENTS. 
 
 The desire of men to become more complete, 
 comely, vigoroiis, and healthy — to approach as nearly 
 as possible to the ideal man — has existed in all ages, 
 and has impelled them to make special efforts to 
 secure these ends. Tlie suggestion of the necessary 
 means would seem to arise from an instinct of our 
 nature ; and these evidently consist in simply calling 
 into action the power v:hose improveinent we desire — or 
 in giving direction to the capabilities of which we are 
 in conscious possession. Such a process is based 
 on anatomy and physiology, and is limited by these 
 sciences ; and it deals with the very instruments and 
 laws of vitality. 
 
 In recent times, the term " movements" has been 
 employed to designate the processes by which this 
 control of the bodily powers is secured. Theoretically, 
 then, movements are capable of being reduced to an art, 
 hygienic and remedial, as perfect as the principles upon 
 which the natural operations of the body are based ; 
 and though, as a training or healing art, it may always 
 have been successfully practiced, yet that success be- 
 comes necessarily more perfect, as less empirical, when 
 it employs the facts and principles developed by mod- 
 ern research in physiology. 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 3cl 
 
 In glancing at tlieliistorj oiinovements^ tlie reader will 
 wonder loliy an art so easily practiced, the elements of, 
 and the demand for, which exist in the constitution of 
 every one, while its principles are so fnndaniental and 
 leave so little room for improvement, should not in 
 modern times have come more generally into popular 
 favor. The answer to this inquiry will be found in the 
 fact of the maze of obscurity that has prevailed in the 
 general mind in regard to the true curative value of 
 drugs. But while all possible things have been both 
 asserted and denied in regard to drugs, the value of 
 movements has never heen denied or questioned^ but 
 only at times neglected^ in the general interest with 
 which the popular mind has invested the other ques- 
 tions. In the last few centuries, chemistry has at each 
 of the successive epochs of its development, furnished 
 medicine w^ith the means of toying with the credulity, 
 the hopes and fears of the suffering public ; and it 
 requires all of the present amount of knowledge, and 
 more time than has elapsed, to enable the scientific, 
 supported by the popular mind, to turn the influence 
 of the full-fledged science into its pi'oper channels, to 
 consummate a revolution that may be delayed, but 
 must eventually be realized. 
 
 The employment of movements for hygienic and 
 medical purposes is by no means a new thing, but is, 
 on the contrary, older than any other means j^roposed 
 for the same purpose. Movements have been employ- 
 ed in every age, and if not suggested by the natural 
 instincts of the rude mind, their imperfect use is very 
 soon suggested by experience. Among Indian and 
 African tribes, various manipulations, flagellations, etc., 
 have been practiced, generally connected with super- 
 stitious rites, incantations, prayers, etc., to which more 
 
32 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 enlightened people attribute tlie least portion of tlie 
 benefit that is obtained. It is well known that certain 
 movements produce vertigo, nausea, palpitations of the 
 heart, and various other effects corresponding to actions 
 that are brought about by chemical means. And so a 
 primitive people, even, would make a beginning that 
 would soon become extended with their extending 
 experience, till checked by their ignorance of the gen- 
 eral scientific principles underlying what they rudely 
 practice. 
 
 Such primitive people, who know nothing of the 
 brain wear, the confinement, and the defective exercise 
 connected with the in-door and sedentary occupations 
 of civilized society, have no need of other physical 
 training than results from the chase and the dance^ 
 to which they are always devoted. But as civilization is 
 developed, which always implies training, the physical 
 powers must also be trained to maintain the general 
 harmony, and if not by accident, then by design ; or 
 the constitution suff'ers in the way we see it so apt to 
 do in old and enfeebled nations. 
 
 Thus it happens that there is developed from causes 
 naturally and inevitably operating, a system of regu- 
 lating the health, and overcoming diseases by the em~ 
 ployment of movements. But this system has, with 
 but few exceptions, been practiced in an incomplete 
 manner, owing to the imperfect development of chem- 
 ical and physiological science, upon wdiich such a prac- 
 tice is necessarily founded. 
 
 Move:ments among the Chinese. — The traditional 
 history of this people affords us many instructive exam- 
 ples of the employment of various exercises -to preserve 
 and restore the health. This history informs us that the 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 83 
 
 iinmidity of tlie atmosphere and the stagnant waters 
 were considered a prolific sonrce of epidemic and en- 
 demic diseases, and that the efficient means of prevent- 
 ing these consisted in regular exercises of the body, 
 by a kind oi gymnastic dance. These movements tend 
 to produce action from the center to the circumfer- 
 ence of the body, or centrifugal — an action very 
 appropriate for the renewal of the functions of the 
 liver, and to give tone and vigor to the whole economy. 
 This matter was considered so invportant as to he under 
 governmental regidation. 
 
 The Cliinese writers support this practice with the 
 tradition that the life of man depends on a union of 
 earth and heaven, together with the use that the crea- 
 ture makes of these. A subtile material, they think, 
 circulates in the body ; if then the body is not in 
 action, the material accumulates ; and, according 
 to their theory, all diseases come of such obstruc- 
 tion. 
 
 The devotion of the Chinese to bodily exercises 
 suggested the fundamental principle, which in China 
 has always been considered the basis of progress and 
 moral development, viz., that of self-development. 
 
 It appears that the Chinese have long practiced an 
 art of medical movements, which they denominate the 
 Cong Fou. The meaning of this term is, simply, the 
 art of exercising the hody. and its application to the 
 treatment of disease. Says P. Amiot, a missionary, 
 " Yolnmes might be written of the traditions, stories, 
 and extravagant virtues of the Cong Fou^ which are 
 implicitly believed ; even the majesty of the throne not 
 exempting many emperors from a stupid credulity. 
 Notwithstanding the priestly superstitions connected 
 with it (for the priests persuade the people that it is a 
 
 2* ■ 
 
34 HISTOKICxU. SKETCH OF 
 
 true exercise of religion), it is really a very ancient prac- 
 tice of medicine, founded on principles, and potent in 
 many diseases." 
 
 From the statements of the learned missionary and 
 others are deduced these conclusions : 
 
 1st. That this art is founded on a genuine experience 
 and original scientific principles, and may be freed from 
 the superstitions and charlatanry that at the present day 
 surround it — that it dates back to Hoang-Fi, 2698 years 
 before the Christian Era. 
 
 2d. It consists of three essential particulars, to wit : 
 
 a. Various positions of the body. 
 
 h. Rules for varying these attitudes. 
 
 c. During these exercises and attitudes, a manage- 
 ment of the respiration according to certain rules of 
 inspiration and expiration. 
 
 3d. This method has its own proper technical lan- 
 guage. 
 
 ttth. It does really effect the cure and relief of many 
 diseases. 
 
 5th. The Chinese of every ranh eagerly resort to this 
 remedy when every other means of cure has heen tried 
 in vain. 
 
 Thus it is affirmed that the Cong Fou has really all 
 the characters and pretensions of an ancient scientific 
 mode of medical practice. 
 
 " The priests (who are the physicians) enter into an 
 extensive detail of the positions of the body in all their 
 shades of variation. These are so numerous, that we 
 do not fear to say that all the postures and attitudes 
 of comedians, dancers, tumblers, and artistic figures 
 are but a small portion of those which have been in- 
 troduced into this practice. The different modes of 
 stretching^ folding^ raising^ falling^ lending and ex- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 36 
 
 tending^ sejyarating and approaching^ the arms and 
 legs, in the standing, sitting, and lying positions, form 
 a prodigious variety." 
 
 M. Amiot proceeds, at considerable length, to ex- 
 plain the methods and principles of this Chinese sys- 
 tem of medical movements, and the diseases and symp- 
 toms for which it is applicable ; and from this account 
 the following is extracted : 
 
 " Tlie Cong Fou consists in certain positions in 
 which the body is placed a certain length of time, in 
 which the patient breathes in j^ecnliar methods. 
 These methods must be chosen and combined accord- 
 ing to the disease that is treated. 
 
 "The morning is the proper time for the treatment; 
 after the night's repose tlie circulation is more equable, 
 tlie secretions more balanced and uniform. Persons 
 pletlioric or charged with humors are always profited 
 by fasting in the evening ; and this is absolutely neces- 
 sary in certain diseases. 
 
 "In practicing the movements, the body is either com- 
 pletely or partially clothed, and has weights upon the 
 head and shoulders, according to the complaint ; and 
 in the respiration, the mouth should be half full of 
 saliva or water. ^ 
 
 "The physical and physiological principles concerned ' 
 seem to be ftiese : 
 
 " 1. Tlie mechansim of the body being entirely hy- 
 draulic, with a free circulation of the fluids, health con- 
 sists only with the proper equipoise of these fluids in 
 their reciprocal relations ; and to restore health, this 
 equilibrum must be established. 
 
 " 2. As the air constantly enters into the blood and 
 vital fluids through the lungs, tempers and purifies it 
 and preserves its fluidity, these last qualities can only 
 
36 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 be maintained through respiration, and of course are 
 restored by the same instrumentality. 
 
 " From these two principles thej draw conclusions 
 after their own fashion, which we will give for what 
 they are w^orth. 
 
 "1. As the circulation of the fluids of the body has 
 to overcome the two great obstacles of weight and fric- 
 tion, all that tends to diminish these, aids to establish 
 the circulation which is disturbed. 
 
 " 2. As the motion and impetus of the air increases 
 the fluidity of licpiids, and thus facilitates their move- 
 ments, therefore all that tends to increase or diminish 
 the force of the air in the body must increase or re- 
 tard the circulation. 
 
 "These principles and deductions being understood, 
 the disciples of the Cong Fou enter into very lengthy 
 details in order to show the sympathetic correspond- 
 ence of the difierent parts of the human body, the 
 action and reaction of the great organs of the cir- 
 culation, of the secretion, and of the digestion of 
 food. 
 
 '^Theory. — ^The Chinese physicians make use of 
 reasoning like the following, after the principles and 
 consequences above expressed. There are two essen- 
 tial parts of the Cong Fou — the flrst emb^ces the po- 
 sitions and attitudes that are given to the body, the 
 second the manner in which the respiration is accel- 
 erated, retarded, or modified. 
 
 *^ 1. If we regard the circulation of the blood and 
 fluids as being opposed by their gravity or their fric- 
 tion, which tends to retard the flow, it is evident that 
 the degree in which the body is straight or bent, lying 
 or raised, the feet and hands stretched or folded, raised, 
 lowered, or bent, ought, in the hydraulic mechanism, to 
 
THE PKACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 37 
 
 effect a physical change, either to retard or to facilitate 
 the circulation. 
 
 " The horizontal position being that which diminishes 
 the weight most, is therefore most favorable to the 
 circulation; while the erect position, on the contrary, 
 augments the weight to its utmost, and must, neces- 
 sarily, render the circulation most difficult ; for the same 
 reason, the position, according as the arms, the feet, or 
 the head are raised, inclined, bent, etc., ought to af- 
 fect the circulation more or less. 
 
 " This is not all ; that which hinders the circulation 
 in one part, gives more force in the direction in which 
 the obstacle does not exist; and hence the fluids are 
 made to overcome the engorgements that obBtruct its 
 passage. 
 
 " Another fact is this, that when the circulation has 
 been hindered in a part, the greater is the force and 
 impetuosity of the current when the obstacle is re- 
 moved. 
 
 " It follows that the different postures of the Cong 
 Fou^ well directed, ought to produce a salutary relief 
 in affections that arise from an embarrassed, retarded, 
 or interrupted circulation. Now what are the affec- 
 tions that have other causes ? Except fractures, bruises, 
 etc., it is difficult to find other than these causes to de- 
 range the organization of the human body. 
 
 " 2. It is certain that the heart is the grand power 
 concerned in the circulation, and the force it exhibits 
 in producing and maintaining it is one of the wonders 
 of the universe. 
 
 " It is also certain that there is an obvious connec- 
 tion, continually existing, between tlie movements of 
 the heart, in filling and emptying itself of blood, and 
 the movements of dilatation and contraction of the 
 
38 HISTOPJCAL SKETCH OF 
 
 lungs, which fill and empty themselves of air by in- 
 spiration and expiration. Their connection is so inti- 
 mate, that the beats of the heart increase and diminish 
 directly in proportion to the increasing and retarding of 
 respiration. 
 
 "Xow, if more air is inspired than is expired, or the 
 contrary, its volume should increase or diminish the 
 total mass of the fluids of the body, and recruit or cur- 
 tail more or less the blood of the lungs ; if the respira- 
 tion is hastened or retarded, the result should be a 
 quickening or retarding of the heart's action, so that 
 both the mode of the circulation in the different parts 
 of the body and the volume of the fluids of the body 
 are controlled by the respiration," etc."^ 
 
 It would appear from the above extract, that the 
 Chinese were acquainted at an early day with the cir- 
 culation of the Uood^ and tolerably versed in the 
 mechanism of the body. And although, in the light 
 of modern science, their reasoning in medical matters 
 appears to a degree fallacious, one can not but be per- 
 suaded that their practice of the movements must have 
 been salutary and efficient; and that this primitive 
 practice, suggested by the most obvious facts pertaining 
 to the constitution, when imj)roved upon and modified 
 by modern science, would be infinitely more salutary 
 and efiicient. The eftect of increased respiration would 
 now be explained by the well-known oxydizing powei- 
 of the air upon the blood, and its consequent elimina- 
 tory eftect upon the system oppressed with incom- 
 pletely oxydized matters. 
 
 The patrons and priests of the Cong Fou^ let it be 
 said to their credit, seem to have had in mind the 
 higher ends of existence — the good of the soul. 
 
 * CiXEsiOLOGiE : on. Science du 3fouvement. Par N. Dally. 
 
THE I'KACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 39 
 
 Tliey believed the true mode of ministering to it to 
 be primarily through the bod3\ P. Amiot says that 
 the Chinese "regarded the Cong Fou as a true exercise 
 of religion, which, by curing the body of its infirmities, 
 liberates the soul from the servitude of the senses, and 
 gives it power of accomplishing its wishes on earth, 
 and of freely elevating itself to the pjerfection and 
 perpetuity of its spiritual nature in the Tao^ the realm 
 of the great creative Power." 
 
 Movements in India.^ — Intermingled with the super- 
 stitious religious practices of the ancient Indians there' 
 were also many bodily exercises, bearing a great re- 
 semblance to those of the Chinese. The most promi- 
 nent among them was the retention of the air in 
 respiration. They insisted that air produced the same 
 effect in the body that fire produces upon metals ex- 
 posed to its infiuence, namely, to imrify it. The Greek 
 physicians entertained similar ideas, and had rules for 
 the application of a similar practice. The retention 
 of the air, said they, will increase the heat of the in- 
 ternal parts, dilate the capacity of the chest, strengthen 
 the organs of respiration, clear the chest of its impuri- 
 ties, enlarge the pores, attenuate the skin, and drive 
 out moisture through that membrane. 
 
 It was from these well-known powers of this move- 
 ment, that it was employed to purify the mouth, throat, 
 stomach, chest, intestines, and to remedy yawning, 
 hiccough, laryngitis, cough, asthma, gastritis, and en- 
 teritis ; while in the intervals of movements, and after 
 each series of exercises, friction w^as employed as an 
 auxiliary means. 
 
 A Greek historian who was on a mission to India, in 
 the third century before our era, relates that "among 
 
40 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 the Brahmins there is an order of physicians who rely 
 chiefly upon diet and regimen, together with external 
 processes, having great distrust of any more powerful 
 means. For this reason it was said that they called 
 charms to their aid. Probably these external pro- 
 cesses were a system of therapeutic movements. An 
 order of Brahminites exists at present whose chief 
 medical recourse is hygienic shampooing. 
 
 The English who reside in India frequently give ac- 
 counts of the shampooing and friction, which they find 
 a great source of delight as well as of health. The 
 person receiving the operation is extended on a seat, 
 while the operator manipulates his members, as he 
 would knead dough for bread. He then strikes him 
 lightly with the side of the hand, applies perfume and 
 friction, and terminates by cracking the joints of the 
 fingers, toes, and neck. After this operation, the sub- 
 ject experiences a sensation of ineffable happiness and 
 energy. It is said that the Indian ladies seldom pass 
 a day without being thus shampooed by their slaves. 
 
 In India, \\\q best qualified practitioners belong to 
 Brahminic families, with whom the art of treating dis- 
 ease was liereditary ; and there is every indication that 
 the sacerdotal orders, who were faithful observers of 
 primitive traditions, secretly possessed some Yedic 
 treatise upon the art, of which the preceding is the 
 substance of fragments that have come down to us. 
 
 Thus it is seen, that the oldest nations of the world 
 fully believed in and practiced various external me- 
 chanical operations upon the body, both as a luxury, 
 and to relieve them of their, chronic ailments. And 
 whatever superstition of a religious nature was con- 
 nected with these operations, by these or other and 
 ruder peo^^le, no one is jprepared to assert that they 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 41 
 
 were inefficacious. All that was required was a larger 
 amount of the science of physiology with whicli to 
 direct and extend the application, to render tliis re- 
 source legitimate and complete. 
 
 MoVEMEIs^TS AMONG THE GeEEIvS AND RoMANS. In 
 
 the remains of statuary that have descended to us, we 
 have ample demonstration of the a]3preciation the 
 ancient Greeks had of perfectly developed and beautiful 
 physical forms. These representations in marble are 
 enduring monuments of the perfection of the phys- 
 ical education of that people. Even without these 
 evidences, we feel from the character of their literature 
 that such must have been the case ; for it is impossible 
 to connect the idea of physical weakness and deformity 
 with such sound philosophical and poetical genius as 
 they possessed. At the very mention of Greek^ there 
 arises in the imagination of the student a robust and 
 beautiful human form, as near to perfection as it is 
 possible for any child of Adam to aj)proach. 
 
 The Gymnasium was, with the Greeks, the place for 
 both physical and intellectual culture. The training 
 of body and mind went hand in hand. It was in the 
 gymnasium that persons of all ages daily congregated; 
 and while some were reciting poetry or delivering lec- 
 tures on philosophy, others were performing, or criti- 
 cising the performance of, various exercises adapted to 
 develop all their physical parts and powers, or to qual- 
 ify them especially for arms. Probably no Greek town 
 of any importance was destitute of these schools of 
 exercise. 
 
 The education commenced at the seventh year, and 
 consisted of music, grammar, and physical training. 
 Some authors assert that as much time was employed 
 
42 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 in the culture of tlie body, as in that of tlie mind. In 
 Sparta, the idea of pliysical culture overtopped eveiy 
 other, and the excess to whicli it was carried excluded 
 that attention to letters which obtained at Athens and 
 the other Grecian states. 
 
 Even the women were subjected to treatment simi- 
 lar to that which men received. For, said the law- 
 givers, " female slaves are good enough to stay at 
 home and spin ; but who can expect a splendid off- 
 spring, the appropriate gift of a free Sj^artaii woman 
 to her country, from mothers brought up in such occu- 
 pations '?" 
 
 The Olympic games were a perversion of the ob- 
 jects of exercise, and produced efiects in opposition 
 to those contemplated by rational movements ; for they 
 stimulated to excess single faculties for the purpose 
 of winning a prize, instead of producing general excel- 
 lence and power. Xeither true liealth nor power are 
 possessed by athletes, no matter Avhat astonishing feats 
 tliey may be able to perform. 
 
 The Ilomans were less appreciative in regard to 
 movements as an educational or as a curative means. 
 The genius of that people was eminently warlike, and 
 they slighted everything that did not look directly to 
 the promotion of physical force for loarlike ^urjposes. 
 No soldiers were better developed by educational drill 
 than the Eoman, both for feats of arms and for en- 
 durance. 
 
 The Eomans had gymnasiums also ; but these were 
 perverted, especially in the later days of the empire, 
 to exhibitions of the most brutal and degrading soi-t, 
 such as Duo-ilistic shows, and encounters with wild and 
 ferocious animals. 
 
 To the preceding accounts we may add the fol- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 43 
 
 lowing extract, relating to ancient "movements," 
 mainly derived from Oribasius, a Greek physician of 
 the fonrth century. 
 
 " By the term exercise the ancients understood phys- 
 iological movements pursued according to determined 
 rules. Tiiey prepared for exercise by special frictions. 
 They divided movements according to their effects, 
 into three kinds : 
 
 " 1st. Movements which proceed from within, having 
 their orighi in the depths of the body, and depending 
 on the will of those that produce them ; these are ac- 
 tive movements. 
 
 " Of these there are several kinds. One requires the 
 exertion of force, as iising the spade, driving four 
 horses at once, raising a weight and holding it at arm's 
 length, walking up a steep ascent, climbing a rope, 
 clinching the fists close, stretching the arms, and main- 
 taining them in this position for a long time, resisting 
 the efforts of one trying to lower the extended arms. 
 
 " There was also used in the jjalestrcc (part of the 
 gymnasium) many other movements that required the 
 exertion of power, but all were directed by the pedo- 
 tribe^ or director of movements, a 23erson as different 
 from the gymnast as a cook is from a physician. 
 
 '* Other movements were rapid, but neither intense 
 nor violent; as the mock combat, gesticulation, the 
 play with the corycos and the little ball ; running in a 
 circle that constantly diminished till a point was 
 reached ; walking upon the points of the toes, raising 
 the arms and causing them to move very rapidly, 
 alternately forward and backward. Other rapid 
 movements not requiring exertion, performed in the 
 2xdestra^ consisted in rolling^ either together or 
 alone. 
 
44 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 " A third kind are violent movements, consisting of 
 sncli exercises as nnite force with rapidity of execu- 
 tion. 
 
 " The following may be classed as violent : nsing the 
 spade, the lance, leaping constantly without resting, 
 throwing heavy projectiles, or working rapidly in 
 heavy armor. 
 
 " 2d. Movements that proceed from exterior causes, 
 or ^;>«.55'«'y^. Among these, in general, are sailing, the 
 motion of horse and carriage riding, movement in beds 
 susj)ended, or with foot supports ; in the cradle or their 
 nurse's arms, for infants. 
 
 " Friction may also be classed among exercises that 
 come from exterior sources. Pressures and pinchings 
 also belong to the same class. Many other movements 
 are included in the kneadings that the ancients em- 
 ployed so frequently. 
 
 " 3d. Mixed moveonents^ or those which proceed partly 
 from exterior and partly from interior sources. Hiding 
 is given as an example, for while one is shaken by the 
 vehicle, he must also maintain his posture and his 
 form erect by his own exertions. 
 
 " They mention also other kinds of movements, such 
 as speaking, hallooing, breathing, retention of breath, 
 dancing, slow walking with stretching the legs, upon 
 the feet, toes, or heels, up or down an artificial hill, in 
 the sand or soft earth, the play of grace-hoops, swim- 
 ming, jumping, etc. All these are of the active 
 kind. 
 
 " ^Yrestling, in which there is established an action 
 and reaction between two persons, appertains to mixed 
 movements. There should be reckoned in this class 
 friction, with retention of the breath to stretch the 
 muscles of the chest, and to relax those of the abdo- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 45 
 
 men, or conversely, and the effect of the applica- 
 tion of a ligatnre, which causes the part to become dis- 
 tended, or when the same effect is produced by certain 
 movements. 
 
 " It is evident that these movements are of a mixed 
 kind, both concentric and eccentric; and that the 
 ancients, to have made applications so ingenious to 
 each particular organ of the body, as well as to the 
 entire organism, must have had a knowledge of the 
 different physiological effects of movements. 
 
 " "We are reminded every day, in our more intelligent 
 applications of these principles, of our indebtedness to 
 the sagacity and patient efforts of the ancients. 
 
 " Each of these kinds and species of movements, we 
 see, had its distinct rules and its supposed physiological 
 effects. These effects were modified according to posi- 
 tion of the body, upright sitting, lying, or as bent 
 in different ways, forward, backward, or to either side. 
 TJiey were sometimes slow, sometimes quick, sometimes 
 moderate, but ahoays regular. The movements being 
 general or partial, precise in their quantity, quality, 
 duration, rhythm, etc., and the director of the ancient 
 exercises being a skillful physician, knew how to 
 adapt them to the age, constitution, or disease of the 
 individual." 
 
 In modern times, the literature pertaining to the 
 science of movements in its various branches has been 
 very abundant. But most of it has either related to 
 special topics, or its applicability in special cases and 
 forms of disease or exigencies of the system; or else 
 it has been of too general and philosophical a char- 
 acter to be of popular use, and has not included such 
 practical directions as are demanded for successful 
 general application. There has heretofore been so 
 
46 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 great an intermixture of error in tlie prevailing physio- 
 logical systems, as to prevent the simple, obvious, and 
 eminently practical truth from shining clearly out and 
 exerting its due influence. 
 
 The philosophical reader will readily appreciate the 
 causes that have prevented so manifestly true and suc- 
 cessful a practice as the movement from becoming para- 
 mount. Men are ever inqniring. As the reward of 
 these struggles of the growing mind of man, new 
 truths and new ways leading to truth ar6 constantly 
 disclosed. Each of these naturally fills the mind 
 with high hopes in regard to the ultimate results of 
 present knowledge and effort. Inorganic chemistry 
 yielded its riches to the modern physician ; and as its 
 facts preceded those of vital chemistry, he naturally 
 made a misapplication of them ; for his practice is an 
 outgrowth of, and is limited by, his knowledge. Neither 
 the chemist nor the metaphysician could form a correct 
 statement of physiological truth, and so practice must 
 necessarily remain empirical to a great extent, waiting 
 for the new light that shall bring out those elemental 
 truths that are instinctively seized upon by all primi- 
 tive people. 
 
 The current medical practice has for its foundation 
 these scattered, incongruous, and shifting facts; but so 
 greatly modified is it, however, by the additions of 
 more modern science, that now it seriously threatens to 
 lead us back at last to the first principles of physiology 
 as the only reliable basis after all. 
 
 Tiie system of Li7ig^ though probably invented by 
 him, is really but the collecting together, on a philo- 
 sophical plan, of the fragments that had long existed. 
 It comprehended, as it were, by an instinctive grasp, 
 all the truth that had been previously realized at vari- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 47 
 
 ous times and places. What in China, Hindoostan, 
 and Greece had been but empiricism, he put upon the 
 ground on which his successors and followers may hope 
 to build a system of philosophical accuracy. 
 
 Biography of Lixg."^ — The present state of the 
 science of remedial treatment by movements, and the 
 development of this doctrine, is intimately connected 
 with the life of Ling, so that his biography is necessa- 
 rily a part of its history. 
 
 Peter Henry Ling was born on the 15th of ^N'ovem- 
 ber, 1766, at Smaland. His father, who was a curate, 
 died soon after his son's birth, and his mother, who 
 married again, died a short time afterward. Possessing 
 no remembrancer of his father, except a small portrait, 
 which he received from his mother, as a souvenir of 
 love and reverence, the growing boy passed the days 
 of his childhood under the too severe training of a 
 capricious tutor. The young Ling was afterward sent 
 to the schools of Wexio for further instruction. Here 
 he soon distinguished himself for his great talents, and 
 his energy and devotion to study. 
 
 When Ling left the schools, he saw life open before 
 him in its roughest aspects ; he found himself exposed 
 to incessant vicissitudes, reduced at times to absolute 
 poverty and want. During this period he resided for 
 the most part in Upsala, Stockholm, Berlin, and 
 Copenhagen ; but it is not known in what manner he 
 was emj^loyed. All we know is, that he studied at 
 Upsala, and passed his theological examinations jit 
 Smaland, in December, 1T9T: afterward he was tut( r 
 in several families ; at one time at Stockholm, at au- 
 
 * Extracted from Rothstein. 
 
48 IIISTOKICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 other in the country. Suddenly he left Germany, 
 and went to Denmark. In 1800 he studied in Copen- 
 hagen, and the following year took part in the naval 
 battle against Nelson, as a volunteer in a Danish ship. 
 He afterward returned to Germany, and passed on to 
 France and England, whence he returned to Copen- 
 hagen, with a perfect knowledge of the languages of 
 these diiferent countries. 
 
 During this period he received on different occa- 
 sions military appointments, the character of which are 
 unknown to us. It is said that during his travels he 
 was frequently reduced to the most trying circum- 
 stances, even suffering the pangs of hunger. At one 
 time he was glad to shelter himself in a miserable 
 lodging in a garret at Hamburgh ; he was even forced 
 to wash, with his own liands, his only shirt. 
 
 These privations, hov/ever, did not depress him; 
 although without means, the desire of continuing his 
 travels, to develop and improve his knowledge, buoyed 
 him up, and enabled him to surmount all difficulties. 
 He was proud of his ability to endure privations, and 
 to do without what are thought by most to be indis- 
 pensable necessaries. 
 
 The same impulsive energy which previously in- 
 duced him to take part in a sea-fight, determined him 
 to study the art of fencing during his second sojourn 
 at Stockholm. Two fencing-masters, French refugees, 
 had founded there at this time a fencing-school. Ling 
 was there every day, and his great skill in this art soon 
 became notorious, and his passion for it grew with his 
 skill. He was now only at the commencement of that 
 career which was already providentially marked out 
 for him, and which from deliberate choice, and with 
 characteristic energy, he steadily pursued. His reflec- 
 
THE PKACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 49 
 
 tions upon fencing, and liis own experience (for he suf- 
 ered then from gout in his arm), taught him to infer 
 the wholesome effects which may be produced on the 
 body, as well as the mind, by movements based on 
 rational principles ; and he began to realize that fenc- 
 ing, however valuable as an exercise, could not accom- 
 plish all that w^as desirable. 
 
 About this time the idea struck him that an harmo- 
 nious development of the body, of its powers and capa- 
 bilities, by suitable systematized exercises, ought to 
 constitute an essential ]3art in the education of a people. 
 
 The realization of this idea now became his grand 
 aim, the more so as he pictured to himself the bril- 
 liant image of mankind restored to health, strength, 
 and beauty. Ling thought not, like his predecessors, 
 of merely imitating the gymnastic treatment of the 
 ancients, but he aimed at its reformation and improve- 
 ment. 
 
 At this period of Ling's life begins that part of his 
 history which for us possesses the deepest interest. 
 Quite unknown, but attracting the attention of every 
 one by his appearance, he made his debut at Lund in 
 the spring of 1805. Versed in several modern lan- 
 guages, and a thorough master of fencing, he began to 
 teach them both, and being proud of all that con- 
 cerned his fatherland, he lectured with enthusiasm on 
 the old IS'orse poetry, history, and mythology. 
 
 Li the same year he was appointed professor of fenc- 
 ing at the University, and began at once to re-fit the 
 fencing- saloon connected with it, and prepare it for 
 several gymnastic exercises, which were commenced 
 without delay. He soon excited the attention not only 
 of the inhabitants of Lund, but of the other towns in 
 the kingdom. 
 
 3 
 
50 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 Ling wished to put gymnastics in harmony with na- 
 ture, and began in 1805 to study anatomy, physiology, 
 and the other natural sciences. The high value he set 
 on these studies, and the enthusiasm with whicli he 
 pursued them, are forcibly expressed in his own words. 
 
 " Anatomy, that sacred genesis, which shows us the 
 masterpiece of the Creator, and which teaches us how 
 little and how great man is, ought to form the con- 
 stant study of the gymnast. But we ought not to con- 
 sider the organs of the body as the lifeless forms of a 
 mechanical mass, but as the living, active instruments 
 of the soul." 
 
 Ling looked on anatomy and physiology as the essen- 
 tial and necessary basis of gymnastics. But according 
 to his idea, these and other natural sciences were not at 
 all sufficient for the gymnast, whose aim is the eleva- 
 tion of man, in his corporeal and mental nature, to the 
 ancient heau-ideal. He must, therefore, know what 
 effects movements produce upon the bodily and psycho- 
 logical condition of man, a knowledge which can be 
 obtained only by investigating human nature as a 
 whole, and by the most careful and untiring analysis 
 of details. 
 
 ISTot only to himself, but to others also, must the 
 gymnast be able to give an account of the application 
 of his art. Ling opened a new field for physical inves- 
 tigation, hitherto untried, and almost unknown, even 
 to the most learned physicians and naturalists. He 
 conducted his researches with the most scrupulous 
 exactness, and in the most earnest manner frequently 
 recommended his companions to do the same. He did 
 not acknowledge a new movement to be a good one 
 until he was able to render an exact account of its 
 effects. His intention was not merely to make gym- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 61 
 
 nasties a branch of education for healthy persons, but 
 to demonstrate it to be a remedy for disease. 
 
 Herein we find the exphanation of the strong pubhc 
 interest taken in Ling's ideas. Laymen who had al- 
 ways looked upon bodily movements as a deception, 
 in their sickness, anxious for the re-establishment of 
 their health, were easily induced to seek relief for their 
 ailments by the new method, and were not disappointed. 
 
 The curative movements were first practiced in 1813, 
 while Ling remained at Stockholm ; but before this 
 time they were neither disregarded nor treated with 
 neglect at Lund. 
 
 During his stay at Stockholm, a change fortunate for 
 Ling's nsefulness took place, which, in the improve- 
 ment of his circumstances, extended itself rapidly. At 
 first he was appointed master of fencing at the military 
 academy in Carlberg, near the Swedish capital. Soon 
 afterward he became the director of the Central Insti- 
 tution, founded at his own suggestion. He projected 
 such an establishment at Lund, and addressed, in 1812, 
 the Minister of Public Instruction, soliciting the sup- 
 port of the Government. He received the following- 
 answer : — "There are enough of jugglers and rope- 
 dancers, without exacting any further charge from the 
 public treasury." This did not at all diminish his zeal, 
 for after his arrival at Stockholm he had the happiness 
 (in consequence of the propositions he personally made, 
 which were examined by a royal commission) to be 
 appointed by a royal ordinance, with a regular salary 
 of 500 rix-dollars, as the founder and director of this 
 Institution, for the setting out and preparation of which 
 not more than 200 rix-dollars were voted. 
 
 The royal ordinance, issned in the year 1814, states 
 that the statutes proposed by Ling, and presented to 
 
52 HISTOEICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 the commission, were coniirmed and legally established. 
 Active and indefatigable, Ling continued his attempts 
 at realizing his great ideas with these scanty facilities, 
 and pursued his philanthropic efforts with a disinter- 
 estedness and self-denial which can be attributed only 
 to his enthusiasm for the cause, and to his noble patri- 
 otism and humanity, l^ot only by the zeal and cir- 
 cumspection with Avhich he performed his duty as 
 director, but by the manner in which he taught and 
 practiced his art, the public were at last forced to 
 acknowledge his merits, and its importance. Although 
 in the last days of his life he may have seen his task 
 still incomplete, he was yet able to enjoy a feeling of 
 satisfaction, in comparing the degree of perfection his 
 art had already attained with the state in which he 
 found it at the beginning of his gymnastic career. 
 
 The important increase of public support which was 
 accorded to the Institution in the year 1834, was a 
 mark of the increasing general favor conferred on 
 him and it by his country. His sovereign raised 
 him to the dignity of a Professor, and Knight of the 
 Order of the IvTorth Star. He thankfully accepted 
 both, but used neither the title of the iirst nor the in- 
 signia of the latter. He was much gratified by the 
 proof of the love of his friends and pupils, when on a 
 festive occasion they presented him with a silver 
 medal. He had the deeper gratification of seeing at 
 length his ideas realized, his art established in Sweden, 
 made use of in every grade of society, and incorporated, 
 as an important element, in the education of the people. 
 
 Ling's gymnastics were introduced many years ago, 
 not only into all the military academies of Sweden, 
 but into all town schools, colleges, and universities, 
 even into the orphan institutions, and into all country 
 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 53 
 
 schools. In the rooms of the Central Establishment at 
 Stockholm, persons of every condition and age, the 
 healthy as well as the sick, executed, or were sul3Jected 
 to, the prescribed movements. The numbei- of those 
 who adopted their use increased every year, and among 
 them were physicians who, in the beginning, had been 
 the most opposed to Ling. 
 
 In the Central Institution clever teachers are edu- 
 cated, and no one obtains a diploma, or an official 
 license to act as a practical teacher, without having 
 finished the course, and passed an examination in anat- 
 omy, physiology, and the bodily movements. 
 
 Ling being convinced of the unity of the organism, 
 and of the importance of the mechanical and physical 
 laws to be observed in its education and remedial treat- 
 ment, based his system on these truths. He says : 
 
 " It is perhaps not readily understood that a move- 
 ment, or a mechanical action, is competent to affect 
 interior portions of the organism. It is necessary first 
 to understand that the human system is a unit^ com- 
 plete and indivisible. It can not exist in distinct j)arts, 
 for then it would not be one organism, but several. 
 All that we find in the body, wdiether inherent, or for- 
 eign matter, in any movement, to whatever extent, 
 engages in each displacement of any one part, and this 
 implies a corresponding change in neighboring parts, 
 according to the extent of the primary action. 
 
 "Every little act of changiog the attitude, or the re- 
 lation of the members of the body, an exterior press- 
 ure upon a nerve, a vein, or muscle, nmst necessarily 
 produce a displacement of neighboring parts, and pro- 
 duce an action more or less sensible upon organs, in tl e 
 proportion of their distance and intensity, resembling 
 those wave-circles we notice on the surface of water. 
 
54 HISTOIilCAL SKETCH OF 
 
 "Experience shows that the different professions 
 affect differently the physical and moral stamina of 
 those engaged in them. It shows ns that a very slight 
 pressure upon a nerve irritates it, that a greater press- 
 ure produces pain, and if we add still to the pressure, 
 engorgement, and at last paralysis is produced. It is 
 well known that a certain position is more convenient 
 than all others for the ease of the body and the tran- 
 quillity of sleep. Do not persons affected with inter- 
 nal maladies find that they are more comfortable in 
 some positions than in others, and therefore seek those 
 positions ?" 
 
 Ling arrived at these results by repeated experi- 
 ments and by direct observation, being nearly always 
 himself the subject of his trials. Still young, and af- 
 fected with a grave disease of the lungs, and already 
 given up by physicians, he noticed the favorable in- 
 fluence that the movements produced upon his health. 
 In the course of these experiments he succeeded in 
 curing himself of a disease that had been deemed in- 
 curable. He w^as thus enabled to corroborate the ob- 
 servations he had made upon the effect of movements 
 of the body in general, and so to progress in the estab- 
 lishment of his system. 
 
 Observation and experiment soon led him to the 
 following law: 
 
 " Nutrition^ or muscular develoj)ment of any jpart 
 of the hody^ occurs in direct relation with the activ^ 
 movements to which the jMrt has 'been sidjjectedP 
 
 His researches and persevering studies upon the 
 skeleton, muscular attachments, etc., led him at last to 
 a great law, and enabled him to draw the correct in-* 
 ference therefrom. Hence the discovery of a series of * 
 movemen-s capable of provoking muscular contrac- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF M0\':E:\rENT8. 65 
 
 tioBS wherever the hygenic or therapeutic needs indi- 
 cate them. 
 
 He gives the following definition of movement: 
 
 Every exercise of ^ohich the direction and duration 
 are determined^ is a movement. 
 
 Each movement^ according to Ling, is an idea ex- 
 pressed hy the hody. 
 
 Ling contended that mechanical agencies could be 
 employed therapeutically as well as chemical and gal- 
 vanic agencies, as it is an established fact that the 
 "living fiber equally reacts from mechanic as from 
 chemical or galvanic excitation." 
 
 He summed up his experiments on the motory phe- 
 nomena of the human organization in this formula: 
 "To render any movement definite and exact, a point 
 of departure, a point of teoimination, and a line 
 through which the body or ^wj portion of it must 
 pass, are to be clearly and severally determined as 
 well as the velocity and rhythm of the motory act 
 itself." 
 
 The following are the general laws which Ling has 
 laid down in his treatise on physical development : 
 
 1. Every just attempt to develop the powers of the 
 human being — mental or corporeal — is properly educa- 
 tion. 
 
 2. Every movement should have proper relation to 
 the organization of the body; whatever transgresses 
 the laws of that organism is irrational. 
 
 3. Tlie sphere of the activity of the muscles and the 
 laws of gravitation determine the limits of a movc-^ 
 ment of the body. 
 
 4. Every movement, however simple and slight it- 
 may appear to be, acquires its character from the na- 
 ture of the wliole organism, and each part of the body, 
 
56 HISTOKICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 within the limits of its own function and office, ought 
 to participate in that movement. 
 
 5. To arrive at a healthful development of the bodj, 
 it is necessary to begin at the primitive type of each 
 movement ; this study should be exact, and can never 
 be considered trifling or unimportant by any one who 
 knows that every movement is either simple or com- 
 posite. 
 
 6. In physical order, as in moral order, simple things 
 are the most difficult to apprehend, thence one can not 
 too zealously study simple movements. 
 
 T. A movement is nothing worth if it is not correct^ 
 that is, if it is not in conformity with the laws of the 
 organism. 
 
 8. The body, whose diflferent parts are not in 
 harmony, is not in harmonious accord with the 
 mind. 
 
 9. The aim of movements as a science is the proper 
 development of the human organism. 
 
 10. Correct movements are such as are founded on 
 the character and temperament of the individual to be 
 developed thereby. 
 
 t/ 11. Tlie organism can only be said to be perfectly 
 developed when its several parts are in mutual har- 
 mony, corresponding to the different individual pre- 
 dispositions. 
 
 1^12. The possible development of the human body 
 must be limited by the faculties, mental and bodily, 
 belonging to the individual. 
 
 %/' 13. A faculty may be blunted by want of exercise, 
 but can never be utterly annihilated. 
 
 y 14. An incorrect and misapplied movement may 
 pervert the development of such a faculty. Conse- 
 quently an incorrect movement tends rather to the dis- 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 57 
 
 advantage than to the gain of the harmonious devel- 
 opment of the body. 
 
 15. All one-sided development impedes tlie practice 
 of corporeal exercise ; general and harmonious devel- 
 opment, on the contmrj, facilitates it. 
 •^10. Stiffness or immobility, in any part of the or- 
 ganism, is, in most instances, only an over-development, 
 which is always attended by corresponding weakness 
 in other parts. 
 
 •^17. The over-development of one part may be di- f'' 
 minished, and the weakness of other parts remedied, 
 by equally distributed movements. 
 
 IS. It is not the greater or lesser power of any part 
 that determines the strength or Aveakness of an indi- 
 vidual, so much as the proportion and harmony of the 
 several parts. Congenital and accidental disorders are 
 not considered here, of course. 
 
 19. A real and healthful power consists in a simul- 
 taneous action of the several parts (or in action and re- 
 action). In order tliat m.otion and power may be 
 developed to their highest point, they must co-oj^erate 
 simultaneously in all parts. 
 
 20. Perfect health and physical power are conse- 
 quently correlative terms ; both are dependent on the 
 harmony of the several parts. 
 
 21. In corporeal development, commencing with the 
 simplest, you may gradually advance to the most com- 
 plicated and powerful movements; and this without 
 danger, inasmuch as the pupil has acquired the instinct- 
 ive knowledge of what he is or is not capable. 
 
 Some of Ling's physiological and therapeutic views 
 
 are contained in the following statements : 
 
 "The vital phenomena may be arranged in three 
 
 principal or fundamental orders: 1st, Dynamical 
 
 3- 
 
58 HISTOKICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 jpheiiomena^ manifestations of the mind, moral and in- 
 tellectual powers. 2d, Chemical 2)henomena^ assimi- 
 lation, sanguification, secretion, nutrition, etc. 3d, 
 Mechanical iihenomena^ voluntary and organic; respi- 
 ration, mastication, deglutition, circulation, etc. 
 
 "The union and harmony of these three orders or 
 phenomena characterize a perfect organization, and 
 every vital act is accomplished under their combined 
 influence. , 
 
 "The shares these jDhenomena take in a certain vital 
 act give it its peculiar character. If any serious de- 
 rangement occurs in any of the phenomena, the result 
 is always a disturbance of the vital functions, which 
 we call disease. 
 
 "The state of the health depends, accordingly, on 
 the degree of equilibrium and harmony existing be- 
 tween the functions of those tissues or organs in which 
 these three orders of phenomena occur. 
 
 " When this harmony is deranged, in order to re-es- 
 tablish it, we should endeavor to increase the vital ac- 
 tivity of those organs whose functions have a relation 
 to that order of phenomena whose manifestation is de- 
 creased or weakened." 
 
 In accordance with these views, he includes among 
 therapeutic means three different kinds of influence 
 on the human organism. 1st, Cheraical agencies / 2d, 
 Physical and mechanical agencies ; 3d, Dynamical 
 agencies. And he observes that the physician has ac- 
 cordingly to regulate, not only the food and medicine 
 requisite for the sick, but also position during resting, 
 and the manner in which the irritable mind is to be 
 calmed. Due attention to these matters is necessary 
 to constitute a rational treatment of disease. 
 
 Ling was a man of unwearied energy and unceasing 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 59 
 
 activity. He had but few lioiirs to spare for the enjoy- 
 ment of domestic life, for which no man had a keener 
 relish. It was with reluctance that he wrote on the 
 subject of his art ; he preferred to practice and teach 
 it. He was a poet of eminence, of whose genius his 
 nation may well be proud. His poetical writings have 
 been collected in hve volumes, consisting of ejpic^ 
 dramaticy and lyrical pieces ; the latter are very popu- 
 lar at this day. He took pleasure in dictating verses 
 to his young friends ; and it is recorded of him that his 
 flow of verse was so rapid that they often could not 
 keep up with him, a thing which not seldom provoked 
 an outbreak of impatience from the poet. During his 
 last years he suffered much bodily pain, but habitually 
 walked from his country seat, Annelund, to Stockholm, 
 through the last summer of his life, besides performing 
 his fatiguing jDrofessional labors. He conversed on his 
 death-bed till the last hour, and gave instructions re- 
 garding the science to which he had so nobly devoted 
 himself through a long life. He died on the 3d of 
 May, 1839. 
 
 A fine cast of Ling's head may be seen in the cabi- 
 net of Prof. Rezius, of Stockholm, the celebrated 
 Swedish ethnologist. It is remarkable for its great 
 length and height, as well as for its general intellectual 
 expression. 
 
 The Movement System in Stockholm. — The Swedish 
 capital contains about 95,000 inhabitants, and it has 
 several public institutions for the practice of move- 
 ments. Having resided there for some time for the 
 purpose of studying the system at its fountain-head, I 
 will give a brief account of the most prominent of these 
 institutions as I found them. 
 
60 HISTOEICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 The Central Gymnastic Institute. — This is tlie orig- 
 inal establishment founded by Ling in 1813 under the 
 royal patronage. Professor Branting, the present di- 
 rector, is the immediate successor of Ling. He has 
 lived at the institution as patient, pupil, and director 
 for forty-four years. He is a man of extensive med- 
 ical reading, a j)i'ofound anatomist and physiologist, 
 conversing easily in nearly all the European languages, 
 and of a bountiful and sympathetic nature. Ling's 
 widow also resides there, and two or three of his 
 children assist at different responsible posts in the 
 institution. 
 
 This establishment consist of several buildings, 
 adapted to the different purposes in view, on a large 
 plot of ground, in a central portion of the city. The 
 locale, originally an armory, belongs to the govern- 
 ment, and the director and teachers are salaried from 
 the same source. 
 
 The especial objects contemplated at this institution 
 are the following: 
 
 1. The training of boys to health and the perfecting 
 of their physical powers. 
 
 2. The instj-uction of teachers of the schools, 
 throughout the kingdom, in the modes of physical de- 
 velopment by movements. 
 
 3. The instruction of youths in sword and bayonet 
 exercise. 
 
 4. The instruction of officers and teachers in practi- 
 cal anatomy and in physiology, as connected with 
 the application of movements for the purposes of their 
 professions. 
 
 5. The treatment of the sick by tlie exclusive means 
 of movements. 
 
 This latter department, in both the male and female 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 61 
 
 divisions, is under Professor Branting's personal super- 
 vision. A yearly report is made to the goveruinent, 
 setting forth the progress of the institution in each of 
 its departments. The total number of persons that 
 avail themselves of the advantages of the institution 
 is about fifteen hundred each year, of whom about 350 
 are invalids. The number of patrons is constantly vary- 
 ing, but is much greater in winter, when about twenty 
 teachers are required for all the different departments. 
 
 Dk. H. Satheebukg's institution enjoys a medical 
 reputation equal, if not superior, to that of the Cen- 
 tral Institute ; and it receives more patients, its purposes 
 being entirely medical. It maintains a free clinique 
 for a limited number of patients, in consideration of 
 which it receives a large governmental stipend. 
 Orthopedic surgery is the branch to which Dr. Sather- 
 burg makes application of the movements^ and with ex- 
 traordinary success. This institution requires about 
 the same number of assistants as the Central. 
 
 There are generally one or two other institutions of 
 the same kind, but on a smaller scale, in Stockholm. 
 There is scarcely any chronic disease known that is 
 not successfully treated at these institutions. I might 
 mention a case that I witnessed of blindness, from 
 amaurosis^ to all appearance completely restored. 
 K'umbers of cases of deformity are constantly under 
 treatment, w^hich are in general quite restored before 
 leaving. Pulmonary catarrh, chlorosis, and all diseases 
 of weakness ai'e treated with eminent success. 
 
 LiSiitutions of a similar kind, but generally without 
 governmental support, are scattered throughout north- 
 ern Europe, The one at St. Petersburg is on a magnifi- 
 cent scale, far excelling anything else of the kind, 
 and is patronized by the royal family. The director 
 
62 IIISTOEICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 receives a salary of 10,000 roubles. The whole num- 
 ber of institutions in Europe based on Ling's system is 
 about thirty. 
 
 To these historical statements we may append the 
 corroborative testimony of several distinguished philos- 
 ophers, physicians, and others, of both ancient and 
 modern times, in regard to the utility and efficacy of 
 this system. 
 
 Dally. — "Physical and mechanical agents excite, 
 augment, or diminish in organic bodies, as in inorganic 
 bodies, light, heat, electricity, and magnetism. 
 
 " The intimate relation of these fluids, still too slightly 
 appreciated, has given occasion to partial and incom- 
 plete applications of mesmerism, electro-vitalism, elec- 
 tro-therapeutics, and, quite recently, to odic-force and 
 tellurism. 
 
 " Artificial movements, deduced from a knowledge 
 of physics and mechanics on the one hand, and physi- 
 ology and pathology on the other, are certainly, of all 
 agents, the most rational and the most powerful for 
 controlling by their action in the interior of the organs, 
 in the gases, the fluids, and the tissues, the development 
 of the so-called imponderable fluids essential to life. 
 
 " Movement is one of the primordial products of life 
 and the regulator of all vital conditions. Artificial 
 movements are the agents most specially adapted to 
 excite natural, physiological, vital, organo-biological 
 action, by which the human machine performs its 
 functions, is developed, preserved, and repaired. 
 
 "These are the ordinary bases of physical education, 
 of hygiene and therapeutics — bases at once traditional 
 and establislied by modern experience in a man- 
 ner the most thorough and positive, and which, in 
 
THE PRACTICE OF MOVE]yiENTS. 63 
 
 tlieir essentially medical point of view, M. Bonnet dis- 
 tinguislies by that beautiful and legitimate title, 
 ' treatment of diseases by the exercise of functions.' " 
 
 Hoffman. — " We can not perfect the art of healing 
 till we learn to apply mechanics and hydraulics to 
 medicine. 
 
 " Experience furnishes materials, but they ought to 
 be worked up according to the rules of mechanical 
 science, and the only way to introduce exactitude in 
 medicine is not to admit as proved that which does not 
 rest upon irrefutable principles. It is thus medicine 
 may be raised, as well as geometry, to the rank of the 
 exact sciences, and it is not less susceptible of a logi- 
 cal or geometrical precision than any branch whatever 
 of the mathematics." 
 
 J. J. RorssEAu. — " It is a pitiable error to suppose 
 that exercise of the body is injurious to the operations 
 of the mind, as though the two actions were not in- 
 tended to go together, and that the one ought not to 
 direct the other. 
 
 " Do you wish to cultivate the intelligence of your 
 pupils, cultivate the power that controls it. Exercise 
 the body continually, make it robust and healthy, to 
 make a wise and rational individual." 
 
 Pliny. — '' The mind is stimulated by movements of 
 the body." 
 
 Galen. — " All the powers of the soul are increased 
 and renewed by exercise. 
 
 " It is necessary to place health under the auspices 
 of labor. 
 
 ^* The greatest danger to health results from complete 
 inactivity. In the same manner the greatest benefit 
 results from moderate exercise." 
 
 Speaking of his own manner of life, and which he 
 
64: HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 had caused to be adopted also "by one of his friends, 
 he thus discourses of movements : " We make it a 
 duty to take exercise and to avoid improper food, and 
 in this manner we have been very many years, even to 
 this time, exempt from diseases." 
 
 Akistotle. — A long time before Galen, Aristotle, re- 
 plying to this question, ''Why is it good hygiene to di- 
 minish the quantity of food and increase^xercise?" says, 
 " The cause of disease is the excess of excretions which 
 result from the excess of nourishment, or from the 
 want of exercise." 
 
 The great and venerable Hippocrates remarks : " He 
 who eats without taking exercise can not be well." 
 And adds, "Perfect health results from a just and 
 constant equilibrium between alimentation and exer- 
 cise." 
 
 This illustrious author also says, " Those who do not 
 eat to satiety, and are diligent in labor, preserve excel- 
 lent health." 
 
 Yegece informs us, that military men consider that 
 the daily exercises contribute more than medicines to 
 the maintenance of health in the soldiers. 
 
 Of the good Abbe Saint Pierre, author of the Projet 
 de paix perpetuelle^ member of the Academie Fvanoais^ 
 and the inventor of a kind of elastic fauteuil which he 
 names Tremousoir (movement apparatus), upon which 
 one may perform hygienic movements similar to 
 those of equitation, Maupertuis, his successor in the 
 Academie, relates the following anecdote : " A geome- 
 ter proposed, on one occasion, to relieve certain organs 
 where the blood accumulated, for the purpose of 
 causing it to flow into other organs, to make use of 
 centrifugal force, wliich he proposed to secure by means 
 of a whirling machine." 
 
THE PRACTICE OF ^rOYEMKNTS. 65 
 
 It was a very rational idea, that of thus exciting in 
 the human organization the centrifugal and centripetal 
 fv)rces for the purpose of modifying at will that organi- 
 zation which Ruysch, in his enthusiasm as an anato- 
 mist, declared to be only a tissue of vessels. 
 
 Plato. — "A good education is that which assures to 
 the body all the beauty, all the perfection, of which it 
 is capable. 
 
 "To secure this beauty, it is only necessary that the 
 body should be developed, with perfect symmetry, 
 from the earliest infancy. 
 
 "The first stages of development are always most 
 controlling and most enduring. 
 
 "If the exercise does not keep pace with the growth 
 of the body, it becomes subject to I know not how 
 many infirmities." 
 
 This is all very well ; but, to obtain this result, it is 
 necessary to know precisely the means ; it is necessary, 
 in the first place, to study hygienic movements, as re- 
 lated to the anatomy and physiology of the body ; 
 otherwise all is uncertainty and ignorance, and the 
 experimenter is blind to the true nature of the means 
 which he puts in practice, as of the result which he 
 wishes to obtain. 
 
 Bacon. — "The human organization, so delicate and 
 so varied, is like a musical instrument of complicated 
 and exquisite workmanship, and easily loses its har- 
 mony. Thus it is with much reason that the poets 
 unite in Apollo the arts of music and of medicine, per- 
 ceiving that the genius of the two arts is almost iden- 
 tical, and that the proper ofiice of the physician con- 
 sists in tuning and touching in such a manner the 
 lyre of the human body as that it shall give forth only 
 sweet and harmonious sounds." 
 
66 HISTORICAL SKETCH OF 
 
 "While discussing the means of prolonging the ordi- 
 nary term of human life, he tluis writes : 
 
 "The living man wastes continually, and continu- 
 ally also repairs his- loss. But this reparative power 
 becomes exhausted, and the man dies. To diminish 
 the activity of the forces which weaken and destroy, 
 to maintain the powder which repairs, to soften the in- 
 durated parts, which are opposed to the reparative 
 powers, this is to prolong human life, as far as the 
 organization of the body will permit." 
 
 As to the different kinds of exercises which con- 
 tribute most to preserve or restore health, no physician 
 has yet been sufficiently specific. Although there is 
 scarcely any predisposition to any disease which may 
 not be corrected by certain well-adapted exercises, it 
 may be mentioned, by way of example, that bowling 
 is valuable for diseases of the kidneys; archery, for 
 those of the lungs ; exercise in the open air, whether 
 on foot or in a carriage, for a weak stomach, et cetera. 
 "Everything in its own turn,'' to the end of the long 
 list of ills to which our flesh is heir. A random, indis- 
 criminate application of these means is rather hurtful 
 than beneficial. Quackery is as injurious here as in 
 any other department of practice. 
 
 Geoegii. — " The education of the mind and that of 
 the body are alike in this, that they both demand a 
 special method, founded upon the physiological action 
 of their respective organs. 
 
 " Hence, as education, moral or intellectual, should 
 have for its object the exercise of those faculties whose 
 action is deficient, so jphysical education should con- 
 stantly tend to produce and maintain an equilibrium 
 between the functions of the body, and to have for its 
 end the harmony of all its operations. 
 
 \ 
 
THE PEACTICE OF MOVEMENTS. 67 
 
 " Having, then, need of a perfect body, let us try to 
 secure that blessing by keeping up the equilibrium of 
 the functions ; let us multiply in ourselves the points 
 of intelligent contact with the whole of nature, and 
 we shall see the princely powers of the soul displayed 
 in all their magnitude and dignity. 
 
 " The actual state of man may be considered as the 
 product of the educational discipline to which the 
 species has been submitted, from the most remote 
 period, and also as a lamentable proof of his departure 
 from the line of rectitude, and of the degree of it thus 
 far." 
 
68 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 THE RELATIONS OF CHEMICAL AN^D MOLECULAR 
 CHAN"GES TO THE ORIGIN OF FORCE IN THE 
 BODY. 
 
 Importance of First Principles. — It is needful to 
 study the nature, origin, and relations of the powers 
 of the body in order to become j)i'operly qualified to 
 direct them healthward. For it is . evident that the 
 kind of health we possess must be determined by the 
 kinds of actions that are going on in the elementary 
 constituents of our physical being ; since it is on these 
 actions that the development of the powers of the 
 body depends. In other words, bodily health is refer- 
 able to conditions back of those symptoms, or good or 
 ill feelings which we superficially regard as constitu- 
 ting the health ; namely, to those primary motions of 
 elementary matter that are concerned in organic 
 growth and physiological manifestation; the sensorial 
 indications being the last result of a series of actions, 
 of which health and happiness constitute the result. 
 Hence, all medical control of the health, of whatever 
 name or origin, essentially consists in a control of these 
 elementary actions, inasmuch as the causes of good or 
 ill health, as we have seen, reside in these. Such med- 
 ical practice as does not recognize the changes induced 
 by its agency on these primary actions, as the basis and 
 explanation of its jDower, is empirical. It appeals 
 chiefly to the sensations, which are ever to be dis- 
 
THILOSOPHY OF MOVEME^'TS. 69 
 
 trusted in the invalid, and in tlie end always prove un- 
 Avorthy of reliance. AVliile the invalid is made com- 
 fortable bj means of a drug, he is to be satisfied that 
 its effects are good, and is disinclined to investigate 
 further. Medical science must remain untrustworthy, 
 and continue incompetent to command the regard of the 
 philosophic mind, so long as it overlooks scientific prin- 
 ciples in its search for remedies, and is not ashamed to 
 ignore the first truths of physiology, or pour contempt 
 upon the simplest dictates of enlightened reason. 
 
 To establish and maintain two great forces is the 
 main object of all the operations of the human system. 
 These are the 'mechanical and nervous forces. All the 
 corporeal functions and actions, of whatever kind, are 
 subservient to these chief purposes; and in the muscu- 
 lar and nervous systems it provides organs or instru- 
 ments through which these powers are manifested. 
 The one set of organs includes the great mass of the 
 flesh of the body covering the skeleton, while the other 
 set is, by its filaments, extensively and minutely dis- 
 tributed to the muscles, as well as to all other parts, 
 besides existing in distinct local masses, in the head 
 and central portions of the body. The nervous forces 
 are of several distinct kinds or classes, each sustaining 
 peculiar relationships to the organism, but all asso- 
 ciated in one grand unit. These classes are, the senso- 
 rial and intellectual, relating to the mind ; the reflex, 
 connecting the mind and senses with the muscles, the 
 medium of mechanical power; and the organic, relat- 
 ing to the various agencies concerned in the processes 
 of growth. 
 
 These powerful instruments are evidently tlie means 
 intended for the manifestation of the individuality and 
 distinctive character of the man, the grade and quality 
 
70 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 of liis being. It is throiigli tliese that lie impresses 
 surround iiig tilings, acts upon tliem in a tliousand 
 ways, modifies tlieir relations to assist his purposes, 
 and secures through their use the objects of his own de- 
 sires. It is through the use of these agents, also, that 
 he fathoms the designs of nature and of God, discover- 
 ing the laws that appertain to surrounding things and 
 to his own spiritual nature. The possession of these 
 powers fulfills in him his utmost desires, and he can 
 covet nothing more as respects the quality of these 
 powers. They are capable of a progressive and al- 
 most limitless expansion, at least this may be said of 
 those belonging to the nervous system. But they may 
 act inharmoniously, feebly, painfully, or antagonist- 
 ically. 
 
 The latter condition constitutes disease. As a man's 
 possibilities of power in this mortal state can not be 
 realized without instruments, so will they find imper- 
 fect expression through imperfect instruments. Hence 
 we must go to the source of these manifestations, if we 
 would correct or improve them whenever they are im- 
 perfect or defective. 
 
 To improve these capabilities, and to train them to 
 their proper uses, is, in short, to put an individual in 
 possession of himself. Ill health is evidence of loss of 
 such control ; medical efiPorts are merely endeavors to 
 restore this control. 
 
 In order to acquire balance and perfection in the 
 powers of the mind, the necessity of training them by 
 due exercise, we have seen, has been acknowledged in 
 society in all its grades, from the most rudimental up 
 to the most civilized. This is everywhere the burden 
 of the precept, and is taught in the examples of the 
 most advanced minds. This principle is the basis of 
 
THILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 71 
 
 all wise education ; it is that wliicli raises men from the 
 condition of the savage, who knows only to supply his 
 immediate animal wants by the most simple and direct 
 means, to that of civilized society, with its manifold 
 resources for, and high appreciation of, intellectual en- 
 joyments — to that, indeed, of philosophers, and ex- 
 pounders of the most important truths of life and 
 nature. 
 
 The importance of this training by exercises is also 
 conceded by most men — it is, indeed, so generally ad- 
 mitted as to make any argument in its favor apj^arently 
 unnecessary for the purpose of arousing a proper sense 
 of its value as a means of cure. The obligation to 
 labor, in some sphere of genial activity, w^as kindly 
 imposed on all men by nature at the beginning, and a 
 sufficient penalty is sure to be visited upon all who 
 transgress this primal law. Men in all states of so- 
 ciety fully understand this principle ; but they recog- 
 nize it only in a general way, and scarcely ever in- 
 quire as to the laws of exercise, its bounds, and its 
 special applications. 
 
 The physical exercise imposed by the necessity of 
 supplying food and shelter, and of compassing the 
 various ends of ambition, has served very tolerably 
 the coincident but incidental purpose of developing 
 both the physical and moral manhood of the race. 
 Yet the laws respecting the effects upon the instru- 
 ments of these powers themselves, and upon the con- 
 nected and dependent functions produced by the dif- 
 ferent modes of manifesting the bodily powers, are 
 generally too imperfectly understood to be made avail- 
 able. 
 
 These Forces a Peoduct of YriAL Action. — ^Though 
 
72 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 we may not define correctly what life is^ yet we may 
 understand wdiat it does^ and what are the conditions 
 of its highest development. The powers above de- 
 scribed are the last products of a series of operations 
 referable to this principle. These operations are con- 
 ducted through material agencies, are chemical in a 
 certain phase of their effects, and are influenced by 
 the chemical nature of the agents that take part in 
 them. The development of life and of the forces 
 here considered is inseparably connected with ele- 
 mental changes that are continuously going on in the 
 system. . These changes are kept in continuance by 
 constant supplies of new material, which enjoys only a 
 temporary residence in the body, being excluded from 
 it in connection with the evolution of the above-named 
 forces, giving place to fresh material of a similar kind 
 that is as constantly provided. Vitality is an endow- 
 ment of matter of the most transient kind ; it is little 
 more than the expression of the changes matter under- 
 goes while in the body, both in regard to forin and 
 chemical composition. Hence it is apparent that what- 
 ever influence modifies the health, whether for good 
 or for ill, efiects this result by modifying in some 
 way those elementary changes whereby vital power is 
 evolved. 
 
 The vital acts through which animal power is mani- 
 fested may be included under the general term, nutri- 
 tion. The term nutrition covers the total process 
 whereby the integrity of the organism is preserved, 
 during its interstitial changes. It consists of many dis- 
 tinct actions, whether chemically or physiologically 
 considered ; but these are resolvable into two general 
 classes, which, in health, are nicely balanced. These 
 acts are variously named construction and dest/ruction 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 73 
 
 of organic forms ; assimilation and disintegration ; 
 composition and decomposition, etc., etc. 
 
 In effecting these functional acts two distinct 
 classes of materials are employed in the body, both of 
 which are conveyed to the scene of vital activity by 
 the blood. These are food and oxygen ; one entering 
 the blood through the stomach, by means of digestion, 
 the other through the lungs, by respiration. 
 
 The general office of these materials is to maintain 
 the actions that produce the two classes of effects 
 under consideration, the food to build up, and the 
 oxygen to change, by its chemical power, the composi- 
 tion of organic bodies, and to reduce them, at last, to 
 the state in which they find their exit from the body. 
 \Ye may be able better to appreciate the extent of 
 these operations by estimating the quantity of the 
 materials that are employed in conducting them. Ac- 
 cording to Draper, the water taken into the system of 
 a man weighing 140 pounds, in the course of the 
 twenty-four hours amounts to 4.1 lbs. ; the dry food, 
 2.25 lbs. ; the oxygen, 2.19 lbs. ; the whole amounting to 
 about eight and a half pounds of material every day, 
 furnished the system to sustain its powers. A propor- 
 tionate amount, we discover, is discharged from the 
 body in the same time, there being no increase of its 
 weight. But in the mean time these materials have 
 become greatly changed in consequence of chemical 
 combinations with each other. About a pound and 
 a half of water has been produced in the course of 
 these combinations, half a pound of carbon has been 
 dismissed through the lungs, and a great variety of or- 
 ganic and earthy salts have been concocted in the sys- 
 tem and drained off by the kidneys. To convey oxy- 
 gen and nutriment to the changing structures, -about 
 
 4 
 
74 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 twenty-live pounds of blood have been kept in unceas- 
 ing circulation through all, even to tlie minutest 
 channels of the body ; and about twenty-one pounds 
 of solvent juices have been poured into the digestive 
 canal to effect the solution of the food, to be again ab- 
 sorbed into the blood. 
 
 But a view of the results and the means of transforma- 
 tion in the body conveys but a very inadequate concep- 
 tion of the amount and extent of the change produced. 
 For the final eliminatory product is generally the last 
 result of a series of changes that must occur in regu- 
 lar order. So the food and oxygen received into the 
 system enter into many distinct states of union, dur- 
 ing their residence in the system, each of which is 
 necessary to the advancement of the vital interests, 
 while it forms a step toward their final dismissal from 
 the body. At each of these stages of jDrogress, malign 
 influences will cause a deviation of the action, as wcLl 
 as of the product of action, from the physiological 
 standard; the healthful process will be arrested, and 
 other actions are substituted, which defeat the great 
 end of evolving the forces mentioned ; the perfect evo- 
 lution of which it is the aim of all physiological actions 
 to accomplish. Disease is a deviation from the usual 
 and prescribed processes of atomic change. 
 
 Since the chief intention of the processes within the 
 body is either to build up or to demolish, it follows 
 that all the influences brought into relation with the 
 organism must tend to promote one or the other of 
 these results. Such is the normal intention of food and 
 oxygen, both of which are received into the system in 
 about equal quantities by weight. The product of the 
 digestion of food is employed in the organizing pro- 
 cesses, while the oxygen aids in dissolving the organ- 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. T5 
 
 ized molecule into a soluble or volatile form, whereby 
 its egress from the system is determined. According 
 to the physiological plan of the system, such matters 
 are applied to these specific purposes, and thus fulfill 
 the intentions of ]N^ature in respect to the development 
 of the forces of which we are treating. 
 
 When the influences exerted upon the physiological 
 processes are such as to promote equally and properly 
 these actions of waste and renewal^ through the use of 
 the legitimate materials prescribed by the laws of or- 
 ganization, health is the necessary consequence. The 
 theory and practice of the principles concerned in the 
 maintenance of health are included in the term Hy- 
 giene. 
 
 By Remedial Hygiene is understood the intelligent 
 application of certain principles and agents for the 
 restoration of lost or impaired health. The employ- 
 ment of Movements is a powerful means of directing or 
 enforcing nutrition. Movements are a device for aid- 
 ing the organism in its elforrs to derive sustenance from 
 suitable materials, and for assisting the exit of waste 
 matters ; and they thus constitute a special application 
 of hygiene ; while hygiene, in general, embraces the 
 means that in health are influential to control the waste 
 and renewal of the body. 
 
 All substances incapable of supporting the growth 
 of the vital parts, if not absolutely neutral in their re- 
 lations to them, will modify and generally accelerate 
 the wasting processes of the body. Such, indisputably, 
 are the eff'ects of drugs. When the living molecule is 
 forced into unwilling contact with a drug which has 
 been introduced into the system, one of two eff'ects 
 must ensue : the natural affinity of the molecule for 
 oxygen is increased, or else it is impressed by the 
 
76 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 chemical or mechanical power of the foreign and un- 
 friendly substance. The peculiar symptoms that appear 
 are either the result of the unusual waste and of the 
 consequent rapid evolution of the reserve powers of the 
 organ, or the quality of the intermediate forms of wast- 
 ing matter is made to differ more or less widely from 
 that of the normal and usual series of products ; thus 
 rendering the ejection of these matters less easy, dis- 
 tending, as a consequence, the capillaries of the part, 
 and impressing both its organic and sensitive nerves in 
 a peculiar and painful manner. The cases of spon- 
 taneous or accidental disease, and the artificial effects 
 produced by drugs, are admitted to be very similar. 
 Hence, drugs are classed accordingly as their effects 
 correspond with certain pathological conditions ; but 
 they may be considered as in general favoring the 
 chemical changes in the body, sometimes accelerating, 
 sometimes impeding the manifestation of power, but 
 never promoting any conditions calculated to induce 
 the production of that power, by contributing to the 
 j^rimary organizing processes. But this organic growth 
 is the first condition for the manifestation of vital 
 power, and, indeed, one without which such power 
 can not be manifested in any degree. 
 
 To the securing of health, then, it appears to be in- 
 dispensable that the interstitial changes taking place in 
 the body shall be those which can proceed only in a 
 normal condition of the organism. To effect this pur- 
 pose, the incentives to the changes must be physio- 
 logical in their nature. 
 
 Tlie existence of the profession of medicine rests upon 
 the general belief in or on the tacit consent of the world 
 to the notion that the operations of the human system 
 can be favorably excited or controlled by the employ- 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF move:ments. 7v 
 
 ment of various agents ; and accordingly the ingenuity 
 of man has always been severely tasked for tlie discov- 
 ery of such agents ; but to this day the toil and search 
 have been unrewarded l)y any result universally satis- 
 factory. These remedial means have generally been 
 of a character calculated either to promote, as their 
 primary eflect, the disorganizing 02:)erations of the 
 body, or else to produce certain chemical effects with- 
 out necessarily effecting the desired elimination of the 
 refuse products, carlonic acid^ water, and urea ; afford- 
 ing also no assistance to the organized agencies. 
 
 Better results must be attained when the means em- 
 ployed shall directly evolve the proper product, which 
 shall be at once liberated from the system, and in the 
 same act shall promote in the highest practicable de- 
 gree the activity of the organizing or reproducing 
 forces. "W^e must confine our researches, in pursuance 
 of this purpose, to an investigation of the conditions of 
 perfect health, instead of vainly searching for some won- 
 derful specific, or panacea, or divine balsam among sub- 
 stances whose demonstrable effect on vitalized matter 
 is only and forever to deteriorate and destroy. 
 
 DiFFEEENT KiNDs OF MoTioN. — The clicmical changes, 
 or changes of quality in the organic tissues of the body, 
 always imply change of place or motion. By motion, 
 all vital phenomena are accomplished. But this mo- 
 tion consists of many kinds, or is presented to us in 
 different phases, each bearing its individual relation, 
 and being equally indispensable to the welfare of the 
 vital whole. ^ 
 
 * Beclard gives the following summary of the natural internal movements of the 
 body, a careful perusal of which will be advantageous to the studious reader : 
 
 Cerebro~spinal anis in the region of the neck: movement of alternate razsing' 
 2inA falling ; a kind of oscillation of the encephalic mass. 
 
7s PHILOSOPHY OF M0VE:MEXT3. 
 
 1. The first variety of triese motions is that already 
 described as being conducted among the elementary 
 constituents of the body, and involving changes in the 
 composition of organized parts ; this is chemical action. 
 Here motion occurs through the displacement of the 
 ultimate atoms, and, as we have said, it \& the inevita- 
 ble consequence of such displacement. 
 
 Chemical action proceeds within the system on a 
 scale of magnitude of which the sensible products af- 
 ford us but an imperfect indication, since we can know 
 only the last of a series of actions of which chemical 
 power is the first cause. Some of these actions are but 
 the concomitants of vital changes, of which vitality 
 only supplies the conditions, the action itself being, 
 meanwhile, independent of vitality. We might in- 
 stance the metamorphosis of tissues, on the one hand, 
 and the oxydation of hydro-carbons on the other, as 
 
 Spinal and sympathetic movement of the nervous fibers from the circumference 
 to the center, and from the center to the circumference ; movements reflex and 
 sympathetic ; movements of undulation and vibration, of quivering, of shuddering. 
 
 Hespiration, inspiration, and exjAration. 
 
 Eelated with inspiration : inhaling, expanding 
 
 Eelated with expiration : voice, speech, singing, crying, whistling, explosion 
 of breath in excretory efforts, yawning, coughing, laughing, sneezing, sighing, sob- 
 bing, hiccough. 
 
 Fenstaltlc movements of the stomach, commencins at the large curve, and Anti- 
 peristaltic a' the small. The revolution is completed in two or three minutes. 
 Concentric movement is that which takes place in the circular fibers of the lesser 
 end of this organ. 
 
 Small Intestine. — Progressive movement of the alimentary mass, conducted by 
 the loui?itudinal and circular fibers of the intestine. The contraction is local, and 
 moderate in force. The movements of the large intestines resemble those of the 
 small, but are slower. 
 
 Organ of the Circulation. Heart: m.oxevL\eni of systole findi of diastole. These 
 movemen's are correlative, and resemble those of a forcing-pump, the contraction 
 of the walls of the heart answering to the operations of the piston, and plugged by 
 its valves. 
 
 Movements of tension and distention; of torsion, pulsation ; of shock, palpitation. 
 
 Arteries and capillaries : eccentric circulation. 
 
 Veins : concentric circulation. 
 
 Movements of electricity, contraction, compression, tension, distention, resist- 
 ance, remittence, intermittence, rubbing, etc. 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 79 
 
 interesting examples of these varieties of chcniical 
 action. 
 
 2. Growth^ or the reproduction of the wasting parts 
 of the body, under the inspiration of vitality, may also 
 be regarded as a peculiar kind of action, involving 
 unceasing motion. In this action, the materials of 
 growth, existing in a soluble state in the blood, are 
 discharged through the membranes of the vessels, and 
 the elementary constituents rearranged in a new form, 
 generally without a very material change in their pro- 
 portions. The matter in this instance assumes, under 
 certain mysterious laws, the primary organic forms 
 which, by repetition, build up or reproduce the various 
 organs. 
 
 3. Muscular action, it has been discovered, results 
 from a motion of contractility peculiar to the cells con- 
 stituting muscular fibrillse. These motions are found to 
 be merely results of a change in their shape, by flat- 
 tening of the little cells in such a way that while their 
 length is diminished, their diameter is augmented. 
 
 4. The above motion, so inconsiderable in itself, re- 
 sults at last in that most conspicuous of corporeal mo- 
 tions, namely, that of a change of place effected by the 
 whole body or of one or more of its members. When 
 a muscle contracts, we knovv^ it carries the whole mass 
 of bones, nerves, vessels, areolar tissue, fluids, etc., of 
 which the moving part is composed, along with it 
 through space, besides changing, in some degree, the 
 relations of these parts to each other. 
 
 5. To the fluids of the body is imparted a motion by 
 this muscular action. This motion of the blood is in 
 fact required as a means of inducing this very muscular 
 action. And the circulation of the blood throuMiout 
 the system is supported by the joint action of the 
 
80 PHILOSOPHY OF MOYEMEin'S. 
 
 coiintless and constant motions taking place in the 
 substance of the various tissues. 
 
 6. By means of the force communicated by the mus- 
 cular action of their walls, the contents of the canals 
 of the body are caused to flow in regular tides through 
 these or£:ans in the direction of the outlets. In this 
 way those matters for which the system has no use are 
 ejected. 
 
 7. The walls of the chest and of the arterial blood- 
 vessels have an established and rythmical motion in 
 health. The one is designed to refresh the blood, and 
 the other mainly to assist the circulation of this fluid 
 throughout the body. 
 
 Recipkocitt of Actions. — 'Tlie different motions of 
 which the body is the sphere, constitute that connected 
 series of activities which it is the function of Physiol- 
 ogy to explain. Their action is wonderfully compli- 
 cated, and they all have a part to play in the develop- 
 ment of that grand mechanical force^ the countless 
 muscles and nerves with which our bodies are supplied. 
 An impediment to the fuMllment of any one of these 
 actions necessarily vitiates them all, just as one defect- 
 ive link weakens the whole chain. In one respect 
 these simultaneous motions resemble the successive 
 elemental actions of the chemical state, before alluded 
 to. All interference with the regular vital processes 
 renders imperfect those several conditions of organic 
 growth upon which all power absolutely depends. 
 
 An important principle is now to be noticed, to wit, 
 that the expenditure of power is neces^niry to its very 
 evolution. This expenditure is the phenomenon con- 
 templated in the entire train of actions above alluded 
 to, and without this there can be no mechanical mo- 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. * 81 
 
 tion, no molecular motion, no organic and no chemical 
 action ; and no demand, therefore, made npon the di- 
 gestive organs, or npon the respiratory function. 
 
 The reader must not infer from this statement that 
 all function ceases with the cessation of voluntary mo- 
 tion, or with the suspension of the will. Provision is 
 made against any such fatal accident. In the economy 
 of the system it so liap])ens that a large amount of its 
 muscular action is carried on involuntarily for the 
 si^ecial furtherance of its organic operations. This is 
 particularly true of all the rythmical motions, snch as 
 the movements of the chest, diaphragm, and abdom- 
 inal mnscles in respiration ; of the heart and arteries ; 
 of the alimentary tube, etc. 
 
 While, then, the living body may be regarded as an 
 admirablv arrano'ed theater in which these various 
 motor forces have their full and harmonious play, mus- 
 cular motion must be considered as the great main- 
 spring of all the others. It certainly sets in operation 
 many kinds of action ; many seem to depend on it as 
 their chief stimulant, and others appear to radiate from 
 it as from a central force. By this far-reaching power 
 of its own it controls to a good extent all the motions 
 of the alimentary atoms, and disposes of them to the 
 highest advantage of the whole system. 
 
 J^ature, in her arrangements for the welfare of her 
 children, saw fit to select motion as a chief means for 
 the maintenance of the physiological harmonies of the 
 body, and for the restoration of these harmonies and 
 the health they confer, in cases in which the latter have 
 been lost through accident or imprudence.* 
 
 * Leehmann corroborates this view of the influence of motion in the following 
 passage : '• Albinus took no superficial view of the organic activity in nature, 
 when he established the axiom, that the essence of vital force consisted in motion. 
 
 4.^ 
 
82 PHILOSOniY OF ilOYEMENTS. 
 
 The System as a Reseryoik of Force. — ^The system, 
 in health, is capable of siq^plying force at a certain 
 rate^ determined by the degree of perfection in whicli 
 its organic processes are conducted. These processes 
 are always, with more or less effect, engaged in pro- 
 ducing force. J^ow, if this force be expended in a 
 single channel, the production will probably about 
 equal the expenditure ; but if in several channels at 
 the same time, the expenditure must not only exceed 
 the production, but will even exhaust the reserved sup- 
 ply which the healthy system always possesses. This 
 state of things is denoted by the feeling we call fa- 
 tigue. 
 
 In the invalid, the force production is more or less 
 limited. This is a necessary result of disease. Hence, 
 such exercises as involve a large portion of the system 
 at one time are harmful, because they are sure to ex- 
 haust the reserve fund of force, which is not readily 
 restored by the defective organic processes, and so the 
 disease will be increased in our very efforts perhaps to 
 quell it. But if the exertion be confined to a single 
 instrument or organ, or to a single set of muscles, the 
 expenditure of force is made to correspond more nearly 
 with its production ; the system is not fatigued, but is 
 refreshed, because the movements have helped to sup- 
 
 Even if this expression be far too general for organic action, it can not be denied that 
 -we assume life to exist wherever we perceive a constant alternation of phenomena 
 and incessant changes induced by the constant motion of the molecules of the or- 
 ganized body, as well as of the organs themselves. ***** 
 
 " Metamorphoses are continually developed in the material substrata of the body. 
 Physical forces continue to act upon matter after it has attained its position of equi- 
 librium, for it is only by opposite actions that equilibrium exists. ****** 
 The case is very different when motion occurs in oriianized bodies, for here we find 
 a tendency to persistence; everything that is brought into the line of the direction 
 of these concurrent forces is impelled to a similar motion, and equilibrium will not 
 be produced, for equilibrium is rest, and in rest there is no life, and in equilibrium 
 there is death."— Vol. ii., pp. 210, 211. 
 
I'HILOSOPHY OF M')\EMENTS. 
 
 83 
 
 ply the true and proper conditions for the production 
 or augmentation of the life-power. 
 
 Desckiption of Muscle. — Tlie mere fact of muscle 
 entering so largely into the composition of tlie system, 
 would indicate to any mind its importance in the 
 physical economy. This tissue constitutes more than 
 half of the weight and bulk of the body. It has but a 
 single function, and that is, as it is technically termed, 
 contraction^ or the approximation of the extremities ; 
 for experiments show that the bulk is unvarying. By 
 contracting, and in proportion to the vigor of the con- 
 traction, muscle is capable of moving the bones and 
 other appendages with which it is connected. It also 
 Icrms the walls of the hollow organs, and, by contract- 
 ing, lessens the caliber of such organs, and impels their 
 contents onward. The muscles are crowded with blood- 
 vessels, the larger trunks of which pass through, and 
 the smaller are distributed within them for the supply 
 of nutrient matter. They are connected together by 
 an areolar structure, consisting of elastic filaments, 
 forming a network around them, which serves the 
 double purpose of at once binding them together and 
 ^*^- ^- keeping them separate. 
 
 ^':iJ Muscular fiber, showing the cells ; a aa, the 
 '' ± waves of contraction, showing the flattening 
 of the cells ; b b b, similar waves, engaged in 
 still stronger contraction, traveling along the 
 fiber, and causing it to be thicker at the con- 
 tracting portions. 
 
 Muscle is visibly distin- 
 guished from other structures 
 by its red color. Masses of 
 muscle are divided longitudi- 
 nally into parallel fibers, visi- 
 
84: PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 ble to the naked eje, whicli are again divided into 
 exceedingly minute iibrillse ; and these fibrillge are 
 crossed by transverse stripes wbicli seem to divide each 
 of them into microscopic dimensions. These cubes are 
 the ultimate muscle-cells. In the act of contraction 
 these cubes are flattened, and at the same time become 
 proportion ably broader. 
 
 The contraction of a muscle is effected by the con- 
 traction separately of the fibers of which it is com- 
 posed. These fibers act through only a portion of 
 their length at the same moment ; the contractions 
 seeming to travel from one portion to another of the 
 fibrils, each portion becoming relaxed as the action 
 travels beyond it. This becomes an important fact in 
 the curative application of movements, as we shall see. 
 
 Muscular contraction never takes place independ- 
 ently of an exciting cause or stimulus. The power 
 efi*ecting this act is derived from the nerves distributed 
 to the muscular structure. Tliese nerves for the volun- 
 tary muscles have their origin in the spinal axis, and 
 are also generally connected with the seat of the will. 
 So that impressions received from without the 
 body by the sensitive nerves, and those originating in 
 the mind, are capable of directly inducing muscular 
 action, and consequently motion, in all the organs that 
 are connected with them. 
 
 M. Beclaed gives thus, with much clearness, the 
 chemical phenomena which attend muscular contrac- 
 tion : 
 
 " The muscles develop a certain quantity of heat at 
 the moment of contracting. The researches of MM. 
 Bequerel and Beeschet, and those more recent of M. 
 Helmholtz, have placed the fact beyond doubt, that the 
 muscles during their contraction, as aJso during their 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 85 
 
 state fifrej^ose, absorb oxygen and form carbonic acid. > 
 During contraction, the absorption of oxygen and cx-> 
 halation of carbonic acid is doubled." 
 
 MM. Du Bois-Eaymond, Liebig, Yalentine, and 
 Matteueci have demonstrated satisfactorily the fact 
 by placing the members of an animal in a space ex- 
 posed to a known gaseous composition. The che mical 
 phenomena of oxydation are then manifested in- the 
 muscles, and these phenomena increase during contrac- 
 tion. M. Helmholtz caused a musclar group to contract 
 by aid of a powerful induction-current for a long time, 
 till exhaustion occurred ; he then examined the chemi- 
 cal constitution of the muscular fiber, and found that 
 the soluble materials contained in the muscle (creatin, 
 creatnine, and inosic acid) had increased in proportion 
 when compared with other muscles that had been in 
 repose of the same animal. Du Bois-Raymond 
 proved, on the other hand, tliat when a muscle remains 
 for a long time at rest, it has a neutral reaction, and 
 that its reaction becomes acid after repeated contrac- 
 tions. The absorption of oxygen increases in a con- ^ 
 tracting muscle, and the action has the effect of trans- '\ 
 forming a part of the muscle into an oxydized product, 
 and this oxydation is the cause of the elevation of tem- ^ 
 perature observed. 
 
 In muscular action, generally, the products of com- 
 bustion formed in the muscles pass toward the blood, 
 and are carried off by the excretory passages ; we have 
 also seen that, in exercise, the products of expiration 
 and the products of urinary secretion are increased. 
 
 Physiological Effects of Exercise. — It will be 
 necessary to particularize at some length the more di- 
 rect and distinct effects of muscular contraction, in or- 
 
86 PHILOSOPHY OF MOYEIMENTS. 
 
 der to bring out more clearly to the mind its claims to 
 attention as an im^Dortant hygenic and remedial agent. 
 
 Effects of Musculae Contkaction ois" the Local 
 Circulation. — Muscular Contraction affords powerful 
 aid to the local circulation of the parts in which it takes 
 place, in several distinct ways. 1st. Materials pass 
 from the arterial to the venous side of the circulation 
 according to a law common to all vital tissues. This 
 occurs at a rate directly proportionate to the vital ac- 
 tivity. 2d. The effect of the pressure of the con- 
 tracting muscle upon the blood-vessels that penetrate 
 it, or that are contiguous, is to hasten the flow of the 
 contents of these vessels. The tendency to displace- 
 ment of these contents can only operate in the direc- 
 tion allowed by the valves of the veins ; that is, in the 
 heari-ward direction. At the moment the contraction 
 ceases, the vessels of the part contain less blood ; but 
 the pressure from the arterial side instantly supplies 
 the part more abundantly, so as to distend the vessels. 
 This is the condition favorable for the effusion of the 
 N\\dX plasma of the blood for the nutrition of the acting 
 part ; thus providing for a rej^etition of the act. 3d. 
 JSTot only the blood, but the intermuscular juices are 
 renewed by the act of muscular contraction, for the com- 
 pression to which these organs have been subjected com- 
 pels all the fluids to change place like the contents of a 
 wetted sponge ; and the previously mentioned circum- 
 stances give direction to the fluids thus set in motion. 
 
 The benefit derived from these effects on the circu- 
 lation is by no means confined to the muscles. All 
 other organs connected with the blood-vessels that 
 supply the muscles participate freely in the same 
 advantages ; and it would seem that this is the ap- 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 87 
 
 pointed way in wliicli to secure the nutritive supply in 
 its perfection to the tissues generally. 
 
 The mucous membrane, skin, intervening areolar 
 structure, nerves, and. other anatomical constituents of 
 the body, share equally in the advantages thus at- 
 tained. It would seem to be the province of the mus- 
 cles, numerous and powerful as they are, not only to 
 secure their own health by the exercise of their func- 
 tion, but to minister to the good of all other structures ; 
 for all depend alike for their nourishment upon a 
 common reservoir, whose distribution could not be 
 efficiently maintained without the assistance so largely 
 rendered by the muscles. 
 
 Effect on Respiration. — Increased respiration oc- 
 curs simultaneously with every muscular effort. This 
 follows from the fact that arterial hlood^ of which oxy- 
 gen is an important ingredient, is essential in every 
 muscular contraction; for in each contraction oxygen 
 is required probably, as a second result, to effect the 
 destruction of the acting muscular molecule ; hence 
 the necessity of a continual supply of this principle 
 through respiration. It will be noticed that an in- 
 creased inspiratory effort does not succeed, but imme- 
 diately precedes the muscular exertion, and is simul- 
 taneous with the suggestion of the will, which it seems 
 to render more vehement and energetic. As the arm 
 is raised to strike, the breath is drawn in ; and if a 
 strong blow is contemplated, the glottis is for a mo- 
 ment closed, and a strong pressure is exerted upon the 
 contained air of the chest, to force, as it were, the blood 
 to take in an increased quantity of the power-liberating 
 element. This involuntary " holding the breath" is 
 without doubt a very important aid to the respiratory 
 
88 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 act. It at the same time expands the chest, and aids, 
 by pressure of tlie respired air, tlie sohition of tlie 
 oxygen. 
 
 In respiration there are two things to be considered : 
 tlie mobility of the walls of the chest, and the nervous 
 arrangement by which this mobility is controlled. 
 The nerves of respiration act independently of the con- 
 sciousness in their ordinary operation ; but every effort 
 of the will increases their action by the stimulus it 
 affords the muscles of the chest. Whether the eifort 
 of the will be directed to the muscles of any part of 
 the body, or is confined to mental operations — in each 
 case waste is produced, and the employment of an 
 amount of oxygen is implied proportionate to the mag- 
 nitude of the exertion. It may be remarked that there 
 are other circumstances that influence respiration, as 
 diet ; but this is true of temperatare especially, and 
 respiration is deep just in proportion to the rapidity 
 with which the body loses its heat. 
 
 But respiration is entirely a raechanical action. It 
 is performed by the muscles of the chest and abdomen, 
 and the degree of perfection with which it is performed 
 is determined by the condition and habits of the organs 
 performing it. If these muscles are badly nourished 
 and imperfectly used, oxygen can be supplied to tlie 
 blood to support the bodily need only in limited quan- 
 tities. So it turns out that the amount of work a man 
 can do is not so much dependent on his muscle as 
 on his hreathing cajMcity. If he can breathe well he 
 can generally work well ; if short-winded, though he 
 may have the muscles of an Ajax, he will be left be- 
 hind to a certainty in the race of life. 
 
 Effect on the Secretions. — Anything that pro- 
 
rillLOSOPIIY OF MOVEMENTS. 89 
 
 motes renewal of the blood of the capillaries, promotes 
 secretions ; for whatever be the nature of the secreted 
 jn-oduct, or its origin, it is derived primarily from the 
 blood of the capillaries, distributed to the membrane 
 whose involutions form the secreting gland. The qual- 
 ity of the secretion will greatly depend, of course, on 
 that of the blood whence it is derived, which, again, is 
 subject to variation from many causes under the con- 
 trol of motion or exercise. 
 
 Effect on the Excretions. — Muscular action power- 
 fully urges the blood into the skin and lungs, the two 
 principal excretory organs, whence its excretory pro- 
 ducts are readily eliminated. The same action results 
 in the production of an important element of the uri- 
 nary excretion, without which this fluid can not be of 
 normal quality. The channels for the egress of this 
 principle are also kept free and open by exercise. 
 
 It is now well understood that the most common 
 cause of constipation of the bowels is want of general 
 muscular tone, and especially want of action in the tube 
 through which the alvine discharges are conveyed. 
 The expulsion of the contents of the bowels is only 
 effected by muscular action, to induce which, the tube 
 and the abdominal wells work conjointly, and too 
 frequently tug in vain. 
 
 Effect on Absoeption. — Kutritive matters, after 
 being reduced to a fluid state by digestion, are pre- 
 pared to pass the digestive boundaries into the blood. 
 But there must first be a demand in the tissues for the 
 materials. The unceasing wastes caused by muscular 
 action, and the ex]3enditure of the blood constantly 
 taking place, must be made good with materials from 
 
90 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 the digestive surface. The connection between muscu- 
 lar action and absorption is direct. 
 
 But local action is also required of the digestive 
 membrane- Hence nature causes the whole alimentarj 
 tube to take on a sort of rythmical, vermicular motion. 
 The ordinary avocations of life accelerate this motion 
 of the canal. But in sedentery occupations the causes 
 of motion from without are lessened, and the health is 
 sure to suffer as a consequence. Absorption from the 
 digestive canal is incomplete, and the digestive organs 
 become clogged, and soon diseased. 
 
 Physiologists have compared absorption to the passage 
 of fluids of different kinds through membranes, known 
 as osmosis. The conditions for maintaining this physical 
 phenomenon are, that the fluids on the opposite sides 
 of the mer/ibrane shall he of different Jdnds. J^ow the 
 renewal of the fluids of either side of the membrane of 
 the alimentary canal by motion preserves this difference. 
 
 Effect on the Quality of the Blood. — All the above 
 enumerated processes, namely, nutrition^ respiration^ 
 secretion^ excretion^ absorption^ are the means whereby 
 the blood itself, the great fountain from which life is 
 supplied to the whole body, is maintained in its purity 
 and fitness for its several purposes, l^utrition itself, 
 so far as the blood is concerned, is an excretory act. 
 The very matters destined to supply muscular power 
 and bulk can not be retained in the blood without in- 
 jury to its quality and damage to the health. Tlie 
 force-imparting properties of the blood can not long be 
 maintained therein unless it gives them up as readily 
 as it receives them. 
 
 Effect on the Digestr^e Pkocess. — Digestion is the 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 91 
 
 means whereby food is furnished to the system, as 
 respiration is the means for supplying oxygen. It is 
 not enough that good food be swallowed. Food is not 
 only inert, but positively injurious, miless rendered 
 fluid and made to proceed in the series of changes it is 
 appointed to undergo. At the natural temperature of 
 the body, food must, from its nature, undergo some 
 change ; and if this change is not digestive^ it will be 
 chemical^ with the formation of poisonous products. 
 Many persons are habitually poisoned with food taken 
 even in small quantities, when the conditions for its 
 digestion are wanting or imperfect. 
 
 Digestion is dependent on the Uood^ its quality and 
 distribution, and on the demand arising in the system 
 for the digested product. If the demand is small, and 
 the amount of food taken be not also proportionably 
 small, the function is injured, and repeated injuries in- 
 flict permanent disease. Exercise, in proper modes, is 
 capable of preventing and of remedying such condi- 
 tions, as is proved by the almost universally good 
 digestive i^ower of the habitual laborer, even when 
 placed under the most unfavorable circumstances. 
 
 Effect on the Oeganiztng Process. — All mani- 
 festations of force, muscular or nervous, are directly 
 proportionate to the vigor of their instruments, the 
 muscles and nerves ; and it is no exaggeration of the 
 truth to say that we may consider all other functions 
 of the system as contributing to their increase and sup- 
 port. The organization or growth of these instruments 
 is evidently a most essential link in the chain of actions 
 between the digestion of food aud the manifestation of 
 force. Organization, or growth of organic forn:!S, is to 
 a great degree a vegetative act, and takes its character 
 
92 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 very mncli from the cliaracter of the nutriment afford- 
 ed and the manner of its appropriations. Atomic ab- 
 sorption is necessarily preliminary to the process of 
 renovation ; the destruction of the organized form and 
 the elimiuation of the effete material must precede 
 growth, and muscular exertion is requisite in order to 
 insure the vitalization of the material elements from 
 which natui-e collects what she needs for the continu- 
 ance of her renovating processes. 
 
 Movements Stimulate the Vitalizing Processes. — 
 The modes in which movements, by their mechanical 
 and chemical effects, contribute to the corporeal wel- 
 fare, has been described, but the last result is of a 
 higher order than any included in these effects. This 
 consists, if we may use the expression, in an aug- 
 mentation of the control exercised by vitality in the 
 system. The body we have considered as the theater 
 of two opposing actions, the organizing^ and the disor- 
 ganizing^ and chemical actions. In the healthy body, 
 those influences which promote the former prepon- 
 derate, secured as they are by voluntary and involun- 
 tary movements habitually conducted, while the inac- 
 tive body becomes diseased, for the simj)le reason that 
 therein actions must transpire among its elementary 
 particles which are purely chemical in their nature, 
 and which must have the effect to deteriorate the or- 
 ganizing vital forces, and consequently vitiate the gen- 
 eral health and sap the strength of the constitution. 
 By means of rational movements, vital action is made 
 to predominate over all opposing or simjDly chemical 
 actions, and health follows as naturally and inevitably 
 as night the day. 
 
 The part played by drug chemicals in the vital 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 93 
 
 domain may be easily understood. The presence of 
 such substances is never uninfluential. Tliey increase 
 to a certainty the amount of chemical change going on 
 in the system ; and notwithstanding the impulse to- 
 ward health that is oftentimes thought to be given, and 
 which is the result of a temporary vital reaction, yet it 
 remains true that the real tendency of the system, under 
 their sway, is necessarily downward, because chemical, 
 and consequently injurious, changes are thereby pro- 
 moted. 
 
 Co-ordination of Motions by the ISTerves. — Every 
 organ and member of the body performs a distinct 
 office, and its individuality is never merged in that of 
 others. But it is also true that all the diverse parts are 
 connected in an individual whole by means of the 
 nervous system. The nerves, we know, pervade all 
 vital j^arts, and not only preside over the peculiar func- 
 tion of every local element and member, but also cause 
 each to act with reference to, and harmoniously with, 
 all other organs, and with the whole economy. We 
 are well aware, through our sensations, of many things 
 that are going forward in the body ; for the conscious- 
 ness and intellectual functions are influenced through 
 the nerves. The great majority of the operations of the 
 system proceed without the consciousness, and are soon 
 interrupted by it when it is brought to bear on them ; 
 but there is, so to speak, a kind of organic understand- 
 ing maintained between the functions of the different 
 parts harmonizing their motions. Some of the mani- 
 festations of this principle are termed reflex action. A 
 person instinctively draws back from a danger that he 
 sces.^ kears^ and feels. The stomach a;]<l bowels also 
 reject food which it would be harmful to tolerate ; a 
 
94 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 limb retracts unconsciously if even a fly alights upon 
 it, and tlie eyelid winks if a mote sails by it ; the pulse 
 is quickened not more readily from the effects of a 
 drug than by a passing thought of the mind or emotion 
 of the heart. These results are automatic^ that is, not 
 connected necessarily with the consciousness and the 
 will. Hence, on the same occult principle, during the 
 natural performance of every organic act, there occurs 
 a response of organ to organ, of part to part, through- 
 out the system, in every direction along the nervous 
 network. One sees a luscious peach, and the whole 
 gustatory apparatus takes on a gentle excitement ; the 
 circulation of the part is instantly affected and the 
 saliva commences to flow. 
 
 If now the fruit be taken into the mouth, not only is 
 an abundance of saliva poured forth, but the stomach 
 also enters upon a state of preparation ; the gastric and 
 other fluids are secreted, and the whole system expe- 
 riences a sense of satisfaction and enjoyment. The 
 explanation of all this is, that the ultimate organic 
 actions of the body have been impressed and brought 
 into vigorous and harmonious play in accordance with 
 natural and beautiful, though mysteiious law. 
 
 The effect of muscular contraction upon the organs 
 of the body, through the nerves, is perfectly analogous 
 to that just noted. "Whenever a great muscle acts 
 energetically, the nerve-filaments distributed therein are 
 powerfully affected, the terminal loops or extremities 
 are suddenly approximated, and its sensibility is in- 
 creased. The immediate effect of the flow of blood 
 which takes place from other parts to the acting part, 
 even the heaving of the chest sometimes, and the 
 change of expression of the whole man, are very ap- 
 parent. This consentaneousness in the action of the 
 
PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 95 
 
 whole person is effected by the nerves ; but these 
 visible eflects, great and striking as they are, are a 
 mere representation of invisible, internal action still 
 more important and wonderful. These actions may be 
 made to supply special needs of the organism, and then 
 they become remedial. We are unconscious of the 
 intervening or connecting changes till we see their out- 
 ward phenomena produced. 
 
 Another important influence that we may mention 
 here, is that exerted upon organic motions through the 
 medium of the consciousness. 
 
 When one notices the efl:ects of the exertion of his 
 muscles, and appreciates the consequences, the system 
 becomes infused with a wholesome energy, the con- 
 sciousness of the possession of power. This principle 
 is understood by comparing the influence upon the 
 mind, and through it upon the organic system of the 
 successful with the unsuccessful eftbrt. If one makes 
 an exertion that is inadequate to overcome the resist- 
 ance, discouragement results, and a general depression 
 of all the organic forces is the consequence. Such is 
 the influence of mental impressions upon the nutrient 
 processes. A few unsuccessful attempts to do what 
 ought perhaps never to have been attempted, will 
 sometimes make an invalid for life ; for the system is 
 thus deprived of the stimulus of that nervous vim 
 requisite for vigorous and healthful organic action. 
 !Now if in such a case exercise be J9r^«c7"^&^rZ so as to 
 adapt nicely the quality and quantity to the condition 
 of the invalid, the encouragement thus aflforded to the 
 failing forces imparts new energy to the w^hole man, 
 and we often see him in a few days brought up out of 
 his slough of despond and enjoying the sunshine of 
 hope and renovated feeling. 
 
96 PHILOSOPHY OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 The Foregoing Effects. — What are ever contem- 
 plated as tlie ultimate results of medical prescription 
 other til an those here enumerated ? Not that perfect 
 health will always be secured by attending to these 
 particulars, even if attended to in the best manner that 
 a j^atient's opportunities, amount of knowledge and 
 experience and constitutional capacity will allow ; but 
 we do say, and insist strenuously, that the mode here 
 indicated of securing healthful effects is direct and ra- 
 tional^ and more efficacious than those usually em- 
 ployed by medical practitioners ; and that it is in 
 many cases attended with the most satisfactory results. 
 And when from causes already intimated imperfect re- 
 sults follow, we insist that it is less the fault of the 
 means than of the mode of their application. 
 
PKIXCIPLES CONSIDERED. 97 
 
 MOVEMENTS, AND THE PRINCIPLES GOVERNING 
 THEIR APPLICATION. 
 
 Definition. — It is necessary for the reader to bear in 
 mind the distinction between movements, gymnastics, 
 and exercises, as these words are here employed. By 
 exe7'cises, is understood all volnntary motions of the 
 body whatsoever, without any reference to the object 
 or objects had in view. Thus labor and recreation, 
 practiced by either body or mind, whether general or 
 partial, are exercise. The word gymnastics is used ex- 
 clusively to indicate the means of developing the corpo- 
 real frame, whereby it is fitted for the business of life, or 
 for any special purpose, by means of certain exercises. 
 Gymnastics are employed by the well, and are recog- 
 nized universally as a useful means of developing the- 
 healthy body into its due proportions, which, without 
 exercise, it fails to acquire. Gymnastics, in its techni- 
 cal meaning, may indicate very many kinds and de- 
 grees of exercise, and it is only necessary that they 
 should have this end in view in order to deserve this 
 title. 
 
 The term exercises, however, does not include, by any 
 means, all that is implied by movements. Movements 
 are not limited to muscular action, instigated by the 
 wUl, but include other motions also, employed accord- 
 ing to certain rules, for certain specific, rational pur- 
 poses. Movements, in short, are simply motions of 
 
 5 
 
98 PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 specific kinds, having sj^ecific efiects, practiced for spe- 
 cific purposes, and intended to secure definite results. 
 Movements are mechanical agencies^ directed either 
 upon the whole system, or a part of it, for the purpose 
 of inducing determinate effects upon its vital actions, 
 and generally hamng reference to its pathological state.'^ 
 Hence, the kind of movements proper in a given 
 case are determined by the condition of the system, and 
 will vary with its variations, so as to correspond with 
 its special as well as general needs, at the particular 
 time when they are employed. Movements admit of 
 extensive variation in regard to Ttind, degree, and 
 pla/ie. 
 
 Different Kinds of Movements, Active and Pas- 
 sive. — The division of movements into active ^tl^ pas- 
 sive relates to the sources whence the moving power is 
 derived. The motion of riding, for instance, \^ passive, 
 if the body be supported. So also are the clappings, 
 hiocMngs, strolcinqs, Tineadings, pulling s, shalcings, vi- 
 hratings, etc., of the duplicated movements, because 
 both the motion and the will that gives it energy are 
 derived from another person. 
 
 * Dally gives the following definition of movements : 
 
 A movement is a product of life, and is impressed rcith its essence ; the natural 
 interior invisible action ichich unceasingly creates the vital forcex ; tchich at the 
 same time engenders other exterior visible vital manifestations— in a icord, it is 
 ihat by tchich the iinited organic individual manifests its intelle' trial and moral, 
 physical and chemical life, whereby life is developed, maintained, deteriorated, 
 repaired s or resolved into its eleinenis. 
 
 If we carry this definition into the domain of animal mechanism, we shall be 
 obliged to modify it thus: A movement is the most direct and proper means for 
 provoking naturally, or in harmony icith physiological laves, vital or biological 
 motions, by virtue of which last the human machine, in all its mitltiform organs 
 and functions, is developjed, maintained, and repaired. 
 
 This philosophical idea of movements furnishes the grand basis of true physical 
 education, rational hygiene, and scientific therapeutics ; the at first despised tradi- 
 tional bafiis that the progress of modern science more and more confirms as the 
 trae one. 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 99 
 
 Among the single movements there arc none that are 
 vjholly passive. A\^hile tlie muscles of some portion of 
 the body are acting, tliey act upon other structures, 
 which, in relation to the acting muscles, are of course 
 passive. But tlie antagonizing muscles are also acted 
 upon — compressed and distended, and are relatively 
 passive. The condition of the will is an important ele- 
 ment in determining whether the movement be active 
 or passive. 
 
 Whenever the contractile power of a muscle is en- 
 gaged in overcoming resistance, the resulting move- 
 ment is active, whether the effort be successful or not. 
 
 Single and Duplicated Movements. — A movement 
 is called single when but a single person is engaged in 
 its execution ; duplicated^ when more than one is en- 
 gaged. In single movements the weight of the whole 
 or of some portion of the body is overcome by muscu- 
 lar action ; as when in a standing posture the feet are 
 extended, or a leg or arm is raised. The movement is 
 also single if the resistance of antagonizing muscles is 
 overcome, as in twisting a limb or the trunk ; or when 
 a burden is added to the weight of the body, or of the 
 extremity or part moved. The movements described 
 in tliis treatise are of the variety termed Single Move- 
 ments. But as frequent reference is made to the du- 
 plicated variety of movements, it is necessary to de- 
 scribe here their general qualities and purposes. 
 
 Duplicated Movements are of two kinds. In one, 
 the movement is received by the patient, who is quite 
 passive, while motion of some particular variety is 
 given to some portion of the body, or to the whole of 
 it, generally by a physician, or by an operator under 
 his immediate direction. In the other kind the patient 
 
100 I'JEtmCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 is required to bring into action some particular part 
 designated in the prescription ; while the quality^ 
 amount^ and duration of the action is entirely con- 
 trolled by the physician. This action is, of course, 
 varied according to the therapeutical indications of 
 the case, partly judged of by the physical symptoms 
 brought to light by the ordinary modes of diagnosis, 
 partly determined by the cultivated and delicate per- 
 ception and experience of the operator. The operator, 
 in manipulating, usually affords a certain kind and de- 
 gree of resistance^ which aids in effecting the desired 
 physiological action of the part concerned in the move- 
 ment. Even in the same movement, the resistance 
 should be carefully varied in the different stages, and 
 with all the nicety of manipulation that is required of 
 the musician for giving expression and effect in an in- 
 strumental performance. 
 
 The range and variety of effects capable of being pro- 
 duced by the duplicated movements, when directed by 
 tact and intelligence, are very great, meeting most of 
 the indications of chronic disease, probably quite all 
 that present themselves in ordinary cases. These 
 effects may be realized either in interior organs or the 
 extremities, and may be made general or local. They 
 may be confined mainly to any particular anatomical 
 division or physiological function, to the nerves, the 
 muscles, or may influence all together. They are 
 adapted to the most enfeebled invalid or to the stout- 
 est persons, and never need produce effects beyond the 
 requirements of the invalid or the intention of the 
 physician. 
 
 A most important element in the treatment by du- 
 plicated movements is that of the co-operation, both b}^ 
 will and action, of the patient with the physicinn or 
 
PKTNCIPLES CONSIDERED. 101 
 
 operator ; by which the superior power of the one be- 
 comes a source of strength to the other. "^ 
 
 JS^o thing, for a plain reason, so encourages a person 
 to act, as the conscionsness of abundant ability ; and 
 this is fully supplied to the mind by the auxiliary 
 power afforded. So that, in addition to the control 
 obtained over the cbemical and vito-chemical actions, 
 we secure in this way the favorable influence of the 
 healthful play of the nerves, whose function it is to 
 control organic operations. All medical systems ac- 
 knowledge the immense value of this assistance in the 
 treatment of invalids ; but what can secure it in so high 
 a degree as an intelligent and patient application of the 
 duj^licated movements ? 
 
 But the employment of duplicated movements, it 
 must be confessed, is attended with difiiculties that will 
 prevent their general use as a medical resource. An 
 ordinary course of medical instruction does not confer 
 the necessary qualifications for their successful applica- 
 tion ; the tact necessary to prescribe and apply them 
 properly is only acquired by long and patient practice, 
 and the labor is excessively severe. 
 
 * Some of the German practitioners of the MoA-ement-Cure, adopting Eelchen- 
 bach's theory of the cdic force, contend that an influence of this kind is concerned 
 in the production of the effects of this treatment ; the nervous energy of the patient 
 being thereby exalted, and the system consequently enabled to overcome disease. 
 Dally gives a fine drawing of the human hand, in its minute anatomy, arguing 
 therefrom that it is an instrument eminently adapted to perform the office, or a part 
 of its physiological functions, of conveying something like vital electricity to anotWer 
 person; and that an important advantage is derived by the invalid from such a 
 transference. The reader will perceive the similarity, if not the identity, of the 
 ideas underlying these statements with those concerning animal magnetism, with 
 which every one is familiar. But it is not necessary, in order to prove or explain 
 the hygienic and the medical effects of the Movement-Cure, to resort to any state- 
 ments outside of its own well-demonstrated facts, and the easily understood laws 
 of physiology. Especially must it be injurious to the reputation of this practice to 
 resort to any theory in explanation of its effects that involves anything, to the com- 
 mon mind, mysterious or equivocal ; and such is confessedly the character of the the- 
 ories alluded to. 
 
102 PKmCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 Single Movements^ on the other hand, being com- 
 paratively few in number and simple in character, are 
 much more readily learned and practiced ; and they 
 are found very efficacious in combating the lighter 
 forms of disease and in opposing the first approaches 
 of graver maladies. 
 
 COXCENTKIC AND EcCENTKIC MOVEMENTS. "When the 
 
 extremities of the muscle are approximated, the mus- 
 cular contraction steadily increasing, the movement is 
 said to be concentvic. When the muscle is stretched, 
 its contraction steadily decreasing^ the movement is 
 said to be eccentric. Thus, the raising of a weight, as 
 a book, by the hand, requires a concentric movement ; 
 while in permitting the same object to fall gradually 
 by the side, an eccentric movement is effected. In both 
 cases the same muscles have been employed ; but often 
 the effect upon the circulation, and especially upon the 
 innervation of the part, is entirely different. The ad- 
 vantages of this distention are however only imper- 
 fectly available in the single movements, because both 
 the concentric and eccentric are necessarily used indis- 
 criminately in many of them. In practicing dupli- 
 cated movements, it is easy to render a given move- 
 ment either wholly concentric or wholly eccentric, and 
 thus to obtain whatever advantages may be derivable 
 from this distinction."^ 
 
 * Dr. Neuman, and some other writers on the Movement-Cure, insist on the great 
 importance in practice of the distinction of eccentric and concentric movements. 
 They suppose that not only the muscles, but also all vital cells, have the two quali- 
 ties of contraction and relaxation, as inseparable from their nature. These two 
 qualities, it is supposed, just balance each other in health, but in disease one or the 
 other of ihem preponderates. In other words, they think that all diseases may be 
 classed either as tliose in which the contractility of the primary cell of the organic 
 structures prevails, or else as those in which relaxation prevails. The one case, 
 accordini: to this theory, is to be treated by concentric movements, and the other 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 103 
 
 The accompanying cuts- will serve to illustrate con- 
 centric and eccentric movements. Fig. 2 represents 
 the arm bent at the elbow. To accomplish this, it is 
 necessary for the muscles of the upper arm, toward 
 which the forearm is drawn in the action, and which 
 are attached to the forearm near the elbow, to con- 
 tract, or shorten the distance between the extremities. 
 This mass of muscles is shown at a h in the cut. This 
 is C07ic€)itric action. But the muscles of the opposite 
 side of the arm are, meantime, by no means passive. 
 If they were, the bending would be accomplished with 
 a sudden jerk ; this is prevented by the contraction of 
 tlie opposing muscles. But this contraction is not suf- 
 ficient to prevent the shortening of a J, and the conse- 
 quent motion of the forearm. At the same time the 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Bending of the arm at the elbow showing that while ihe contracting muscle, a 6, 
 shortens Itself, its antagonist, c d,\s drawn out 
 
 by eccentric. Oftentimes the symptoms are supposed to indicate that concen- 
 tric movements are appropriate to one organ or region of the body, while the eccen- 
 tric are required for the other, and they are to be combined accordingly in the 
 prescription. 
 
 * From "Theory and Practice of the Movement-Cure." By C. F. Taylor 
 M.D. 
 
104 PRINCIPLES CONSIDEKED. 
 
 muscular mass, c d^ is steadily extended, in opposition 
 to its efforts, and its contraction is called eccentric. 
 
 stretching of the arm at the elbow, showing the action of the same muscles re 
 versed. 
 
 If, while the muscle cV c' is contracting, there be re- 
 sistance applied at the hand, then a' V will not contract 
 during the movement, for its opposing force is already 
 supplied by the resistance fi-om without, and though 
 drawn out, it remains relaxed during the movement, 
 having neither the physiological nor mechanical con- 
 ditions requiring an influx of arterial blood. The 
 whole effect of the movement is experienced in the 
 contracting part. 
 
 Again, \i force be applied to the hand, and a' V is 
 drawn out by means of that force, instead of c' d' act- 
 ing, then the muscle c' cV will not contract, and it will 
 possess neither the physiological nor mechanical con- 
 ditions for propelling forward the venous blood, but 
 will remain entirely inactive. The only result of the 
 movement is the contraction of a' V with the resulting 
 influx of arterial blood. Furthermore, if the move- 
 ment be made with resistance both ways, from 1 to 2 
 and from 2 to 1, the contraction would be first concen- 
 tric in c' d\ then also in a' h', without any eccentric 
 action. But if force be used to move ilio, limb in the 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 105 
 
 directions specified, while the muscles oppose the force 
 which overcomes them, then both actions are eccentric^ 
 and there are no concentric actions. The understandin<r 
 of these principles is of the first importance in the ap- 
 plication of movements for the removal of disease. 
 
 In fig. 3 it is plain that the action of the muscles 
 cT c' overcomes that of a' V ; hence the action of the 
 former is concentric^ while that of the latter is eccentric. 
 In either case both sets of muscle act, but with differ- 
 ent effects. 
 
 The difference in the physiological effects of these 
 two modes of muscular contraction is thus explained : 
 
 The pressure resulting from the contraction of ci! V 
 forces the contained blood into the venous capillaries, 
 while at the same instant the drawing out of the mus- 
 cles c' d' extends the arteries, relieves them of pressure, 
 and admits more arterial blood into the capillaries 
 than before. In both cases the conditions are supplied 
 for a new contraction ; in the one case, by excluding 
 waste matter, and in the other, by bringing arterial 
 blood to the acting organ, while by the conjoint action 
 the blood is hastened in its progress through the part. 
 
 General and Localized Movements. — One of the 
 most potent causes of disease is the habitual employ- 
 ment of the powers of the system in a 23artial or inhar- 
 monious manner. A person who constantly uses his 
 brain to the neglect of his whole body ; his senses, 
 rather than his muscles ; his hands and arms in prefer- 
 ence to his legs ; or his legs, and forgets his abdom- 
 inal muscles, has no right to anticipate the enjoyment 
 of continued good health. It is apparent that in these 
 cases nutrition progresses inordinately in the acting 
 parts, while other and as important portions of the 
 
 5* 
 
106 PRINCIPLES C0X3IDEKED. 
 
 frame are suflering for the want of it. The effect after 
 a time — and in individuals of feeble constitutions that 
 period is soon reached — is a total prostration of the 
 general physical energies. 
 
 These instances (and they are, alas ! too numerous 
 in all communities) illustrate a principle too apt to be 
 ignored by individuals, and neglected by physicians, 
 to wit, that even a moderate use of a part, while other 
 parts are in a state of quiescence, not only stimulates 
 the nutrient actions therein, but also causes the general 
 current of the circulation to set in toward them to an 
 abnormal extent. In other words, an undue and contin- 
 ued use of an organ induces a tendency to congestion 
 of its tissues. It also generally heightens its nervous 
 sensibility, frequently carrying it to the point of irri- 
 tahility / for evidently if an organ be set vigorously at 
 work, while all other parts are at rest, it is made to ex- 
 press the whole available vital force of the system. 
 Any organ may be compelled to do this, and they may 
 all be so compelled in succession by sufficient stimula- 
 tion. If the organs of the body be employed in union 
 or in proper succession, the current of the circulation 
 thus actively set in motion in them, instead of pro- 
 ducing congestion and irritation, only affords the proper 
 conditions for the high degree of nutrition necessary 
 for their healthful functional activity. It is only by 
 too long continued use, preventing at the same time 
 the healthful employment of other parts, that the most 
 vascular and delicate organs come to be injured. 
 
 The state of congestion, and the opposite one oishrunh 
 capillaries, coexist in different parts of the same body 
 in nearly all cases of chronic disease. The capillaries 
 of some portions, generally situated centrally, are dis- 
 tended and are too weak to push forward their con- 
 
PKIXCIPLES CONSIDERED. lOT 
 
 tents, and the stagnant blood soon becomes deteriorated 
 ill quality and incapable of affording nntrition ; while 
 at the same time other capillaries, generally those be- 
 longing to the skin and extremities, do not receive 
 enough of blood to answer the general nutrient pur- 
 poses of those parts. The rate of the circulation is 
 unequal, for the blood is arrested in the congested or- 
 gan, whatever may be the state of the pulse. The last 
 cause of the trouble may be a poor quality of blood ; 
 but back of this there are causes connected with the 
 blood-making operations of the body, previously de- 
 scribed, which the movements are competent to correct. 
 The removal of congestion is one of the important 
 objects of partial movements. The principles con- 
 cerned in this practice are easily understood. A con- 
 gested organ is one in which the capillaries have lost 
 their contractility, and are therefore distended with 
 blood, with a tendency to effusion of its serum, to re- 
 lieve the oppressed walls. Microscopists inform us 
 that gelatinous corpuscles are also present, which must 
 afford further impediment to the onward flow. Most 
 of the local, passive, duplicated movements assist very 
 materially in our efforts to remove this condition. But 
 permanent effects are secured by rousing vital action in, 
 and consequently drawing the congested fluid to, con- 
 tiguous organs, and even organs remote from the seat 
 of disease, but needing the supply. Thus the affected 
 part is emptied and relieved, and consequently soon 
 acquires a healthy tone again in its capillary circula- 
 tion ; while at the same time the other organs that were 
 suffering from deficient nutrition are supplied in a 
 healthful manner. If tolerable tact be employed in 
 the selection and arrangement of the movements in 
 the prescription, no more efficient means than thoge 
 
108 PUmCIPLES COXSIDERF.D. 
 
 here considered are to be found within the limits of 
 the remedial art for relieving congestion, the constant 
 concomitant of all chronic disease. 
 
 A similar principle is concerned in the treatment of 
 cases of disordered innervation. If a single organ be 
 the chief medium of nervous action, or even if it be 
 the seat of great pain, other organs are proportionably 
 wanting in sensibility. Kervous power is dependent on 
 the same general conditions of nutritive supply or mus- 
 cular power, and the nervous equilibrium is restored by 
 agencies that harmonize the general nutrient actions 
 of the body. Erom these statements, the broad, prac- 
 tical inference may be deduced, that congestion and 
 morbid innervation may he removed from any locality 
 hy emjyloying^ in other jportions of the system^ the ma- 
 terials and actions that are concerned in producing 
 them. 
 
 The attempts to accomplish these objects by ordi- 
 nary medical means are less successful than by move- 
 ments, because the control of the circulation thus ob- 
 tained is less direct and perfect. 
 
 It is evident that these principles furnish important, 
 and, indeed, invaluable suggestions for the manage- 
 ment of the sick. It is a process of reversing those 
 secret and subtile operations of the system whereby 
 diseases are originally produced. And these principles 
 are capable of the most easy, satisfactory, and beautiful 
 demonstration in every-day practice. 
 
 The curative employment of movements is by no 
 means confined to their local application. Those in- 
 volving the whole body are often used to excellent 
 advantage. Such movements urge the blood into the 
 superficial capillaries, and increase thereby the pe- 
 ripheral circulation. But they need to be employed 
 
PRmCIPLES CONSIDERED. 109 
 
 with miicli discretion, in order to avoid fatigue and tlie 
 consequent defeat of the very purposes for which they 
 are applied. 
 
 Influence of Movements in Regulating the Fokcks 
 OF THE Body. — It is ah-eady understood that, in accord- 
 ance with the view of physiology and pathology taken 
 in this w^ork, the omtscles and the nerves are regarded 
 as the two great channels through which the available 
 powers of the system are made to work. 
 
 In health, the muscles and nerves exercise co-ordinate 
 functions. The muscles, we know^, act only in response 
 to nervous stimuli ; but this involves both mental and 
 sensorial action, for the cause or origin of the impulses 
 imparted to the muscles resides in the intellect and 
 sensorium. The voluntary muscles ordinarily obey 
 only the mandates of the will and of the feelings. The 
 muscles should be the obedient servants of these 
 higher powers. Indeed, it is the wdiole aim and end 
 of our corporeal nature to minister to the higher and 
 spiritual ; and when it fails to do this, nature fails to 
 accomj)lish what she undertook in the creation of 
 man. 
 
 The laws of nature can not be broken wdtli impunity. 
 Every attempt to w^ork the intellect independently of 
 the forces allied to it, must end in a miserable and dis- 
 graceful defeat. But wdien these are harnessed to- 
 gether and made to draw in concord, there is nothing 
 wnthin the limits of the possible that we do not see men 
 accomplishing and enjoying. 
 
 Kow in disease, arising from whatever cause, there 
 is a disturbance in the operation of these two classes of 
 powers. Muscular power is partially or wdiolly sus- 
 pended, while the sensorial powers are generally in- 
 
110 PKtNCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 creased, irequentlj to the production of pain. Kone 
 will dispute this, and most will be ready to admit the 
 truth of the following proposition, to wit, that if the 
 proper relations hetween these two sets of powers he ha- 
 hitually disregarded^ disease in some form must he the 
 inevitahle consequence. An appeal to common obser- 
 vation would abundantly confirm these statements. 
 
 Every one knows how the chronic invalid is tor- 
 mented with sensations, and often with such as seem 
 to bear but very slight relation to his apparent disease. 
 The imagination in these cases is stimulated to ex- 
 cess ; the consciousness is subjugated, and the strong- 
 est volition of such an invalid is incapable of resisting 
 the power of feelings and fancies that accumulate with 
 the advancement of the malady and threaten at times 
 utterly to overwhelm their victim. 
 
 It is an indisputable fact that much of the disease of 
 our modern civilization has its origin in this partial 
 functional action, which in turn produces partial de- 
 velopment, and which is another name for deformity. 
 The nervous system is, in multitudes of cases in civil- 
 ized life, compelled to act constantly with a force 
 greatly disproportioned to the muscular — and to a de- 
 gree frequently that renders the healthful nutrition of 
 their organs an utter imj)ossibility. Every physician's 
 practice affords him numerous and lamentable illus- 
 trations of this sad truth. 
 
 If the constitution is defective from hereditary 
 causes, the proclivity to disease of this kind is propor- 
 tionally stronger, and the necessity for intelligent train- 
 ing of the system to a condition above the liability to 
 this subjugation to the nerve-power becomes all the 
 more imperative. For if this nervous habit be pro- 
 longed, and the muscles continue for any length of 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. Ill 
 
 time to be deprived of their nutrition, the general nu- 
 trient actions throughout the body are enfeebled, and 
 general impairment of the strength results. 
 
 Abuse of the nervous system usually operates, as we 
 have hinted, through two channels, the mental and the 
 sensorial. Examj^les of the latter class are much more 
 numerous than those of the former ; indeed, it may be 
 doubted if those of the first often occur uncomplicated 
 with the second. The sensorial faculties, besides being 
 purveyors to the mind, are appointed also to minister 
 to the material welfare and gratification of the body. 
 But whenever the nerves belono^ino; to this class are in- 
 ordinately stimulated — that is, when stimulated with- 
 out reference to nutritive ends — they become over- 
 strained, the nutrition of the parts is perverted, their 
 powers debilitated, and their action becomes uncon- 
 trollable. 
 
 Civilized life furnishes abundant and ingenious de- 
 vices in the habits of eating, of drinking, and of living 
 generally, eminently calculated to contribute to this 
 end. For this are used spirits, tobacco, condiments, 
 and confections, and the domestic beverages which are 
 said to cheer but not inebriate ; and the arts of cook- 
 ery furnish too often the means of corrupting the taste, 
 while they poison the food. 
 
 The habit, so rife with us, of permitting the emo- 
 tional nature to bear undue sway, operates in a similar 
 and hardly less injurious way, and is therefore equally 
 reprehensible. The excitements of extensive or preca- 
 rious business or of domestic infelicities are well known 
 to produce tlie efi'ects here pointed out ; and not unfre- 
 quently tlie disproportionate degree with which the 
 feelings become' engaged in questions of politics and 
 of religion bring the same unhappy results to the 
 
112 PRINCIPLES COXSIDEEED. 
 
 health. In these cases, bad, hygiene and habits sow 
 broadcast the seeds which other influences and circnm- 
 stances afterward arouse into disastrous and fatal ac- 
 tivity. 
 
 In all cases of this kind, arising from whatever cause, 
 the use of movements furnishes a directs safe^ powerful^ 
 ViTidi philosophical means of restoring these interrupted 
 harmonies, and of correcting the ill health that is 
 dependent thereon ; provided, of course, that the influ- 
 ence of the causes leading to stich results, and which 
 have been here pointed out, are withdrawn. 
 
 Relations of the Action of the Will and of the 
 Muscles in Moveivients. — Much error prevails on this 
 subject. Most persons seem to think that the degree 
 of fatigue one experiences indicates the amount of exer- 
 cise taken, but it really only shows the amount of exer- 
 tion put forth, and which depends on the will. The 
 degree of fatigue and the amount of exercise do not 
 necessarily bear a direct relation to each other ; but 
 the degree of fatigue indicates the greater or less ti7ne 
 in which a movement was being performed. As evi- 
 dence that fatigue is inseparably connected with the 
 exercise of the will, it is only necessary to refer to 
 numerous physiological operations that proceed without 
 our attention and without fatigue, some of which, in- 
 deed, are capable of being brought by an eflort into 
 relation to the will, and thereby immediately become 
 fatiguing. The heart's action, though powerful and in- 
 cessant, is unaccompanied by any sense of fatigue. The 
 internal organs generally, as the stomach and intestinal 
 canal, are in constant motion, but never grow weary. 
 In itself, the motion of riding by rail-cars or carriages 
 is not fatiguing. Many of the ordinary avocations of 
 
PKINCIPLKS CONSIDEKKI). 1\6 
 
 life are habitual, and are performed autoiiiatically, and 
 Avithout fatigue. In all these niovenients the volitions 
 are in abeyance, and the actions ai-e carried forward 
 under the control of the involuntary or cerehro-spinal 
 system of nerves. 
 
 The function of resjpiration affords an excellent illus- 
 tration of the relations of the will and the involuntary 
 nerves in movements. In ordinary respiration there is 
 no fatigue, because it proceeds without consciousness, 
 that is, it' is involuntary. But we may control this 
 function by the will, and its performance is imme- 
 diately followed by exhaustion. The reader w^ill infer 
 from this the impropriety, and in some cases the nn- 
 qualilied harmfulness, of employing instruments de- 
 vised to modify respiration. These contrivances direct 
 the attention to the respiratory act, and thereby em- 
 barrass its performance, rendering it no longer invol- 
 untary. 
 
 A careful analysis of these facts leads us readily to 
 the principle, that fatigue is in proportion to the 
 amount of mental and nervous, rather than to the 
 amount of muscular action employed. 
 
 Into active movements, the two kinds of action, mus- 
 cular and nervous, enter in diiferent proportions. And 
 this proportion seems to be determined chiefly by the 
 time occupied in executing the movement, the quich 
 movement requiring within a given period the greatest 
 expenditure of nervous power. The principle here is 
 analogous to that in mechanics, wnth which cA^ery 
 school-boy is acquainted, viz., that velocity is obtained 
 at the expense of power. 
 
 But if a movement be prolonged, the amount of mus- 
 cular exercise is greater in proportion to the time occu- 
 pied. This principle is made evident by the physiology 
 
114 PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 of muscular contraction, explained in the second chap- 
 ter, where it is shown that the longer the action of the 
 muscle is continued, the greater the number of its ulti- 
 mate elements that participate in the action. 
 
 The principle in movements relative to time may be 
 stated thus : 
 
 Rapid movements necessitate most iiervous action ; 
 slow and sustained movements, the most muscular 
 action. If the principle be stated with reference to the 
 limit of the capabilities of these powers, it might be said 
 that the one exhausts the most nervous, and the other 
 the most muscular power. If with reference to the 
 eflects on nutrition, the statement would be, the one 
 stimulates to the most nervous, and the other to the 
 most muscular action and development. These state- 
 ments will, of course, apply only within certain limits 
 in the healthy state, but which in daily life are being 
 constantly exceeded in respect to the nervous func- 
 tion particularly ; so that the proper relation of these 
 two powers is destroyed, and the whole system becomes 
 disordered. 
 
 This principle is well illustrated in common experi- 
 ence. If a person runs a few rods briskly, he will pant 
 with fatigue ; while if he loalh the same distance, he is 
 refreshed and invigorated, although it is a demon- 
 strated fact that the aggregate amount of mechanical 
 resistance that he has overcome is greater in the latter 
 case than in the former. In the first instance the object 
 was accomplished by means of a greater eifort than in 
 the second ; but in the second, a larger number of 
 muscle-cells had taken part in the contraction than in 
 the first. In the one case, also, a larger amount of 
 blood was conveyed to the nerve-centers to sustain the 
 action ; while in the other case, the muscles have re- 
 
PRINCIPLES COXSIDEKED. 115 
 
 ceived the larger quantity to replenish the waste occa- 
 sioned by their action. 
 
 This principle meets also Avitli abundant confirma- 
 tion in all departments oi pathologij. The paralytic 
 walks with great difficulty, because though the mus- 
 cles are really uuafl:ected, the loill is transmitted to them 
 imperfectly and only by great effort on account of the 
 vitiated state of the nerve-conductors. 
 
 The eti:ect of poisons wdiose influence is exerted upon 
 the nerves, presents a pathological state corroborative 
 of this principle. Strychnine produces violent muscu- 
 lar contortion, exhibiting evidence of the excited and 
 rapid action and finally the exhaustion of the nerve- 
 centers ; while spirits and most other stimulants pro- 
 duce their deceptive effect by evolving rapidly at first 
 the nerve-power by exciting in the nerve-centers an 
 action which the deluded victim attempts to maintain 
 by repeating tlie doses. ]^o lasting power is really 
 gained in any of these ways, because the action is 
 essentially of the destructive^ and not of the construc- 
 tive kind. 
 
 The Movement-Cure makes direct a])plication of the 
 general principles here set forth ; hence its value as a 
 therapeutic means. It employs slow movements in 
 preference to the more rapid, because chronic invalids 
 need to have their nervous powers husbanded, and 
 their general muscular and nutritive powers increased. 
 Such invalids have suftered enougli already from un- 
 natural and irregular nervous activity. The muscles 
 of such patients not only fail to execute the promi)iings 
 of the will, but also to control in a proper manner those 
 vegetative actions of the system that so directly depend 
 upon a full supply of nervous energy in the muscular 
 system. 
 
116 PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 The true principles concerned in the therapeutic ap- 
 plication of movements being plain, we only need to 
 be carefnl that onr practice in making remedial appli- 
 cation of these principles be made thoronghly to corre- 
 spond with them. E'ot only the application of the move- 
 ments, bnt the general habits of the body (which, too, 
 are of the nature of movements), must be made to ac- 
 cord with the same principles. The tendency to spas- 
 modic haste, especially, that characterizes the invalid, 
 must be broken up ; otherwise this of itself will be 
 likely to perpetuate the troubles under which he labors, 
 in spite of any remedial means he may have been led 
 to institute. 
 
 Movements as a Specific Medical Agency. — The 
 single movements only apjDroximate the duplicated 
 movements in importance as a therapeutic means. 
 These latter answer all the distinct purposes indicated 
 in chronic disease. Their effects may be local as well 
 as general, and in this respect they quite equal those 
 of drugs, difficult as some may find it to believe this. 
 The primary impression made by a drug is essentially 
 pathological ; while that of a movement is in the direc- 
 tion of the desired physiological action, and conse- 
 quently and surely toward health. Movements are also 
 superior to drugs in the extent to which tlie physiolog- 
 ical actions may be influenced by them, especially in the 
 control obtained by their application over the circula- 
 tion of the blood, and the directness with which respira- 
 tion and nutrition are influenced ; which last results are 
 scarcely exjDected even as the indirect efi'ect of drugs. 
 
 The grand difference between movements and drugs 
 exists in all their relations to the system. The one 
 changes physiological action to pathological, the other 
 
PRIXCIPLES COXSIDERED. 117 
 
 carries j^atliological action toward physiological. The 
 drug accomplishes specific objects by pervading the 
 whole organism, including every structure within it, 
 and leaving thereon its morbid impression. It has no 
 power to encourage or stlrmiliite, primarily/, the great 
 life-forces of the system. 
 
 Movements, on the contrary, secure or restore unity 
 and a just balance to the various functions, and from 
 disorder and discord tend to bring out that blissful 
 order and harmony -svhich it was doubtless the inten- 
 tion of the all-wise and good Creator should character- 
 ize the physical nature of his favored children. 
 
 Movements as Reliable Means of Securing the 
 Object of Nutritive Medication. — Much is said at the 
 present day in regard to supplying, directly to the 
 blood, its deficient saline ingredients. Certain forms 
 of disease are assumed certainly to indicate this want in 
 the blood, and these diseases are supposed to be cured 
 by treatment of this sort. Of the faulty quality of the 
 blood in cases of defective nutrition there can be no 
 doubt ; but it is far from being a settled point that its 
 normal quality can be restored to it in this way. It so 
 liappens that our ordinary food furnishes an abundance 
 of organizable nutritive matters. The trouble is not in 
 the lack of the material. The power to make use of it 
 is what is w^anted chiefly ; and this can never be im- 
 parted by ever so free an administration of saline, 
 earthy, or ferruginous preparations. It is insisted that 
 the structures require these materials; but the first 
 question to be settled is : Are these stmctures in a state 
 of preparation and fitness to receive and appropriate 
 such supplies f It is contrary to all we know of physi- 
 ological law to conclude that nutritive actions, or in- 
 
118 PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 deed any action, should proceed in the absence of the 
 conditions necessary for the supply of oxygen. 
 
 The truth is tliat the supply of the materials above 
 mentioned is supererogatory. If we examine by chem- 
 ical tests any proper and wholesome foods, we shall lind 
 the saline and earthy matters needed in the system to 
 be present in quantities positively above the demands 
 of the system. These matters are constituents of all 
 common food, and whether they become appropriated 
 or are cast off depends entirely upon the needs of the 
 organism and its appropriating ability. This need ex- 
 ists in direct and uniform ratio to the waste ; and 
 though the blood and tissues be ever so deficient in re- 
 gard to the substances in question, they can never be- 
 come richer in them in the absence of the imperative 
 and effectual demand created by action. Movem-ents^ 
 it has been found, are the true and reliable means for 
 bringing nutritive materials in general, and the saline 
 elements of the blood in particular, from the cavity of 
 the stomach into the inner chambers of the system, 
 where they are wanted. 
 
 But the mode of administering these materials in 
 vogue with our medical friends of the present day is 
 much less satisfactory than the more ancient and natu- 
 ral method. The saline elements of food are in the 
 state of preparation effected by the organs of the plant 
 expressly for nutritive purposes. As here found, they 
 bear an analogy to organic materials, if, indeed, they 
 are not essentially such. The iron, lime, phosphorous, 
 etc., are not in the food as crude substances, but are 
 incorporated with other elements or matters in oi-ganic 
 combination, and are thus fitted to accompauy them in 
 their errand and mission of good to every needy tissue 
 of the frame. 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 119 
 
 Movements as Related to ^N^erve Stimulants. — But 
 few j)ersons fully understand the impropriety, in a phy- 
 siological point of view, of subjecting their nerves to 
 the habitual influence of sedatives and stimulants for 
 the purpose of quieting troublesome sensations, or of 
 allaying unpleasant brain-action. The principles and 
 facts above stated must demonstrate the inutility, to 
 say the least, of such habits. These agents conduce to 
 the act of what is technically termed retrograde raeta- 
 morphosis in the body, in an improper manner. They 
 debase the system, and render its actions habitually 
 vicious, and ultimately overthrow the mental powers. 
 They interfere with the method nature has appointed 
 for the due production of morphological changes in the 
 system. 
 
 There is no doubt of the existence of a real need, 
 though artiiicially induced, the consciousness of which 
 impels its subject to resort to these injurious methods of 
 relief. But they do this in ignorance of a simpler and 
 far more trustworthy recourse. A careful study of the 
 principles involved in the Movement-Cure suggests 
 a ready way of securing quietude to the nerves by the 
 simplest of means; for experience has taught us that 
 when irritability or pain exists, the nerves are only de- 
 manding to be rescued from the eflPects of a bad circu- 
 lation and an irregular distribution of nervous power. 
 It has already been shown that the movements fnrnish 
 a far more reliable means for attaining these ends than 
 can be mustered in all the drug shops or chemical 
 laboratories on the planet. We believe — and every day 
 see what we believe — that the vexed brain may be re- 
 lieved by drawing off its surcharged vessels ; that the 
 stomach and blood need not be fired by a stimulant in 
 order to warm the skin and excite action in the extrem- 
 
120 PRINCIPLES CONSIDEEED. 
 
 ities. We have learned that distressful sensations gen- 
 erally only indicate that dead matter needs to be ejected 
 from the system ; that pain, even severe pain, is quieted 
 by employing, in contiguous and even in remote por- 
 tions of the body, the actions that supply the perverted 
 nerve-power. Destroy thus, by the continuous and 
 thorough use of suitable movements, the hankering 
 (which is seated in the irritable nerve-fiber) for innutri- 
 tions and inflaming stimulants, and soon the destructive 
 habit will die out, and the sufferer be relieved from a 
 despotism w^orse than that which merely puts chains 
 upon the body, and has no more that it can do. 
 
 Movements as Related to Pathology. — Pathology 
 wears a greatly changed aspect from the point of view 
 furnished by the Movement-Cure. Disease is no longer 
 hidden to us among inscrutable causes, nor its cure 
 among unintelligible operations or more mysterious 
 mixtures. Pain need now no longer be confounded 
 wdth disease, nor the cure deemed completed w^hen the 
 consciousness has become oblivious to suffering. 
 
 On the contrary, disease is proved, beyond dispute, 
 to depend on disturbed physiological action, and it only 
 waits for correct and equable physiological action to be 
 restored, in order that disease shall disappear. The 
 special conditions upon which the symptoms of disease 
 are based are easily and speedily removable wdien they 
 exist in moderate degree, and often when they exist to 
 a degree quite beyond the reach of ordinary medical 
 art, providing, only, that we are master of the instru- 
 mentalities within our reach. 
 
 Several of these removable causes or conditions usu- 
 ally co-exist in the same case, but with different de- 
 grees of intensity or development. In every effort to 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 121 
 
 remove tlieni, the Movemeut-Cure seeks to recover the 
 impaired liarmony of the system ; never, like drugs, 
 develo[)s symptoms of its own worse than the disease ; 
 but, by bringing all the forces of the organism into due 
 co-relation, assists the system- to glide, naturally, into 
 a state of health, with all its available forces unim- 
 paired, and ready to fulfill the behests of the will. 
 
 Those invisible, vito-chemical actions are capable, 
 we see, of producing results that may agree or not with 
 the standard of health. The nature of the product is 
 of but little consequence compared with the productive 
 causes. Morbid materials can never exist without mis- 
 chievous antecedents. We are not accomplishing much 
 when we apply antidotes to effects, while the causes are 
 busily at work out of sight and out of reach. 
 
 The inter-relations of physiological and pathological 
 agencies are so involved, that to look for the first of 
 morbid causes is like seeking the end of a circle, or a 
 needle in a hay-stack. But to the practical inquirer 
 the few essential phenomena that most demand his at- 
 tention are readily recognized ; such as defective res- 
 jpiration^ congestion or nial-cir dilation , imperfect nu- 
 tritio)!^ morMd innervation. These are the conditions 
 that chiefly interest us, and to obtain the control over 
 which it is the aim of all our practice and endeavor. 
 
 Province of Movements. — Whether movements are 
 hygienic or remedial in their effects, depends on the 
 character of the case for which they are used. They 
 are hvo;ienic when their influences are such as to main- 
 tain the already existing healthy relations of the pbysi- 
 ological man — when they give healthy scope to all 
 vital powers in spite of the deteriorating tendencies of 
 sedentary or intellectual occupations ; or of such habits 
 
 6 
 
122 PEINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 
 
 of labor as employ some portions of the body too much 
 and other portions too little. Movements thus applied 
 may be called the natural means of counteracting the 
 evil tendencies of an artificial mode of life, whose name 
 is legion. 
 
 Movements become medical when their effects are 
 to improve imperfect physiological relations, or break 
 up pathological states habitually existing ; as, for in- 
 stance, when they permanently increase the circulation 
 and nutrition of a part previously defective, increase 
 the respiration, diminish morbid innervation, restrain 
 morbid discharges, or incite any defective function to a 
 healthful and satisfactory play. 
 
 Morale of Move:ments. — Invalids are gaining in- 
 struction all the time through their experience in the 
 daily use of movements in regard to the causes of their 
 troubles, and thus are often enabled to rise superior to 
 the depressing influences of the disease. As a thorough 
 system of movements involves a general hygienic treat- 
 ment, the invalid no longer pursues the preposterous 
 plan of employing a remedy for difiiculties that he is 
 continually reproducing in himself. Yicious practices 
 cease to be seductive when he is alive to their proba- 
 ble effects. His faith in the wonderful and reputed 
 powers of medicine, which forever offers its premium 
 to vice and folly, collapses, and he, by so doing, re- 
 solves to try, at least, to do right. 
 
 But the influence of this sentiment does not stop 
 here. The physiological and the spiritual are co-ordi- 
 nate departments of our being, sustain relations of 
 mutual ministry, and conspire to mutual elevation of 
 function. But the physiological system is anterior in 
 development, though temporary in function ; and its 
 
PRINCIPLES CONSIDERED. 123 
 
 obvious office and essential purpose is that of instructor 
 of the spiritual nature in fundamental truths. 
 
 The same law of development resulting from the ex- 
 perience of good and evil, pleasure and pain, disobedi- 
 ence and penalty, is common to both departments, but 
 being first apprehended on the physiological plane, 
 meets with a ready transfer to the spiritual. In the 
 body these laws are of tempo]*ary application, but ap- 
 plied to the higher life, become fundamental and per- 
 manent. Generations of men cast away the weary 
 experiences of life as of no profit, because it has not 
 yet taught their meaning; — even in a physiological 
 sense it has not been comprehended. 
 
124 MOVE^EENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 
 
 MOVEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 
 
 One evil has grown out of the recent interest that 
 the Movement-Cure has awakened, and this is the 
 adoption bj invalids of those ill-considered and hetero- 
 geneous exercises embraced under the general name of 
 Gymnastics. The very great danger to the weakly 
 and the invalid from the mistake of confounding the 
 two things, renders it a duty to explain the difference 
 in their effects. 
 
 The man who, feeling himself sick, should rush into 
 the first drug-shop in his way and there seize and swal- 
 low whatever he might lay hands on, would be con- 
 sidered a madman, whose life would most likely pay 
 the forfeit of his want of consideration. If a physi- 
 cian, who ought to know that drugs are potent sub- 
 stances, should recommend this procedure to his patient, 
 he would be designated by some not very mild term. 
 And yet essentially the same thing is practiced with 
 reference to exercises. Like dosing, exercising, it is 
 assumed, is useful for the sick in a general way, and so 
 the sick are advised to " take exercise," without desig- 
 nating what when., where, or how. Upon this loose prin- 
 ciple ten thousand doctors are daily prescribing and 
 many more invalids practicing, until aggravating their 
 old complaints, or contracting new, the latter become 
 disgusted with both advice and adviser, and, fancying 
 
MOVEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 125 
 
 there can be no lielp for them, give np to hypochon- 
 dria, with all its woes. All this comes from not con- 
 sidering that exercise is a most potent means of affect- 
 ing the hody^ whether for good or for ill, and that it 
 necessarily has laws^ and must be practiced in obe- 
 dience thereto, or it will be quite as likely to do harm 
 as good. 
 
 The very fact that a person needs exercise distinct 
 from his usual avocations, whatever these may be, im- 
 plies — as one will see if a moment's thought be given 
 the subject — that he needs it of a particular kind or 
 quality, in particular amount, or aftecting particular 
 portions of the body. If one receives it in such parts 
 and of such form as will serve to dissipate the con- 
 gestion of over-worked or diseased organs, and vivify 
 and set in normal action the parts that are suft'ering 
 from inaction, he is refreshed, strengthened, and rein- 
 stated in health and power. Otherwise, or if the exer- 
 cise be indiscriminately employed, he has no ground 
 for assurance that undesirable effects will not be pro- 
 duced, that the congestion, the anemia, the want of 
 power, or whatever the trouble may be, may not be 
 aggravated by the same agency that, scientifically em- 
 ployed, would have produced the happiest results. 
 Such a person, indeed, has reason to become discour- 
 aged, and can hardly be blamed for arriving at the 
 conclusion, after such an experience, that exercise is not 
 the thing he requires. 
 
 The distinction between Gymnastics and Movements 
 is so plain that it must be readily appreciated if a little 
 consideration be bestowed upon the subject. While 
 the one results mainly in the expenditure of power, 
 both nervous and muscular, indiscriminately, without 
 reference to the particular conditions of the system, 
 
126 MOVEMENTS COMPARED WITH GTISLNASTICS. 
 
 either in its original conformation, its idiosyncrasies, 
 its diseases, or its temporary states, the other not only 
 takes all these into full consideration, but also by the 
 aid of a severe, thorough, and systematic analysis of 
 all the modifications of motion applied to the body or 
 produced by it in all its varied conditions, is able to 
 adapt itself nicely to the needs of the individual case. 
 While Gymnastics may be practiced by any one who 
 is accomplished enough to turn a somerset, Movements 
 require the discipline furnished by the schools, by 
 which only can be acquired that knowledge of the na- 
 ture of diseases, the nicety of tact and quickness of 
 perception which are essential to insure a nice adapta- 
 tion of the means to the ends contemplated. Move- 
 ments further require for their greatest success certain 
 mental and moral qualities in the practitioner calcu- 
 lated to gain and keep the confidence of the patient. 
 This is a great point, as might be supposed, a priori. 
 
 In comparing the efifects of Gymnastics w^ith the 
 Movements^ a German writer makes the following sen- 
 sible remarks : 
 
 " It is not denied that gymnastics may serve to de- 
 velop the parts that execute the movements — muscle, 
 tendon, ligament, and bone ; but in doing this they 
 will give a heavy and too concentrated a form, espe- 
 cially to the superior portions of the body. If we ex- 
 amine a gymnast, we find the upper portion of the 
 body much more largely developed than the lower, 
 because it is the general fault of gymnastics that the 
 great proportion of the exercise consists in overcoming 
 either the weight of the body or that of some other 
 object by the arms^ while the legs only sustain the 
 weight of the trunk, as on ordinary occasions. This 
 effect, of course, is detrimental to the system as a 
 
MOVE^fENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 127 
 
 whole. The subject of any special excessive develop- 
 ment, instead of being benefited thereby, is absolutely 
 incapacitated by it for the performance of life's ordi- 
 nary duties to some extent. 
 
 Gymnastics, also, in case of the existence of a pre- 
 disposition to it, are liable to fasten upon themselves a 
 dangerous disease. It is well known that by these 
 violent exercises the veins are rendered full and turgid. 
 This condition is always followed by a general relaxa- 
 tion of the body and mind, a disposition to somno- 
 lence, and one can conceive that if this state is fre- 
 quently reproduced, very injurious physical and moral 
 effects will ensue. If it can be demonstrated that 
 gymnastic exercises produce a predominance of venous 
 blood in the body, it follows, of course, that it is by 
 this means seriously vitiated in all its parts, and we 
 have no need of other facts to assure us that the veins, 
 of which the walls are naturally soft and easily dis- 
 tended, may be readily broken down under the press- 
 ure of the accelerated blood, and that there will be a 
 resultant tendency to hemorrhage. 
 
 The circidatory system is necessarily oftentimes 
 much disordered by gymnastic exercises performed 
 without rule or measure. Gymnastics, we know, can 
 only excite the functions through the medium of the 
 circulation. The irregular flow thus induced is not 
 advantageous, but quite the contrary, to the diseased 
 or enfeebled parts. The common gymnast labors in 
 vain to relieve tendencies to pulmonary disease. For 
 this class of cases all violent exercises are injurious, 
 and for an obvious reason ; the passage of blood as 
 well as air is impeded in the lungs ; the exercises of 
 tlie rack and bars force the blood violently into these 
 delicate or diseased structures, causing sometimes a 
 
128 MOVEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMXASTICS. 
 
 rupture, and frequently congestion therein. And 
 where disease already exists, an aggravation of it must 
 ensue, and the poor invalid, by his rashness, is sud- 
 denly put beyond a chance of cure. 
 
 It will also be noticed that every violent effort at 
 inspiration not only calls air into the lungs, but exer- 
 cises an equal power over the return flow of venous 
 blood. The effect, then, of these repeated violent move- 
 ments of the walls of the chest produced by gymnastic 
 feats, is accumulation of the blood, or congestion, in one 
 of the most delicate and fragile portions of the organ- 
 ism, from which not seldom the most serious results 
 have been known to follow. 
 
 Whatever of profit may be gotten from these exer- 
 cises, it is to be feared, is more than balanced by the 
 loss of nervous energy experienced. The invalid feels 
 this, and is soon inclined to desist. Those compara- 
 tively well, however, are not apt to notice this declen- 
 sion of nervous force till a serious inroad has been made 
 upon their constitution. 
 
 In striking contrast to this are the effects of wisely 
 conducted movements. By these exercises, the nervous 
 power is conserved to the greatest possible degree com- 
 patible with its continuous development. The willing 
 power is husbanded and re-enforced, the superior force 
 of the operator energizing the relaxed system of the 
 patient. 
 
 These serious objections that we have raised against 
 gymnastics equally apply to calisthenics. This kind 
 of exercise chiefly tasks the nerves, especially the cere- 
 bro-spinal axis, upon which all motive power depends. 
 In the practice of this class of exercises, not even the 
 whole weight of the members is to be overcome ; but 
 all available power is expended in the production of 
 
MOVEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 129 
 
 celerity in the motions, an efiort tliat greatly draws 
 upon the nerves. Ko wonder that feeble ladies, who 
 are directed to use this kind of exercises (for the gym- 
 nasium is virtually closed to ladies), experiment with re- 
 luctance, and soon give over, conscious of their injurious 
 eflect on their already morbidly active nervous systems. 
 It must be manifest, by this time, to the reader, we 
 think, that there exists an important difference between 
 well-ordered and directed exercise, pursued in accord- 
 ance with true physiological principles, and that sort 
 which practically ignores all these principles. 
 
 The Muscles a Medium of Language, and of the 
 Manifestation of Charactee. — The muscles have other 
 functions besides officiating as agents of the will in the 
 manifestation of mechanical power. They also give ex- 
 pression to the thoughts and emotions of the soul ; na- 
 ture employs them in conducting intercourse between 
 man and man as their visible sign, "Without this means 
 we can hardly conceive it possible that society could 
 exist, except in the most rudimental and savage way. 
 It is through this agency that not only our transient 
 moods, but our very characters, are represented to 
 others. Not only by the changes that are being inces- 
 santly wrought in the lineaments of the face, but in the 
 constantly shifting attitudes of the person involuntarily 
 assumed, are we forever publishing to the world our 
 ever-changing mental and emotional states. 
 
 These statements are amply supported by the expe- 
 rience of every living being. We all do involuntarily 
 form judgments as to the characters of the persons we 
 meet, without receiving any other knowledge in regard 
 to them than that derived from this source, and these 
 judgments are proverbially more correct than those 
 
 6* 
 
130 MOVEMENTS COMPAKED WITH GYMNASTICS. 
 
 which we subsequently acquire as the result of an anal- 
 ysis of their words and deeds. Deeds often lie, we 
 know ; and language is as often used, perhaps, to con- 
 ceal as to express thought. We are often as much con- 
 vinced or moved by the glance of the eye, or gesture, 
 or general bearing of a public speaker, as by anything 
 he says, as may be proved by allowing another per- 
 son to speak or read the discourse that charmed us on 
 its first delivery. "We all well enough understand the 
 power of what is sometimes termed silent eloquence in 
 that expression of emotion of fear, ibr example, or an- 
 ger, revenge, jealousy, confidence, which is efifected in 
 utter silence, and chiefly by muscular play of feature. 
 Indeed, the strongest emotions, we well know, are much 
 more powerfully rendered by facial expressions than by 
 the employment of the most vehement phraseology. 
 Who can not call up in imagination or from memory 
 these representations of fear, disgust, grief, joy, etc? 
 
 The accomplished actor, by combinations of attitudes, 
 look, and gesture, is enabled to enhance a thousand-fold 
 the efi'ect of the dramatist's effusions ; for by his artistic 
 disj^lays lie reaches the mind and heart through ave- 
 nues that tongue or pen can never travel. One is often 
 more strongly impressed by what he knows to be fic- 
 tion, when it is empowered in this way, than by abso- 
 lute truth conveyed by pen or tongue alone. But the 
 feeling conveyed must really exists if it only he for the 
 time^ else it can not find expression in the natural lan- 
 guage which it is the oflSce of the muscles to furnish. 
 The feeling thus expressed can not be simulated ; it 
 must proceed from interior sources. The merit of a 
 public speaker consists mostly in his power to experi- 
 ence, for the occasion, the amount of intensity of 
 thought and feeling requisite for the production of the 
 
MOVEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 131 
 
 efiects lie desires. The demagogue, the patriot, and 
 the preacher alike wield these powerful instruments. 
 A gesture, a turn of the head, a lifting of the finger, a 
 grand wave of the arm, has doubtless many a time 
 given that power to a sentence or a sentiment that has 
 decided some great question, perhaps determined the 
 fate of a nation or a soul. 
 
 It is because of this universal reco2:nition of a Ian- 
 guage in the muscular motions and positions of the hu- 
 man figure, that the power exists of giving permanency 
 to these expressions of ideas in marble and on canvas, 
 for the arts of sciilpture and painting are nothing more 
 than the art of representing by perspective, color, and 
 form these natural signs, so that the idea, emotion, or 
 event which forms the subject of the work is instantly 
 and forcibly impressed upon the beholder's mind. All 
 muscular action is dependent on the stimulus of the 
 nerves. Destroy the nerves, and muscular power per- 
 ishes immediately. This stimulus is received directly 
 or indirectly from the will^ and by will we simply mean 
 mental action. 
 
 These eifects are similar to those we witness in the 
 cerebro-spinal system. Here, every sensation, though 
 not manifested in the consciousness, is represented by 
 the action of that portion of the muscular system that 
 is associated with the sensitive nerve. So also any emo- 
 tion pervading the mind is a source of a distinct ner- 
 vous perception that is immediately reflected upon ap- 
 propriate muscles. Certain mental states uniformly ex- 
 press themselves through certain nerves, and these, in 
 their turn, being connected with appropriate muscles, 
 a corresponding outward expression is effected. The 
 manner and degree of contraction are the measure of 
 the thought or emotion which is represented by it. 
 
132 MOVEMENTS COMPAEED WITH GYMNASTICS. 
 
 These principles will be admitted as eminently true, 
 so far as regards the muscular apparatus connected 
 with the face. The face, indeed, has several muscles 
 for which there is no other known use but that of giv- 
 ing visible expression to thought. 
 
 These muscles form — to borrow a phrase from poetry 
 — the dial-plate of the soul, on which all may read its 
 lessons as in a glass. There are faces, to be sure, that 
 are only masks^ but these are the exceptions. 
 
 But muscular expression is by no means confined to 
 the countenance. All the muscles of the body are 
 subservient in various degrees to the same purpose, 
 and the variety of their play gives significance to the 
 attitudes and gestures, countless and ever changing, 
 that contribute so much to the eflfect of conversation, 
 public speaking, and to the charm of the stage. 
 
 Thus far the principles I have advanced are those 
 commonly understood and accepted. But it must be 
 borne in mind that the difierent parts and forces of the 
 body exert a reciprocal action and influence upon each 
 other. JSTow we say, if mode of mind give character 
 to muscular expression, what, arguing from analogy, 
 so likely as that a careful attention to the healthful 
 and symmetrical development of this wonderful and 
 delicate system of muscles, so intimately associated 
 with the mind, should confer a reflex advantage upon 
 the mind itself, especially when we consider that the 
 body, with all its amazing appliances, was made to 
 answer the ends and contribute to the comfort and 
 welfare of the spiritual resident. The dependence of 
 the mind upon the body it is not necessary that we 
 should prove as a general proposition. All must con- 
 cede that. Mens sana in corpore sano^ is the law. A 
 vigorous manhood can not be reached save by a prac- 
 
MOYEMENTS COMPARED WITH GYMNASTICS. 133 
 
 tical obedience to the law that recognizes this mutual 
 dependence of the material and the immaterial ele- 
 ments of our natnre. It is said that a person can not 
 assume for an instant the exterior look and action of 
 one in fear without experiencing the emotion. This is 
 but one fact of a thousand pointing to the same princi- 
 ple. One perfectly acquainted with the physiology 
 of the frame and its relations to the soul might, we 
 think, almost be able to infer the character of a man's 
 politics, morality, or religion from his physical habits 
 and manifestations. 
 
 If this be so, may it not behoove us to look a little 
 more closely than we are apt to do to the physical 
 condition and habits of those who assume to be our 
 spiritual guides ? May we not reasonably inquire 
 whether this dogma, that creed, or the other platform 
 may not possibly result from defective reasoning, itself 
 the result of vicious digestion or a languid circulation 
 — whether the surj^rising conversion of men to particu- 
 lar forms of faith may not have something directly or 
 indirectly to do with the quality of their nerve-power, 
 or the condition of their livers or mucous membranes ? 
 
134 DIKECTIONS FOK PKESCEIBING 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR PRESCRIBING AND APPLYING 
 MOVEMENTS. 
 
 Movements, whether single or duplicated, become 
 remedially valuable only when prescribed with due 
 reference to the condition of the system. The pre- 
 scription must be based on several principles of physi- 
 ology, absolute in their nature and direct in their 
 application. If these are not strictly regarded, a given 
 movement becomes of no account, but descends to the 
 level of the ordinary purposeless actions of the body, 
 perhaps harmful ; or at best, contributing in but a 
 general and ud satisfactory way to the well-being of 
 the system. 
 
 It should be further stated, that the efficiency of 
 movements, when well prescribed^ depends measurably 
 upon the tact and energy of the operator if they be of 
 the duplicated kind ; and upon the intelligence^ pa- 
 tience^ and strength of the patient, if single. 
 
 This treatment regards the system as subject to a 
 continual though invisible growth, and to further and 
 perfect this process is its especial aim and business. 
 And as the pulling-down and repairing operations of 
 tlie system in health are gradually and unconsciously 
 conducted, so the effects of judicious treatment are 
 gradually and imperceptibly produced. The patient, 
 indeed, ought to arrive at a knowledge of the effects 
 of treatment only by experiencing an abatement of his 
 
AND APPLYING MOVEMENTS. 135 
 
 pains and a restoration of strength and vivacity. Those 
 who expect effects such as follow from the administra- 
 tion of drngs, will be disappointed, although it may he 
 stated that many of these effects may be produced in- 
 directly through the agency of movements, but they 
 are not regarded' as legitimate or desirable. 
 
 Time Coxsideeed. — If for hygienic purposes, to coun- 
 teract the effects of sedentary habits, of undue mental 
 application, or the practice of some kind of labor that 
 involves the use of a part of the body only, move- 
 ments may be taken at any time when this necessity is 
 felt. In cases of positive disease, it is considered de- 
 sirable that they be taken in the early part of the day, 
 when the system is more plastic, and when, owing to 
 the night's rest, there is most power in store within it: 
 hence, either before breakfast, or a short time after it, 
 the system at this time, owing to the repose of the 
 night, being in condition most favorable for the recep- 
 tion of curative impressions. 
 
 In general, a prescription of movements should be 
 practiced no more than once in the day ; and in dupli- 
 cated movements, however moderately used, we must 
 guard against the occurrence of crises^ headaches, 
 febrile symptoms, etc., which frequently occur after a 
 short term of treatment. Immediately on the occur- 
 rence of crises, we must change the prescription or 
 leave off treatment altogether, for the effects in such 
 cases are similar to those brought about by the abuse 
 of hydropathy or of drugs. 
 
 An auxiliary prescription may sometimes be made 
 for another time in the day, repeating perhaps some 
 portion of the primary one, but only under the di- 
 rection of a competent physician. 
 
136 DIRECTIONS FOR TRESCRIBING- 
 
 Manner. — Every movement lias two important ele- 
 ments, mschanical and a mental, or mental and moral, 
 neither of which may properly be neglected for the 
 other. The correct posture must first be taken, care- 
 fully adjusting every member. The part to be moved 
 should then be made to pass through the prescribed line 
 until it reaches the indicated limit, which is usually 
 the limit of the contractile capacity of the chief mus- 
 cles employed ; and this last position should then be 
 retained for a few moments, unless the nature of the 
 movement renders it impossible. Generally, the part is 
 returned to its first position with comparatively little 
 muscular efi'ort. 
 
 In the mean time, the mind or will is intent on the 
 mechanical execution of the movement, and the nerves, 
 its faithful servants, are busy conveying the needful 
 stimuli to the part, without which we are aware the 
 execution of the movement, if it be a voluntary one, is 
 impossible. The mind is thus engaged in sustaining 
 the vital operations of the moving part. Both the ex- 
 ternal display of mechanical force, and the internal 
 vito-chemical changes upon w^hich it depends, are the 
 results of mental action. If the movement be dupli- 
 cated, the mental force of the operator is exclusively 
 employed, while that of the patient is economized. If 
 the movement be inaccurate or faltering ; in other 
 words, if to a lack of precision in the prescription there 
 be added a want of intelligent determination and force 
 in the oj)erator, little, if anything, is eflected. 
 
 Rhythm. — ^This is a highly important element of our 
 system, and one that is far too generally overlooked. 
 For the general purposes contemplated by movements, 
 whether hygienic or curative, they should be performed 
 
AND APPLYING MOVEMENTS. 137 
 
 slowly, much more slowly than are the habitual mo- 
 tions of the body. Thus the acting part occupies the 
 attention for a considerable time, and the amount of 
 control gained over the changes of the part is conse- 
 quently and proportionably great, while the energy of 
 will and the expenditure of nerve-power that is re- 
 quired is small. The absolute time occupied in a 
 movement should vary with the size, and especially 
 with the length, of the acting muscle or muscles, 
 the short muscles doing their work in briefer time. 
 The part should retain its extreme position for a short 
 period. 
 
 Exertion. — In duplicated movements the assistant is 
 responsible for the amount of exertion employed by 
 the patient, for it is quite under his control. The effect 
 may be perfectly graduated to suit his judgment, as 
 notes of music respond to the touch of the master- 
 player ; indeed, a nicely executed movement has some- 
 thing of the swell and harmonious flow of a musical 
 strain. 
 
 The single movements, however, do not admit of this 
 precise control. The resistance is supplied by the 
 w^eight of the part which is varied as the positions 
 vary, but can be increased only to a limited extent. 
 Tlie amount of exertion possible in any position is de- 
 pendent upon the degree of mobility of the part con- 
 cerned. 
 
 [NrMBER. — Tlie number of movements to be taken at 
 once should be sufficient to engage all parts of the sys- 
 tem (there are some exceptions to this rule, as in cases 
 of paralysis and surgical diseases), but not enough to 
 occasion fatigue, or only such moderate fatigue as is 
 
138 DIRECTIONS FOR PKESCRrBING- 
 
 quickly recovered from. The number generally re- 
 quired in a prescription ranges from ten to twelve. 
 
 Oedek. — ^Tliis is a very important matter in dupli- 
 cated movements; so much so tliat by a re-arrange- 
 ment of tlie order quite new effects may often be pro- 
 duced on the invalid. The arrangement should be 
 such that the movements shall support each other, and 
 all work together to the production of the effect. By 
 a vicious arrangement they interfere with and neutral- 
 ize each other. A proper arrangement is also import- 
 ant in the single movements. Too many in succession 
 applied to the same organ, if enfeebled, would be likely 
 to produce congestion, the usual effect of excessive ex- 
 ercise ; if the part is diseased, it would be apt to in- 
 crease and extend the disease. All the requirements 
 of the system, in any given case, should be considered 
 in the prescription, and the order of their importance. 
 Professor Branting proposes that the following order be 
 generally observed, modifications, of course, being 
 made to meet the needs of particular cases. 
 
 1. A respiratory movement. 
 
 2. A movement of the lower extremities. 
 
 3. Of the upper extremities. 
 
 4. Of the abdomen. 
 
 5. Of the lower extremities — terminating with 
 
 6. A respiratory movement. 
 
 The formula, we repeat, is to be varied according to 
 the particular circumstances of each case, the part 
 affected, the temperament, etc. Whatever the order, 
 the movements should always harmonize with each 
 other ; for it is only from the harmonious union of their 
 separate actions that the best results can proceed. 
 
AND APPLYING MOVEMENTS. 139 
 
 Relation to Diseased Parts. — Every formula of 
 movements for persons that have local weakness or dis- 
 ease, will contain both general and, sjKcial elements — 
 the latter having particular reference to the disease. 
 But, in general, active movements must iiot he ajyplied 
 to organs affected with actual disease. The diseased 
 part must be approached gradually, beginning at some 
 remote part of the body, arousing it to vital activ- 
 ity, and augmenting its capacity to receive blood. In 
 this way the congestion accompanying the disease is 
 gradually removed, and the vital and nutrient power 
 of the system increased and established, until finally 
 the diseased part is so relieved that it becomes capable 
 of receiving advantageously the direct eifects of move- 
 ment. 
 
 The passive kind of duplicated movements are, how- 
 ever, an exception to the above rule. The direct 
 eftect of many of the passive movements, such as mhra- 
 tions, etc., is to move the blood of the congested capil- 
 laries toward the veins. The adherent corpuscles are 
 thus dislodged, and the current arrested by them is 
 allowed again to flow onward. Such movements, in 
 this way, greatly assist in the removal of congestion, 
 and may, with care, be applied to the diseased mem- 
 bers or organs. 
 
 It is needless to say that the general habits of exer- 
 cise should be compelled to accord with the tenor of 
 the movement prescription. For instance, as in pro- 
 portion to the organic disturbance there is always an in- 
 crease of nervous excitability, and a decrease of phys- 
 ical power, the habitual exercises of the patient should 
 be so ordered as to assist in repressing the excitability 
 and to invigorate the general nutrition of the body. 
 All violent and continued exercises, such as exhaust the 
 
140 DIRECTIONS FOE PRESCRIBING 
 
 powers and induce lasting fatigue, sliould be avoided. 
 Those that are partly passive, such as riding on horse- 
 back or in a carriage, sailing, traveling, etc., are highly 
 appropriate, and may be taken most advantageously in 
 connection with the course prescribed. 
 
 Regions of the Body. — In their application to the 
 body, movements necessarily have special relations to 
 its individual parts, which I have familiarly termed 
 regions. By this term no definite portion of its mass, 
 having distinct boundaries, is intended. The term is 
 very general indeed, and a portion of the body thus 
 designated generally includes a portion or the whole 
 of several anatomical divisions. By thus simplifying 
 our terminology, a knowledge of anatomy on the part 
 of the person making application of movements to 
 himself, is dispensed with ; and to such the intelligent 
 and successful use of single movements is rendered 
 practicable. 
 
 A region generally consists of one or more joints, 
 with the bones, ligaments, muscles, vessels, nerves, 
 areolar tissues, and w^hatever other elements may be 
 included in the range of the muscles, having their 
 points of origin or insertion within the locality thus 
 designated. Each joint is considered as not only a cen- 
 ter of motion of the sound members, but as involving 
 in its motions those invisible physiological or nutritive 
 actions indissolubly connected with the health of the 
 part. K the impulse to motion proceeds from external 
 sources, then the region simply indicates the structures 
 thus acted upon. 
 
 We are to understand, then, that any portion of the 
 body, however complex in its structure and functions, 
 which may be moved en masse and separately from 
 
AND APPLYING MOVEMENTS. 141 
 
 the rest of the framework, constitutes, in the sense here 
 indicated, a i^egion. The whole of an extremity, for 
 example, or \\\q whole of the trunk, or even a part of 
 either, may, if included in a movement, be thus de- 
 nominated. 
 
 The reader who is philosophically inclined will re- 
 mark this diflerence between the Movement system 
 and the Drug system, in their practical application. 
 In the latter, he will observe, the remedy is primarily 
 applied to the stomach and alimentary canal, which it 
 attacks in full force, while that portion of it which is 
 received into the circulation subsequently spends its 
 power among the vital structures, generally and indis- 
 criminately, wherever the blood circulates, in the well 
 quite as much as in the diseased portions. 
 
 In the application of movements, however, the parts 
 demanding succor are pointed out in the prescription, 
 and such portions as do not require the applications 
 are scrupulously avoided. The practical results of this 
 difference are apparent. In the one case there is an 
 unavoidable waste of the forces of the system, while in 
 the other only the conditions for developing power and 
 restoring health are restored. Another object fulfilled 
 by the division of the body into regions is, that the 
 purposes of the movement are rendered distinct. This 
 advantage is in striking contrast with the purposeless 
 and loose method employed in gymnastics. 
 
142 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 Importance of System. — When the facts relating to 
 any branch of knowledge become classified accordmg 
 to their mutual relations and importance, they come to 
 constitute a science. Any science, to be generally use- 
 ful, must be capable of being readily communicated. 
 Otherwise it is limited in its influence, however exten- 
 sive its applicability, or however great the need exist- 
 ing for its difi'usion. In order to convey any new truth 
 or system of truth to the mind of the learner, particular 
 forms of expression become necessary ; and these ac- 
 quire a special and philosophic value almost as great 
 as the subject itself of which they treat. This use of 
 language of philosophic accuracy is of the highest im- 
 ]3ortance for the assistance it affords the student in his 
 investigations, and in giving method to liis style of 
 thinking witii reference to it ; so that discovery and 
 classification proceed naturally and properly together ; 
 and new truths easily take their proper place in the or- 
 derly and symmetrical construction of the system. A 
 terminology^ indeed, becomes an absolutely necessary 
 instrument in the progress of a science or art of any 
 kind. 
 
 JSTo approach was made to a method of designating 
 and classifying the positions and movements of the 
 body for the purposes contemplated in the Movement- 
 Cure, till the time of Ling. In fact, the truths of phys- 
 
TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 143 
 
 iology had first to be so far developed as to clear away 
 some of tlie rubbish of the old medical science (so 
 called) before such a thing could be even attempted 
 with any chance of success. At the present time the 
 need of this aid is deeply felt by the student, and the 
 writer has thought that an attempt on his part to rep- 
 resent some of the facts of the Movement-Cure by 
 means of a terminology, albeit a crude and imperfect 
 one, would be a labor not altogether useless. 
 
 The reader will understand, at the outset, that the 
 writer does not consider the terminology of the posi- 
 tions, as here j^resented, completely satisfactory and 
 final. Thought and labor will do their w^ork, and per- 
 fect, by slow degrees, what is here but a rough sketch 
 of, or, it may be, even but a hint at, the truth. 
 
 Though the necessity may be felt of conforming to 
 the order of nature in regard to when her storehouses 
 shall be opened to us, yet a regret can not but be ex- 
 pressed that some method has not been known of re- 
 cording, for our advantage, w^ith the precision neces- 
 sary for practical purposes, the observations, facts, and 
 experiences of all previous time in relation to this sub- 
 ject. But no such method has ever been employed, if 
 known, in ancient or in modern times, until now. 
 
 The reader needs no argument to make him realize 
 the importance of using some method of this kind. In 
 no other way, he must see, can knowledge upon such a 
 subject be disseminated ; and a practice, if such a one 
 were possible, not thus reduced to appropriate terms, 
 would die with its possessor. And for duplicated 
 movements, in aid of the terminology, it will be seen 
 that it is also necessary, or at least a matter of the great- 
 est convenience, to be able to employ signs instead of 
 written words for the purpose of expressing, at a glance 
 
144 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 of the eye, to the minds of the physician and his assist- 
 ant, the precise thing indicated. 
 
 Positions and Movements. — A movement, by a sim- 
 ple analysis, is resolved into positions ; as, the commenc- 
 ing^ the terminating^ and the intermediate. Each of 
 these is important, as exercising its share of effect in 
 determining the nature and effect of the movement. 
 The movement, in its execution, consists in the assump- 
 tion, by the member, of all positions, successively, as it 
 j)asses through the intermediate space between the 
 commencing and terminating positions. Says Ling : 
 
 "To render any movement definite and exact, a 
 point of departure, a point of termination, and the line 
 through which the body or any of its parts must pass, 
 are to be clearly and severally determined, as well as 
 the ryhthm of the action itself." 
 
 But the change of place^ or motion^ of the member, 
 though it is all that is visible to the eye, is by no means 
 all that is implied by a movement. The muscular con- 
 traction and relaxation, wdth the effects of these actions 
 in the substance of the tissues, and which occur out of 
 sight, are what is chiefly implied by movements. A 
 movement, properly considered, is a mechanico-organic 
 effdct, the result of the contractile power of the mus- 
 cle, or muscles, and may be effected while the member 
 is resting as wxll as when it is in motion. The charac- 
 ter of a movement, in this sense, is determined by the 
 resistance which the muscular contraction tries to over- 
 come, which may consist of gravity^ the opposing force 
 of antagonizing muscles, or that which is exerted by 
 another person. This last may be exactly graduated to 
 the amount of effect it is desirable to secure. 
 
 In applying a movement, the commencing and ter- 
 
TERMmOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 145 
 
 iniiiating positions must first be determined in the 
 mind of the operator ; and without intention^ on his 
 part, no proper movement can take place. Sometimes 
 the terminating position coincides with the commencing 
 position, and no visible change of place occurs. Such 
 a movement is called holding^ and consists simply in 
 maintaining, for a certain time, one position. 
 
 Co:mmexcixg Positions. — Tliese relate, first, to the 
 trunk; secondly, to the dipper extTemities ; thirdly, to 
 the lower extremities; fourthly, to the head. In de- 
 scribing positions, the head is generally neglected, as 
 it is assumed to be erect. They are divided into prin- 
 cipcd and derivative^ or 5i^5-positions. 
 
 PRINCIPAL POSITIONS OF THE TKUNK. 
 
 These are five, viz., standing^ hieeling^ sitting^ ^y^'^9'i 
 hanging. Tlie names of these principal positions are 
 sufiiciently descriptive of their character, and it is un- 
 necessary to refer to illustrations. 
 
 Each of these positions admits of several variations. 
 
 I.— STANDING POSITIONS. 
 
 1. Standing, or Erect-Standing. — In this import- 
 ant position the body is straight and perpendicular, the 
 arms hanging from the shoulders, the legs parallel, the 
 heels in contact, the toes about twelve inches asunder. 
 
 The derivative positions are — 
 
 2. Fall-Standing. — ^The whole body inclines at an 
 angle greater or less from the perpendicular ; all of the 
 members, in the mean time, retaining their natural 
 relative positions. The body in this position must be 
 supported at some point by a firm object. An illustra- 
 tion of fall-standing may be seen in fig. 19. A slight 
 
 T 
 
146 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 deviation forward is called inclining; backward, re- 
 clining. 
 
 The body may greatly deviate from the perpendicu- 
 lar, and the position is then called low fall-standing ; or 
 but slightly, and then it is high fall-standing. 
 
 It may deviate in any direction ; ?i^ forward, right 
 or left sidewise, or hackward; and at various points in 
 these directions. The position is described with suffi- 
 cient accuracy by designating the two cardinal posi- 
 tions between which the body falls, 2<& forward-side- 
 wise, right or left, and hachward-sidewise, right or left. 
 
 3. Bent-Standing. — ^This indicates that the trunk is 
 bent in its middle portion. Deep-bent, means bent to 
 the utmost extent. The hending may be either for- 
 ward, sidewise, or backward, to any degree. 
 
 II.-KNEELING POSITIONS. 
 
 1. Kneeling, or Erect-Kneeling. — ^The trunk rests 
 on the knees instead of on the feet. A soft cushion 
 must be placed under the knees. 
 
 2. Fall-Kneeling. — The trunk may assume the fall- 
 ing position while kneeling, corresponding with this 
 form of the standing position. 
 
 III.— sitting positions. 
 The derivatives of this position relate to the disposi- 
 tion of the legs as well as of the trunk. 
 
 1. Sitting. — The trunk rests upon the seat, the legs 
 at right angles both at the hips and knees, the feet 
 resting upon the floor. 
 
 2. Short-Sitting. — ^The seat rests upon the edge of 
 the chair, occupying as little of it as possible, to main- 
 tain its posture. 
 
 3. Long-Sitting. — ^The legs are extended horizon- 
 
TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 147 
 
 tally in the same plane with the seat, while the trunk is 
 erect. See fig. 10. 
 
 4. Lie-Sitting, or Half-Lying. — In this position the 
 trunk reclines, and is supported by cushions or by a 
 movable seat constructed for this purpose. 
 
 5. Fall-Sitting. — The trunk deviates from the per- 
 pendicular at a certain angle, greater or less; thus it 
 may be falling^ inclining^ or deep-falling. 
 
 Fall-sitting may also h^ forward., sidewise, hackward., 
 or at any intermediate point. 
 
 6. Stride-Sitting. — ^This indicates that the legs are 
 placed at right angles apai't, and also that the feet are 
 widely separated, so as to afford as broad a base as 
 possible. 
 
 lY.-LYING positions. 
 
 In this position the whole body is horizontal. This 
 position is to be varied by changing the points of 
 support. 
 
 1. Forward-Lying. — In this position the face is 
 down, the body extended on a cushion, its anterior sur- 
 face in contact therewith. 
 
 2. Backward-Lying. — Lying extended upon the 
 back. 
 
 3. Sidewise-Lying. — Lying upon the right or left 
 side. 
 
 4. Trunk-Lying. — In this position the trunk only is 
 supported, while the legs project beyond the support- 
 ing surface, and are sustained by the force of the 
 muscles. The derivatives are — 
 
 {(I) Trunlc-forward-lying ; 
 
 (h) Trunk-hackward-lying ; and — 
 
 (<?) TrunTc-sidewise-lying. 
 
 5. Leg-Lyeng. — In this position the legs only rest 
 upon a suitable couch or seat, while the trunk projects, 
 
148 TEEMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 sustained only by the action of tlie mnscles. It admits 
 of the same variations as trunk-lying. 
 
 In leg-lying it is always necessary to employ some 
 device, as the weight of another person, or some suit- 
 able fixture, to counterbalance the superior weight of 
 the trunk. 
 
 This position admits of the same modifications as the 
 preceding. 
 
 6. Head-and-Heels-Lyixg. — In this position the 
 head and heels are supported by a cushioned stool, 
 while the body is extended horizontally between them, 
 back down, sustained by the muscles. Fig. q repre- 
 sents the position. 
 
 7. Elbows-and-Toes-Lying. — In this position the body 
 is sustained only by the elbows and toes. See fig. q- 
 
 8. Sidewise-Lying. — This also admits of several va- 
 rieties, ?i?> plain, elbow, and /b(9^, right, left, etc. 
 
 9. Balance-Lying. — In this position, the support of 
 the body is under the center of the trunk. It may 
 be hackward, forward, or sidewise. 
 
 v.— HANGING. 
 
 In this position the body is perpendicular, as in 
 standing, but the weight is sustained by the hands, in- 
 stead of the feet, by grasping a transverse pole, or 
 something of the sort, overhead. 
 
 Swim-Hanging is when the body is made to deviate 
 from the perpendicular position, through the instru- 
 mentality of another person. 
 
 POSITIONS OF THE AEMS AND LEGS. 
 In each of the above postures of the body, the arms 
 and legs may assume all the various positions that are 
 consistent with the anatomical arrangement of the parts 
 
TEKMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 149 
 
 concerned. These variations of position are dependent 
 upon the nature of the joints which connect these ex- 
 tremities with the trunk. 
 
 These joints are of the hall-and-socket kind, wliich 
 permit the greatest degree of freedom of motion. The 
 arms are caj^able of describing an entire circle, of 
 which the shoulder is the center. The mobility of the 
 leg is considerably less, its motion in an upward direc- 
 tion being prevented by ligaments and osseous projec- 
 tions at the ujDper edge of the acetabulum. 
 
 The other two joints of the limbs — viz., the elbow 
 and knee joints, act on the hinge principle, permitting 
 motion of those 23ortions of the extremities beyond the 
 joint only in one direction. 
 
 In studying the positions of the extremities we must 
 keep distinctly in mind not only the difference of these 
 two kinds of joints, but also the fact that the position 
 resulting from the flexure of the one joint is to be re- 
 garded as entirely distinct and different from that re- 
 sulting fi-om a flexure of the other. Thus, for example, 
 the upper arm is capable of bending at the shoulder, 
 in many directions, and it makes no diflerence in regard 
 to that motion whether the elbow joint is bent at the 
 time or not. If we keep this simple fact in view, it 
 will greatly simplify our study of the positions of the 
 arms and legs. 
 
 The arms and legs, whether bent at the elbow and 
 knee joints or not, may be considered as forming th6 
 rarJii of a multitude of circles, of which the shoulder 
 and hip joints form the centers, so that the hands and 
 the feet, when the limbs to which they belong move 
 freely, describe arcs of circles, not only parallel with 
 the antero-posterior diameter of the body, but also at 
 every conceivable angle with this diameter. 
 
150 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 Of course, it is impossible to invent a nomenclature 
 that shall define with accuracy, through tliis great 
 range of possibility, all the positions the members may 
 assume ; but for the ends demanded in the practice of 
 movements, both as a hygienic and as a remedial art, a 
 description sufficiently accurate to fulfill all purposes of 
 practical utility, becomes quite easy. 
 
 "We reduce the description of the positions of these 
 members to the utmost simplicity, bringing them 
 down to a few cardinal points easily remembered. 
 Tlius, we may refer all the positions of the arms to 
 Xh-Q perpe7idicular, the anterio-jposteTior, and the trans- 
 verse diameters of the body. Every direction in which 
 the arm can be extended will either correspond with 
 these planes, or be related to them more or less nearly, 
 so that they may be described or designated accord- 
 ingly. 
 
 Arm Positions Seen in a Front View of the Body. 
 — These positions of the arms will be understood by 
 reference to the following diagram. 
 
 In this diagram, the positions of the arms are repre- 
 sented in the plane of the transverse diameter of the 
 body. The left side of the diagram represents the chief 
 positions of the arms in that plane. A is the shoulder 
 joint, representing the center of the circle of which the 
 arm is the radius. The names of these positions are as 
 follows : 
 
 Stretch, or iijpioard-stretcTi, A a. 
 
 Side-stretch, or yard, A c. 
 
 High-side-stretch, or high-^ard, A h. 
 
 Low-side-stretch, or low-yard, A d. 
 
 Downward-stretch, or natural position, A e. 
 
 The right side of the diagram represents the same 
 
TERMINOLOGY OF POSFTIONS. 
 
 161 
 
 FRONT VIEW, SHOWING TIIK ARM POSITIONS. 
 
 positions, but with the elhow-hent at a right angle, the 
 shoulder being at A. 
 
 Each of these positions might receive the same name 
 as the corresponding ones of the opposite side, with 
 the addition of the term elbow-bent^ to denote the varia- 
 tion of the forearm from a straight line with the upper 
 arm. Thus, A Z o is stretch elbow-bent / Ami is high 
 side-stretch elbow-bent ; and so of all the other posi- 
 tions with the elbow bent, corresponding with the posi- 
 tions on the opposite of the diagram, in which the 
 elbow is straight. 
 
 But as this would be a rather cumbrous mode of 
 expression, and as it is easier to remember shorter spe- 
 
152 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 cific names for these positions, the following terms are 
 used for convenience : 
 
 Curve^ A I 0, indicates tliat the arm is placed in close 
 contact Avith the head, both the elbow and wrist joints 
 being bent so as to bring the member in close contact 
 with the head. This is otherwise expressed as stretch, 
 elbow, and wrist-lent rest. 
 
 Shelter, A m I, is equivalent to high side-stretch, or 
 yard, elbow-beii t rest. 
 
 Heave, A n h, is the same as yard elljow-bent. 
 
 Angle, A ij, is low-yard elbow upward-bent. 
 
 Wing, A i h,iQ low-yard elbow downward-bent rest. 
 
 Cover, A gf, is doion-stretch elbow-bent rest. 
 
 The above comprises all the arm positions that it is 
 necessary to describe in the transverse plane of tlie 
 body. It is obvious that the same kinds and the same 
 number of positions, with slight variations, may be had 
 in any other plane as in tliis, and they admit of an 
 analogous mode of description. 
 
 Ajrm Positions Seen in a Side Yiew of the Body. 
 — ^The accompanying diagram represents the positions 
 of the arms in the plane corresponding with the antero- 
 posterior diameter of the body. It will be seen at once 
 that the shoulder being the center, the arm may de- 
 scribe the greater part of the circle of which it is the 
 radius, a small arc posteriorly being excepted. 
 
 It will also be seen that when the arm is extended 
 perpendicularly, either up or down, it is in exactly the 
 position it occupies on the plane of the previous dia- 
 gram, which plane, it will be noticed, cuts the one 
 represented in this diagram at right angles. The posi- 
 tions of the arms shown in this view are as follows, viz. : 
 
 Stretch, arm upward. 
 
TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 163 
 
 \ 
 
 SIDE VIEW OF ARM POSITIONS. 
 
 Rack^ A b^ or forioay'd-stretch. 
 
 High-rack^ A «, or high-forward-stretGh. 
 
 Low-rack^ A c, or low-forward-stretch. 
 
 Backward-stretchy A d. 
 
 The chief variation of the positions in this plane, pro- 
 duced by bending the elbow joint, \s> flighty A cf. 
 
 The positions intermediate to those represented in 
 the above diagram, which represent the positions seen 
 in the front and side views of the body, are named 
 from these. Thus the position between rack and 
 yard^ is forward-side-stretch / the position between 
 this and stretch, in the same plane, is high-forward 
 side-stretchy etc., etc. The only one of the interme- 
 diate positions that has received a name is lowforwar^ 
 
 7* 
 
154 
 
 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 sidewise-stretch^ which is termed, briefly, speah po- 
 sition. 
 
 Beside the extensive rotary motion technically termed 
 tending^ of which the shoulder joint is capable, it may 
 also be considerably twisted to the right or left, in 
 nearly every position of the upper arm that has been 
 above described. Hence the term twisty or right-twisty 
 or left-twisty prefixed to the names of these several 
 positions. 
 
 LEG POSITIONS. 
 
 The leg positions are produced by the bending of the 
 hip and knee joints, except in standing, lying, etc., 
 when the lower extremities are parallel with the trunk. 
 The mobility of the hip joint is not quite so great as 
 that of the shoulder joint, since it is limited in its mo- 
 tion upward, but in general it may be said that the 
 positions of the legs may be made to correspond with 
 those of the arms. 
 
 The general appellation given to any deviation of the 
 leg from the perpendicular produced by bending the 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
tek:minology of positions. 155 
 
 hip joint, is (one less graceful than expressive, perhaps) 
 kiclc. 
 
 Forward-Mck^ the leg carried forward and raised to 
 an angle of about fortj-iive degrees. 
 
 lligh-forward-kich is between forward-kick and the 
 horizontal. 
 
 Loic-forward-hick is between forward-kick and the 
 perpendicular. 
 
 Sidewise-Jcicl', the leg extended sidewise. 
 
 BachiDcird-'kick^ the leg extended backward. 
 
 There are also intermediate positions, as — 
 
 Forioard-sidewise-kick, high and low. 
 
 Baclcward-sidewise^ high and low. 
 
 LOWER LEG POSITIONS. 
 
 These positions are designated by the term hnee-hent 
 prefixed to tlie names of positions resulting from flexure 
 of the thigh joint. 
 
 A number of the positions of the legs, as in the case 
 of the arms, are better expressed by distinct terms, as 
 follows : 
 
 1. Stride. — In this position the legs are set apart, on 
 each side of the perpendicular, distant about two or two 
 and a half feet ; whether sitting, standing, or lying. 
 
 2. Walk. — One leg is placed before the other, the 
 trunk perpendicularly between them, as in ordinary 
 walking. 
 
 3. Step-Standixg. — One foot rests upon a stej) or 
 stool, eight to twelve inches high ; the knee and thigh 
 johits are bent, to permit the foot to be thus raised, 
 and the leg may be extended either forward or side- 
 wise. 
 
 4. Foot-Suppokt-Standixg indicates a similar posi- 
 tion. When this term is used, the position of the leg 
 
156 TERMINOLOGY OF POSITIONS. 
 
 must also be designated ; a matter often neglected in 
 step-standing. Thus, forward-kick^ foot-supfort^ half- 
 standing^ indicate that while the body rests upon one 
 leg, the other is raised in forward-kick position, and 
 that the foot rests upon some object that elevates it 
 from the floor. 
 
 5. Squat-Position. — This is when both thigh and 
 knee are bent at right angles. 
 
 6. Leg- Angle is a term indicating the bending of 
 both thigh and knee, without precision as to degree. 
 
 In describing positions, the word half denotes that 
 but one side is concerned, whether in reference to the 
 arms or legs. 
 
PART II. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF SIXGLE MOVEMENTS. 
 
 EEGIOI^ OF THE FEET. 
 
 Kemaeks on Movements of the Feet. — A large 
 number of small bones enter into the composition of 
 tlie feet, and are firmly bound together by ligaments 
 and tendons. Some of the muscles of this region are 
 confined to the feet, while others extend beyond them 
 and are attached to the bones of the leg, nearly as high 
 as the knee. Motion of the feet is produced by the ac- 
 tion of these muscles, the chief bulk of which are situat- 
 ed in the lower leg, which member is, in consequence, 
 afi'ected by most of the movements of the feet, so that 
 these muscles are properly included in this region. 
 The feet are so constructed as to be very elastic, and at 
 the same time very compact and strong, and little 
 liable to injury from accidents to which they may be 
 subjected. 
 
 The strength of the muscles and tendons of the feet is 
 necessarily subjected to much more constant and severe 
 trials than that of almost any other portion of the body. 
 This results from their location, which obliges them not 
 only to sustain the weight of the entire superior portion 
 of the body, but also any additional weight that the 
 
158 KEGIOX OF THE FEET. 
 
 person may cany. It is j^lain, too, that whatever power 
 the muscles of the superior portions of the body may 
 exert, must necessarily be continued to the ground or 
 floor upon which the feet rest ; because, through them, 
 the feet not only sustain the body, but must sustain, as 
 well, the effects of all the forces brought to bear upon 
 it. Thus we brace ourselves with the feet in perform- 
 ing any action by means of the upper extremities — as 
 in lifting a weight, pushing, pulling, etc. 
 
 To maintain the ordinary perpendicular position of 
 the body upon the narrow base furnished it, it requires 
 a stronger action of the muscles of the lower exti^emi- 
 ties than of those of any other part of the body. In 
 inferior animals the weight is shared by four legs, which 
 gives a base so broad as to render any such concentra- 
 tion of muscular power unnecessary. 
 
 This arrangement in the human framework may 
 seem, at first sight, to be unwise, but a little reflection 
 will show that it is a very wise and gracious provision 
 of nature. "We find, indeed, throughout nature, a law 
 of compensation and balance, and in the present in- 
 stance we see it most beautifully illustrated. At the 
 superior extremity of the body is the head, containing 
 those intellectual organs which, j;«r excellence^ distin- 
 guish man from the unthinking beasts. The functions 
 of this part of the body require much nutrition, for 
 which it draws largely upon the common reservoir. 
 ITow, to maintain an equilibrium of the circulation, 
 it is needful that the mferior extremity of the body 
 should be subjected fo such habitual and vigorous 
 action as to make an equally great counter demand 
 upon the circulation. This is secured by the arrange- 
 ment that we have just noticed, in which the lower ex- 
 tremities may be considered as the grand functional 
 
REGION OF THE FEET. 159 
 
 counterpoise of tlie braiu. If tliis view be correct, it; 
 seems plain enough tbat when the health suffers from 
 excessive cerebral action, the true remedy will consist 
 in instituting strong action of the lower part of the 
 body, especially at the feet, which must conduce to an 
 equilibrium of the circulation by creating a counter 
 tlow in the direction of these members. And, in fact, 
 in proportion as the demand for nutrition in those re- 
 gions is responded to, will the cerebral symptoms abate. 
 This principle is popularly understood and practiced 
 upon in the application of irritants to the feet — every 
 old nurse understands it; it holds equally true when the 
 eflect is realized by the natural method of exercise. In 
 the technical language of the doctors, the eflect here 
 spoken of is termed derivcLtive. 
 
 Thus we see that movements of the lower extremities 
 supply a ready and eflicient means of counteracting the 
 efi'ects of excessive stimulation in the superior portions 
 of the body, consequent on the mental labor and anxie- 
 ties inseparable from cultivated and busy life. They 
 are also an eflicient auxiliary means in the treatment 
 of many cases of chronic disease. 
 
 We may remark here, that the feet sustain precisely 
 the same relation to temperature as to motion. That is, 
 by contact with the earth, which is cooler and damper 
 than the air, they part more rapidly with their heat 
 than do other portions of the body. And to supply 
 this loss it is necessary to urge forward the heat-making 
 process in the feet in proportion to the necessity thus 
 produced, and thereby to cause the blood to flow into 
 the extremities in suitable measure. 
 
 We will now enter upon a description of particulai- 
 movements, charging the reader to bear in mind that 
 he must not depend upon them for any curative or re- 
 
160 
 
 REGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 ciiperative effects unless he is willing to practice them 
 in conformity to the directions and principles laid 
 down. To accomplish any good, they must be per- 
 formed very slowly and with the utmost precision. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF MOVEMENTS OF THE KEGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 1.— STANDING, FEET-EXTENDING. 
 
 Position. — To execute this movement, one should 
 stand in the erect posture, with one hand extended so 
 as to preserve the balance of the body by touching a 
 wall, chair, or other object. 
 
 Action. — 1. The feet should stretch at the ankle 
 joint in such a way as to slowly raise the whole body, 
 which they support, as high as possible, bringing it at 
 Fig. 7. length into the tip-toe position, in 
 
 which it must be sustained for a 
 few moments. 2. Relaxation of 
 the stretched muscles should be al- 
 lowed slowly to take place, till the 
 heel reaches the floor, and the feet 
 and trunk have recovered their 
 original position. The cut shows 
 the position after the extension is 
 completed — in other words, the ter- 
 minating position of the movement. 
 This action should be repeated from 
 six to ten times, slowly, as at first, 
 with a slight interval between. If 
 a more strenuous exercise of the 
 muscles is desired, the movement may be performed 
 with one foot only, the knee of the opposite leg being 
 slightly bent, to clear the floor. After performing it 
 wi^h one foot, change to the other, and repeat the 
 
REGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 161 
 
 movement in the same manner as it was performed at 
 first. 
 
 Effect. — In this movement the muscles of the bot- 
 toms of the feet, also those of the posterior parts of tlie 
 legs below the knee, are brought into powerful action. 
 By this process they are streiigthened, that is, their nu- 
 trition is increased, owing to the blood being attracted 
 to the parts that have acted moay from other organs. 
 Hence the term derivative applied to such actions. 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 2.-T0E-SUPP0ET, IIALF-STANDING, HEEL-PEESSING. 
 
 Position. — One knee is bent, the foot lifted, its upper 
 surface resting upon a cushioned seat or chair, while 
 the weight of the body falls upon the 
 other leg, standing in the erect position; 
 the hand on the side of the raised foot 
 is placed upon it, requiring the body to 
 be slightly turned that Tvay. 
 
 Action. — 1. The hand placed upon 
 the heel of the foot strongly j^i'essed 
 upon it, stretching the muscles and forc- 
 ing the upper surface of the foot into a 
 line Avith the leg, where it remains a 
 short time. 2. The ankle bends, rais- 
 ing the heel against the pressure of the 
 hand, till the foot is at right angles 
 with the leg. The dotted lines of the 
 cut show the terminating position. This action is to be 
 repeated six or eight times with each foot. 
 
 Effect. — This movement renders the ankle joint sup- 
 ple, warms the feet, and is powerfully derivative. The 
 muscles of the top of the foot and of the sides of the 
 lower leg are chiefly affected. 
 
162 
 
 REGION OF THE FEKT. 
 
 3.— WING-WALK, TOE WALL-STANDING, FOOT-BENDING. 
 
 Position. — The hauds sliould be placed uj^on the 
 Fig. 9. hips, one foot advanced a yard or 
 
 so beyond the other, in walJdng 
 position, but with the ankle of 
 the forward leg a good deal bent, 
 and the toe against the wall, with 
 the heel as near the wall as pos- 
 sible. 
 
 Action. — 1. The knee of the 
 forward leg should bend, causing 
 the instep to form a more acute 
 angle with the leg; this position 
 to be maintained for a short time. 
 2. The bent knee should now be 
 extended, and the ankle and foot 
 made to resume their former position. The cut shows 
 the posture, the dotted outline indicating the position 
 at the end of the first part of the movement. This 
 should be repeated five or six times with each foot. 
 
 Effect. — The calf of the leg is very strongly acted 
 upon, as well as the sole of the foot, producing a deriv- 
 ative effect, and rendering the ankle supple, and the 
 calf strong, elastic, and voluminous. 
 
 In each of the preceding movements the weight of 
 the body is the chief resistance that the acting muscles 
 are compelled to overcome. 
 
 4— long-sitting, feet sidewise-bending. 
 
 Position. — Sitting in an easy posture in a chair, the 
 hands placed upon the hips, and legs extended horizon- 
 tally across, and supported by another chair that is 
 placed immediately in front of the one occupied by the 
 body. The feet should extend quite beyond the chair 
 
REGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 163 
 
 supporting the legs, and should Fig. lo. 
 
 remain quite free. 
 
 Action. — 1. The feet should 
 be turned to one side slowly, as 
 far as they will go, being kept 
 in the mean time in close con- 
 tact ; they should so remain for 
 a short period. 2. They should 
 then be turned in the opposite 
 direction, in the same manner. 
 This action should be repeated 
 ten or twelve times. The cut shows the position ; the 
 dotted outline indicates the extent of the motion. 
 
 Effect. — ^This motion is produced chiefly by the 
 muscles of the lower leg, and it strengthens these parts, 
 and is derivative. If the ankle be weak, so that it is 
 inclined to bend too easily in one direction, the move- 
 ment should be directed to that side. Slight deformi- 
 ties of the ankle may be corrected by persevering in 
 this discipline of the faulty -pig. ii. 
 
 muscles. 
 
 5.— LONG-SITTING, FEET-ROTA- 
 TION. 
 
 Position. — This is the 
 same as in the preceding 
 movement. 
 
 Action. — The toes of both 
 feet are made to describe 
 as broad a circle as j)os- 
 sible, by slowly ■^^■ forming revolutions from right to 
 left, ten or a dozen times, and then reversing the action. 
 The motion may be changed in this way three or four 
 times. Tlie dotted outlines indicate the circle on which 
 
16^ REGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 the toes revolve, which, it will be seen, represents the 
 base of a cone, of which the heels are the apex. The 
 two feet are to be kept close together diirhig the exe- 
 cution of the movement, and the legs and body must 
 maintain a uniform position. 
 
 Effect. — In this movement all the muscles of the 
 feet and lower leg are put in vigorous action, and all 
 the motion of which the ankle joint is capable is eliected 
 at each revolution. The movement is strongly deriva- 
 tive, and especially useful to the joint when in a weak 
 state. 
 
 6— FOOT-PERCUSSION. 
 
 Position. — Sitting in a chair with one of the lower 
 ^^^^' legs supported by the thigh of 
 
 the other, near the knee, the 
 foot projecting a little beyond 
 it, while the other foot rests 
 firmly upon the floor. 
 
 Action. — The hand of the 
 side next to the raised foot 
 holds a ruler or stick fifteen 
 inches long and half an inch 
 thick, by which a rapid suc- 
 cession of light blows, amount- 
 ing to thirty or forty, are dealt upon the sole of the 
 uplifted foot. The sole of the foot thus treated should 
 be protected by a shoe or slipper. The cut shows the 
 position, and suggests the mode of the action. Both 
 feet are to be acted upon in this way alternately. This 
 is what is called a passive movement, because the effect 
 derived is not produced by inducing muscular contrac- 
 tion of the part. 
 
 Effect. — ^The benefit derived chiefly belongs to the 
 
REGION OP^ THE FEET. 165 
 
 capillaries and nerves of the parL In the capiHaries 
 the clogged vessels have their blood renewed thereby, 
 while the arceries, through the increased action of the 
 nerves supplying them, are made to contract more vig- 
 orously. If there is congestion of the capillaries, as in 
 chilhlains^ it is quickly scattered, and the normal con- 
 dition restored. The movement is derivative, and 
 warms tlie feet. Tlie cure of chilblains by this method 
 is speedy and permanent. 
 
 7— rOOT-EOTATION (PASSIVE). 
 
 Position. — The same as shown in the preceding cut, 
 except that the hand, instead of holding a stick, grasps 
 the toe of the foot. 
 
 Action. — ^The toe of the foot thus grasped is made by 
 means of the action of the hand thus grasping it to 
 describe as broad a circle as the ankle joint will allow, 
 the foot itself remaining in the mean time quite passive, 
 that is, offering no resistance by means of its muscles. 
 The motion is wholly effected by means of the hand 
 thus applied to it. The foot should make about six 
 revolutions in one direction, and then as many in the 
 opposite. This change • should be repeated five or six 
 times. The movement should be applied to both feet. 
 
 Effect. — ^The foot may be turned farther in each 
 direction in this manner than by its own muscles, and 
 the movement is made with less effort and with more 
 grateful effect ; otherwise the general effects flowing 
 from it are similar to those of the preceding move- 
 ments. 
 
 8 -support half-standing, leg-swinging. 
 
 Position. — Standing wdth one foot resting upon a 
 stool, one hand is extended and touchincr a wall, and 
 
166 
 
 REGION OF THE FEET. 
 
 Fig- 13. supported bj it, one leg 
 
 free. 
 
 Action. — The free leg j 
 is caused to sioing by ^ 
 bending at the hip 
 joint, in a plane par- 
 allel with the antero- 
 posterior diameter of 
 , the body, the foot de- 
 / scribing an arc of a cir- 
 cle, to be repeated fif- 
 teen or twenty times on 
 each side. 
 
 Effect. — This mo- 
 tion assists the flow of 
 the arterial blood to- 
 ward the feet, while it 
 retards the venons flow in the contrary direction, and 
 thereby causes the blood to accumulate in the lower 
 extremities. It warms the feet, and induces a pleasant 
 sensation in the limbs. 
 
 All the above movements tend, if repeated at regu- 
 lar intervals, and in a proper manner, to increase the 
 healthful flow of arterial fluid toward and into the 
 lower leg and feet, while at the same time the venous 
 blood is abundantly removed. They augment the bulk 
 and energy of the parts thus brought into special 
 action, warm the extremities, derive from the head 
 and superior organs, and so bring great relief to a 
 system suffering from oppression, congestion, or fatigue 
 in its superior portions. 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 167 
 
 d^Hpter "glut. 
 
 REGIOIT OF THE LEGS. 
 
 Kemakks on Movements of the Legs. — The legs 
 are endowed with very large masses of muscle, and it 
 is necessary to employ them freely in movements, in 
 order to secure the objects contemplated in our pre- 
 scriptions for diseases. They are used as means of 
 modifying the circulation of the blood, and by the aux- 
 iliary power thus derived, of securing the more special 
 and desired effects of movements for other regions of 
 the body. When a derivative effect is desired from 
 movements of the region of the feet, it is best se- 
 cured by employing the auxiliary influence of move- 
 ments of this region ; for the effect of these is strongly 
 derivative also, and the whole result then produced is 
 greater on account of the larger mass of muscle belong- 
 ing to this region. It will be borne in mind that every 
 part of the body is charged with the duty of perfecting 
 the circulation of the blood in itself, and also of aid- 
 ing its passage in the blood-vessels both to and from 
 other parts more remote, for which it necessarily 
 furnishes a channel. 
 
 Walking. — ^This most common and most useful spe- 
 cies of exercise is performed chiefly, though not entirely, 
 by the muscles of the legs, and the act of walking con- 
 stitutes a movement that deserves attention, as it enters 
 not only as an element into many of the Movement- 
 Cure prescriptions, but is very generally prescribed 
 by physicians of every class and creed. We will briefly 
 
168 REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 consider the S2:)ecial purposes it is sui^posed to answer, 
 and its mechanism. Walker gives the following an- 
 alysis of the actions concerned in walking : 
 
 " For the purpose of walking, we first bear upon one 
 leg the weight of the body, which presses equally upon 
 both. The ^other leg is then raised, and the foot quits 
 the ground by rising from the heel to the j)oint. For 
 this purpose, the leg must be bent upon the thigii, and 
 the thigh upon the pelvis ; the foot is then carried 
 straight forward at a sufiicient height to clear the 
 ground without grazing it. To render it possible, how- 
 ever, to move the foot, the haunch, which rested with its 
 weight upon the thigh, must turn forward and outward. 
 As soon as by this movement this foot has passed the 
 other, it must be extended on the leg, and the leg upon 
 the thigh, and in this manner, by the lengthening of the 
 whole member, and without being drawn back, it reach- 
 es the ground at a distance in advance of the other foot, 
 wliichis more or less considerable according to the length 
 of the step, and it is placed so gently on the ground as not 
 to jerk or shake the body in the slightest degree. As 
 soon as the foot which has been placed on the ground 
 becomes firm, the weight of the body is transferred to 
 the limb on that side, and the other foot, by a similar 
 series of actions, is brought forward in its turn. In all 
 walking, tlie most imj)ortant circumstance is, that the 
 body incline forward, and that the movement of the 
 leg and thigh spring from the haunch, and be free and 
 natural. Viewed in this way, the feet have been well 
 compared to the spokes of a wheel, the weight of the 
 body falling upon them alternately." 
 
 The exercise of walking is extremely gentle, and it 
 becomes fatiguing only by being unduly prolonged. 
 The leg is raised, not by a direct lifting^ but by cans- 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 169 
 
 ing the limb to deviate from a straight Hue by simply 
 bending the thigh and knee joints. This action short- 
 ens the distance between the hip and foot, and thus 
 the foot is elevated from the ground. The act requires 
 comparatively little muscular power. Then the leg is 
 brought forward, not by projecting it by means of 
 sheer muscular force, but by an easy swinging motion, 
 like that of a pendulum ; its own momentum is made to 
 assist the action. The progress of the trunk, in the for- 
 ward direction, renders the swinging of the leg neces- 
 sary and easy. 
 
 In walking, all the muscles of the legs and feet are 
 moderately exercised, as also those of the back and 
 shoulders. By these latter the body is kept upright, 
 while the arms gently swing with a motion opposite 
 that of the legs, so as to preserve the center of gravity 
 over the changing base. If the pace be quickened, the 
 muscles of the feet and legs enter upon a more vigor- 
 ous action, whereby the body is projected more rapidly 
 forward at the same time. This great expenditure of 
 muscular power calls for a more rapid and profound 
 respiration, and the respiratory muscles respond ener- 
 getically to the demand, the chest dilates, and air passes 
 into the farthest cells of the lungs. 
 
 In consequence of these actions, a surj^lus amount of 
 heat is developed ; more water, carbonic acid, and urea 
 are produced, and these soon show themselves at the 
 different oitlets ; perspiration appears uj^on the surface 
 of the whole skin, and there are more frequent calls for 
 urination, while the volume of vapor discharged by the 
 lungs is greatly augmented. 
 
 Walking is doubtless superior to any other single 
 exercise that a person can take, yet it fails to answer 
 all the ends of exercise. As there are many other ex- 
 
 8 
 
170 
 
 REGION OE THE LEGS. 
 
 ercises involved in many kinds of loork better adapted 
 to preserve the health and power of all the organs of 
 the well man, so there are others better adapted to cer- 
 tain morbid conditions. Though these should be em- 
 ployed in connection with a suitable amount of this 
 exercise, walking, alone, fails to bring the abdominal 
 organs into sufficient activity. On the contrary, these 
 organs are simply carried, and are, until the respiration 
 becomes accelerated, nearly as inactive as in sitting. 
 Hence weakly persons, especially females, complain of 
 a dragging sensation in walking, in this condition of 
 the system ; and without some other movement to in- 
 vigorate the enfeebled parts, walking may be consid- 
 ered not only useless, but even injurious to the health. 
 In these cases, certain movements of the trunk and 
 abdomen are absolutely required to render walking 
 proper and useful. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF MOVEMENTS OF THE LEGS. 
 9— WING-STEIDE-STANDING, CUET8EYING. 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 PosiTiox. — The hands are fixed 
 upon the hips, in the standing pos- 
 ture, with the back in contact with 
 a smooth wall, the heels two or two 
 and a half feet apart, and five or six 
 inches from the wall, against which 
 the trunk is slightly supported, the 
 toes turned outward. 
 
 Action. — 1. Tlie feet stretch (as 
 in IS^o. 1). 2. The knees bend for- 
 ;ward and outward, while the trunk 
 '' sinks quite down. 3. The knees 
 stretch, raising the body to its up- 
 most height. 4. The heels sink and 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 lYl 
 
 rest again upon the floor. At each stage the move- 
 ment should be performed very slowly, observing a 
 few moments' pause between its distinct portions. The 
 cut shows the position at the stage of the movement 
 when the body begins to descend, also by the dotted 
 outlines, the position at the extreme limit of motion. 
 The movement may be repeated four or five times. 
 
 Effect. — The action is felt at the bottoms of the feet, 
 in the calves of the legs, and, after the knees bend, 
 strongly in the muscles of the legs. The effect in- 
 creases in proportion as the knees deviate from the 
 perpendicular by the bending of the knee joints. The 
 muscles of the perineum, and even of the rectum, in 
 the extreme position, are strongly affected. 
 
 10— HALF-STANDING, CUETSEYING. 
 
 Position. — One hand is Fig. is. 
 
 placed upon the hips, the other 
 rests on some object to steady 
 the body ; the trunk erect, one 
 leg straight, and the foot rest- 
 ing on the floor, the other leg 
 bent at the knee at right angles. 
 
 Action. — 1. The foot on the 
 floor is bent so that the weight 
 rests upon the toes. 2. The 
 knee slowly bends, and the 
 trunk sinks as low as the leg is 
 able to support it. 3. It is 
 again stretched till the trunk 
 rises to its erect position, when, 4, the heel sinks to the 
 floor. The cut shows the position, and the dotted out- 
 line the extreme position. This action should be re- 
 peated three or four times with each leg. 
 
172 EEGIOX OF THE LEGS. 
 
 Effect. — This is similar to that of movement No. 8 ; 
 but as the whole weiglit of the body is supported by one 
 leg, the movement is thereby made mucb more positive. j 
 
 11 —BALANCE-STANDING, CURTSEYING. 
 
 Fig. 16. PosiTiON.-One hand is placed in 
 
 contact with some firm object to 
 steady the body; the other is placed 
 upon the side ; the trunk erect, 
 and its weight is borne by one foot 
 resting upon a stool about eight- 
 een inches bigh, while the other is 
 free. 
 
 Action. — 1. The knee slowly bends, 
 and the trunk witli the suspended leg 
 falls, but it does not touch the floor. 
 2. The bent knee is slowly extended 
 till tlie body is in the first position. 
 The cut shows the position after the 
 Repeat the action five or six times with 
 
 knee is bent, 
 each side. 
 Effect. - 
 
 Fig. IT. 
 
 •This move- 
 
 ment is only a modification >"'■'•.. 
 of the previous one, and the J />;,- 
 effect is much the same. ff:;' ■ 
 
 12.-WING-KNEELING, KNEE- 
 
 STEETCHING. \: 
 
 Position. — The hands 
 are placed upon the hips, 
 trunk, or kneeling position, 
 with a cushion under the knees, and the heels prevent- 
 ed from rising by being forced down by some firm 
 object, as the frame of a sofa. 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 173 
 
 Action. — ^1. The trunk inclines gently and slowly 
 forward, without bending at the hips or in the back, 
 the knee only being slightly straightened or stretched. 
 2. It rises upward and backward till it regains its erect 
 position. The cut shows the commencing, and the 
 dotted outline the extreme position of the movement. 
 This movement should be repeated live or six times. 
 
 Effect. — This movement powerfully affects the mus- 
 cles and fascia of the thigh, its influence extending to 
 the hips and back, also to the calves of the legs. It is 
 derivative, and counteracts the ill effects of too much 
 exercise of the muscles of the anterior portion of the 
 thigh. 
 
 13— HALF-STANDING, ALTERNATE LEG-TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — ^The hands being fixed upon the hips, the 
 trunk rests upon one foot, while ^^^- ^^• 
 
 the other foot is placed upon a 
 slight elevation, about two feet 
 distant, in a direction diagonal to 
 the front of the body. 
 
 Action. — By a slight effort of 
 the body and of the leg upon 
 which it rests, the trunk turns 
 horizontally upon the axis of the 
 leg, right and left, alternately. 
 Care should be used not to twist 
 too strongly, so as to over-tax the 
 knee joint. The cut shows the 
 commencing position. The twisting should be per- 
 formed five or six times each way upon each leg. 
 
 Effect. — ^The amount of contraction of the muscles 
 of the leg in this movement is comparatively small ; 
 all the muscles, however, together with all the other 
 
174 
 
 REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 structures of the part, are strongly affected by it. The 
 muscles, nerves, areolar structures, vessels, etc., are 
 subjected to an unusual agitation, that induces peculiar 
 sensations and marked effects. 
 
 14— WING-WALK, FORWARD-FALL-STANDING, KNEE-BENDING 
 
 Position. — The hands being fixed upon the hips, one 
 Pig. 19, foot is placed about two and a 
 
 half feet before the other in 
 walking position ; the posterior 
 foot is at right angles with the 
 anterior. 
 
 Action. — 1. The heel of the 
 forward foot rises at the same 
 time that the knee slowly bends ; 
 and since this action shortens 
 the forward leg, the body is in- 
 clined forward, throwing its 
 weight upon it. 2. The bent 
 knee slowly extends, the leg becoming straight, until 
 tlie heel reaches the floor, and the trunk is raised to 
 the commencing position. The cut shows the move- 
 ment in one stage of it. This action may be repeated 
 five or six times W'ith each leg. 
 
 Effect.— This movement very strongly affects all 
 the muscles of the legs, and it proves derivative in 
 cases of cold feet or rush of blood to the head. 
 
 15.-LEG-ANGLE HALF-STANDING, LEG-CLAPPING. 
 
 Position. — The knee and thigh of one leg are bent 
 so as to raise the foot, which is placed on a chair or 
 stool, while the trunk rests upon the other leg in the 
 erect or gently inclining posture. 
 
JJEGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 175 
 
 Action . — Eotli liaudd, with the 
 pahns open and fingers outstretched, 
 are employed to clap^ from the hip to 
 the ankle, the whole of the leg thus 
 brought within their reach. The clap- 
 ping consists of rapid ])ut light strokes 
 of the palms of the hands. Each leg 
 may be thus clapped throughout its 
 length five or six times. The cla^Dping 
 is a passive movement for the legs, 
 
 Fig. 20. 
 
 although the arms are 
 
 active, of 
 
 l^^« 
 
 course, in applying it. 
 
 Effect. — ^This action imparts a high 
 degree of nervous sensibility to the legs thus operated 
 upon, and greatly increases the vascularity and warmth 
 of the skin. It is derivative for the superior organs, 
 and also for the interior vessels of the parts subjected 
 to the action. This operation will also be found an ex- 
 cellent means of warming cold hands and of increasing 
 the circulation in the arms. 
 
 REGION OF THE HIPS. 
 
 Remarks on the Region of the Hips. — This region 
 includes the pelvis, its contents, and its connections. 
 In debility from any cause, this region frequently pre- 
 sents some severe symptoms, and is often afflicted with 
 grave disease, such as constipation^ prolapsus of the 
 womh and rectum^ uterine congestion^ ovaritis^ amenor- 
 rhea, leucorrhea^ diseases of the prostate, bladder, and 
 sexual organs. 
 
 The movements applicable to this region are nume- 
 rous and important, affording us the means of con- 
 trollinoj the circulation and nutrition of these parts, 
 
176 
 
 REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 and if well selected and a]3plied in proper connection 
 with others that may be indicated, such movements 
 prove an invaluable means for maintaining or destroy- 
 ing the health. 
 
 The utility of these movements will be realized 
 when it is noticed that after childhood the class of per- 
 sons afflicted with the diseases referred to, seldom 
 make use of much variety in their exercises, but are 
 in the habit of carrying themselves stiffly about, em- 
 ploying as few muscles as possible. Most of the fol- 
 lowing movements necessarily aii'ect the thigh, back, 
 and abdomen, because the muscles acting have their 
 attachments at one extremity in one or the other of 
 these regions. Many of them aifect the legs equally 
 with the pelvis. 
 
 16.— WING-STEIDE, SHOET-SITTING, LEG OUTWAED-STEETCHING. 
 
 ^^s-21. Position. — The hands are 
 
 iixed on the hips, the body 
 erect, in the sitting posture, 
 upon the edge of a chair or 
 stool, with the thighs sepa- 
 rated ii' right angles, feet 
 resting on the floor. 
 
 Action. — 1. The foot of 
 one side is raised a few inches 
 from the floor. 2. The knee 
 is slowly stretched, till the 
 legs. 2>!V% quite straight, and 
 in a horizontal position, and poiilting forward-si dewise. 
 3. The knee bends and returns to its first position. 
 This movement may be repeated five or six times with 
 each limb. The cut shows the position, and the dotted 
 line indicates the extreme position of the movement. 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 177 
 
 Effect. — Tliis movement requires strong action of 
 the internal muscles of the pelvis, and of the muscles 
 of the abdomen and upper portion of the leg, and 
 causes the blood to circulate toward the feet. It 
 strengthens the pelvis, and is derivative in congestion 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 of its organs. 
 
 17.— LEG-ANGLE HALF-STANDING, KNEE-STRETCHING. 
 
 Position. — With one hand extended, and grasping 
 some firm object, and the other upon the liip, the body 
 stands erect upon one 
 foot — namely, that on 
 the supported side ; the 
 other leg is bent at both 
 knee and liip, the thigh 
 being horizontal. 
 
 Action. — 1. The knee 
 is slowly stretched until 
 the leo; is strai2:ht. 2. '."v y'' 
 The knee bends, and the ''^^'' 
 leg assumes the first po- 
 sition. This action may 
 be repeated three or four 
 times with each side. 
 The cut shows the position, and the dotted line indi- 
 cates the terminating position. 
 
 Effect. — ^The action in the movement is like that of 
 the preceding, though somewhat more energetic, and 
 more difficult to perform, and it produces similar 
 effects. 
 
 18.— WING-EECLINE, SUPPOET-SITTING, KNEES-EAISING. 
 
 Position. — ^The hands are placed upon the hips, the 
 trunk sustained in a chair, in reclining posture, or on 
 
 8* 
 
178 
 
 REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 a coucli with the shoulders 
 a good deal elevated; the 
 feet resting upon the floor, 
 and the knee; 
 
 Fig. 28. 
 
 bent at right 
 
 angles. 
 
 Action. — 1. The knees 
 are slowly raised as high as 
 possible, the lower leg re- 
 maining in the same rela- 
 tive position. 2. The legs 
 slowly return to the first 
 position. This action may be repeated five or six times. 
 The cut shows the first position, and the dotted outlines 
 the direction and the extent of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — In this action the lower abdominal muscles 
 and the internal pelvic muscles are sirongly aflected. 
 The movement strengthens the part, and removes in- 
 ternal congestion of the pelvic organs. 
 
 19— HALF-STANDING, LEG FORWAED-KAISING. 
 
 Fig. 24 Position. — The body is 
 
 steadied by extending one 
 hand for this purpose, 
 while the other is placed 
 upon the hip, the body in 
 standing position, resting 
 its weight upon one leg. 
 
 Action. — 1. The leg of 
 the side opposite the sup- 
 port is slowly raised for- 
 .,'N. ward till it nearly reaches 
 }J the horizontal position. 
 -'' 2. It then slowly returns 
 to its first position. This 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 179 
 
 action may be repeated four or five times with each 
 leg. The dotted line of the cut indicates the direction 
 and the extent of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — This is similar to that of the j^receding 
 movement. 
 
 20.— HALF-STANDING, LEG BACKWAKD-EAISING. 
 
 Position. — This is precisely like that in movement 
 ISTo. 19, to which the reader is referred. 
 
 Action. — 1 . The leg is extended slowly backward, 
 and raised as high as possible. 2. It returns slowly to 
 its first position. The cut (fig. 24) shows this move- 
 ment, the dotted outline extending backward indicat- 
 ing the limit of the backward motion. 
 
 Effect. — In this movement the muscles of the seat, 
 the lower portion of the back, and those of the pelvis 
 are strongly affected. It is useful to strengthen these 
 parts, and to remove internal weakness and congestion. 
 The action of the muscles in the direction in which the 
 leg moves is concentric^ while that of the anterior and 
 internal muscles is eccentric. 
 
 21.— HALF-STANDING, LEG SIDEWISE-EAISING. 
 
 Position. — For this the reader is also referred to 
 movement ISTo. 19, fig. 24. 
 
 Action. — 1. The leg is separated from the standing 
 one, and slowly raised sidewise as far as possible. 
 2. It then falls slowly to its first position. The plane 
 in which the leg moves is represented by the perpeur 
 dicular dotted line. 
 
 Effect. — Similar to that of the preceding, except 
 that the muscles of the thigh and hip on the side 
 moved, are brought into strong action. 
 
180 
 
 REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 Each of the above four movements acts upon the 
 muscles of the thigh and leg in a very jDowerful man- 
 ner, especially if the extremity be maintained for a 
 few moments at the extreme limit of the movement ; 
 and since not only the muscles of the hips and thighs, 
 but also those of the leg enter into these actions, they 
 are all strongly derivative in their effects. 
 
 Fig. 25. 
 
 22.— FOEWAED-FALL, HEAD-SUPPOET-STANDING, LEG-EAISING. 
 
 Position. — The head rests upon the folded arms 
 placed upon some object of convenient height, as a 
 table or mantle-piece ; the feet resting on the floor, so 
 far back from the perpendicular as to cause the body 
 (which is in a nearly straight line) to form an angle 
 with the floor of about forty-flve degrees. 
 
 Action. — 1. The leg is slowly raised as high as pos- 
 sible, where it remains for a few moments. 2. It then 
 slowly returns to its first position. Tlie dotted outline 
 
 of the accompany- 
 ing cut indicates 
 the direction and 
 extent of the move- 
 ment. This action 
 may be repeated 
 v)^ four or five times 
 with each leg. 
 
 Effect. — Tlie 
 muscles of the 
 thigh, leg, seat, pe- 
 rineum, and back 
 are strongly affected, and also those of the anterior sur- 
 face of the body. This movement is especially valu- 
 able for sedentary people whose legs have become 
 weak from disuse. 
 
REGION OF THE LF.GS. 
 
 181 
 
 23— HALF-9TAKDING, LEG-KOTATION. 
 
 Position. — One hand extended steadies the body hy 
 leaning against a wall or ^ Fig. 26. 
 
 some firm object; the other 
 hand being fixed upon the 
 hip. Body erect, and rest- 
 ing upon the leg nearest the 
 supporting hand. 
 
 Action. — The free leg is 
 made to rotate so that the 
 foot shall describe the broad- 
 est possible circle, of which "I 
 the inner edge is near the 
 supporting foot. This mo- 
 tion is produced by the al- 
 ternate gentle action of the 
 muscles attached to the hips. 
 The rotation may be performed six or eight times in 
 one direction, wdien it is reversed, and performed in 
 the opposite direction. In the cut, the dotted outline 
 indicates the action. 
 
 Effect. — This movement gently aftects all the mus- 
 cles of the thigh, and by the centrifugal effect that re- 
 sults from the motion in a circle, restrains the return 
 of the venous circulation for a moment, whereby the 
 circulation of the leg is subsequently quickened, and 
 the leg warmed. 
 
 24.-WING-SITTING, DOUBLE LEG-TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — The hands are upon the hips, the trunk sus- 
 tained by a chair, or lying uj)on a couch with the shoul- 
 ders raised high ; the legs are extended across another 
 chair, the feet projecting freely, and placed so far apart 
 that the toes will barelv touch in the movement. 
 
182 
 
 REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 ^^s- 2^- AcTioN.-l. The legs slow- 
 
 ly rotate, tlie toes turning 
 outwa7xl^ the rotation being 
 effected at the upper ex- 
 tremity of the thigh. 2. 
 They then rotate inward^ 
 till the toes touch in a near- 
 ly horizontal position. This 
 action is repeated five or 
 six times, each time in both 
 directions. In the cut, the 
 dotted curved line indicates 
 the direction of the movement. Care should be taken 
 that the limbs turn on their own axis, without bending 
 at the knees, stretching at the ankles, or in any other 
 way deviating from the first position of the legs. 
 
 Effect. — This movement is chiefly effected by small 
 muscles about the head of the thigh bone, some of 
 which are intimately related to the cavity of the pelvis, 
 though many others assist in the movement. It circu- 
 lates the blood in the legs, strengthens the hips, and 
 removes congestion of the organs contained in the pel- 
 vic cavity. 
 
 25.-LEGS-ANGLE, LIE-SITTING, KNEES-STEETCHING. 
 
 Position. — The hands are placed upon the hips, the 
 trunk reclining on a couch with the shoulders raised, 
 the legs bent both at the thigh and knee joints so that 
 the feet may rest upon the couch near the seat, tlie legs 
 being in angle position. 
 
 Action. — 1. The knees are slowly stretched, the feet 
 being raised and the lower legs being brought into a 
 line with the tliighs, the thigh in the mean time re- 
 maining at an angle of about forty-five degrees with 
 
REGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 183 
 
 the body, wliicli position is maintained for a few mo- 
 ments. 2. The knees slowly bend, bringing the feet 
 back to their original position, resting on the couch. 
 This action may be repeated six or eight times. 
 
 Effect. — If the extreme position of the legs be main- 
 tained, the action at the lower portion of the abdomen 
 and in the pelvis is powerful, and in character concen- 
 tric. The anterior part of the leg is also affected. 
 
 r 
 
 26 —SHELTER TRUNK-BACKWAED-LYING, LEGS-EAISING. 
 
 Position. — The hands are placed upon the crown of 
 the head, the trunk lying backward npon a couch, the 
 legs, from the hips, projecting beyond the edge, their 
 weight causing Fig. 28. 
 
 them to descend ^r^ 
 
 considerably be- 
 low its level. 
 
 AcTioN.-l.The 
 legs are slowly 
 raised till .'hey 
 are in a posi- 
 tion approach- 
 ing right angles 
 with the trunk, 
 and are held '^ 
 
 there for a few moments. 2. They are permitted slowly 
 to fall back to their original position. This action 
 may be repeated five or six times. The dotted out- 
 line in the cut shows the position reached at the limit 
 of motion. 
 
 Effect. — This movement acts upon the abdominal 
 coverings and the muscles of tlie pelvis, presses upward 
 the pelvic and abdominal contents, and affects eccen- 
 trically the muscles of th.e chine and hips. 
 
184 
 
 KEGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 27.- KICK BACKWAED-LYING, LEGS-SEPAEATION. 
 
 Position. — The hands are placed upon the hips, the 
 head slightly elevated, the trunk lying on the back, 
 and the legs raised nearly to the position shown in 
 fig. 31. 
 
 Action. — 1. The legs are allowed slowly to separate, 
 as far as possible, being carried apart laterally by their 
 own weight. 2. Are slowly brought together again. 
 This action may be repeated five or six times. 
 
 Effect. — The insides of the legs, the perineum, the 
 pelvis, and the lower portion of the abdomen are af- 
 fected by this movement. 
 
 28.— sidewise-lying, leg-eaising. 
 Position. — The body lies upon one side in a horizon- 
 tal and straight position, the head being pillowed upon 
 
 Fig. 29. 
 
 the under arm, while tlie hand of the other is placed 
 upon the hip. 
 
 Action. — 1. The leg slowly rises in the perpendic- 
 ular plane of the body as far as it may, where it remains 
 for a few moments. '2. It then slowly falls back to its 
 first position. This action may be repeated six or 
 eight times with each side. The dotted outline of the 
 
KEGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 185 
 
 cut indicates the point to wliicli tlie leg rises, and the 
 direction of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — The sides, the outsides of the legs and hips, 
 and the perineum, are brought into action in this 
 movement. 
 
 29— backwaed-lying, legs-eotation. 
 
 Position.— ^'^- ^^' 
 
 The com- 
 mencing posi- 
 tion is exactly 
 like that of ; 
 ilso. 28. 1 
 
 Action. — 1. '^:; 
 The legs are • 
 carried to one side by bending at the hips. 2. The feet 
 •are then made to revolve in as wide a circle as possible 
 while the legs are kept in contact. 3. The direction 
 of the rotation is then reversed. This change is re- 
 peated three or four times. The dotted outline of the 
 cut shows the circle traversed by the feet. 
 
 Effect. — This movement acts upon all the muscles 
 of the thighs and hips, the lower portion of the abdo- 
 men and back in turn, also the rectum, uterus, blad- 
 der and lower portion of the spinal cord. 
 
 30— WING LEG-ANGLE HALF-LYING, ENEE-STRETCHING. 
 
 Position. — Tlie arras are in wing position, trunk 
 lying with the shoulders much elevated, the legs bent 
 at both thigh and knee joints at riglit angles, the feet 
 resting on the same horizontal level with the body. 
 
 Action. — 1. The knees slowly stretch, without chang- 
 ing the position of the thighs, until the legs are straiglit, 
 
186 
 
 EEGION OF THE LEGS. 
 
 ^'S- 81. the feet being elevat- 
 
 ed. 2- Tlie knees 
 slowly bend, and the 
 feet take the position 
 from which they 
 started, i. e.^ the com- 
 mencing position. 
 This action may be 
 repeated five or six 
 times. The dotted outline of the cut shows the posi- 
 tion at the end of the first part of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — ^This movement brings into action all the 
 anterior muscles of the leg, as well as those of the 
 low^er abdominal and pelvic regions, and afi'ects the in- 
 ternal organs of these parts. It also warms the feet. 
 
 31— THIGH-EOTATION. 
 
 Position. — The hands are placed upon the hips, the 
 
 trunk is lying back- 
 ward, with the shoul- 
 ders and head elevat- 
 ed, the thighs bent 
 strongly upon the ab- 
 domen ; the knees also 
 are bent to their acut- 
 est angle. 
 
 Action. — The knees are caused to revolve five or 
 six times in a circle as broad as possible, the inner part 
 of which is close to the body. The direction of the 
 motion should change four or five times, as in I^o. 31. 
 Effect. — This movement excites the rectum, lower 
 intestines, and abdominal contents generally, and also 
 strengthens the muscles about the hij)s, and all the 
 
KEGION OF TIIK LEGS. 
 
 187 
 
 organs depending for their innervation on the lower 
 part of the spinal cord. 
 
 32. -CHINE KNOCKING. 
 
 Position. — One hand is extended so as to brace and 
 steady the body by its contact with ^ig. 88. 
 
 some firm object; the trunk leans 
 forward, the body in the standing 
 position. 
 
 Action. — The free arm and hand, 
 strongly clenched, is nsed to deal a 
 number (twenty or thirty) of smart 
 blows upon the lower portion of the 
 chine. 
 
 Effect. — This movement makes a 
 vibratory impression upon the sacral 
 bone, its contained nerves — the 
 lower portion of the spinal cord and 
 branches. The eftect is also communicated to all the 
 pelvic organs, as the rectum, uterus, bladder, etc., both 
 directly, and as a result of the excitement produced 
 in the part of the spinal cord supplying the affected 
 region with nerves. The movement is highly useful in 
 many cases, but should be omitted in others. The 
 question of its appropriateness may generally be de- 
 cided by the sensations ^^I'oduced. If it is intended to 
 stimulate the action of tlie rectum, the knocking should 
 be applied to the lov/er extremity of the sacral bone. 
 
188 EEGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 EEGIOX OF THE TEUi^K. 
 
 The trunk of the body consists of external walls, 
 witli the inchided space, which is filled with the organs 
 of digestion and respiration, and their appendages. 
 This space is divided by the diapliragm into two parts 
 or chambers ; the one below the diaphragm containing 
 the apparatus for the digestion of food and the prepara- 
 tion of nutritive material, that above it being devoted 
 to the aeration and circulation of the blood. 
 
 In the light afforded by the Movement-Cure, there 
 is seen to be an intimate connection between these two 
 sets of functions, whether physiologically or patho- 
 logically considered. The therapeutical indications 
 also relate to hoth sets of oi'gans and their functions — 
 even though the symjjtoms of which the invalid chiefly 
 complain relate more especially to one or the other. 
 There can be no good digestion with imperfect respira- 
 tion, and no efficient respiration while the blood is 
 overwhelmed with the crude materials derived from 
 imperfect digestion. The location of these organs very 
 much favor their associative treatment. These organs 
 are the media through which the materials destined 
 for vital service are brought into those peculiarly inti- 
 mate relations with each other that are required. 
 
 By digestion, food is reduced to a fluid state ; it then 
 passes the digestive boundaries into the blood. The 
 circulation carries the materials in this condition to the 
 
KEGIOX OF THE TRUNK. 189 
 
 lungs, where thej become associated with the oxygen 
 of respiration, and the products of this association are 
 tlien applied to all the nutritive purposes of the body ; 
 oxygen or the blood-plasma being yielded up to the 
 tissues according to the various vital requirements. 
 
 It has been already shown that the quality of the 
 vital manifestations depends uj^on the manner in which 
 these preparatory processes are performed. The modes 
 of attempting to control these processes are as numerous 
 as the devices of medicine ; for it is to gain this con- 
 trol that the remedial art is exercised everywhere. But 
 to accomplish this grand object successfully, we must 
 make use of the appliances furnished us in the Move- 
 ment-Cure. 
 
 Movements of the Digestive Organs. — It has al- 
 ready been shown, pp. 88, 90, how necessary are move- 
 ments to further the diiferent stages of the digestive 
 processes ; to set the blood in healthful motion ; to rouse 
 to activity the secretory functions, etc., etc. But their 
 applicability in disease would seem, at first view, not to 
 be demonstrated by these facts. That they are so, how- 
 ever, one is convinced from attending to the essential 
 nature of many pathological conditions, as revealed to 
 us by the Movement-Cure, and by a consideration of 
 the advantages that these organs are constantly receiv- 
 ing from those natural and constant movements to 
 which they are subjected while in a state of health. 
 
 1. In the alimentary canal we have a tube more than 
 twenty-live feet in length, variously convoluted and 
 folded upon itself, but the greatest portion of which is 
 quite free to move when acted upon by causes external 
 to itself. It is fixed to the abdominal wall by few and 
 movable attachments, so that it readily yields in all its 
 
190 REGION OF THE TRUNK:. 
 
 parts to the least mechanical force exerted upon it. 
 The tendency of the several portions of the canal to 
 glide upon each other is highly favored by the exceed- 
 ingly smooth and polished surface they present, and by 
 the fine, glairy secretions with which they are lubri- 
 cated. These surfaces glide and play upon each other 
 witli every change of posture, and with the muscular 
 exertion put forth in nearly every part of the body. 
 These mechanical displacements, caused by impressions 
 received from external sources, afford to the intestines 
 the stimulus necessary to induce their own worm-like 
 motion, which is effected by means of the circular mus- 
 cular fibers that enter into the structure of tlie tube 
 itself. It is by this motion that the contents of the 
 canal are carried forward and the condition supplied 
 for absorption of the fluid portions and for the passage 
 of the portal blood in the direction of the liver. 
 
 It is a curious and most interesting fact, that children 
 and young animals, whose desire for motion is inherent 
 in their constitutions, are inclined chiefly to those kinds 
 of exercise, and to assume those positions, that necessa- 
 rily affect the abdominal contents in the way above 
 described. It is in such exercises as climbing^ rolling^ 
 crawling^ jumping^ and inlaying generally, that these 
 contents are most disturbed ; but we never hear that 
 these movements, though often violent, are attended 
 with harmful consequences. On the contrary, we are 
 convinced that these are the very means that nature 
 prescribes to secure healthful development and jDower 
 in these most essential parts of the body. 
 
 2. And, asif to insure these healthful effects, nature 
 Jias ordained that by respiration^ as an efiicient and 
 constant means, these motions shall be secured to the 
 alimentary canal. The abdominal contents may be 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 191 
 
 considered as located between two great muscular or- 
 gans, the diaphragm and the abdominal ^. ^^ 
 walls. These muscles act conjointly ^f;?2- 
 ultancously^ and upon all the included 
 parts, causing them to play incessantly 
 upon each other, and subjecting them to 
 a constant and gentle pressure. 
 
 Diagram illustrating the moA^ements of the abdominal walls 
 and contents under the influence of respiration ; a, position / 
 after expiration ; 6, position after inspiration. The diaphragm ' 
 is shown to be much more concave after expiration. 
 
 The accompanying diagram shows how 
 the diaphragm and walls of the abdomen 
 are moved and acted upon by the included 
 organs at each respiration. And as these 
 respiratory acts are at the rate of about 
 eighteen per minute, we see these or- 
 gans must undergo a pretty thorough 
 churning. 
 
 Any cause operating to deteriorate the health, dimin- 
 ishes the amount of this motion, for the simple reason 
 that the respiration, in chronic disease of every kind, is 
 less vigorous than in health. In disease, also, these 
 natural movements are not only less in extent, but 
 faulty in kind ; for we frequently find that, to afford 
 play to the lungs, some other part of the walls of the 
 body take on motion that compensates for the lack of 
 it in the parts originally intended for the performance 
 of that function. In this way the advantage of the 
 respiratory movements to the abdominal contents is 
 partially lost. The common causes operating to pro- 
 duce these injurious results are too long continuance 
 of the fixed positions of standing or sitting, at work or 
 study. The prevalent style of dress ^ too, by limiting 
 the movements of the chest and abdomen, and com- 
 
192 EEGIOX OF THE TETINK. 
 
 pressing and weakening the muscles, has much to do 
 in the production of these disastrous consequences. 
 
 3. One prime effect of exercise is the increase of the 
 substance and the contractility of the abdominal mus- 
 cular coverings. The walls of the abdomen become, in 
 the absence of proper exercise, weak, flabby, and un- 
 naturally distended. When this occurs, the abdominal 
 contents necessarily obey the laws of gravity, become 
 dislocated, and their function consequently impeded. 
 "Well-directed movements restore the power of these 
 walls ; the sinking organs a.re reinstated in their orig- 
 inal position, and their function is recovered. 
 
 -i. The action of these muscles necessarily calls blood 
 into them to supply their nutrient wants. The advan- 
 tage of this does not stop with the maintaining of the 
 powers of these muscles. An equal benefit is derived 
 in the scattering of the visceral congestion, which will 
 necessarily occur when the blood is not employed in 
 external parts. Congestion of the mucous surfaces, or 
 of some portion of the contained glandular apparatus, 
 is quite sure to accompany the weaknesses above men- 
 tioned. 
 
 The reader will now be able to understand the mor- 
 bid conditions that coexist in nearly all forms of dys- 
 pepsia, constipation, bronchial, laryngeal, and liver 
 affections, that so extensively prevail in the community. 
 There is insufficiency of respiration, and consequently 
 of the natural movements of the digestive organs ; these 
 functions are hence impeded, and the well-known symp- 
 toms are manifested that are so freely doctored instead 
 of the diseases themselves. And the reader will also read- 
 ily infer that, in order to correct all the above-mentioned 
 difficulties, it is only necessary to employ movements 
 with due reference to the exact pathology of the case, 
 
REGIOX OF THE TRUNK. 193 
 
 and with a rational understanding of the limits of their 
 ability to correct physiological aberrations. Other- 
 wise employed, movements are quite as competent, and 
 as likely, in fact, to do injury as good. In congestion 
 of the liver, for instance, it is highly improper to em- 
 ploy such movements as would tend to promote that 
 condition in a healthy person. Ignorance will not 
 shield one from the consequences resulting from such 
 foolish practice. That an aggravation of disease fre- 
 quently follows the use of heterogeneous exercises, is 
 only a proof of their power to do good when properly 
 directed. The beginner can not observe too much 
 caution in prescribing for himself. 
 
 Movements of the Respiratoet Organs. — The 
 function of aerating the blood would seem to be more 
 important than any other of the system. Every func- 
 tion may suffer a temporary suspense except this, and 
 those intimately connected with it, as the action of the 
 heart ; but life shortly ceases when respiration is from 
 any cause too long suspended. When, also, respiration 
 becomes defective or inefficient, whether from exter- 
 nal or internal causes, all the other functions speedily 
 fail. This fact shows the direct dependence of all other 
 functions upon this. All changes in the system, wheth- 
 er for the purpose of evolving sensorial, intellectual, or 
 muscular power, require in the blood the presence 
 of oxygen obtained from the air of respiration. It is 
 by means of oxygen that the compounds into which the 
 w^asting organs are resolved, are reduced to the still 
 simpler and less noxious forms in which they are dis- 
 missed from the body. It is the abundant, supply of 
 this element, secured by wholesome avocations, or, in 
 the absence of labor, by special exercises, that secures 
 
 9 
 
194 REGION OF THE TKLXK. 
 
 to the system that elasticity and vigorous tone, which 
 is health. Withdraw this element, by contracting the 
 respiratory capacity, and important vital changes are 
 interrupted, and the forces of the system begin at once 
 to fail — the bow has lost its spring, the eye ceases to 
 sparkle, the rose fades on the cheek, and that form that 
 once no trouble could bend, now bows under grasshop- 
 per burdens. 
 
 The need of a supply of oxygen to the system is gen- 
 eral ; all parts are equally liable to suffer without it. 
 Hence all the organs and tissues, including the nerves 
 and muscles, unite in a common effort to secure it, and 
 to perfect the respiratory process. That such is the case 
 is proved by many symptoms in acute disease. In these 
 cases the efficiency of the respiratory process is first di- 
 minished by a deterioration of the quality of the blood, 
 whose attraction for oxygen is thereby lessened.* The 
 whole system is then aroused, and the respiratory and cir- 
 culatory actions excited to a high degree in the effor^t to 
 attain inore air by means of which to reduce its nox- 
 ious principles to the more neutral and bland state of 
 carbonic acid^ water ^ and urea^ which are the ultimate 
 products of the oxydation attending these vital opera- 
 tions. 
 
 There are two principal circumstances that control 
 the amount of oxygen received into the system. One 
 % the affinity of the blood and tissues for this element, 
 , jiich, there is reason to believe, varies with the health, 
 habits, diet, etc. The other is, the capacity of the chest 
 in cubic measure, and the degree of the mobility of its 
 walls. In complete health there is, of course, a com- 
 
 * There is no disease characterized by an increase of the products of respiration. 
 
f 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 195 
 
 plete harmony between the chemical and the mechan- 
 ical conditions of supply and the general needs of the 
 system for oxygen. But it is also necessary that in 
 health there should be a large funded capacity, be- 
 yond the ordinary needs of supply, to meet the emer- 
 gencies into which the system may be thrown ; for 
 instance, the extra breathing made necessary during 
 temporary forced labor or excessive cold. The powers 
 of the system soon succumb under hardships, if this re- 
 serve capacity for respiration is limited or deficient, as 
 in pulmonary aiiections. 
 
 That the walls of the chest are very mobile and well 
 adapted to contain and to charge different quantities 
 of air according to circumstances, is apparent from an- 
 atomical considerations. This cavity is bounded below 
 by a thin muscle, the diaphragm, which is convex up- 
 ward during respiration, but which by contracting is 
 flattened, leaving much space above it to be filled by 
 the air which simultaneously rushes in to supply the 
 vacuum thus produced. 
 
 The sides of the chest are formed by the ribs, and 
 their tendonous and muscular attachments. The ribs 
 extend downward and forward from the spinal column, 
 are connected with the sternum in front by long elas- 
 tic cartilages, except the two lower ones of each side, 
 whose anterior extremities are entirely free. Simul- 
 taneously with the contraction of the diaj)hragm, the 
 external muscles of respiration also contract. This 
 action elevates the forward extremities of the ribs, 
 causing them to include a larger space ; and it also 
 turns them slightly outward, thus contributing to the 
 same result. The extent of this eflect is precisely in 
 proportion to the degree of the muscular action. The 
 diagram, fig. 34, page 191, illustrates the motions of 
 
196 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 the inferior and lateral walls of the chest. It may 
 not only be inferred that the amount of air revivi- 
 fied in respiration depends on the amount of the mo- 
 tion of the walls of the chest, but also that the amount 
 of air habitually resident in the lungs depends on the 
 tone of these muscular walls. 
 
 Habitual immobility of the walls of the chest is a 
 characteristic of all chronic diseases. The capacity of 
 the chest has become restricted, the power of the mus- 
 cles lessened, most likely from habitual disuse ; for in 
 these cases the occupations and habits of life have not 
 enforced that abundant exercise that the requirements 
 of the system demand. In most cases, the evil is not 
 lack of exercise in general, but lack of the particular 
 kinds that are calculated to serve the wants of the par- 
 ticular function in question. The kinds of exercise 
 that the weakly and sedentary are most inclined to en- 
 gage in do not, it is admitted, sufiiciently affect the 
 respiratory apparatus. Just here, often, is the true 
 disease, while the invalid is suffering from symptoms 
 that have not yet suggested to him their origin. 
 
 The important part played by respiration in the ani- 
 mal economy is not doubted, but we fail to recognize 
 the practical inference deducible from this considera- 
 tion bearing upon the restoration of the invalid. We 
 also fail to consider that one is running in the direc- 
 tion of disease whenever the efficiency of this function 
 is from any cause abated. When these facts are well 
 considered, and not till then, will the importance of 
 special means adapted to counteract the effects above 
 indicated be appreciated. 
 
 All exertion of the voluntary powers, we have said, 
 causes an increase of respiration. Profound thought 
 or study, all may have noticed, demands frequent and 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 197 
 
 profound inspiratory eflbrts ; while preliminary to any 
 very strong muscular efforts there is invariably an in- 
 voluntary pi-e23aration made by a deep inspiration. 
 The inspired air, at such times, is frequently held^ and 
 subjected to all the jjressure that the chest can exert 
 upon it, apparently to accelerate and increase the so- 
 lution of the oxygen brought in this way into contact 
 with the blood. Thus we see that exercise not only 
 increases the expansibility of the chest, but probably, 
 after the manner here noticed, deprives the respired air 
 of a larger proportion of its oxygen. 
 
 Great caution, let it be remarked here, is indispen- 
 sable in prescribing movements designed to enlarge 
 the chest, for great injury is easily done in this di- 
 rection. Persons of feeble habits we would caution 
 earnestly against indiscriminate, random movements. 
 Let it be understood, and always borne in mind, that 
 movements of this region tend more decidedly than 
 those of any other to produce congestion ; while the 
 production of this condition ought specially to be 
 avoided, and the movements should be so prescribed 
 as to overcome it if it already exists. 
 
 It is to be borne in mind, too, that the same act that 
 causes the chest to become filled with air, assists also 
 the flow of venous blood to the same locality. Hence, 
 movements of this region should always be given in 
 such connection and order as to counteract, or render 
 impossible, these pernicious eflects. By inattention to 
 this caution, not only may congestion be produced, 
 and alarming disease promoted, but even serious hem- 
 orrhages may occur that may threaten life, especially 
 if there be previous disease of the pulmonary organs. 
 These accidents need never occur in the most delicate 
 or in the worst cases of disease, but the capacity and 
 
198 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 power of tlie cliest may be greatly but surely improved 
 in nearly all of them. 
 
 33— STRETCH-STEIDE SHOET-SITTING, TRUNK FOEWAED-SIDEWISE 
 FALLING. 
 
 ^^^- ^^- Position. — The arms are 
 
 brought up nearly in con- 
 tact with the ears, and par- 
 allel to each other ; the 
 trunk erect, supported 
 upon the edge of a chair 
 or other convenient seat ; 
 the thighs at right angles 
 apart ; feet so extended 
 *--/>-:::, upon the floor as to form 
 ■ -^C^^ a large base. 
 Action. — 1. 
 falls slowly, 
 forward, that is, in a line 
 directly over one thigh, bringing the breast in close 
 contact with the knee. 2. It then slowly resumes the 
 lirst 23osition. This action may be repeated five or six 
 times on each side. In the cut, the dotted outline indi- 
 cates the direction and the extent of the falling. 
 
 If it is deemed advisable that less effort be expended 
 in this movement, the arms may be put in wing j30si- 
 tioii instead of stretch ; when considerable effort is de- 
 manded, the stretch position may be used. In this 
 case the hands should grasp some weighty object, as a 
 pair of dumb-bells, and the movement be performed 
 as before. 
 
 Effect. — Tliis movement affects the region of the 
 loins, and if weights are used, also the back and arms. 
 
 The trunk 
 diagonally 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 199 
 
 34. 
 
 STEETCH-STRIDE SUORT-SITTING, TRUNK BACKWARD-SIDE- 
 WISE-FALLING 
 
 Fig. 36. 
 
 Position. — This is pre- 
 cisely like that repre- 
 sented in Ko. 33, ex- 
 cept that it may be nec- 
 essary to secure the feet 
 by placing them under 
 some firm object, or they 
 may be held to the floor 
 by another person, as 
 may be most convenient. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk 
 to be twisted a little to- 
 ward the knee of one 
 side. 2. It must now be 
 allowed to fall slowly 
 backward till it reaches a position approximating the 
 horizontal, where it remains for a few moments. 3. 
 Then rises slowly again to the commencing position. 
 This action may be repeated three or four times with 
 each side. In the cut, the dotted outline indicates the 
 direction and the extent of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — This movement calls po werfully into action 
 the muscles of the abdomen upon either side, and 
 strengthens them as well as the fasciae of the groin and 
 leg, especially in the region liable to rupture. It also 
 presses the bowels, and is derivative in respect to the 
 visceral organs. 
 
 35— stretch-sitting, trunk backward-falling. 
 
 Position. — This is the same as in ^o. 34, including 
 the support necessary for the feet. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk falls directly but slowly 
 backward till it reaches a position nearly horizontal. 
 
200 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 ^?-: 
 
 Fig- 3T. 2. It then rises slow- 
 
 ly till it regains the 
 commencing posi- 
 tion. This action 
 may be repeated four 
 or five times. In the 
 cut, the dotted out- 
 line indicates the di- 
 rection and extent 
 of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — This is a 
 very useful move- 
 ment to increase the 
 nutrition of the ab- 
 dominal coverings, especially the lower portion of the 
 walls of the abdomen. It also produces* strong deriva- 
 ative effects, and consequently tends to remove visceral 
 congestion, and to restore the contained organs to their 
 natural situation in the abdominal cavity. If the arms 
 be in wing position, the movement will be easier ; if 
 weights be held, it will be more positive in its effects. 
 
 36— half-steetch, half-wixg, steide shoet-sitting, teunk 
 sidewise-bexdixg. 
 
 Position. — One hand is placed upon the hij)S ; the 
 arm of the other is stretched perpendicularly upward ; 
 trunk erect, sitting ; thighs at right angles; feet extend- 
 ed and braced against the floor. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk gently bends in the lumbar 
 region in the direction of the hip, on which the hand 
 is fixed, while the stretched arm retains the position 
 relative to the head, in which the movement commenced. 
 The trunk falls as far as it can without raisins: the seat 
 at the opposite side. 2. It then slowly rises to its orig- 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 201 
 
 inal position. This action may be ^^^' ^^^ 
 
 repeated three or four times upon 
 each side. The perpendicular dot- 
 ted line and the arrow indicate in 
 the cut the direction of the move- 
 ment. The extent of the move- 
 ment will increase after a little 
 practice. If the action needs to 
 be stronger, a weight may be held 
 in the upright hand. The action 
 may be repeated four or five times 
 with each side. 
 
 Effect. — ^This movement strong- 
 ly affects the side of the body, and 
 the effect is extended to the liver, spleen, and other 
 visceral organs. 
 
 37.-HALF-STRETCH, HALF-WING STRIDE-SITTING, TRUNK- 
 TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — Tliis is the same as 
 in ]^o. 36. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk remains 
 perpendicular, neither bending 
 nor swaying in any direction, but 
 twists on its own axis, while the 
 seat remains immovable on the 
 chair or stool. In twisting^ the 
 side of the raised arm moves for- 
 ward, while the opposite side 
 moves to an equal extent back- 
 ward, performing the twisting to 
 the extent of about a quarter of 
 a circle, there remaining for a 
 
 9* 
 
 Fig. 39. 
 
202 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 few moments. 2. The trunk then moves on its axis in 
 the opposite direction ; or, in simpler phrase, it un- 
 ttoists, bringing the anterior part of the body forward to 
 the commencing position. This action may be repeat- 
 ed four or five times with each side. 
 
 Effect. — Although in twisting movements the limit 
 of the power of motion is soon reached, on account of 
 the confined condition of the muscles, yet this class of 
 movements are potent, especially in their efi'ect on the 
 circulation, since nearly all the muscles of the part are 
 put in action — some concentrically, others eccentric- 
 ally. The muscles are thus nearly all rendered very 
 tense, producing much pressure upon the blood-vessels 
 and nerves, followed by increased flow of blood into, 
 and nutrition of, the parts subjected to this action. 
 Twisting also tends to contract the diameter of the 
 cavity of the trunk, and hence produces slight press- 
 ure upon the contained organs. This class of move- 
 ments are derivative. 
 
 38— shelter steide-sitting, change-twisting. 
 
 Pig. 40. 
 
 Position. — ^The hands are locked 
 upon the top of the head ; in all 
 other respects the position is iden- 
 tical with that in the last four ex- 
 amples. 
 
 Action. — ^The trunk turns on its 
 axis with moderate rapidity as far 
 as it will turn, and then in the op- 
 posite direction for the same dis- 
 tance. This action may properly be 
 repeated fifteen or twenty times suc- 
 cessively. The cut shows the posi- 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 203 
 
 tioD, which is not varied, except by the twist motion 
 during the movement. 
 
 Effect. — This movement, for the great majority of 
 the parts affected, is nearly passive^ only a few mus- 
 cles, comparatively, being employed to give the mo- 
 tion, while all the organs contained in the cavity of 
 the body are agreeably stimulated by the agitation im- 
 parted to them. The movement is tranquilizing for 
 the nerves, and equalizing in its effect on the circula- 
 tion, while certain muscles in different portions of the 
 body are performing active service. 
 
 39 .— yaed-sitting, swaying. 
 Position.— The ^^g- Al- 
 
 arms are extended 
 horizontally until 
 they are both in the 
 same line ; trunk 
 sitting, legs stride, 
 and feet well braced. 
 
 Action. — The 
 trunk turns on its 
 axis, as in No. 38 ; 
 but on account of 
 the position of the 
 arms, much more deliberately. It iirst turns as far as 
 it can to the right, and then in the same way to the 
 left, allowing the extended arms to acquire consider- 
 able momentum, and, by the consequent reaction, in- 
 creasing the effect of the movement upon the loins. 
 This twisting may be repeated ten or fifteen times 
 each way. 
 
 Effect. — The muscles of the top of the shoulders, 
 and nearly all those of the arms, and those of the sides, 
 
204 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 are strongly affected. The centrifugal effect upon the 
 circulation of the blood in the arms is to detain and 
 then quicken the circulation, and warm the hands. 
 The movement acts derivatively for the chest. 
 
 40— STEETCH BTKIDE-KNEELES'G, TKUNK BACKWARD-BENDING. 
 
 Fig. 42. Position.' — The arms are stretched 
 
 upward parallel with each other, 
 and with the head ; the trunk erect, 
 kneeling, with the knees placed far 
 apart in the stride position ; the 
 knees must be sustained by a cush- 
 ion. 
 
 Action. — 1. Tlie trunk bends 
 slowly backward as far as its flexi- 
 bility will allow, so as to assume a 
 reclining posture, where it remains 
 for a few moments. 2. It then re- 
 turns slowly to its commencing po- 
 sition ; the knees and hips remain- 
 ing fixed in the mean time. In the cut, the dotted 
 outline indicates the direction and extent of the move- 
 ment. 
 
 Effect. — This movement puts the skin and fasciae 
 and muscles of the anterior portion of the body and legs 
 strongly upon the stretch ; it is felt in the groin, the 
 walls of the abdomen, and chest; elevates the ribs, -dia- 
 phragm, and visceral contents, and expands the chest. 
 The action is chiefly produced by the muscles of the 
 back, which it strengthens. 
 
 Eemark. — This and many other back-bending move- 
 ments frequently occasion keen sensations in the back, 
 especially at the beginning of their employment. This 
 is not because the muscles of that region are strained 
 
REGION OF THE TKUNK. 205 
 
 unduly by the movement ; for, the weiglit of the body 
 assisting the movement from the time it first deviates 
 from the perpendicular, the muscular action is compara- 
 tively slight. The sensation is, no doubt, produced by 
 the pinching of the vertebral cartilages caused by the 
 unusual position. The sensation gradually wears away 
 as the cartilages become more elastic, and as the parts 
 adapt themselves to the new requirements imposed 
 upon them. If movements of this class j)roduce an un- 
 pleasant tenderness, they must be desisted from for a 
 short time, after which they may be resumed. 
 
 Yakiations of No. 40. — 1. The arms may be in 
 shelter position instead of stretch. In this case the 
 action is not so forcible, and it is, therefore, better 
 adapted to those who are quite feeble. 
 
 2. The arms to be extended exactly as in ISTo. 39, 
 but may grasp a couple of weights, as a p>air of dumb- 
 bells. The effect in this case becomes much greater, 
 since the added weight acts through the leverage of the 
 arms and body, very much more powerfully upon the 
 whole anterior surface of the body. 
 
 3. While the arms are in either of the above posi- 
 tions, the legs may be placed in walking position, that 
 is, with one knee presented forward of the body, and 
 the other behind it, and as far apart as convenient. In 
 this case, after the action has been repeated three or 
 four times, the position of the legs may be reversed, by 
 placing forward the leg which was behind, and putting 
 behind that which was forward. The action is now 
 felt much more powerfully in the groin, and the move- 
 ment is especially useful to strengthen the muscles and 
 fasciae about the hernial region. 
 
206 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 41.-HALF-STEETCH, HALF- WING RECLINED STRIDE KNEELINQ, 
 TRUNK-TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — One arm is extended upward, w^liile the 
 hand of the other is placed npon the hip ; the trunk 
 erect, in the kneeling position, with the legs w-idely 
 apart. 
 
 Action. — The side of the extended arm moves for- 
 ward while the opjDosite side moves backward, twisting 
 the bod}' upon its axis. ' This action is to be repeated 
 four or five times with each side. The reader is refer- 
 red to No. 37 for an explanation of this movement ; it 
 is to be remembered that in this movement the posi- 
 tion is that of kneeling, with the body a little bent 
 backward. 
 
 Effect. — ^This movement is felt at the sides, and in 
 the arm which is in stretch position ; also across the 
 abdomen, at its lower portion, pressing somewhat the 
 contents of the abdominal cavity, and strengthening 
 these regions as well as acting derivatively. 
 
 42 —HALF-STRETCH, HALF-WING, WALK-KNEELING, TRUNK- 
 TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — One arm is stretched, the 
 hand of the other being upon the hips ; 
 the trunk erect ; the knee on the same 
 side with the stretched arm is placed as 
 far back as is possible ; the opposite 
 knee placed as far forward. 
 
 Action. — The side on which is the 
 stretched arm moves forward, while the 
 opposite side moves backward, twisting 
 the body on its axis, as far as practica- 
 ble. After this motion has been repeat- 
 ed four or five times, the knees change 
 their respective positions, the back one 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 207 
 
 being placed forward, and the forward one back, and 
 the motion is repeated as before. The cut shows the 
 position after the body has twisted. 
 
 Effect. — This movement acts strongly upon the ab- 
 dominal muscles and fasciae, and especially those of the 
 groin, and increases the power and resistance of those 
 parts. 
 
 43.— AKMS- ANGLE RECLINED KNEELING, ARMS STRETCHING. 
 
 Position. — The arms are in an- Fig. 44. 
 
 gle ])ositlon^ that is, the elbow is cfh) 
 
 bent while the upper arm is near 
 the side parallel with the body ; 
 the trunk kneeling, knees wide 
 apart, but leaning back from the 
 perpendicular. 
 
 Action. — 1. The arms are slow- 
 ly stretched till they become par- 
 allel with each other, and in a 
 line with the body, where they re- 
 main for a short time. 2. They 
 are then allowed slowly to return to the commencing 
 position. This may be repeated six or eight times. In 
 the cut, the dotted outline shows the position after the 
 first part of the movement, that is, the extreme position. 
 Care should be taken that the arms be not stretched 
 perpendicularly, but exactly in the line of the reclining 
 trunk. 
 
 Effect. — The parts afi'ected by this movement are 
 the arms, the tops of the shoulders, the region beneath 
 the shoulder blades, the sides of the chest, the dia- 
 phragm, and the abdominal muscles, as well as the 
 visceral organs, which are raised by it and moderately 
 compressed. 
 
208 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 Yariations of Iso. 43. — 1. The hands may grasp 
 some heavy objects, as a pair of dumb-bells, which in- 
 creases the effect upon all of the parts enumerated. 
 
 2. The legs may be in walking position. In this case 
 the effect upon the abdomen, especially upon the groin, 
 is materially increased. 
 
 44— KACK-EECLINED STPwIDE-KNEELING, APwMS BACKWAED- 
 STEIKING. 
 
 Fig. 45. 
 
 Position. — The arms are in 
 rack position, that is, extend- 
 ed horizontally forward ; the 
 trunk slightly reclining, and 
 kneeling ; knees apart or 
 stride. 
 
 Action. — The arms are 
 thrown horizontally back- 
 ward as far as the anatomy 
 of the parts will allow. This 
 action is repeated eight or 
 ten times. 
 Effect. — There are but few muscles brought into 
 active play in this movement, and these are situated 
 back of the shoulder. By this movement the muscles 
 of the breast are acted upon, the ribs elevated, and the 
 blood thrown into the hands, increasing their Avarmth. 
 This movement may be practiced slowly ; if more 
 quickly, an increased eff'ect is produced upon the ante- 
 rior muscles. 
 
 45.-WING steide-kneeling, einging. 
 
 Position. — The hands are placed upon the hips, the 
 trunk is perpendicular, and kneeling ; legs in stride po- 
 sition. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk bends above the hips to one 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 209 
 
 side, as far as it can. 2. It then rc- ^*^- ^• 
 
 tnrns and passes beyond tlie perpen- 
 dicular for the same distance on the 
 opposite side ; the motion being 
 someAvhat rapid, so that the mo- 
 mentum acquired will be felt upon 
 the convex side. This action maj 
 be repeated ten or twelve times. 
 The cut indicates the position and 
 the direction of the movement, but 
 not its extent, which will vary great- 
 ly with the powers of the patient and the amount of 
 practice. 
 
 Effect. — This movement acts upon the muscles of 
 either side, and also upon the liver, spleen, and other 
 organs situated in the region affected by the motion, as 
 the abdominal walls and viscera. 
 
 Variation. — 1. The arms may be in stretch position. 
 The motion then is much more slowly performed, and 
 the effect much greater, at the same time more gentle. 
 
 2. The arms may be in stretch position, and the 
 hands grasping a pair of weights. This variation adds 
 greatly to the effect, making the movement a gentle 
 and very effective one. 
 
 46— YARD STRIDE-KNEELING, SWAYING. 
 
 Position. — The arms are extended in a line, palms of 
 the hands downward ; the trunk is erect and kneeling ; 
 the legs apart, or in stride position. 
 
 Action. — The trunk turns on its axis as far as the 
 muscles will allow, from right to left, and then from 
 left to right, and so continues to repeat the action of 
 twisting, without bending the body, the arms being 
 maintained in the same straight line. This may be re- 
 
210 
 
 REGIOX OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 peated eight or ten times. This movement affects the 
 coverings of the abdomen, and the muscles of the back 
 generally. It also warms the hands, and is derivative 
 for the chest. 
 
 h-::nc 
 
 47— STEIDE-SITTING, ARMS SIDEWISE-EAISING. 
 
 ^^•^^- Position.— The 
 
 arms hang in their 
 
 natural position bj 
 
 , the side, trunk erect, 
 
 \ sitting, legs in stride 
 
 J position. 
 
 ' / Action. — 1 . The 
 / arms slowly rise side- 
 wise, in the same 
 perpendicular plane 
 with the trunk, the 
 back of the hands 
 uppermost, carefully 
 avoiding all irregu- 
 lar actions, till the backs of the hands meet perpen- 
 dicularly above the head, where they remain for a 
 short time. 2. They then return slowly to the first 
 position by the side. This action may be repeated six 
 or eight times. In the cut, the dotted outlines show 
 the commencing position, also the horizontal interme- 
 diate position, and the circle described by the points of 
 the fingers in making the movement. 
 
 Effect. — In this movement the muscles of the top of 
 the shoulder, and all of the muscles of the side of the 
 chest, are brought into action, the former concentrically, 
 the latter eccentrically ; the ribs are raised and everted, 
 the diameter of the chest increased ; the diaphragm is 
 also affected. 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 211 
 
 48 -8TKETCH HALF-WALK, HALF-KNEELING, TEUNK BACKWARD 
 BENDING. 
 
 Position.— The ^'^•''• 
 
 arms are in upward 
 stretch position, the 
 trunk erect; one leg 
 kneeling, w^hile the 
 other is extended for- 
 ward, wdth the sole 
 of the foot upon the 
 floor. 
 
 Action. — 1. The 
 trunk bends slowly 
 backward, so as to 
 carry the arms, which 
 must be kept parallel 
 with the liead, and in the axis of the trunk, as far back- 
 ward as possible. 2. It slowly resumes the commencing 
 position. This action may be repeated three or four 
 times, when the position of the legs should be reversed, 
 and the action again repeated. The cut shows the 
 commencing position, and the dotted outliue the posi- 
 tion at the end of the first part of the movement. 
 
 Effect. — The lower portion of the abdomen, the 
 groin, and the wdiole anterior surface of the body are 
 affected by this movement ; the parts acted on are 
 strengthened, and those beneath experience a deriva- 
 tive influence in consequence of the action. 
 
 49— HALF-WING HALF-CUEVE (WEIGHT HELD) STEP-EECLINED- 
 STANDING, TEUNK SIDEWISE BENDING. 
 
 Position.— One hand rests upon the hips ; the foot 
 of the same side is elevated upon a step or stair; the 
 other hand holds a weight, the forearm resting upon 
 
212 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 the head ; the weight of the body, 
 which is erect, is sustained princi23allj 
 by the leg that stands erect upon tlie 
 floor. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk slowly bends 
 at the waist in the direction of the ele- 
 vated foot, being assisted by the position 
 of the weight in the hand. 2. It rises 
 slowly to the commencing position. 
 This action may be repeated four or six 
 times, with each side of the body. The 
 dotted outline in the cut shows the di- 
 rection of the motion. 
 
 Effect. — This movement allows the 
 muscles of the bent side to remain near- 
 ly passive, the bending being mostly produced by the 
 weight ; while the muscles of the convex side of the 
 bended body are felt strongly upon the stretch, or in 
 eccentric action. The movement aflTects the walls of 
 the body upon each side, also the contiguous internal 
 
 50.-HALF-WIXG, HALF-6TEETCH, STEP-STANDING, TKUNK SIDE- 
 WISE-BENDIXG. 
 
 Position. — In this movement no weight is held, and 
 the arm is in upvjard-stretch position. In all other re- 
 spects, the position is precisely like that in IS^o. 49. 
 
 Action. — ^The trunk bends as in 49, but it is brought 
 into the curve of the terminating position by the action 
 of the muscles of the side. The movement is repeated 
 four or five times upon each side. 
 
 Effect. — The eti'ects of the movement difler but lit- 
 tle from those of 49 ; the muscles in the present posi- 
 tion, however, acting more concentrically. 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 213 
 
 51— HALF-STEETCH, HALF-WING, HALF-KICK RECLINED STANDING, 
 TRUNK SIDE WISE BENDING. 
 
 Position. — One arm in wing 
 position ; the leg of the same 
 side extended forward in kick 
 position, and maintained in 
 place by means of a stool ; the 
 arm of the opposite side in 
 stretch position ; the trunk re- 
 clined, and resting with its 
 
 Fig. 50. 
 
 weight upon the leg on the side 
 of the stretched arm. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk slow- 
 ly bends in the direction oppo- 
 site the stretched arm. 2. It 
 returns to the first position. 
 
 The commencing position is 
 shown in the cut. 
 
 Effect. — This movement differs from JS^o. 50, in 
 causing much more strain upon the groin and iliac re- 
 gion of the stretched side. 
 
 Modification of 51. — Both arms may be in stretch 
 position, as described in No. 54, instead of only one. 
 The twisting will then be performed in the same direc- 
 tion as before, and the movement in every respect like 
 the one here described. In this case the movement 
 aftects the trunk and elevates the ribs more than in 
 the first described. 
 
 52— HALF-STRETCH RECLINED KICK-STANDING, TRUN^ 
 TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — The 230sition is exactly like that in I^o. 
 51, and is seen in the cut. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk twists upon its axis, the 
 
214 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 gtretched side moving forward, and the opposite side 
 backward. 2. It returns to the commencing position. 
 This action is repeated four or five times with each 
 side. 
 
 Effect. — This movement affects nearly all the mus- 
 cles of the trunk. 
 
 53.— SHELTEE LONG-SITTING, TRUNK rOEWARD BENDING. 
 
 Position. — The hands 
 are placed upon the 
 head in shelter position ; 
 the trunk in sitting pos- 
 ture ; the legs extended 
 horizontally, and sup- 
 ported by a cushion. 
 3 Action. — 1. The trunk 
 
 bends slowly forward as far as possible. 2. It returns 
 slowly to the primary position. This action may be 
 repeated five or six times. The cut shows the first po- 
 sition, and also, by the dotted outline, the direction of 
 the movement. 
 
 Effect. — This movement elevates the ribs, causes 
 the abdominal muscles powerfully to contract, elevates 
 the abdominal contents, and affects eccentrically the 
 muscles of the back and seat. 
 
 54.-AEMS ANGLE, HALF KICK (FOOT SUPPOETED) EECLINED- 
 STANDING, AEMS STEETCHING. 
 
 Position. — The arms are bent at the elbows, while 
 the upper arm is by the side of the body ; the trunk 
 reclines ; one leg placed two feet forward, in liick po- 
 sition, with the foot supported by a stool ; the weight 
 of the body rests mainly upon the other leg. 
 
 Action. — ^The arms slowly rise, stretching the el- 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 215 
 
 bow, and keeping the 
 extending arms in the di- 
 rection of the transverse 
 plane of the body till they 
 become straight and par- 
 allel with each other, with 
 the head somewhat thrown 
 back ; this position is re- 
 tained for a few moments. 
 2. The arms then slowly 
 resume the first position. 
 This action may be re- 
 peated three or four times, 
 when the position of the 
 legs should be reversed, 
 
 and the action again repeated. The dotted outlines of 
 the arms in the cut show their commencing position, 
 and the stretched arms, the limit of the upward mo- 
 tion. 
 
 Effect. — In this movement the whole of the ante- 
 rior surface of the body and the tops of the shoulders 
 are strongly acted upon ; also the parts beneath the 
 shoulder-blades and the muscles connected w^th the 
 ribs generally. It develops the muscles of these re- 
 gions, is derivative for the chest, and is valuable as a 
 means of assisting in its expansion. 
 
 Yarieties. — 1. A pair of dumb-bells may be held by 
 the hands, and the movement practiced in all other re- 
 spects as before. This modification of the movement 
 greatly increases its eflect. 
 
 2. The movement may commence in the stretch po- 
 sition, instead of the angle. The efi'ect in this case 
 will be the same in all essential particulars. 
 
216 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 55— YAED EECLIXED HALF-KICK STANDING, SWAYING. 
 
 Position. — ^The arms are in yard position ; in every 
 other particular the position is like that of No. 54. 
 
 Action. — The trunk twists in the lumbar region as 
 far around as it can, Avhile the arms remain in the same 
 relative position, but sway in a circle of which the 
 hands describe the arc, and the j^lane of which is 
 necessarily inclined to the horizontal in consequence 
 of the reclined position of the trunk. The motion 
 is alternate, and may be repeated fifteen or twenty 
 times, in the mean time changing the position of 
 the legs. 
 
 i FFECT. — This movement acts strongly upon the ab- 
 dominal walls, especially at the sides, and also uj^on the 
 liver, spleen, and other visceral organs. 
 
 56— HALF-STEETCH, HALF-WIXG, WALK, TEUNK SIDEWISE BENT, 
 STANDING, TEUNK TWISTING. 
 Fig. 53. -73 r\ • ' 
 
 r^osiTiON. — One arm is m 
 stretch, the other in wing, posi- 
 tion; the legs in walk position, 
 with a long distance between the 
 feet ; the leg of the wing side 
 being forward, and the trunk 
 bent toward the same side. Tlie 
 commencing position here de- 
 scribed is identical with the ter- 
 minating position of JS'o. 52. 
 
 Action. — 1. Tlie trunk slowdy 
 twists upon its axis, the side on 
 which is the stretched arm, as in 
 previous instances, moving forward, and the opposite 
 backward. 2. It returns to the primary position. The 
 cut shows the position after the twisting. 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 217 
 
 This action may be repeated four or five times with 
 each side. 
 
 Effect. — This movement puts into powerful eccen- 
 tric action the muscles of the sides ; it is derivative in 
 cases of central congestion, and strengthens the chest 
 and abdomen. 
 
 * 57— YAKD walk-standing, TRUNK BACKWARD BENDING. 
 
 Position. — The arms ere Fig. 54. 
 
 extended horizontally on ei- 
 ther side, the trunk erect; 
 one foot is placed before, and 
 the other behind, the center 
 of the body, the two being 
 two and a half feet apart. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk 
 bends backward as far as it 
 can, where it remains a mo- 
 ment. 2. It then returns to 
 the commencing position. 
 This action may be repeated 
 three or four times, and then 
 the legs should exchange places, and the action be re- 
 peated again. 
 
 Effect. — This movement expands the chest, warms 
 the hands, and strengthens the back. 
 
 58— UPWARD-SIDEWISE STRETCH DOORWAY-STANDING, WALKING. 
 
 Position. — This is taken in a doorway, the arms 
 being extended upward and outward, and the palms 
 of the hands pressed against the casement ; the trunk 
 erect, the feet just behind the middle portion of the 
 threshold. 
 
 Action. — 1. One leg is raised as if to walk, but some- 
 10 
 
218 
 
 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 Fig. 65. 
 
 what higher 
 
 than is common in that 
 action. 2. At the same instant the 
 body is projected forward ; but the 
 arms being arrested by the resisting 
 object against which the hands are 
 placed, the center of the trunk is very 
 much curved forward. 3. The raised 
 leg returns to its place beside the other 
 on the floor, and at the same time the 
 trunk straightens, resuming the com- 
 mencing position. The other leg is next 
 raised and put forward in the attempt 
 to walk, but its progress is arrested, 
 and the trunk bends forward ; the 
 whole body afterward returning to the 
 commencing position, as before. This 
 action may be repeated with each leg 
 ten or twelve times. The cut repre- 
 sents the movement at the point when the raised leg 
 and the projecting trunk are falling back into the com- 
 mencing position. 
 
 Effect. — This movement acts powerfully in expand- 
 ing the chest, and tends to develop all the muscles of 
 the front portion of the body. It is easily taken (after 
 being once learned), and requires but little exertion 
 compared with the amount of effect produced. In this 
 respect it very much resembles a true duplicated move- 
 ment. 
 
 59— SHELTER, SIDEWISE-BENT STRIDE-STANDING, TRUNK ROTA- 
 TION. 
 
 Position. — Tlie hands are locked upon the top of the 
 head, the trunk is bent far to one side, the legs in stride 
 and the body in standing position. 
 
 Action. — ^The trunk is made to rotate, carrying the 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 219 
 
 head around a circle of consider- ^'g- ^^' 
 
 able extent. The axis of motion 
 is jnst above the hips. This ro- 
 tary motion may be performed 
 three or four times each way, 
 when the trunk should bend to 
 the opposite side to the same ex- 
 tent, and repeat the motion as 
 many times more. In the cut, the 
 dotted lines indicate the perpen- 
 dicular, also the circle in which 
 the head revolves. 
 
 Effect. — This movement 
 strengthens the parts about the loins, and expands the 
 chest. 
 
 Modification. — This movement may be taken in the 
 sittiiig position. In this case, the body being more 
 firmly supported, the extent of the movement, that is, 
 the diameter of the circle described by the head, may 
 be greater than while standing, and this will, of course, 
 cause greater action of the sides. This movement 
 afiects the liver and spleen. 
 
 60 -HEAD-AND-HEELS LYING, HOLDING. 
 
 Position.— The ^^s-^^- 
 
 trunk lies in a hori- 
 zontal position, with 
 the hands clasped 
 upon the head, the 
 legs parallel, the 
 head and the heels only resting on supports, as two 
 chairs, while the remaining portion of the body is quite 
 free. 
 
220 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 Action. — The body remains in this position for a 
 longer or shorter time, according to the strength. 
 
 Effect. — The muscles of the back are put into power- 
 ful action in this movement. Hence it is derivative in 
 respect to the spinal cord, while it increases the de- 
 velopment and power of the muscles of the back. 
 
 Modification. — The supports may be placed nearer 
 each other, as at the shoulders and lower legs. The 
 movement thereby becomes less powerful, and the 
 holding may continue longer. 
 
 6i.-ELB0WS-AND-T0ES LYING, HOLDING. 
 
 Fig. 53. 
 
 Position. — The arms are in rack elboiD-hent position, 
 the trunk horizontal, face downward ; the elbows and 
 toes only resting on a mattress. 
 
 Action. — The trunk is held in this position for a few 
 moments, more or less, according to the strength of the 
 experimenter. 
 
 Effect. — This movement produces a muscular ten- 
 sion and contraction of the whole forward part of the 
 body, the eifect of which is especially felt at the lower 
 portion of the abdomen. It presses the abdominal 
 contents toward the diaphragm, and often instantly 
 relieves prolajysus of any of the pelvic organs, as 
 that of the womb, vagina, or rectum, restoring the 
 parts to their natural condition and relation. This 
 
EEGION OF THE TRUNK. 221 
 
 movement is invaluable in tliis class of cases. Indeed, 
 all other medical applications designed to meet the 
 ends here indicated, bear no comparison in value with 
 this simple movement. Bj repetition the weak parts 
 are strengthened, and a radical cure is effected. 
 
 M0DIFICA.T10N. — While in the position above de- 
 scribed, the hips may rise slowly upward, and after a 
 moment, slowly fall to the level of the elbows and toes. 
 This movement may be repeated six or eight times. 
 This mode of taking the movement is often more 
 agreeable, as well as somewhat more positive, and pro- 
 duces similar effects. 
 
 62.-elb0w-and-leg sidewise-lying, hips raising-. 
 
 Position.— ^'s-^o. 
 
 One arm lies 
 upon the trunk, 
 while the elbow 
 of the other rests 
 upon a mattress. 
 The trunk is ex- 
 tended horizontally, the lower leg lying with its side 
 upon the mattress, the other resting upon it. 
 
 Action. — 1. The hips are raised slowly upward, and 
 remain for a few moments lifted. 2. They return to 
 their first position. This action may be repeated four 
 or five times with each side. The dotted outline in the 
 cut shows the point to which the hips rise. 
 
 Effect. — This movement is strongly felt at the side 
 of th-e hi]) which is under at the time, and acts through- 
 out the whole extent of the side of the 'body. It also 
 affects the back. 
 
222 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 63- SHELTER BACK-LYING, HEAD AND LEGS RAISING. 
 
 F^g-fio- Position. — The 
 
 trunk lies horizon- 
 tally upon the back, 
 supported by a mat- 
 tress ; the hands 
 
 '/// W 'TTF "^\\T clasped upon the 
 
 U^yUJ^ \^ head; legs paral- 
 
 lel. 
 Action. — 1. Both the feet and head are raised from the 
 horizontal line at the same time, so as to cause the 
 body to assume a curved shape, and remain for a short 
 period. 2. They return to the commencing position. 
 This action may be repeated five or six times. 
 
 Effect. — Tliis movement is a very powerful one for 
 the abdominal muscles, affecting the visceral organs 
 derivatively. It also increases the force of the general 
 circulation, and urges the blood into the capillaries of 
 the system at large. 
 
 Modification. — Only the back may be supported, 
 instead of the whole length of the body. The effect is 
 similar. The cut above represents the movement as 
 being taken in this way ; the dotted outline indicating 
 the extent of the movement. 
 
 64.-BACK LYING, HOLDING. 
 
 Position. — The arms remain in contact with the body 
 at the sides ; the trunk rests with the back supported 
 by a single chair ; while both the legs and the head 
 and shoulders are suffered to obey the law of gravita- 
 tion, and fall below the horizontal position. 
 
 Action. — ^The body is allowed to remain for a short 
 period in this position. 
 
 Effect. — ^This is chiefly felt in the forward part of 
 
REGION OF THE TRUNK. 223 
 
 the body, which in this position is stretched^ or receives 
 eccentric action. The curved position causes consid- 
 erable pressure upon the abdominal contents. 
 
 65.-WING-STEIDE LEG-ANGLE STANDING, TEUNK VIBEATION. 
 
 Position. — The hands are placed upon the hips ; the 
 knees and thighs are bent to the greatest possible ex- 
 tent ; the feet rest on the floor about two feet apart ; 
 the trunk maintained in a position as nearly erect as 
 the position of the legs will allow. 
 
 Action. — The body is slightly raised by the exertion 
 of all the muscles of the legs, on w^hich its weight rests, 
 and is directly permitted to return with the force of its 
 weight to the same position. It should rise only a few 
 inches, and repeat the action a dozen times or more as 
 fast as possible. 
 
 Effect. — This is felt in the perineum, and is propa- 
 gated to the rectum, exciting its contractility to a 
 noticeable, and sometimes to a remarkable degree. If 
 the posture is maintained with difficulty, the back may 
 be supported by a smooth wall. This movement en- 
 courages an evacuation of the bowels in cases of con- 
 stipation. 
 
 66— OPEEATIONS UPON THE DIGESTIVE OEGANS.* 
 
 A great variety of motions may be given to one's 
 own digestive organs suited to different constitutions, 
 conditions of disease, develoj^ment of the region, 
 strength of the person, etc. A few forms are selected 
 for the reader's attention, which, if not entirely appli- 
 
 * In the inferior animals, the position of whose bodies is such that the trunk is 
 horizontal, the digestive organs are subjected to considerable molion at every step 
 taken ; and this motion is greatly augmented with the increase of the pace. The 
 upriglit posture of man in a degree precludes this motion that is inevitable for the 
 brute. This fact, however, renders it necessary that he should employ his reason 
 and intelligence in order to secure a relief he is so liable to need. 
 
224 REGION OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 cable for a given case, may at least prove suggestive of 
 some other that may act more to the purpose. 
 
 Position. — Lying u23on a couch, with the shoulders 
 raised and the legs in an easy position. 
 
 Varieties of Achon. — 1. Kneading. — The two fists, 
 strongly clenched, may be pressed upon the abdomen 
 so firmly as to cause the subjacent parts to yield be- 
 fore the pressure. This action is to be repeated for sev- 
 eral minutes over the whole region of the abdomen. 
 The movement excites the muscular contractility of 
 the tube, and promotes fecal discharges. 
 
 2. Shaking. — The liands are applied to each side of 
 the abdomen, and alternate pressure given to it, pro- 
 ducing a somewhat rapid oscillating movement of all 
 the abdominal contents included between the two 
 hands. This movement promotes venous absorption, 
 and removes congestion. 
 
 3. Stroking. — Each hand is applied to the region of 
 the groin, the tips of the fingers nearly meeting ; then 
 each hand is to be drawn slowly, wdth much pressure, 
 upward and outward. The movement has an efl'ect 
 similar to that of the first. 
 
 4. Circular Stroking. — ^The pressure of the hands is 
 made to follow the course of the colon, beginning low 
 upon the right side of the abdomen, passing around be- 
 neath the stomach, and terminating on the side oppo- 
 site. This movement also promotes fecal discharges. 
 
 5. Point Pressure. — This may be performed under 
 the short ribs ; the ends of the fingers are applied from 
 below, and strong pressure made with a tremulous mo- 
 tion. The movement excites muscular and nervous 
 action in the organs reached, and in certain cases re- 
 lieves pain. 
 
 6. Clapping. — The extended hands are made to 
 
REGION OF THE TRirNK. 225 
 
 strike any portion of tlie frontal region of tlie body. 
 The blows should be given with each hand alternately, 
 and at such a rate of rapidity and force as to produce 
 no unpleasant sensations. If there be a point where 
 pain is felt, the motion, at each successive application, 
 should for a period be given to surrounding parts, ap- 
 proaching the tender point gradually until the j)ain 
 disappears. 
 
 The doubled fist may be used instead of the flat 
 hand, when it can be borne. This movement promotes 
 absorption, and removes congestion. 
 
 Yakiety of Positiox. — All the above movements 
 may be applied in the standing position, with the 
 trunk a little bent forward, or stooping. 
 
 Effects. — The above motions are but imperfect imi- 
 tations of a few of the duplicated movements that may 
 be applied to the part ; their efifects, however, are often 
 highly salutary. 
 
 It is not necessary in practice to procure each of 
 these eifectsin a distinct form, because in every patho- 
 logical state there is a general similarity of condition 
 to that of other such states ; and it is pathological 
 states, more especially, that these movements meet. 
 Indeed, the eflects above described merge into each 
 other as do the applications themselves. With con- 
 gestion of the mucous membrane, there may be dry- 
 ness and costiveness ; or there may be an attempt at 
 relief by serous effusion or diarrhea ; but either of 
 these is relieved by overcoming the primary cause. 
 In either case the surcharged capillaries need to have 
 their contents impelled along their course. In either 
 case, too, the subjacent muscle needs more nutrition 
 and power ; in both the circulation needs to be equal- 
 ized, and nutritive absorption promoted. These results, 
 
 10* 
 
226 REGION OF THE TEUNK. 
 
 the motions above described, and others analogous, 
 tend in an eminent degree to secure. 
 
 67— AGITATION or THE ABDOMEN AND DIAPHRAGM. 
 
 Position. — Wing stride sitting. 
 
 Action. — ^This movement consists in contracting the 
 abdominal coverings and diaphragm by strong efforts 
 exerted in rapid succession, thus producing an oscil- 
 latory motion of the entire abdominal contents. This 
 may be continued for several minutes. 
 
 Effect. — This movement promotes the contractile 
 power of all the muscular tissues participating in it, 
 and the functional action of all the organs affected 
 by it. 
 
IlEGION OF THE ARMS. 227 
 
 EEGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 Kemaeks on this Region. — The region of the arms 
 is intimately connected with that of the chest. This 
 connection is not only suggested bj its contiguity to 
 the chest, but indicated by the anatomical conforma- 
 tion and relations of the parts. The arms are con- 
 nected with the chest by large and strong muscles 
 spreading themselves over a good portion of its surface. 
 The blood-vessels and nerves of the chest also extend 
 along the arms. The gymnast who uses his arms vig- 
 orously and habitually, never fails to secure an ample 
 development of the chest. We see this fact further 
 illustrated in the use we make of the arms in certain 
 duplicated moveraents for the purpose of overcoming 
 various deformities and even grave diseases of the tho- 
 racic region. 
 
 Several movements have already been described in 
 which very potent effects are incidentally experienced 
 in the arms and hands. Indeed, movements of the 
 chest and arms are so connected that no absolute and 
 precise distinction can be drawn between those of the 
 two regions, the one being necessarily affected by the 
 operations designed to influence the other. Power 
 may be exerted by the arms in every direction, in each 
 of which there will result a distinct effect appertaining 
 to both the arms and the chest. 
 
 But it is often highly proper to employ such move- 
 
228 REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 ments as cliieily affect the arms. The cases in which 
 one arm is much stronger than the other are ahnost 
 universal, indicating how general is the reprehensible 
 habit of making partial use of these important mem- 
 bers. So, too, an arm becomes useless from nervous 
 shocks, especially in children, and its growth partly 
 ceases. It then continues powerless, because the parent 
 or phvsician does not employ the means in his hands to 
 direct the nutritive actions into the channels in which 
 they are now so especially needed. These results are 
 only more conspicuous in the arms, the princi]3le being 
 equally true in its application throughout the body. 
 
 In all cases of great feebleness, the treatment must 
 at first be of a kind that husbands* the strength, while 
 it is necessary, at the same time, to direct the energies 
 and the nutrition of the system outwardly. The blood 
 of central congestion needs to be removed to external 
 members deficient in it. The use of arm movements, 
 forcible in proportion to the general strength, is the 
 proper mode of commencing the treatment of these 
 cases. By this means the pressure in the large cen- 
 tral vessels is relieved, and thereby a most important 
 advantage is gained in the treatment of the disease. 
 The novice Avill pay a costly forfeit if he neglects this 
 essential portion of the treatment, even in cases proper 
 for its application, especially as diseases situated in the 
 superior cavity of the trunk are the most difficult and 
 dangerous of all under any kind of treatment. By 
 using these precautions, however, the treatment be- 
 comes quickly and certainly beneficial. 
 
 The reader will notice that in the examples given of 
 movements of the lower extremities, advantage is taken 
 of the weight of the body or of some portion of it, which 
 weight is made to act upon the regions to which the 
 
REGION OF THE AKM8. 220 
 
 movement is principally directed. In this way effects 
 are- produced that somewhat resemble those of the da- 
 plicated movements. So, also, as we approach the up- 
 per portion of tlie body, advantage derived from this 
 source may be obtained by taking such positions as 
 throw a portion of the weight of the body upon the 
 arms. 
 
 68.-STEETCH BACKWAED-LYING, WEIGHT-HOLDING. 
 
 Position. — The arms are stretched^ the trunk extend- 
 ed upon the back, with the crown of the head pro- 
 Fig. 61. 
 
 jecting a little beyond the edge of the couch ; weights 
 are held in the hands. 
 
 Action. — The weights are held for a length of time 
 proportioned to the strength, the action consisting in a 
 holding. The cut shows the position. 
 
 Effect. — ^The weights not only task the muscles of 
 the under sides of the arms, but the arms serve as lev- 
 ers, by the action of which the ribs are raised and the 
 chest enlarged. There is little voluntary effort in this 
 movement, but much valuable effect is produced. It 
 is particularly advantageous for strong persons, but 
 useful also for the weak, if not carried too far. 
 
 Yaeiety I. — 1. The arms may be slowly raised, 
 maintaining their parallel relation to each other until 
 
230 
 
 REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 the J reach the perpendicular, when, 2, they are allowed 
 gradually to fall back again. This may be repeated 
 six or eight times. This mode of performing the move- 
 ment is somewhat easier than the first, and is attended 
 with similar effects. 
 
 II. The arms may describe an arc of a horizontal 
 circle on each side, repeating the motion three or four 
 times. This mode of employing the movement calls 
 other muscles into play, which it is sometimes desir- 
 able to develoD. 
 
 RACK GRASP, FORWARD FALL-STANDING, ARMS ANGLING. 
 
 Position. — ^The arms are 
 extended forward, grasp- 
 ing with the hands some 
 convenient object, as the 
 edge of a mantel or top of 
 a bedstead ; the body is in 
 forward-fall-standing posi- 
 tion, forming an angle of 
 about fortv-five de2:rees. 
 
 Action. — 1. The elbows 
 slowly bend outward, 
 while the body falls for- 
 ward, till the head is 
 brought into the immediate vicinity of the object of 
 support. 2. The elbows now slowly stretchy bringing 
 the trunk again into the commencing position. This 
 action may be repeated four or five times. The dotted 
 outline in the cut indicates the extent of the move- 
 ment, * 
 
 Effect. — In this movement not only the arms are 
 affected, but the chest is expanded, and the anterior 
 muscles of the abdomen are acted upon. 
 
REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 231 
 
 Yakiety. — Some means of support, about half as 
 high as that represented in the above cut, may be em- 
 ployed. 
 
 In this case the strain is greater upon the arms and 
 hands, and the influence upon the anterior muscles 
 of the abdomen is increased so as to elevate the ribs 
 and visceral organs. 
 
 70.-STRETCH'GRASP STANDING, HIP EOTATION. 
 
 Position. — The arms are stretch- ^'^^- ^^• 
 
 ed^ and a transverse pole, eight or 
 ten inches below the point of ut- 
 most reach, is grasped by them di- 
 rectly over the feet — these, as well 
 as the hands, being placed close to- 
 gether. 
 
 Action. — The hips bend to one 
 side, and then revolve in a circle of 
 which the diameter is as extensive 
 as the position of the body will al- 
 low. The revolutions are performed 
 eight or ten times in each direction. 
 The cut shows the position, and the 
 dotted outline the circle, in which 
 the hips revolve. 
 
 Effect. — Tlie hands and arms sustain nearly the 
 whole weight of the body, and the motion aflTords 
 action alternately to nearly all the muscles of the 
 arms. The same effect is also experienced in nearly 
 equal degree by tlie shoulders and chest, the ribs being 
 elevated. The size of the chest and the action of the 
 respiratory muscles are increased. The strong tension 
 of the arms also produces a derivative effect upon the 
 chest, and the hands are warmed. There is but little 
 
232 
 
 REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 exertion of the will expended in tins movement, and 
 consequently there is but little fatigue. 
 
 71.— HALF-STKETCH GEA8P STANDING, AEM TWISTING. 
 
 Fig. 64. Position. — One arm is stretched up- 
 
 ward, and the hand grasps a transverse 
 pole placed at about the height it can 
 conveniently reach, while the body is 
 standing erect. 
 
 Action. — 1. The trunk turns quite 
 round, without moving from its stand- 
 ing-point, which, as the grasp of the 
 hand is maintained, causes the arm to 
 be twisted. 2. It then turns in the op- 
 posite direction, not stopj^ing till the 
 arm is untwisted and twisted again in the 
 opposite direction. This action may be 
 repeated four or five times with each arm. 
 Effect. — This movement causes all 
 the muscles of the arm to act strongly 
 and eccentrically, it affects all the blood-vessels, small 
 and large, is strongly derivative, and warms the hands. 
 
 72.-YAED STPwIDE-SITTING, 
 AEMS TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — The 
 arms are extended at 
 either side in the same 
 straight line, body in 
 a sitting position. 
 
 Action. — The arms 
 are twisted upon tlioir 
 own lono;itudinal axi^■, 
 first forward, then 
 backward, alternate- 
 
REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 233 
 
 Ij ; the same position being maintained. Tliey may 
 be twisted eigbt or ten times each way. The position 
 is shown in the cnt. 
 
 Effect. — This movement engages all the muscles 
 of the arms in both concentric and eccentric action. 
 It is highly stimulant to the circulation, w^arms the 
 hands, and is derivative for the chest. 
 
 / 
 
 73.— STANDING, ARMS ROTATING. 
 
 Position. — The arms ^'^■^^■ 
 
 are stretched in the up- 
 right standing posture. y' 
 
 Action. — The arms are 
 made to describe circles, 
 perpendicular and paral- c'H ------_..... 
 
 lei with the body, the I "''--- 
 diameters of which are \ 
 twice the length of the \ 
 arm. After revolving in 
 one direction ten or a 
 dozen times, the direc- 
 tion of the motion is re- 
 versed. The cut shows 
 the position, and the dot- 
 ted circle the course tra- 
 veled by the hand. 
 
 Effect. — This move- 
 ment causes the blood to be retained in the arms and 
 hands, because the centrifugal force attained by the 
 rotation counteracts the return of venous circulation ; 
 while, at the same time, the arterial flow is assisted. 
 The consequence is, that the hands become not only 
 warmed, but absolutely swollen with blood, and the 
 tendency to cold hands is overcome. The movement 
 
231 REGION OF THE AEMS. 
 
 also relieves congestion of the chest. Besides these 
 effects, all the muscles and ligaments about the shoulder 
 joint, including those that are spread over the chest, 
 are strengthened. 
 
 Modification. — 1. Oue arm may be in wing position, 
 while the movement is performed, as described, by the 
 other arm, but changing after a suitable number of 
 .revolutions. The effect of this mode of performing the 
 movement is, perhaps, greater than if both arms re- 
 volved at the same time. The body accommodates 
 itself better to the single than to the double movement, 
 and the object is achieved in a shorter time, and with 
 less tendency to fatigue. This last advantage will be 
 especially appreciated by the feeble invalid. 
 
 2. Let the commencing be the rack position. One 
 arm may be brought backward on a nearly horizontal 
 plane, as far as it can extend, with a swinging motion, 
 and while returning to the commencing position the 
 other arm may be in the act of performing the same 
 motion backward that was before performed by the 
 first. These alternate motions may be kept up till fifteen 
 or twenty are performed. The dotted outlines indicate 
 the positions occupied by the arms anteriorly and pos- 
 teriorly in this movement. The body is required to be 
 in a more lax state in this than in the principal mo^^e- 
 ment. 
 
 74.-HANGING, SWINGING. 
 
 Position. — For this movement it is necessary to pro- 
 vide a swinging apparatus, to consist of a pole about 
 three feet long, suspended horizontally by ropes attached 
 to it at each end, and so high that it can be just reach- 
 ed by a person standing upon the floor. The higher 
 the ceiling from which the apparatus is suspended, the 
 
REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 235 
 
 greater the arc tlirougli wliicli tlie body ^^s- ^t. 
 
 swings, and the more desirable the ar- 
 rangement. Tlie two hands are to grasp 
 the pole, as represented in the cut. 
 
 Action. — ^The person gives a spring 
 with the feet, throwing himself power- 
 fully forward, and hangs by his hands. 
 The momentum thus acquired causes 
 him to swing for a time like a pendu- 
 lum, the feet describing the arc of a 
 large circle, of wdiicli the suspended 
 ropes and body together are the radius. 
 This motion may be continued as long as 
 the body can be sustained by the hands. 
 
 Effect. — This motion does not oc- 
 casion fatigue, since the will is but 
 slightly exerted, but the effects are 
 very important. A powerful derivative eifect, Iiaving 
 reference chiefly to the central portions of the body, is 
 produced, caused, 1. By the strong action of the nnis- 
 cles of the hands, arms, and shoulders, required to sus- 
 tain the body, the prolonged tension occasioning a 
 subsequent rush of the blood into the arms. 2. The 
 swinging motion produces a very great centrifugal 
 effect, which, acting upon the circulating fluids, causes 
 them to flow into, and be retained in, the lower ex- 
 tremities. In other words, the venous circulation is 
 for the time retarded, while the arterial is accelerated, 
 and the result is an accumulation of blood in the lower 
 extremities, expanding the vessels and increasing the 
 nutrition of that region. While these objects are being 
 attained, the equally important one of diminishing the 
 amount of blood in central portions of the body is also 
 secured, and the circulation is equalized. 
 
236 REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 Another desirable effect produced by this movement 
 is the elevation of the ribs, with consequent expansion 
 of the chest. It will be seen that the weight of the 
 body is suspended by the arms. But the arms being 
 connected by muscular attachments w4th the ribs, both 
 before and behind, the body is really suspended at the 
 walls of the chest in such a way as to force them outward, 
 and to allow the inspired air to occupy a larger space. 
 
 It is evident that in this movement most of the in- 
 dications for the treatment of chronic 23ulmonary affec- 
 tions of the various grades are fulfilled. The same 
 may be said in respect to the treatment of affections of 
 the liver, and the dyspepsia usually connected with it. 
 Hence, for chronic invalids of nearly every class, this is 
 a movement as important as it is grateful and easily 
 performed. 
 
 75._S WING-HANG-STANDING, TRUNK ROTATING. 
 
 Fig- 68. Position. — The hands 
 
 \ \ grasp the swing, in the 
 
 / / \ \ same way as in N'o. 74, 
 
 '=^^--^'' \®s=C^ ^^^^ ^^^^ f^^^ remain upon 
 
 / r ,'; n \\ tiiejioor. 
 
 ! X^ I > I \ -A\ Action. — The body falls 
 
 / \;^|'_/^ \jP^ \ ^^ ^^^® ^^^® ^y ^^^ weight ; 
 
 r'^^P I \^^A but being sustained by 
 
 I f'T V~f'J ^^^^ swing, it bends at the 
 
 L_K''\ /^^W^ ^^^^ ^^' shoulders, while 
 
 \ 'f \ / V / ^^^ ^"^^^' ^^' rather the 
 
 \ \ \ I / / ^^®^' remain on the floor, 
 
 \^ '\ \ / /^ / directly under the point 
 
 V^^\ ^\^ I / ^' / of suspension. 
 
 'j ^^^^ ^X^^/^^^;^^^^^ Action. — The body 
 
 ^'^^^^G^ now, by a little effort, is 
 
REGION OF THE ^VRMS. 237 
 
 made to revolve in a circle, the longest diameter of 
 which is at the shoulders, care being taken to keep it 
 looking constantly one way. It may revolve several 
 times in each direction. 
 
 Effect. — In this movement every part of the surface 
 of the body is stretched^ as the weight is thrown upon 
 it, and relaxed^ as the revolution throws the weight 
 upon other muscles. The intercostal muscles and those 
 of the arms are particularly subjected to the action, as 
 are also the muscles of the abdomen, back, and legs. 
 As this movement is accomplished with little effort, it 
 is very grateful and refreshing. It also develops the 
 the chest and respiratory apparatus, and is useful in 
 dissipating the unpleasant feeling of fatigue, or any in- 
 cipient congestion that ma}^ have been produced by the 
 expenditure of too mnch power in the practice of other 
 movements. 
 
 MoDiFicATiox. — Instead of revolving in a circle, the 
 body may remain stationary at any given point in the 
 circle ; as, for instance, looking forward. In this case 
 the anterior portion of the body is convex, the feet 
 being placed far back, and strong action is produced 
 upon the muscles of the chest and abdomen. 
 
 76.— TEUNK FOPvWAED-FALL HANGING, HOLDING. 
 
 Position. — The hands grasp firmly some object about 
 as high as the shoulders ; the feet and legs are extend- 
 ed backward, the toes resting on the floor ; the body 
 takes on a curved shape, the convexity being an- 
 terior. 
 
 Action. — 1. Tlie trunk straightens itself, so that it 
 forms a line diagonal to that of the arms. 2. It then 
 falls back into its curved position. This may be re- 
 peated two or three times. The dotted outline in the 
 
238 
 
 KEGIOX OF THE ARMS. 
 
 cut indicates the 
 G m m e n cing posi- 
 tion, while the figure 
 shows the position 
 attained by stretch- 
 ing. 
 
 Effect. — This 
 movement affects 
 the hands and arms, 
 the chest, the abdo- 
 men, and the legs, 
 upon their anterior portion. 
 
 MoDiFicATiox. — The bodj may take the position 
 shown in the accompanying cut, and hold for a few 
 moments. The effects are very similar to those of the 
 above movement, but perhaps a little more marked. 
 The top of a bedstead or a mantel will answer perfectly 
 well as a means for obtaining the position. 
 
 77— BACKWAED-FALL ELBOWS-SUPPOET LYING, HOLDING. 
 
 ^^'s- ''^- Position. — 
 
 The arms ex- 
 tended on ei- 
 ther side, in 
 yard position, 
 but the elbows 
 may be bent ; 
 the trunk is in 
 backward - fall 
 position, and is 
 supported by a cliair or ciisliiuned stool under each 
 elbow, while the back of the heels are supported by 
 the floor, the body being cai-efully maintained in the 
 straight line. 
 
REGION OF THE ARMS. 
 
 239 
 
 Action. — The position may be continued for about 
 one minute. The cut shows the position and action. 
 
 Effect. — This movement affects the back of the 
 arms, the muscles between the shoulders and under 
 the shouulder blades, and also those of the back ; it 
 strengthens these parts, and is derivative for the spinal 
 cord. 
 
 78— half-steetch support half-standing, stretching. 
 
 Position. — One arm is extend- ^'s- 7i, 
 
 ed horizontally, and being in 
 contact with some object, helps 
 to maintain the upright position 
 of the body ; the other arm is 
 stretched ; the leg of the same 
 side resting with the foot upon 
 a stool, while the other leg is 
 free ; the trunk is erect. 
 
 Action. — The action in this 
 movement does not consist in 
 change of place, nor in holding^ 
 but in putting all the muscles 
 of the standing side of the body 
 into a state of tension ; the ac- 
 tion of each muscle being ex- 
 actly balanced by that of its an- 
 tagonist. In other words, all of 
 the muscles of one side of the 
 body are stretched by a strong 
 
 exertion of the will. After the action has continued 
 for a minute on one side, the other side may undergo 
 the same discipline. The cut indicates the position. 
 
 Effect. — This movement is quite fatiguing, and is 
 strongly derivative in its effects ; it may be used on 
 
240 
 
 EEGION OF THE AKMS. 
 
 Fig. 72. 
 
 one side, when that side is much weaker than the op- 
 posite, as in jDartial hemiplegia, curvature of spine, etc. 
 
 79.— STEETCH-STRIDE STANDING OE STAE-STANDING, STEETCHING. 
 
 Position. — The arms are 
 stretched upward, and a little 
 outward ; the legs are in the 
 stride position, trunk erect. 
 
 Action. — An effort is simul- 
 taneously made by nearly all the 
 muscles of the body to reach 
 higher^ and this action is con- 
 tinued for a minute. 
 
 Effect. — This is a very fa- 
 tiguing movement, since it calls 
 for a powerful exertion of the 
 will to maintain the simultane- 
 ous action of so many muscles. 
 The effect is derivative, and 
 equalizing to the circulation, 
 and also to the nervous and nu- 
 tritive forces, for it stimulates at once all these powers 
 to harmonious and vigorous co-oj^eration. It drives 
 the blood toward the skin, and if continued, soon ex- 
 cites perspiration. 
 
BEGION OF THE HEAD AND NECK. 24:1 
 
 EEGION OF THE HEAD AND NEOK. 
 
 Remarks on the Region of the Head. — ^The motions 
 of the head are due to the action of the muscles of the 
 neck, some of which have their attachments at the base 
 of the skuU, and to the framework of the chest. The 
 neck is .provided with numerous and powerful muscles, 
 enabling the head to assume an extensive range of posi- 
 tions, and to perform a variety of most important move- 
 ments. These movements are useful, in a hygienic and 
 medical point of view, chiefly as they affect the circu- 
 lation of the blood to and from the head, and also as 
 enabling us to modify, to a limited extent, the circula- 
 tion and nutrition of the throat, and the several organs 
 of sense, as the eyes, ears, nose, etc., all of which are 
 liable to disease or weakness. These muscles of the 
 neck are also called upon to assist in removing certain 
 natural and acquired faults of position, or deformities, 
 not only of the neck, but also of the spine, of which it 
 is a part. In treating of the several movements of this 
 region, it is more convenient to refer them to the head, 
 since it is the change in the position of the latter that 
 constitutes their most conspicuous result, although it is 
 tlie neck that is the region to which the movement is 
 really applied. 
 
 11 
 
242 REGION OF THE HEAD AND XECK. 
 
 Fig. 78. 
 
 80 —HEAD TUENING. 
 
 Position. — ^The body may be in either sitting or 
 standing position, with the head erect, as in the central 
 figure of the cut, which is the commencing position in 
 all head movements. 
 
 Action. — The head turns upon its axis to the right, 
 so far as it can, and then, in the same manner and to 
 the same extent, to the left, thus twisting the neck. 
 The terminating positions of the moyement are shown 
 in the right and left figures of the cut. The action may 
 be repeated six or eight times each day. 
 
 Effect. — ^This movement brings all the muscles of 
 the neck into strong action, thus causing them to press 
 upon the vessels, and so aiding the circulation of the 
 blood in this region. 
 
 81.— HEAD FOEWAED BENDING. 
 
 Fig- 74. Position, — This is the same as is 
 
 represented in 'No. 80. 
 
 Action. — The head is bent directly 
 forward, as far as it can go, bringing 
 the chin close to the breast, as in the 
 cut. It is then carried up to the com- 
 mencing position. This action may be 
 repeated six or eight times. 
 Effect. — This movement is concentric for the front 
 
BEGION OF THE HEAD AND NECK. 
 
 243 
 
 part of the neck, and eccentric for the back. It is 
 sometimes advantageous on account of its influence on 
 the vertebral vessels, in removing headacbes. It is 
 also useful in affections of the throat. 
 
 Fig. 75. 
 
 82— HEAD BACKWAED BENDING. 
 
 Position. — This is the same as that 
 shown in 'No. 80. 
 
 Action. — ^The bead is carried back- 
 ward as far as possible. It then returns 
 to its first position. This action to be re- 
 peated six or eight times. 
 
 Effect. — ^This is nearly the same as 
 that in No. 81. The Mnd of action, however, is differ- 
 ent ; the eccentric action being in this case exercised 
 by the anterior muscles, while the concentric is effected 
 by the muscles at the back of tlie neck. 
 
 83.-HEAD BACKWAED BENDING AND TWISTING. 
 
 Position. — The same. ^'^- '^^• 
 
 Action. — 1. The head bends back- 
 ward, and assumes the position repre- 
 sented in fig. 75. 2. It then turns to 
 the right while thus bent, and then to 
 the left, and so on, alternating the mo- 
 tion exactly as in No. 80. 
 
 Effect. — ^This movement acts much more power- 
 fully upon the front of the neck than that in E'o. 80. 
 It is useful for its derivative effect upon the laryngeal 
 mucous membrane in case of congestion of that surface. 
 
 84— HEAD BACKWAED BENDING AND TWISTING (SCEEW 
 EAISING). 
 
 PosniON. — rhe head is bent forward and sidewise. 
 Action. — The head slowly bends backward, turning 
 
24:4 
 
 KEGION OF THE HEAD AND NECK. 
 
 tlie face -upward, while at the same 
 time the head turns upon its axis until 
 it looks toward one shoulder. The mo- 
 tion is like the turning of a screw. The 
 head may return to the primary posi- 
 tion, and then rise and turn in the 
 direction opposite to that previously 
 taken. This action may be repeated each way '^ve or 
 six times. 
 
 Effect.— This movement is useful much in the same 
 way as those previously described. It is also useful in 
 lateral curvature of the spine ; but in this case the 
 turning should be of course in only one dii'ection. 
 
P A 11 T III, 
 
 THE PATHOLOGY OF SEVERAL FORMS OF CHRONIC DISEASE. 
 
 THE RELATIONS OF MOyEMEN"TS.. 
 
 Kemark. — ISTo attempt will be made in the follow- 
 ing pages to go into any particular account of the 
 symptoms and progressive stages of the several affec- 
 tions that we have selected as the ^theme of remark. 
 Such an acconnt would so far swell the size of onr vol- 
 ume as to defeat its object. Besides, if such an effort 
 were possible within our present limits, there are many 
 excellent popular treatises, written in the interest of 
 different medical systems, that embrace a similar de- 
 sign, and do such ample justice to the subject as would 
 render any further attempt on our part in the same di- 
 rection a work of supererogation, to say the least of it. 
 
 In the following chapters, therefore, we have thought 
 it best to presume some knowledge on the part of the 
 reader in regard to the nature and symptoms of the 
 diseases noticed — a degree of knowledge sufficient, at 
 any rate, to enable him to refer the particular com- 
 plaint under discussion to some general class. It should 
 further be understood that the principles of the Move- 
 ment-Cure, which generally aim at the correction of 
 the primary, radical causes of disease, regard the sec- 
 
246 THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 ondary symptoms as merely effects, and consequently 
 as demanding less attention than they do in those plans 
 of remedial treatment in which the suppression of these 
 is regarded as the prime object of the practitioner's 
 solicitude. 
 
 The account of himself given by the patient to the 
 physician is really nothing more than a statement 
 crudely rendered of the evidences of the operation of 
 abnormal causes which it is the function of the latter, 
 through this deceptive vail of symptoms, to recognize 
 and remove. To suppress or ameliorate the symp- 
 toms while the cause remains, is but to practice a 
 sort of deception at the ex]3ense of the patient ; to 
 sing the song of peace ! jpeace ! in the time of trouble ; 
 to attempt to purify the stream while the work of 
 corruption is proceeding busily in the secret depths 
 of the fountain. 
 
 It will be my chief endeavor, in the following pages, 
 to expose the essential nature of certain maladies in 
 connection with their causes ; not in the light of the 
 ordinary, or what would be termed orthodox therapeu- 
 tics, but in that letter, truer light, as we think, that is 
 shed upon the subject by the Movement-Cure. We shall 
 endeavor to make manifest to the reader's mind, what is 
 clearer than noon-day to the writer's, to wit, the entire 
 therapeutic appropriateness (and we' use the word in its 
 full, original meaning) of the"cw?^e" to the many mor- 
 bid conditions to which it is now beginning to be ap- 
 jDlied ; and hence the propriety of claiming for it the 
 distinction of being, in the best sense of the term, 
 a philosophical system. It can not be said that the 
 views of pathology herein set forth are in the interests 
 exclusively of either of the two great antagonistic theo- 
 ries of medical science, the chemical or humoral^ or the 
 
THK KELATIOXS OF MOVEMENTS. 247 
 
 vital. The curative process, properly so called, is re- 
 garded as eminently a physiological process, in distinc- 
 tion from tlie critical and artificial^ and therefore patho- 
 logical actions that are the result of the means used by 
 nearly all other schools of medical practice extant. 
 These processes, it has been shown, present both chem- 
 ical and vital features; and that the movements promote 
 these processes, we have made it our business to demon- 
 strate in these pages. It will be seen that the function 
 of any defective locality may be exalted to the healthy 
 state, the circulation be made equable, innervation di- 
 rected to needy quarters, and so the health be restored, 
 not. by excitement and violence (which are ever fol- 
 lowed by depression and functional anarchy), but by 
 gentle, gradual, and harmonious tonic impressions. 
 
 These results are reached in an eminent degree by 
 the practice of the duplicated movements, the effects 
 of which, I hope to be able to show, may to a consid- 
 erable degree be realized by the single movements, as 
 explained and rej^resented in this volume. 
 
 INDIGESTIOX— DYSPEPSIA. 
 
 Under this general head may be embraced all the 
 common chronic disoj'ders of the stomach, with the re- 
 sulting loss of muscular power and disturbance of the 
 nervous system. The varieties of this disorder so 
 named are many, and the symptoms attending them are 
 legion ; but it is unnecessary here to go into a partic- 
 ular enumeration of them, since, being dependent all on 
 essentially the same causes, very little variation in the 
 treatment is demanded for all the countless phases of 
 the complaint. 
 
 The digestion of food may be regarded as a central 
 function, upon which the integrity of all the others 
 
248 THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 are, to a great extent, dependent, and all, tnerefore, 
 are apt to suffer in consequence of disturbance at this 
 point. Indeed, no function of the body can be proper- 
 ly understood when considered apart from its physio- 
 logical connection ; but the control which this exerts 
 over all the others is made painfully evident to the 
 se;: es in case of any considerable deviation, as many 
 a reader will be quick to acknowledge. Digestion is 
 the first in the order of the changes wrought upon 
 alimentary materials in the system, and when we con- 
 sider that the supply of this material is under the con- 
 trol of the judgment and will, the responsibility resting 
 upon us for the healthy performance of this act becomes 
 evident. 
 
 The term digestion simply implies the reduction of 
 alimentary material to a state of flnidity, whereby it is 
 rendered fit to enter the circulation and supply mate- 
 rial for the organizing processes of the frame. This 
 act is effected in the digestive cavity formed by the 
 alimentary canal, which, with its expansions and con- 
 volutions, extends qnite through the body, and pre- 
 sents an inner surface of several square feet. Each 
 portion of this canal is adapted to perform some dis- 
 tinct and necessary portion of this act, and the func- 
 tion is incomplete if any portion of the digestive sur- 
 face is incapable of performing its particular, allotted 
 share of the operation. 
 
 This change is effected in food by means of secre- 
 tions poured into the cavity and mingled with the 
 food derived from all parts of the digestive surface. 
 The extent of this surface is very much auormented bv 
 certain appendages to it called glands, whose secre- 
 tions are conducted into the cavity. 
 
 The amount of secretion thus daily poured into this 
 
THE RELATIONS OF M0YE1MENT8. 
 
 249 
 
 cavity for this exclusive purpose is very large, and 
 consists in the following substances : 
 
 -Saliva 3.30 lbs. 
 
 Gastric juice 14.08 " 
 
 BUe 3.30 " 
 
 Pancreatic juice 44 lbs. 
 
 Intestinal juice 44 " 
 
 The aggregate of these secretions amounts to more than 
 twenty-one and a half pounds of solvent secretions 
 poured into the digestive cavity, whose wliole object is 
 the solution of the two or three pounds of food that is 
 daily required to sustain the functions of the body. 
 
 These secretions, we all know, are derived from the 
 hlood^ and their cpiality and adaptation to the purposes 
 for which they are intended, we see at once, must 
 greatly depend on the quality of that fluid. 
 
 AYhile we are investigating the causes, and selecting 
 the remedies for indigestion^ it is necessary to inquire 
 into the separate influence exerted by these several 
 factors that take part in the act — namely, {\\Qfood^ the 
 secretions^ and those accidental ov iQm^0Y2iYj co7iditions 
 of the system that have so much to do in promoting or 
 impairing its health. 
 
 1. The quality of the food is a matter of much mo- 
 ment, and this is a subject that happens to receive, in 
 our day, much attention from the popular mind ; but, 
 unfortunately, this attention proceeds from a most un- 
 reliable quarter; for, sad to say, senses perverted by 
 long habits of wrong action are allied to the popular 
 mind, and hence its judgments are generally erroneous. 
 To the healthfully disciplined judgment, enlightened 
 by science and experiment, there is but one test allowed 
 for food — taste, fashion, must be set aside — the only 
 question to be put in regard to any given material is, 
 
 * Draper's Physiology. 
 
250 THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 Can it he assimilated f What is its degree of capacity 
 for supporting all the functioiial operations of the sys- 
 tem? And here let me say, we must carefully discrimi- 
 nate between supporting and exciting functional acts, 
 for substances belonging to the class of excitants, 
 though generally mixed with, and often regarded as, 
 food, yet in a true physiological sense do not really bear 
 this relation. Even the mechanical and the imponder- 
 able agents may excite^ but they certainly do not sup- 
 p>ort^ vital actions. They occasion waste, possibly to a 
 hurtful extent ; they never help forward in any direct 
 way tlie organizing or reproducing processes of the 
 body. The organic actions of the body have two grand 
 objects in view : 1st. The construction of the instru- 
 ments of vital action. 2d. The maintenance of the 
 vital temperature. To accomplish this there must be a 
 constant supply of materials capable of being organized 
 instead of those capable of being oxydized. But of all 
 the products of the organic world, whether produced 
 by the plant or derived from the animal, nature re- 
 stricts food material proper to sustain life to two dis- 
 tinct types. One is the albuminous^ consisting of vege- 
 table and animal aliment., and its derivatives fihrin., 
 gluten^ casein^ etc., and the saline matters associated 
 with these, all of which contain nitrogen in a certain 
 definite proportion. The other class contains no nitro- 
 gen., and is always of a bland nature, of which starch 
 and oil are examples. 
 
 A common cause of imperfect digestion consists in 
 improper food — that is, from a sort of food that does 
 not correspond with this description. Since the system 
 is able to dispose of other matters besides food, one 
 portion by the oxydizing process always going on 
 within it, effecting its destruction, and another portion 
 
THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 251 
 
 by its insolubility, the distinctive difference betweeo 
 what is and what is not food is apt to be lost sight of, 
 and hence the unconscious, but not the less harmful 
 abuse. 
 
 Another source of injury to digestion arises from 
 disregarding the proper relative proportion of the cor- 
 rect elements in the use of food. In this case, while 
 there may be an insufficiency of some of the elements, 
 others are in surplus amount, so that while the system 
 is loaded with materials, organization, or rather nutri- 
 tion, is at a low standard, because the necessary ele- 
 ments are not present in sufficient quantity. 
 
 Practically, the danger to the health arising under 
 this head comes from two sources : one, the employ- 
 ment of too much soluble — that is, saccliarine matter ; 
 and the other is the rejection of the saline constituents, 
 which are fully as important as the organic. These are 
 apt to be lost by mechanical refining, for the chief por- 
 tion of the saline elements of the edible grains exists 
 in the outer or coarser portions. 
 
 It is also important that the amount of food taken 
 be strictly proportionate to the needs of the system ; 
 in other words, proportionate to its power of dissolving 
 in the stomach and intestines, and also of its power of 
 elimination, by means of the oxygen respired. If 
 these bounds be exceeded, the materials thrust into the 
 digestive cavity are no longer food, but a harmful 
 foreign mass, perhaps even poisonous matter, affording 
 to the local nerves a cause of irritation that w411 affect 
 the whole system, and also to the blood a quantity of 
 matter rife with chemical tendencies, over which vitality 
 can exercise but imperfect control. 
 
 2. The secretions constitute the next great factor in 
 the digestive process to be considered. It is by these 
 
252 THE EELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 that the solution of food is effected. If these secre- 
 tions are deficient in quantity or vitiated in quality 
 from any cause, an imperfect sohition of food must re- 
 sult. A deficiency in quantity can never really exist, 
 because, being furnished by the vital powers of the 
 organism, the quantity must always be graduated to 
 the vital need, so that, practically, the want of a healthy 
 relation, in this respect, resolves itself into an excess of 
 quantity of food ^ the consequence of which was sho^vn 
 when speaking of the relations of the elements of food. 
 There can be no proper digestion unless the peculiar 
 chemical affinities of the true digestive secretions are 
 able to overpower all tendency to other chemical action 
 in the digestive mass. 
 
 The cause of a deterioration of the quality of the 
 digestive secretions arises partly from the cause above- 
 mentioned, and partly from a morbid condition of the 
 blood, and of the general nutritive offices of the body 
 connected therewith ; in other words, from the general 
 imperfect evolution of vital activity in the system, 
 hereafter to be noticed. 
 
 All the causes above enumerated have in them- 
 selves an intrinsic and direct injurious tendency, but I 
 am inclined to believe that the train of unpleasant 
 symptoms resulting from indigestion is due, to a large 
 extent, to consequent disturbance of the nervous system. 
 Tlie nervous susceptibilities of the digestive organs are 
 aroused by the various causes noticed, and soon be- 
 come habitually — morbidly active. The perce2)tions 
 not only become unnaturally acute but erroneous, and 
 the judgment is insensibly led to make false decisions 
 in regard to the conditions of the system. Stomach ir- 
 ritation is reflected through the nervous system to all 
 the bodily organs, and nutritive changes in remote 
 
THE KELATIOXS OF MOVEMENTS. 253 
 
 parts of the body are injurior.sly influenced tliereby. 
 But what is of more importance, the ganglionic centers^ 
 situated near the stomach, and posterior to it, whose 
 function it is to preside over dig-estion, become in- 
 flamed, and rendered incapable of performing their 
 ofiice. There is an insanity of digestion, quite as 
 much a disease as that of the brain, and more diflicult 
 of cure. The difficulty in either case consists in with- 
 drawing the morbid causes, which are apt to be self- 
 perpetuating in their nature. 
 
 The morbid activity of the digestive organs disturbs 
 the digestive process as we have seen by its direct in- 
 fluence, but this is only a portion of the troublesome 
 effects. The attention is concentrated continuously 
 upon the stomach and the digestive process. This is 
 contrary to nature, and is sure to disturb still further 
 the process. Xo good digestion is possible while sen- 
 sations in the stomach are habitually aroused by food, 
 improper in kind or amount, by stimulating beverages, 
 or by drugs. 
 
 There are two symptoms attending the state of things 
 here described, besides the ordinary ones of loss of 
 power, local or stomach symptoms, pain, acidity, etc., 
 but these appear only in aggravated cases. One is, 
 sensitiveness or soreness at the pit of the stomach upon 
 deep pressure ; the other is, a peculiar sensation of buz- 
 zing or ringing in the head, generally referred to the 
 region of the ears. There are many evidences that the 
 latter symptom is due to the connection of the nerves 
 of organic life with the cerebrum. The removal of 
 these symptoms is one of the earliest proofs of the res- 
 toration of the digestive power. 
 
 . 3. Another, and not the least important cause of 
 indigestion, consists of a defect in the general vital 
 
254 THE RELATIONS OF :M0YEMENTS. 
 
 actions of the system. Yiewed with reference to the 
 whole system, digestion may be regarded as being de- 
 pendent upon the general nutritive actions that are 
 constantly j)roceeding in every portion of the body. 
 These actions make digestion necessary, and give, at 
 the same time, its peculiar character to the secretion 
 provided for this purpose. The Moid of digestive ac- 
 tion, as well as the quality of the product^ will there- 
 fore depend on the degree of perfection with whicb all 
 the other processes of the system are performed; for 
 each, as we have seen, contributes to the blood the last 
 result of its action, and it is from blood thus replenish- 
 ed and enforced that the digestive secretions are drawn. 
 Thus it is that an imperfectly elaborated blood, loaded 
 with the results of the imperfect vital action of the tis- 
 sues, is returned to the stomach and intestines, and is 
 capable of affording only morbid secretions, which 
 must irritate, debilitate, and finally render diseased and 
 sensitive, these important and central organs. It will 
 be recollected that the amount of the digestive secre- 
 tions that is daily poured into the digestive cavity, 
 nearly equals that of the whole mass of the blood from 
 which they are derived, so that the morbid effects that 
 it is capable of exciting may be concentrated upon 
 these delicate and important parts. 
 
 Hence, the cause of indigestion is not confined to im- 
 proper food, but it is also, in a degree, referable to 
 those voluntary habits which are connected with, and 
 exercise an immense control over, the vital manifesta- 
 tions of the general system. It is to this source that the 
 quality of the digestive fluids is ultimately referable, 
 because they are produced from the blood common to 
 all parts, and by means of the exercise of vital power 
 belono^ino' to the local oro-ans, so that when the vital 
 
THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 255 
 
 energy of the general system is low, the digestion is sure 
 to suffer as a direct consequence. It is plain, then, that 
 the digestive process depends no less upon liow we act, 
 then it does upon lohat we eatj and therefore, that no 
 amount of dieting, however correct, per se, will he capco- 
 Ue of doing more than palliate some of the symptoms 
 of indigestion, and can never cure it so long as the 
 movements of the body are insufficient in amount or 
 faulty in Mnd. 
 
 In cases of indigestion arising from this cause, the 
 amount of j)ain suffered in the region of the stomach 
 affords no true indication of the severity of the disease. 
 Indeed, there is generally but little, or perhaps no 
 pain referable to that organ, even though the digestive 
 power be very small. The perceptive j^ower of the 
 nerves is deteriorated along with the general power of 
 the system. 
 
 The indications of disease afforded through the nerves 
 are very irregular and unreliable, and this fact serves 
 greatly to embarrass the efforts that may be made to- 
 ward a cure. The dyspeptic patient is generally tanta- 
 lized, for instance, by a morbid craving for food, and 
 there is little or no sense of satisfaction experienced 
 when food is taken, so that he never knows wlien to 
 leave off eating, nor when to begin. He also, in this 
 condition of the nerves, craves piquant substances and 
 concentrated food, which is often the worst for him, 
 and shows that the feelings of the dyspeptic, especi- 
 ally those accompanying this phase of the disorder, 
 are entirely untrustworthy. Such a patient should 
 hrst instruct his judgment, and learn to rely upon it, 
 and to distrust his setisations scrupulously, and also 
 consider that the physician whose prescriptions are 
 directed to the mere palliation of liis present sufferings, 
 
266 THE FtELATIOKS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 is not a safe professional adviser. The dictates of the 
 cultivated judgment must be strictly submitted to, even 
 though opposed to his perverted feelings, if so be he 
 would avoid the abysses of suifering toward which his 
 disease is pressing him, and into which thousands are 
 daily plunging, never to rise till Death comes to their 
 relief, or his brother, Palsy ^ quiets the tortured nerves 
 with his benumbing touch. 
 
 We are now prepared to understand what are the 
 proper means to be employed for the purpose of over- 
 coming, or, to use the phrase to which the popular 
 mind has been so long accustomed, of curing these 
 particular affections. These consist, in the first place, 
 in attention to the quantity and quality of the food. 
 In indigestion, the capacity, not of the stomach only, 
 but of the whole system^ to receive food, is impaired. 
 The quantity of food that may be taken by the system 
 always must depend on the general habits of the indi- 
 vidual as well as upon his condition at the particular 
 time ; on circumstances exterior to the body, as tem- 
 perature, as well as those within it, as mental and 
 bodily activity. With the consciousness of a lack of 
 nutrient force pervading the system, it is very difficialt 
 to resist the inclination to perform that act which for 
 the time being generally relieves the feeling. 
 
 On account of the morbid sensations in the stomach, 
 there is perhaps greater inclination to err in quality 
 than in quantity of food taken. As this matter is 
 treated with some elaborateness in another j^lace, it 
 need not be further discussed here. We will now only 
 caution the dyspeptic by suggesting that he can never 
 expect his health and strength to return to him while 
 his system is receiving through the stomach such mat- 
 ters as conflict with the tendency of the acting parts 
 
THE RELATIONS OF MOVE^SIENTS. 257 
 
 of the body to organize themselves, whether these may 
 be chemical products of morbid action, or food contain- 
 ing noxious elements, as too much alkali, salt, spices, 
 etc., or a larger quantity than can be eliminated by the 
 ordinary physiological processes. 
 
 Especiall}^ to be deprecated in this disease is the use 
 of drugs, even of the mildest kinds. The temporary 
 relief sometimes gained by this means is quite certain 
 to be followed by a proportionate impairment of pow- 
 er ; and the gravest features of the disease are con- 
 firmed by an habitual recourse to such palliative expe- 
 dients, and the unfortunate invalid so treated is apt 
 to lapse into a lamentable and sometimes hopeless 
 hypochondriasis. Even cases which recover after 
 (generally, it may be said, in spite of) the use of drugs, 
 serve but as dangerous precedents. 
 
 It has been intimated that voluntary action is the 
 most important means for maintaining or restoring the 
 integrity of the digestive function. This fact has al- 
 ways been popularly recognized, and in some imperfect 
 manner it has always entered into medical prescrip- 
 tions of every class. 
 
 The general reasons why movements should have so 
 important an influence upon the health, have been ex- 
 plained in a former chapter, and are contained in the 
 normal activity which is thereby induced in the assim- 
 ilative and depurative functions of the system — the 
 higher vital tone imparted to the essential machinery 
 of life, of which the digestive organs constitute so im- 
 portant a part. 
 
 It is particularly to be insisted upon that the di- 
 gestive power augments with every augmentation of 
 the resjnratory action, whether induced by exercise or 
 through continued exposure to low temperature, be- 
 
258 THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 cause this act lias the direct efl'ect of deterging the 
 blood, and causes the product of vital action to be elim- 
 inated through the emunctories, thus relieving the sys- 
 tem of those matters that would otherwise contaminate 
 and poison it. The dyspeptic, like the consumptive, 
 is generally a person whose habits of life have been 
 such as injuriously limit the amount of air respired. 
 Persons who confine themselves to the atmosphere of 
 warm rooms, and who seldom expose themselves to 
 currents of cool out-of-door air, find it very difiicult to 
 elude the disease in question. Exercise, and espe- 
 cially that afiforded by well-directed oiiovements, has 
 the efl'ect, we repeat, of urging the blood to the sur- 
 face. Free contact with the air, aided by baths, tends 
 to the same result. These means greatly stimulate 
 the respiratory process, and scatter, at the same time, 
 those central congestions which, if they give no further 
 trouble, serve at least to cherish the dyspeptic condi- 
 tion of the digestive organs. 
 
 While, then, it is a patent and an admitted fact that 
 exercise contributes more than all other things, drugs 
 included, to the restoration of the dyspeptic invalid 
 (we have the united testimony of physicians of all 
 schools, as well as of public opinion, to this truth), the 
 admission fails of eflPecting the good it should effect in 
 consequence of the prevalent crude and unphilosophical 
 notions that obtain generally in regard to the whole 
 subject of exercise as a remedial agent. Every one is 
 conscious that much of the forced exercise he obliges 
 himself to undergo, so far from being beneficial and 
 recuperative, proves decidedly injurious, and so he 
 jumps sagely to the conclusion that Ids ■particular 
 case is an exception, and that the more quiet he keeps, 
 the better. This difficulty arises from ignorance of the 
 
THE RELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 259 
 
 principles we have tried to explain, l^otliing is clear- 
 er than that when the nutrition is imperfect, the j)ower 
 of exertion must be proportionally limited. In pro- 
 portion as the ninscular power decreases^ it becomes 
 necessary to increase the efibrt of the will in order to 
 accomplish a given effect. This necessitates an inju- 
 rious expenditure of nervous power, at the same time 
 causes a preponderance of nervous over Tnuscular 
 action, which is fatal to the health. Ko exercise is 
 proper which does not tend directly to augment the 
 capacity for exertion, by increasing muscular nutri- 
 tion ; but this power is not increased, but on the con- 
 trary diminished materially if immoderate demand be 
 habitually made upon the nervous system. 
 
 Partial exercise, that is, exercise of some one portion 
 of the body exclusively, particularly if it be a central 
 portion, as frequently happens in some of the trades 
 and professions, is also detrimental ; for it is apt to 
 excite and maintain congestion in those delicate cen- 
 tral organs already affected by disease, or full of the 
 seeds of it, while it withdraws the circulation from 
 the feet and peripheral parts. It is in such cases as 
 these that discouragement is most apt to be expe- 
 rienced in view of the effect of exercise. 
 
 When persons are conscious of receiving injury in 
 this way, they should not conclude, as they frequently 
 do, that all exercise must be in the nature of things 
 injurious. Even much stronger exercise, if of the 
 right kind, and involving j^arts remote from the seat 
 of the disease, may be taken, not only with impunity, 
 but with the highest advantage. There is no more im- 
 portant lesson than this for the invalid world to learn. 
 
 All passive exercise, such as riding on horseback, or 
 in carriages, or by railroad, and also by sailing, are 
 
260 THE RELATIONS OF MOVEjSIENTS. 
 
 generally very advantageous in this disease. These 
 passive movements husband the will-power, remove 
 impediments in the caj^illary circulation, and assist 
 those actions in relation with which all nutrition takes 
 place. Tlie aeration of the blood is also greatly assist- 
 ed, as well absorption, both from the digestive surface 
 and from the system generally. In this way all the 
 j)owers of the body are equalized, and the organic or 
 formative processes are promoted. 
 
 Special movements are well adapted to fulfill all the 
 indications in this immensely large class of diseases. 
 The prescription should be so made as to affect all 
 parts of the body successively, commencing with the 
 respiratory region, and including at last the feet, legs, 
 abdomen, liver, and the stomach. This latter organ 
 should, at first, be attacked cautiously and tentatively, 
 or be let alone entirely. A difiicult case of indigestion 
 requires the duplicated movements, both because there 
 is too little strength for the single ones, and because of 
 the amount of control over the circulation which it is 
 necessary to acquire, and to which the single movements 
 can not attain. But the single movements are eminently 
 useful for a large class of persons that need to guard 
 against the approaches of disease, or to overcome its 
 milder forms ; also for the after-treatment of a case 
 cured by duplicated movements. The plan of treat- 
 ment in this disease does not materially differ in its 
 mpre important particulars from that which is appro- 
 priate in pulmonary affections. The most important 
 indications in both are to expand the chest, stimulate 
 the circulation in the extremities, also in the peripheral 
 portions of the body, and to promote the concoction of 
 well vitalized blood in all the tissues throughout the 
 framework. 
 
THE KELATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 261 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PRESCRIPTIONS.* 
 
 1. Half- wing, curve (weight held), kick-support half- 
 standing, trunk sidewise bending. Change. ISTo. 48. 
 
 2. Forward-fall head-support standing, leg-raising. 
 Change. 25. 
 
 3. Wing stride-standing, curtseying. 9. 
 
 4. Yard-sitting, arms twisting. 72. 
 
 5. Support half-standing, leg-rotation. Change. 23. 
 
 6. Yard-kneeling, arms-swaying. 46. 
 
 7. Sidewise-lying, hips-raising. Change. 62. 
 
 8. Half-wing, half-stretch, short-sitting, trunk-twist- 
 ing. 37. 
 
 9. Half-lying, abdomen-kneading. 66. 
 
 10. Hanging, holding. 
 
 After a formula like the above has been used for a 
 while, movements that affect the central portions of the 
 body may properly be used. 
 
 1. Arms angle reclined kneeling, arms stretching. 44. 
 
 2. Shelter, back lying, legs raising. 59. 
 
 3. Shelter, sidewise-bent, stride-standing, trunk ro- 
 tation. 59. • • 
 
 4. Stretch, half-walk, half-kneeling, trunk backward 
 bending. 48. 
 
 5. Sidewise-lying, leg-raising. 28. 
 
 6. Wing-stride kneeling, ringing. 45. 
 
 7. Half-wing, half-stretch, walk-kneeling, trunk- 
 twisting. 42. 
 
 8. Half- standing, leg backward raising. 19. 
 
 9. Wing-sitting, legs twisting. 24. 
 
 * The figures at the end of the line describing the movement refer to its number 
 as arranged in Part II. of this work. 
 
262 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 NEKYOUSNESS. 
 
 The sufiering of many clironic invalids, especially 
 those afflicted with disorders of the digestive organs, 
 consists in general not so much in absolute pain as in a 
 peculiar and somewhat indefinite morbid sensation, 
 which, for want of a more significant term, they de- 
 nominate nei'vousness. 
 
 NervouHness is apt to be regarded by people in health 
 as a trivial symptom. This opinion is founded, per- 
 liaps, on the peculiar, and often even ludicrous nature 
 of the phenomena, mental, moral, and physical, which 
 accompany it. If, however, if be regarded with refer- 
 ence to tiJe real sufi'ering exjierienced by the invalid, 
 or to the permanent nature of the malady, it must be 
 admitted to be one of the most serious and important 
 of the diseases which the physician is ever called upon 
 to treat. 
 
 In regard to the essential nature of the affection, 
 there would not seem to be room for much difference 
 of opinion. When the result of physiological action 
 is imperfect, we are at liberty to presume that there 
 must be a fault in some one or more, or all of the pro- 
 cesses whereby it is produced ; and such faults are 
 often called, in a general way, a perversion of the true 
 function which it is the office of the part to perform. 
 IS^ervous symptoms may be attributable to imperfect 
 
NEKV0USNE8S. 263 
 
 nutrition of the nerve-centers in which all nerve-force 
 originates ; and this again, as we have seen, is depend- 
 ent on the other physiological functions whose work it 
 is to maintain the general nutritive processes of the 
 body in harmonious co-operation. 
 
 Xervons symptoms exist in many grades of intensity, 
 even in the same person ; sometimes they arise through 
 depressed, sometimes through irregular, and sometimes 
 through greatly heightened functional actions of the 
 nerve-centers. The impressions which these centers 
 receive affect the consciousness at times to a degree 
 greatly beyond that to which it is accustomed. This 
 may not, however, be entirely due to the physiological 
 state of the centers themselves ; but in many cases 
 probably the intensified consciousness is owing to a 
 general morbid condition of the whole system, of which 
 the nerves of sensation make report, in their own pecu- 
 liar and unmistakable way. 
 
 In nervousness, the judgment itself suffers sadly 
 from the irregular action of the nervous system, for it 
 is obliged to depend, to a^ great extent, on the Evidences 
 which the senses afford. Now, the more the sensa- 
 tions and feelings are excited, the greater becomes 
 their control over the higher powers in council ; and 
 their perverted action insures wrong mental decisions. 
 In nervous disease, the sensorial powers immensely 
 preponderate, and the whole man is overwhelmed with 
 influences due to the action of a depraved and rampant 
 nervous system. 
 
 It unfortunately happens, that the state of the nerves, 
 and consequently that of the mind, re-acts on the phys- 
 iological condition in such a way as to perpetuate this 
 condition of things in spite of all that can be done 
 through the most judicious medical treatment. To the 
 
264 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 mind of the suffering indiyidnal, no evidence in regard 
 to liis condition and wants equals tliat of the senses ; 
 and these senses being perverted, the subject is con- 
 stantly inclined to make improper choice of means and 
 materials for the suj^plj of his wants and the rectifica- 
 tion of his disorders. He eats improperly, drinks im- 
 properly, acts improperly ; because the nerves that in 
 health speak truth, now have taken to speaking falsely. 
 Under the guise of friendship they deal treacherously 
 with him, and before he well knows what he is about, 
 he has been led into all sorts of errors and vices of 
 conduct, from the effects of which it may take him a 
 long time to recover. 
 
 Imperfection in the various nutritive actions has been 
 mentioned above, as a common cause of nervous dis- 
 orders ; and it was also intimated that such diseases are 
 most liable to occur in persons of intellectual habits, 
 and of delicate and refined tastes and sensibilities. 
 The reasons for this are very obvious. The aspirations 
 for honor or fame, fulfilled or otherwise, and the per- 
 plexities "and trials consequent thereupon, of which 
 such persons are always the subjects, occasion a great 
 waste of the vital power which should go to the nutri- 
 tion of the organs. The intense ardor, indeed, with 
 which afiairs are conducted by the great mass of the 
 people of this country, obliges the nervous systems of 
 men and women to act^ that is, to sufi'er waste and 
 repair, to a degree greatly disproportionate to tl with 
 which actions proceed in the other vital structures. 
 The consequence of this is, that the organic or vegeta- 
 tive life of all other tissues of the body is depressed. 
 A general depressed tone of vitality accompanies all ex- 
 cessive or inharmonious action ; and where the causes 
 continue to act, results must follow, as we see them in 
 
NEKVOUSNESS. 265 
 
 the multiform nervous complaints about us. One thing 
 we may set down as certain and incontrovertible : 
 nervous diseases do not occur in the absence of nervous 
 abuse. It matters not how the invalid may protest to 
 the contrary as respects his own particular case, the 
 existence of the symptoms in question is conclusive 
 evidence against him. The ignorance of the sufferer, 
 alas ! does not reverse physiological laws. That he has 
 only been led by the dicta of a conventional system is 
 not a plea that will serve to bring about a commutation 
 of the sentence already pronounced upon him. He may 
 bring forward the evidence of the senses in favor of his 
 habits, and the approval of the consciousness ; but 
 these arguments only prove a perverted state of the 
 senses, which his bad habits have fostered. 
 
 The victim of this form of disease is apt to com- 
 plain that his suffering is greater than that occasioned 
 by other diseases. He should remember that the ar- 
 rangements of his system which give rise to pain are 
 conceived in the highest wisdom, that the experience 
 of pain is designed in mercy by our Creator, and that 
 the objects of such experience are not fulfilled till he 
 has been stimulated by his sufferings to trace out their 
 sources, and thus enabled to pursue a wiser course in 
 future. In this light, pain is really the invalid's kind- 
 est instructor, and as strictly a blessing as enjoyment, 
 though a blessing in disguise. This class of diseases 
 furnishes to the physician a deeper study than he has 
 generally the time or patience to investigate thorough- 
 ly, and the sufferer seldom meets, from any quarter, 
 with the amount of intelligent sympathy which his 
 case deserves. 
 
 The nervous powers may be abused, and nervous dis- 
 ease induced by causes operating through either the 
 
 12 
 
266 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 physical or the mental system. The first class of causes 
 affect the sensory nerves, and those of organic life, by 
 direct impressions made by improper substances. The 
 habitual use of fragrant and pnngent seasonings and 
 inspiring beverages, which are stimulating and tempo- 
 rarily refreshing but not nutritious, is a most common 
 mode of abusing the nerves. The organic needs of the 
 system demand only materials that are strictly nutri- 
 tive. Whatever is received into the stomach of a dif- 
 ferent quality may impress the nerves and rouse their 
 action, and very agreeably, perhaps ; but this action is not 
 in the direction of, nor satisfSdng to, the healthful wants 
 of the system. This is so, because the stimulant sub- 
 stance is not adapted to the purposes of growth and de- 
 velopment ; thus is established a depraved habit of the 
 central nerves, from which spring, as from a poisoned 
 fountain, those morbid feelings, wrong thoughts, and 
 insane judgments that characterize so many in every 
 community. 
 
 Another cause of nervous distemper, and perhaps 
 quite as important as any other, is one perfectly sim- 
 ilar in mode of operation to that last mentioned, and 
 this is medication in general. The physician, whether 
 he so intends or not, addresses his remedies mainly 
 to the already too sensitive nerves. For as the percep- 
 tion of suffering is mainly through these, so by address- 
 ing this department of the organism is the conscious- 
 ness of pain frequently most readily overcome. In- 
 deed, the cause, in the estimation of both physician and 
 patient, is of secondary importance^ but both unite in 
 seeking present freedom from pain, or what in general 
 supplies the place of it, obliviousness to the existence of 
 the morbid condition. But though quietude, artih- 
 cially induced, may be graceful for the time, the in- 
 
NERVOUSNESS. 267 
 
 jury done to the misused nerves is permanent. Though 
 slight and almost inappreciable at first, this injury in- 
 creases witli the repetitions of the cause, and a diseased 
 habit, degrading the whole physiological and moral 
 man, is induced. This remark is directed against no 
 particular method or school of medication, but it is 
 equally applicable to all systems, that of the Water- 
 Cure included, so far as they seek to attain their pur- 
 poses by making strong impressions upon either the 
 internal or external nerves of sensation, or those of or- 
 ganic life. 
 
 The second, not perhaps second in importance, of the 
 two great classes of causes affecting the health of the 
 nervous system, we term the raental. If we take de- 
 light in those pleasures that are derived through the 
 senses, those that are obtainable by means of the emo- 
 tional nature exercise an equal, or even greater, fasci- 
 nation. From the sensorial we rise to the region of the 
 feelings, and thence to that of pure intellect, but each 
 of these fountains of enjoyment depends, after all, upon 
 a material and physiological source for supply. The 
 purest, holiest, and most commendable impulses and 
 actions, if cherished or pursued without a wise regard 
 to physiological interests, work mischief, and death at 
 last. This is because all the organic powers run to the 
 support of those actions which do most loudly call for 
 them. Men are too apt to shut themselves up in cer- 
 tain parts of the wondrous tenement of their being. 
 Some domicile themselves in the emotional, some in 
 the intellectual apartments, and never think of occu- 
 pying, much less of furnishing and keeping in order, 
 the other portions of the building. 
 
 In this class may be reckoned the multitude of hu- 
 man desires and ambitions fulliUcd and disappointed— 
 
268 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 the perplexities, jealousies, and strifes incident to the 
 battle and race of life, as well as the solicitudes, the 
 alternating hopes and fears resulting from the political, 
 moral, and religious movements in the community. 
 In Europe, where these latter questions are questions 
 of the state, in which the mass of the people are not 
 expected or allowed to take any considerable interest, 
 and where, also, the condition of the people, as regards 
 the pursuits of life, is mainly fixed, these diseases are 
 much less prevalent. 
 
 The causes above stated are amply sufficient to give 
 a nervous character to the diseases of chronic invalids. 
 Especially mast this be true, for reasons named, in our 
 own country. The reader will perceive the want of 
 relevancy of the ordinary medical means to meet the 
 exigencies of such cases. It is a condition which dis- 
 creet, conscientious physicians declare to be beyond the 
 province of ordinary medical skill, while they still re- 
 gard it as amenable to the milder, yet more potent 
 influences of hygiene, such as change of climate, scenery, 
 and mode of life. Hence, such are the means j)rinci- 
 pally advised by the more experienced and careful 
 among physicians, and often with great advantage, 
 though it must be confessed, at other times, with 
 wholly unsatisfactory results. It is reasonable to p]'e- 
 sume that incapacity for restoration in the invalid is 
 Twt the cause of failure in these attempts, but the real 
 cause of the failure lies in the imperfect or improper 
 system, or to that want of system that characterizes tlie 
 endeavors of many physicians in bringing these im- 
 portant means to bear upon the sufferer. 
 
 Those Avho have conceived a tolerably correct idea of 
 the character and modus operandi of movements must 
 be convinced that they are eminently adapted to this 
 
NERVOUSNESS. 269 
 
 class of affections. Practically, tlie treatment by move- 
 ments operates with all the certainty and directness of 
 effect of a specific. The value of the treatment by the 
 Movement-Cure has become apparent to the thoughtful 
 and scientific of many differing schools of pathology. 
 
 And why should it not be so ? If it be conceived by 
 the practitioner that the indications for treatment in a 
 given case are for detergents^ most abundantly do the 
 movements supply the means for accomplishing these. 
 If, in another, the general nutrition needs to be stim- 
 ulative, the movements furnish the means in amplest 
 measure for accomplishing this. If congestion is to 
 be removed, where will you find instrumentalities that 
 will do it more readily and thoroughly than the move- 
 ments ? If the peripheral circulation is to be exalted, 
 here are certain unfailing modes of securing this ob- 
 ject. 
 
 The principles involved in the Movement-Cure fur- 
 nish a ready explanation of the power exerted by 
 movements over the many forms of nervousness. The 
 doctrine of hcdance or equipoise., in the relative activity 
 of functions, will be more fully explained hereafter. 
 
 The system of movements has it in its power to elect 
 what function or force shall predominate in the man 
 brought under its influence. The several organic ac- 
 tions may be, as tliose of nutrition, of the circulation, 
 of waste, etc., waked up, so to speak, by movements in 
 any part or parts where they have become languid and 
 insufiicient, while at the same time undue action in 
 the nerves is brought under control. 
 
 It is important to notice that nervous symptoms, 
 wlien they come on with acute paroxysms, are most 
 frequently owing to visceral obstructions and derange- 
 ments, the nature of which, though often apparent, are 
 
2Y0 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 sometimes obscure. A morbid change suddenly occur- 
 ring in the contents of the alimentary canal may gen- 
 erate a peculiar product that poisons the blood or irri- 
 tates the nerve-centers of organic life, producing symp- 
 toms sometimes severe and occasionally of a strange 
 and fantastic character. These acute paroxysms gen- 
 erally subside spontaneously in a short time, and medical 
 interference wit-h them is of but little account, though 
 it often gets a great deal of undeserved credit. The 
 treatment by movements should be directed to the per- 
 fecting of the digestive powers, to the augmentation of 
 the functional activity of the liver, and to the restora- 
 tion of the secretions generally. By thus preventing 
 the occurrence of the morbid conditions named, these 
 troublesome attacks may be avoided. And if ever an 
 ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure, it surely 
 is found to be so in our experience of nervous disor- 
 ders — to the patient particularly. To the doctor^ in- 
 deed, especially if he happens to be possessed of a 
 homeopathically small practice, and an infinitesimal 
 conscience, it may look difierently. 
 
 The Movement-Cure supplies the means for arousing 
 directly the action of the nerves, but this is not usually 
 called for in these cases. Usually it is only necessary 
 to treat the invalid of this class with reference to his 
 general health, to the condition of the stomach, liver, 
 bowels, circulation of the head and feet, etc. The 
 patent disorder is usually a concomitant and symptom 
 of some other — perhaps far graver — affection which 
 the judicious and acute physician will discover, and 
 when this is overcome, the nervousness will surely — 
 gradually, it may be — sometimes very quickly — subside. 
 
 If the invalid reader has read carefully the chapters 
 treating of the rules and principles which are laid 
 
NERVOUSNESS. 271 
 
 down as tlie basis of the movement practice, lie will 
 now be a])le, witliont much difficulty, to frame a pre- 
 scription suited to his own particular case. We take 
 it for granted, of course, that he ]30ssesses a reasonable 
 degree of intelligence and judgment. 
 
 Seminal Disease. — This peculiar and distressing af- 
 fection is an indication of a diseased state of the nerves, 
 rather than of the organs to which it is commonly re- 
 ferred. It very frequently accompanies that state of 
 general nervousness described above; but sometimes 
 those nerve-centers that are situated in the lower sec- 
 tion of the spinal cord, from which these organs draw 
 their powder, are tlie principal seat of the trouble. In 
 either case there is a very great amount of mental de- 
 pression and lassitude accompanying this disease, the 
 person so afflicted being generally unfitted for busi- 
 ness and society, and for any of the enjoyments of life. 
 The abuse of this portion of the nervous system prob- 
 ably brings down upon the sufferer regrets more bit- 
 ter and a remorse more stinging than that of any oth- 
 er — a fact which indicates the important relations these 
 functions sustain both to the material and the mental 
 system ; and we all can understand how it is that intense 
 mental pain should make a part of the penalty attached 
 by nature to such abuses. But, independently of cer- 
 tain special and well-known causes, the affection often 
 appears as one of the resnlts of general nervous debil- 
 ity or irregular distribution of nerve-power ; and in all 
 cases its treatment, to be successful, must be general 
 rather than topical. Indeed, topical treatment, in these 
 cases, is often much worse than useless. 
 
 Persons afflicted with these symptoms are commonly 
 the easiest dupes in the world of audacious charlatanry. 
 
272 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 Their intense desire for restoration disposes them to 
 be credulous, and to grasp at straws, while the nec- 
 essary weakness of the investigating faculties which 
 accompanies the disease, alike unfits them for the per- 
 ception of their true condition and for a choice of 
 proper remedial means. Thus, frequently, the victim 
 continues to swallow nostrums which, by increasing 
 the nervous irritability of his system, can only aggra- 
 vate his disorder, till finally he becomes a confirmed 
 hypochondriac, or some more formidable disease sets 
 in, and death ends his woes. 
 
 The prime indication in this afi'ection is to allay 
 nervous excitability. The mode of eflecting this has 
 already been pointed out. The treatment required in 
 this class of cases does ..not differ essentially from that 
 required for general nervousness or for neuralgia. 
 The morbid nutrition of the nerve-centers, upon which 
 this and the other forms of nervous disease depend, 
 can not be perpetuated at the same time with full and 
 complete nutrition of the muscles, and the general sat- 
 isfactory state of the organic life which attends this 
 condition of the muscles. In persons much emaciated, 
 and especially those who have passed far into the hy- 
 pochondriacal condition, the general health must be so 
 far restored that these latter symptoms shall disappear 
 before the difficulty in question can be entirely re- 
 moved. But if the health be not too far wasted, the 
 relief of this difficulty is in general very speedy. In 
 some cases, treated by duplicated movements, the dis- 
 ease has been cured without difficulty. 
 
 It can hardly be expected that the single movements 
 will be so efficient in the treatment of this malady as 
 the duplicated, in cases especially where the nerves are 
 greatly disordered. Yet I doubt not their judicious 
 
NERVOUSNESS. 273 
 
 use would prove all-sufficient in a large number of 
 cases, if persons now resorting to other expedients — 
 expedients that can not bear the test of common sense 
 and true science — would but try these simpler and 
 truly rational means. 
 
 Neuralgia. — This is a disease characterized by great 
 suffering ; but it is usually unaccompanied with the 
 other ordinary concomitants of inflammation, such as 
 swelling, heat, and redness, and frequently there is an 
 absence even of soreness. Hence it is presumed that 
 the cause of the pain is confined to the nervous struc- 
 ture itself, and is not referable to any morbid condi- 
 tion of the vital structures to which the painful nerve 
 is distributed. jS'euralgia may attack any portion of 
 the body, whether internal or external ; it may be con- 
 fined to a particular locality, or it may affect the gen- 
 eral nervous system through all its ramifications. 
 
 To understand this affection at all, it is necessary to 
 inquire first into the nature and causes of jyain. As 
 this phenomenon is exhibited by the sensory nerves, it 
 is evident that it bears a relation to their ordinary 
 function. Indeed, pain, as well as sensation in general, 
 has its uses, which consist in informing the mind, not 
 only of the nature of objects in contact with the nerve, 
 but also of the incompatibility of certain of them with 
 the vital purposes. 
 
 We know but little of the chemistry of the inter- 
 cellular fluids. It is not unlikely that the peculiar 
 quality these juices in some depraved states of the sys- 
 tem acquire may give rise to the symptom in question, 
 without sensibly afl'ecting vital structures of any other 
 kind. However this may be, the affection seldom 
 yields to ordinary medical influences ; but it is gen- 
 
 12^ 
 
274 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 erallj treated with reference merely to its palliation — 
 b}' means which obliterate, for the time, the conscious- 
 ness of pain, rather than remove its cause. This can 
 be done by stupefying drugs ; but, alas ! the pain re- 
 turns when the effects of the anodyne pass off. 
 
 It is absurd to entertain the expectation that this dis- 
 ease will vanish while the nutritive processes are car- 
 ried on in an imperfect way. The system must be 
 relieved of its burden of effete matter, and arterial 
 blood, rich in oxygen, must again find its way freely to 
 every structure before any permanent benefit can be 
 experienced. 
 
 How it is that movements effect the removal of neu- 
 ralgic pain, will be obvious upon a little reflection. 
 The analogies afforded by certain physiological phe- 
 nomena throw light upon this matter. For instance, 
 the amount of force put forth by a muscle corresponds 
 with the amount of change that takes place in that 
 muscle during its action. In like manner we argue 
 from manifestations of nervous power the extent of the 
 changes going on in the substance of the nerves, both 
 centers and conductors. Pain, however severe, is but 
 the result of functional play, and is the representative 
 of nerve-power, and consequently of nutritive change 
 in the inner tissue of the nerve itself. If the nerve be 
 so much diseased, or have undergone such a structural 
 change as not to be able to perform its function, one is 
 no longer conscious of pain in the part. Pain, then, is 
 not simply a result of action, but of excessive action of 
 the nerves in the direction in which they manifest 
 their power, and it consequently implies excessive, 
 though perhaps perverted, nutrition of the nerve-sub- 
 stance. 
 
 The therapeutic indications deducible from these 
 
NERVOUSNESS. 276 
 
 principles are plain. Tlie restoration of nervous action 
 to the healthy standard depends on a depression of the 
 activity of the nerves involved. This efiect readily fol- 
 lows the excitement of muscular action. For it is 
 found that in proportion to the increase of the nervous 
 activity, is there an abatement of muscular nutrition. 
 The limb afflicted with sciatica becomes weak, and it 
 is noticeable that the neuralgic subject generally has 
 but little muscular power ; the nutritive effort is con- 
 centrated upon the excited nerves. That this pervert- 
 ed nutrition of the nerve-substance is an important 
 element in neuralgia is forcibly proved by the imme- 
 diate subsidence oftentimes of neuralgic pain when the 
 activity of contiguous muscles has become exalted. 
 That this is so is unquestionable, whatever theory may 
 be adopted in regard to the philosophy of the matter. 
 It is a most significant fact that robust people are but 
 little liable to attacks of neuralgia. Those most afflict- 
 ed with the disease in question, are the weakly ; those 
 who have imperfect digestion, sallow complexions, and 
 are poorly nourished. To perfect the nutritive opera- 
 tions, we consider the most imj)ortant indication in our 
 treatment of these cases. To effect this purpose, the 
 movements are entirely sufficient. By these the func- 
 tions of the outlets of the body are encouraged, and 
 waste matters are dismissed ; so that those matters 
 wanted from the alimentary canal, to subserve nutri- 
 tive purposes, are selected and conveyed by the blood 
 to their various points of destination. This is espe- 
 cially the case with those saline elements of the blood, 
 without which the organizing processes can not take 
 place. 
 
 The most painful cases of neuralgia are those attribu- 
 table to mineral poisoning, incident to the practice of 
 
276 NERVOUSNESS. 
 
 various trades, such as the working of gold with mer- 
 cury, or other metals, or their salts. The use of mineral 
 drugs, as a medicine, is also a fruitful source of this 
 affection. Many a person, in consequence of a course 
 of mercury, is ever after subjected to attacks of neu- 
 ralgia. Even in these obstinate cases, the movements 
 would probably prove useful, since no other means are 
 so effectual as these in dislodging and conveying foreign 
 matters from the system. 
 
 The prescription for a case of neuralgia should be so 
 arranged as not only to include every part of tlie body, 
 affecting all the blood-purifying and blood-making pro- 
 cesses, but especially so as to act upon the part subject 
 to pain. With duplicated movements the application 
 can be nicely adjusted to the needs of the local nutri- 
 tion, and an important part of the prescription will be 
 the passive element, consisting of stroking, clapping, 
 punching, etc., as the case may require. The single 
 movements will be the next best substitute, and the 
 passive portion may be applied by one's self to such 
 regions of the body as can thus be reached. It is not 
 necessary to say that when the neuralgic disorder is 
 local, such movements should be chosen as will act on 
 the muscles of the part, especially upon those near to 
 the seat of the pain. 
 
SCROFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 277 
 
 SCROFULOUS AFFECTIOISrS. 
 
 The scrofulous diathesis manifests itself in a great 
 variety of symptoms, differing according to constitution 
 and age. In children, it is denoted by a peculiar pallor 
 of countenance, dullness of complexion, liypertrophied 
 or inflamed mesenteric glands, and tumid abdomen, 
 bowels alternately loose and costive, capricious appe- 
 tite — frequently too urgent — shrunken limbs, fetid 
 breath, indisposition for play. Eruptions of various 
 kinds may occur upon the skin of the face or other 
 parts of the body, and swellings upon or about the 
 neck of an indolent character often appear. The scrof- 
 ulous child often presents a haggard, almost wild ap- 
 pearance, and its blue veins are painfully prominent. 
 Sometimes the head becomes abnormally developed, 
 accompanied occasionally by a precocity of intellect, 
 which may be accounted for by the larger amount of 
 nutrition diverted to the head, in consequence of im- 
 pediments in the peripheral circulation, while the ex- 
 tremities are at the same time illy nourished. 'Not 
 infrequently serous effusion and death by dropsy are 
 the final results of this unnatural flow of blood and 
 nervous influence to the head. 
 
 In youth, the most striking symptoms of the affection 
 are enlarged glands of the neck, fragility of form, nar- 
 rowness of the chest, and a strong tendency to cough 
 
278 SCKOFULOUS AFFEC'lIONS. 
 
 and lung disease, which not unfrequeutly terminate in 
 pnhnonaiy consumption. 
 
 In adults, the morbid, action is apt to center in the 
 lungs, in disease which, as commonly treated, is gen- 
 erally incurable. 
 
 The intelligent reader hardly needs to be told that 
 in this malady there is a period anterior to that of its 
 outward manifestation, when it exists in an unrecog- 
 nized and latent form, and is associated immediately 
 with its producing causes, when vicious physiological 
 action is clearly seen to depend upon vicious atomic 
 relations ; a period, in short, when sufficient knowledge 
 and a correct practice would furnish an effectual bar to 
 its further progress. But as such knowledge is only 
 acquired under the spur of feelings resulting from the 
 presence of the disease in its developed state, we must 
 be content to bring into requisition as curative^ means 
 that ought to have ^yqx^^ pre^Dentlve. 
 
 It is evident that in this disease the results of the 
 vital processes are incompletely attained. The mesen- 
 teric glands and lymphatic vessels become clogged 
 with the materials of an imperfect nutrition, while the 
 skin and lungs execute their functions in an unsatis- 
 factor}" manner. The result is, either that the nutri- 
 tive elements become imperfectly vitalized, or else that 
 the matters destined to be cast out as waste from the 
 system, fail to become converted into the usual soluble 
 forms of carbonic acid, water, and urea, the legitimate 
 products of these important processes. Hence occur 
 the excess of albuminous material, and the imperfect 
 and irregular cells that characterize the scrofulous de- 
 posits of the lungs, glandular system, etc. Disease 
 being essentially incomplete or ineffectual action (pa- 
 thology being simply a modified physiology), it can 
 
SCROFULOUS AFFi:CTiOXS. 279 
 
 occur only tlirougli defect of the conditions essential to 
 the 2:)erfect development of the system in all its parts 
 and functions. The nature of the mischievous agents 
 that concur in the production of these conditions is 
 learned only by a study of the disease during its de- 
 A-elopment and subsequent progress. 
 
 In this way we discover among the prominent causes 
 of this disease, insufficiency of pure air^ lights and ex- 
 ercise^ and want of cleanliness. 
 
 We have only to look into the abodes of poverty and 
 squalor for confirmation of this statement. Every city 
 physician has abundant opportunities for studying all 
 forms of this disease in connection with these causes. 
 
 But the wealthy, and those who have it in their 
 power to command the conditions of health, are quite 
 as apt to be afflicted with scrofula in one or other 
 of its forms, and in their case it is evidently the result 
 of the same causes that produce it among the poor. 
 For the real hygienic condition of those whose circum- 
 stances and social position are so ditierent, are often 
 very much alike. For while the one class is deprived 
 of fresh air and sunlight by being confined in low and 
 crowded localities, the other suffers an equal depriva- 
 tion through the agency of shutters, heavy window- 
 drapery, and interior rooms, aggravated by the choking 
 dust and corrupt air, which are the inevitable con- 
 comitants of fashionable upholstery and cai-peting. In 
 both cases, respiration is rendered ineffectual, through 
 lack of healthful motion and purity of the air, and 
 these effects are aggravated by want of exercise and 
 good habits on the part of the persons thus exposed. 
 
 We must call the reader's attention to the fact, that 
 it is not the uncleanness which is external to the body 
 that exercises the most deleterious influence upon the 
 
280 SCKOFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 
 
 health. It is not till matters foreign to the j)nrposes 
 of the body become constituents of its substance, that 
 they can interfere to any great extent with the vital 
 operations. The liability of being poisoned through the 
 lungs is evidently immeasurably greater than of being 
 poisoned through the skin, for volatile and soluble 
 poisons are brought in contact with the blood through 
 the one avenue, while through the other there can pen- 
 etrate only insoluble and solid matters. Indeed, no 
 amount and thoroughness of washing and bathing are 
 etfectual if other habits are such as to preclude a free 
 access of air to the skin and lungs. There are no hy- 
 gienic or medical procedures which can possibly com- 
 pensate, or begin to compensate, for this want. Thor- 
 ough cleanliness preserves the blood as well as the 
 external cuticular covering uncontaminated. The illy 
 clad children of the street, though they may suffer un- 
 told deprivations, and be subjected to the most un- 
 wholesome dietetic regimen, yet for the most part 
 enjoy good health ; because, though unwashed, they 
 are essentially purified within through the wholesome 
 effect of the air to which they are through so many 
 hours of the day exposed ; while the occupants of the 
 dark and dusty chamber (a luxurious one, it may be) 
 are sickly and scrofulous from the contrary condition 
 of things. Even the dumb animal, caged and treated 
 after a similar cruel fashion, suffers from scrofula and 
 consumption, and manifests symptoms throughout the 
 progress of the disease similar to those under which 
 his lellow human sufferer languishes. 
 
 The interesting question in regard to the origin of 
 scrofula is frequently broached. There is no doubt 
 but that hereditary influences may j)roperly be recog- 
 nized as among the most important conditions deter- 
 
SCROFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 281 
 
 mining this form of disease. For the original form of 
 the body is undoubtedly inherited, and the narrow 
 chest of the scrofulous child not less than the color of 
 his eyes or contour of his face. But the practice of the 
 Movement-Cure instructs us that the shape and size of 
 the members and regions of the body may be wonder- 
 fully modified by judicious training, as may the slight- 
 er temporary or local effects of physiological lapses be 
 counteracted by appropriate medical means. There 
 is, indeed, much reason to believe that if all the con- 
 ditions of health were supplied to the greatest extent 
 possible, they would quite neutralize the power, im- 
 mense as it is, of bad hereditary influences, and re- 
 store the faulty constitution, after a generation or two, 
 to its pristine vigor. But we all know how fearfully 
 rapid is the decline of persons of originally defective 
 constitution, when subjected to unfavorable influences. 
 The knowledge of such quicksands in the channel of 
 life should be effectual in inciting persons to make that 
 acquaintance with the physiological chart that shall 
 enable them to avoid the dangers that are ever threat- 
 ening to wreck them or their j)Osterity after them. 
 
 With the indications for the treatment of scrofula 
 that are derived from a careful examination of its 
 causes, it is strange that that such palliatives of symp- 
 toms as gross animal oils, alcoholic and narcotic stim- 
 ulants, iodine, etc., should ever have been proposed as 
 curatives. How, we ask, can any agent prove cura- 
 tive while the causes above mentioned continue to op- 
 erate in full force? "Wliat is evidently required is, 
 the securing of a greater degree of energy in all the 
 formative or organic actions of the system. Especially 
 must those agencies which favor the oxydizing pro- 
 cesses in the blood and solid tissues be brought into 
 
282 SCKOFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 
 
 active play, sucli as lights exercise^ and wliolesome and 
 invigorating food. With these indications fulfilled, 
 there are no others left for the drng to accomplish, i 
 Tiirongli the assimilation of oil or spirits, the disease 
 may be temporarily masked, and iodine, holding mncli 
 the same chemical relation to the system as oxygen, 
 only less potent, may do some good, bnt it mnst needs 
 be temporary and uncertain. 
 
 Movements affect the scrofulous subject more like a 
 specific than any other known means. They give di- 
 rection and energy to the vitalizing processes thi-ough- 
 out the body, cause a renewal of the fluids of the 
 clogged glandular system, and so relieve glandular 
 congestion, and are the most direct and powerful 
 means for supplying oxygen to the impoverished blood. 
 In this way the non-vitalized and imj^erfectly vitalized 
 matters of the blood, and of the body generally, are 
 reduced, and the system relieved from them ; the 
 chest is enlarged, and the power of the system to con- 
 tinue its multiform operations in a healthful manner, 
 maintained and augmented. 
 
 The scrofulous subject needs to press into his service 
 every available hygienic resource. He can not effectual- 
 ly combat the advancing disease simply by attending to 
 one or two particulars of remedial hygiene. By so doing 
 he will be as apt to encourage the approaches of the 
 malady as to oppose them. He should jDarticularly 
 heed such suggestions as we have advanced under the 
 head of Hygiene, regarding abstinence from all drugs, 
 condiments, heating beverages, stimulauts, etc., and 
 should adhere to a simple nutritious diet, selecting 
 such food as possesses tlie particular elements he needs. 
 He must not compel his digestive apparatus to reduce 
 needless matters to the necessary forms in which they 
 
SCKOFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 283 
 
 may find their exit from the body ; for all such mat- 
 ters require the oxygen that might and ought to be 
 employed in eliminating the disease. 
 
 The strength, in these cases, is generally already im- 
 paired, and the patient, consequently, should avoid 
 such exercises as tend to exhaust the physical powers. 
 Iliding and driving are particularly beneficial to liim, 
 because, while so engaged, he is not only in contact 
 with the best air constantly renewed, but the shaking 
 that he thus gets is particularly useful in assisting the 
 clogged and sluggish circulation, both of the glandu- 
 lar system and of the general capillaries. Long jour- 
 neys, if the circumstances of the patient permit of 
 such indulg-'ence, are highly useful, because thereby 
 the above-mentioned advantages are not only secured, 
 but they are continued for a length of time. Besides, 
 the invalid is thus carried beyond the sphere of the 
 particular influences that at first planted and afterward 
 served to foster his disease. We can not be too ex- 
 plicit or emphatic upon this point. 
 
 It has been noticed that in this disease, as in con- 
 sumption, want of compass in the breathing organs is a 
 prominent impediment to recovery, though it is proba- 
 ble that defective action of these organs is the more 
 common one. The deficiency in dimensions may be 
 either congenital or acquired. In either case it is sus- 
 ceptible of remedy, and it should be one of the first 
 objects of our attention in entering upon the treatment 
 of such a case, whether the subject be either child, 
 youth, or adult. The circumference of the chest and 
 waist may be astonishingly increased by proper dis- 
 ciplinaiy measures, and the several cubic inches of 
 increased capacity that is thus afforded to the lungs of 
 course increases the respiratoi-y ability in a conimen- 
 
284 SCROFULOUS AFFECTION'S. 
 
 surate degree. The change in the health for the better, 
 after entering upon snch a course, immediately becomes 
 manifest. The food is thereby not only reduced to 
 fluidity, and enabled to pass the digestiv^e surfaces into 
 the blood, but becomes transformed into the healthy 
 vital element of the body, instead of those low organic 
 forms which afford an obstruction, instead of an assist- 
 ance to the healthy growth of the system. A higher 
 vital tone and energy is thus secured, and good health 
 is the natural and necessary consequence. 
 
 The duplicated movements are demanded if the case 
 be a formidable one, and these should be continued for 
 several weeks, or until evidences of improvement be- 
 come apparent. At a later day, or even to begin with, 
 if the illness be not severe, the single movements may 
 be employed with profit. 
 
 The movements prescribed for a scrofulous patient 
 should be similar to those recommended for pulmonary 
 affections, but they may from the first be used some- 
 what more energetically. All portions of the body 
 should be included in the movements taken, so that all 
 the organs and functions of the system may share the 
 effect. But the sjpecial indication, or indications, of the 
 case should not be slighted. If there be a tendency 
 of blood to the head or w^eakness of eyes, the prescrip- 
 tion should begin with movements for the lower ex- 
 tremities, afterward for the arms and chest. If there 
 be constipation, movements adapted to this particular 
 complaint should be included. If there be no special 
 indications, it should begin with movements for the 
 chest. 
 
 The following fornmla will serve as an example : 
 
 1. Wing sitting, feet rotation. 7. 
 
 2. Stride sittino^, arms twistine;. 65. 
 
SCROFULOUS AFFECTIONS. 285 
 
 3. Swing holding, rotating. 75. 
 
 4. Stride-kneeling, swaying. 39. 
 
 5. Doorway-stretch, span-standing, walking. 58. 
 
 6. Stretch-kneeling, trunk rocking. 45. 
 
 T. Heel-support kneeling, trunk forward falling. 12. 
 
 8. Support half-standing, leg rotating. 23. 
 
 9. Half-stretch, half-wing stride-sitting, trunk-twist- 
 ing. Change. 37. 
 
 10. Backward-stretch lying, weight holding. 68. 
 
286 PULMONARY AFFECTIONS — CONSUMPTION. 
 
 PULMONARY AFFECTIONS— CONSUMPTION. 
 
 The principles of the Movemeiit-Cure cast new and ; 
 important light upon the nature of most of the grave ■ 
 affections belonging to this class. By simplifying the ! 
 pathology of these diseases the patient can be brought i 
 to understand, as well as the physician, if he will read ' 
 with care, the suggestions that are made, and the value • 
 of the practice here taught will be demonstrated at i 
 every step. We give the outlines of a treatment ap- '■ 
 propriate, direct, and efficacious — a treatment satisfac- < 
 tory to both patient and physician. The practice of i 
 movements affords new indications to the practitioner, ' 
 as well as furnishes new means for fulfilling such as ! 
 are recognized by the schools. ' 
 
 Yiewed in the light (or darkness) afforded by ordinary i 
 medical science, the diseases that we are now consider- ^ 
 ing are involved in much mystery. Those thus afflict- ' 
 ed, as is well known, almost infallibly continue to de- 
 cline, in spite of the most vigorous application of all the ■ 
 means known to and recommended by the highest medi- ! 
 cal authorities of the land. Persons possessed of what ; 
 is termed the " consumptive habit," are regarded as 
 fated, even before the disease makes its appearance in I 
 any decided manner. This fact indicates the extent ; 
 of our knowledge of the pathology of these cases, and ' 
 it takes no argument to show that the conditions from 
 
PULMONARY AFFECTIONS — CONSUMPTION. 287 
 
 which originate the disease in question, are miserably 
 misunderstood. 
 
 A too common reference of the disease to remote 
 and intangible causes disposes of the case and pre- 
 cludes further investigation. Thus, people are in the 
 habit of saying, and with a learned look sometimes, 
 that such subjects have originally defective constitu- 
 tions^ are exposed to a poisoned atmosphere, inhabit 
 ' unfavorable localities, are unfortunately endowed with 
 too great intellectual activity, etc., without explaining 
 how it is that the constitutions of some persons and not 
 of others are affected by these circumstances. Physi- 
 cians, taking advantage of popular ignorance and mis- 
 conceptions, content themselves with pleasing their 
 patients by the exhibition of all sorts of injurious palli- 
 atives, and resort to devices that at the best but do the 
 sufferers some temporary good. The short-sighted and 
 hopeful invalid is satisfied to be made to feel hetter for 
 the time, and often mistakes the transient relief for Re- 
 turning health. The plan of treatment commonly pur- 
 sued is effectual for vailing the real nature and rela- 
 tions of these affections from the minds of both phy- 
 sician and patient, '^o wonder that such small pro- 
 gress is made in the pathology and treatment of these 
 diseases, or that nostrums and quacks, and their vic- 
 tims, should so abound in the community ! The poor 
 invalid, to be sure, is troubled at times with many sad 
 doubts in regard to the efficacy of these cure-alls^ and 
 he goes, tossed by his doubts, from one nostrum to an- 
 other, and sometimes will swallow a dozen at once, 
 supposing that in so doing he is increasing the chances 
 of hitting upon the right thing at last. By such whole- 
 sale dosing the poor victim is rapidly and surely get- 
 ting rid of whatever restorative capacity the ravages 
 
28S PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 
 
 of disease may have left him. And so it generally 
 happens, that between popular and professional igno- 
 rance, and the empiricism that is the result of both, 
 persons threatened with diseases of the lungs seldom 
 escape a fatal termination. 
 
 We ought not to expect curative effects which are 
 real and permanent in diseases of this class, unless we 
 direct our treatment point blank at the radical causes. 
 It will avail us little to attend exclusively to the 
 symptoms as they appear, looking for nothing beyond 
 these. We must trace out the circumstances, and phys- 
 ical, mental, and social conditions in wdiich the disease 
 has its origin, and settle ourselves in the conviction, 
 that no medical means whatsoever, that fall short of re- 
 moving these, can be of any positive and permanent 
 service. Then, and not till then, we shall be prepared 
 to combat with remedies of unquestionable applicability 
 and potency those incipient forms of the disease which, 
 when the subject is only under the influence of pallia- 
 tives, must inevitably pursue a regular and destructive 
 course of growth. 
 
 My observations in pulmonary afiections — and they 
 have been extensive — have brought me to the conclu- 
 sion, that the tendency to ijuhnonary affections is al- 
 ways in inverse ratio to the amount of respiratory 
 power. My belief in this doctrine, which is now daily 
 gaining converts, is amply confirmed by evidence both 
 of a physiological and pathological character. There 
 is no dispute in regard to the nature and relations of 
 the morphological products of the disease, nor as to its 
 general diagnostic features, and what may seem to be 
 exceptions to the above rule, are found upon further 
 investigation rather to confirm it than otherwise. 
 
 1. One of the first signs confirmatory of this view 
 
PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 289 
 
 of tlie disease is the greatly diminished size of tne chesty 
 noticeable in those in whom chronic pulmonary disease 
 has resulted fatally. I have been at the pains to make 
 careful examination of the skeletons of a number of per- 
 sons known to have died of consumption, and found 
 the circumference of the chest to be from three to five 
 inches less than that in persons of the same height, 
 who died of other diseases. In the frequent measure- 
 ments made by me in the treatment by movements, I 
 have found the same fact to exist invariably ; the con- 
 sumptive is always either narrow-chested or else de- 
 formed, one side (that diseased) being shrunken. This 
 condition of things is so patent to all observers, that a 
 resort to measurements to prove it has seemed super- 
 fluous. 
 
 2. Another invariable condition attendant upon this 
 disease is diminished mobility of the walls of the chest. 
 The chest seems, sometimes, to heave with considerable 
 force, but a closer observation shows that the motion is 
 confined to a limited portion of its walls, while the 
 average extent of motion is less, generally very much 
 less, than normal. The change is always apparent in 
 the relative extent of the inspiratory and expiratory 
 movements, but the observer is apt to be deceived in 
 regard to the total amount of mobility of the breathing 
 organs. The efficiency of the respiratory act is far 
 from being in exact proportion to the amount of effort 
 made to effect this act. The necessity for effort proves 
 the presence of an impediment to the performance of 
 ihe act, as well as the fact that the amount of respira- 
 tion is less than the system requires. 
 
 3. Tlie increased frequency of the pulse is an evidence 
 of the diminished efficiency of the respiratory apparatus. 
 The action of the circulatory organ is not under the 
 
290 PULMONAEY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 
 
 direct control of tlie will, and it is a law of the economy 
 that the circulation, or at least the activity, of the ar- 
 terial system increases with the increased need of the 
 system for oxygen ; as, for instance, in a healthy per- 
 son during strong exertion either of the muscles or of 
 the hrain. The principle holds as well in disease, 
 which in fact is, as we have said, but metamorphosed 
 physiological action. When the respiration has for a 
 time been imperfect, as under the influence of an ele- 
 vated temperature, or through the ingestion of too great 
 a quantity of food, the pulse of respiration afterward 
 raj)idly quickens, so as to bring the blood more speedily 
 and thoroughly in contact with oxygen. This is one 
 of the conditions in acute disease. Similar effects are 
 brought about by drugs. So also when, by disease 
 of the lungs, the respiratory capacity is materially di- 
 minished, or when, through a want of due development 
 of the muscles engaged in the respiratory act, the 
 amount of air breathed is too sin all, the pulse neces- 
 sarily becomes quicker, in orde. to insure the contact 
 of the blood and air along the diminished respiratory 
 surface. 
 
 4. The pulse becomes slower, and a sense of relief 
 and rest is always experienced, by any accident or 
 device that facilitates the aeration of the blood. This 
 object is often secured by a removal of the invalid to 
 a locality where there is exposure of the person to winds, 
 as for instance, to the Western prairies, to southern 
 climes, to islands of the sea. An ocean voyage is often 
 of great benefit. If an invalid suffering from hectic rides 
 on a fair day in a carriage, his pulse becomes appreciably 
 slower. K a consumptive be exposed to an increase 
 of atmospheric pressure of six or eight pounds to the 
 square inch, the pulse is also retarded, because this 
 
PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 291 
 
 pressure facilitates the changes eitected in respiration. 
 Herein lies the efficacy of what is termed the com- 
 jpressed air hath. Thus the most distressing syin]> 
 toms, in the several forms of pulmonary disease, are 
 shown to arise from insufficient respiration, 
 
 5. Another and hardly less conclusive evidence of 
 the truth of the doctrine here laid down is found in 
 the means required to overcome this disease. If move- 
 ments are made to serve the purpose of increasing the 
 aerating power of the lungs, the pulses are found soon 
 to decrease in frequency, the strength begins to re- 
 turn, and all the more distressing symptoms gradually 
 abate, and in a degree proportionate to the amount of 
 energy imparted to the respiratory efforts. Even dur- 
 ing a single trial of a prescription of duplicated move- 
 ments, the pulse will often fall ten or more beats per 
 minute. If they are followed up, the capacity of the 
 chest soon begins to augment, and along with this in- 
 crease of breathing power various cheering signs appear. 
 
 The amount of air ]-espired in a chest collapsed 
 by disease or disuse, compared with the amount re- 
 spired after being expanded and strengthened by 
 training it, would be very difficult to compute, even 
 approximately. This increase of efficiency is the effect 
 of two causes acting conjointly ; one of these is the in- 
 creased amount of residual air contained by the lungs ; 
 the other, the increased amount of motion secured to 
 the walls of the chest and the diaphragm. If we sup- 
 pose that by this gain in their mobility the lungs are 
 enabled to admit only a single inch more of air at 
 each respiration, in the coui-se of the day, the increase 
 would amount to fifteen cubic feet ! Even this trifling 
 amount of increase in respiratory power, the reader can 
 readily conceive, would be capable of effecting a great 
 
292 PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 
 
 change in the quality of the blood and the general nu- 
 trition of the system. But when this is multiplied by 
 several cubic inches — a result often attained — the good 
 accomplished is great indeed.* 
 
 The habits of life of the consumptive invalid are 
 such as constantly to repress the development of the 
 lungs, or a defect here may be due to original con- 
 formation. The diminished capacity of the chest of 
 course implies imperfect respiration. A direct conse- 
 quence of this insufficient respiration is increase of 
 the frequency of the pulse. The maintenance of this 
 accelerated speed of the pulse occasions a wear of and 
 perpetually increasing demand upon the powers of the 
 organism incompatible with that quiet play of the func- 
 tions, which is health. Had we no facts to prove it, 
 
 * The following remarks of Lehmann are stronglj^ confirmatory of the view here 
 given : 
 
 " While the advances of the science of medicine have taught us that of all the 
 vast accumulation of remedies which in the course of time have been collected to- 
 gether, very few are of any value at the bedside, and while the enlightened practi- 
 tioner is disposed to attach at least as much imporlaace to a rational dietetic as to a 
 specifically therapeutic mode of treatment, the value of investigations on normal 
 respiration, in reference to the science of medicine, can nev< r be overrated; for 
 when once the fact is universally admitted that tlie first thing to be considered in 
 many diseases is to furnish a copious supply of oxygen to the blood which has been 
 loaded with imperfectly decomposed substances, and to remove as speedily as pos- 
 sible the carbonic acid which has accumulated in it, these observations will have 
 afibrded us the true remedial agents which exceed almost any other in the cer- 
 tainty of their action. We may, perhaps, aid a tuberculous patient quite as much 
 by recommending him to respire a moist warm air, as if we prescrib d Lichen Car- 
 ragheen, or 01. jecoris Aselli. 
 
 " Instead of tormenting an emphysematous patient, suffering from congestion 
 and hemorrhoidal tendencies, with aperient and saline mineral waters, we might 
 relieve him far more effectually by recommending him to practice artificial aug- 
 mentation or expansion of the chest in respiration (filling the lungs several times in 
 the course of an hour), or to take exercise suited to produce this result, while we 
 should forbid the lise of spiritiioiis driiiA'S, and 7wt j')reHerihe tinctures which 
 might hinder the necessary excretion of carbonic acid. We abstain, however, 
 from offering any further illustra'ions of these assertions, since the reflecting i hysi- 
 cian will not blindly follow any guide, while the mere empiricist can never learn 
 thoroughly to heal any disease, whatever his knowledge of physiology and patho- 
 logical chemistry." — Physiologi al Chemistry, vol. ii., p. 471. 
 
PULMOXAKY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 293 
 
 we should suppose from analogy that congestion of the 
 pulmonary tissues would be likely to occur from the 
 excessive labor imposed upon this organ, and a dete- 
 rioration of the morphological elements of the blood, 
 and a consequent deposition in the form of tubercle 
 need not be an unlooked-for consequence. 
 
 When the respiration is below the requirements of 
 the system, either one of two things may occur : either 
 f the blood, not being purified, and the secretions becom- 
 I ing clogged and changed in quality, colds, or the more 
 grave and decided forms of fever, follow^, with a quick- 
 ening of the pulse and of the respiratory movements, 
 and failure of the appetite ; or the oxydizing action 
 j being less energetic, the materials accumulated in the 
 ' blood may be able to resist it. Tubercle seems to be a 
 degraded form of vitalized matter which continues to 
 resist the oxydizing agencies at work within the blood. 
 The quick pulse and breath are never able to balance 
 each other perfectly. If, now, in this condition of 
 things, an increase of respiration can take place, unac- 
 companied by the evils resulting from quick breathing 
 and the rapid pulse, the chances of restoration are at 
 once immensely increased. 
 
 The available power a person enjoys does not equal 
 the absolute product of vital action ; it is only that 
 part of the total force of the system which remains 
 after the amount is expended which is needed for or- 
 ganic purposes. It is clear that when the rate of the 
 pulse is one hundred and twenty, and the respirations 
 thirty-two per minute, the expenditure of force is much 
 greater than when the pulse is sixty and the respira- 
 tion sixteen. 
 
 It follows, from this theory of the pathology of pul- 
 monary disease, that the chief remedial indication is, 
 
294 PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 
 
 to increase the size of the chest and the mobility of its 
 walls. 
 
 The arrangements of nature are designed to secure 
 the perfect performance of the respiratory act, and con- 
 sist of means which affect the size and mobility of the 
 chest. 
 
 1. TemperatuTe. — The lower the temperature to 
 which the body is exposed, the greater the impression 
 made by it upon the whole sensory surface. This im- 
 pression is a direct stimulant to respiration. Whetiier 
 the impression affects the whole, or only a limited por- 
 tion of the surface, the result is the same ; for a given 
 amount of heat expended, an equivalent amount of air 
 is respired. The average temperature of the atmo- 
 sphere is forty to fifty degrees below that of the 
 body. 
 
 2. Exercise. — This, in the plan of nature, is rendered 
 as necessary as temperature. All movements, wheth- 
 er spontaneous and involuntary or voluntary, necessi- 
 tate the use of oxygen derived from the blood by the 
 acting vital organs. Hence the degree of perfection 
 reached by the respiratory act is strictly proportionate 
 to the vigor of the muscular action ; and we find that 
 such action powerfully promotes respiration, and im- 
 proves the mobility of the walls of the chest. 
 
 Properly directed exercise may prove advantageous 
 to the respiration in two ways : 1. By directly increas- 
 ing this action. 2. Indirectly, by developing and per- 
 fecting the mechanism by which this act is performed. 
 
 Chronic pulmonary diseases are of tvx'o principal 
 forms : congestion and ulceration of the pulmonary 
 nervous surface — the surface in contact with the air ; 
 and a deposit of non-vitalized organic matter in the 
 parenchyma of these organs. Both forms are refer- 
 
PULMOXAllY AFFPXTIONS CONSUMPTION. 295 
 
 able to tlie imperfect aeration of the blood at tlie point 
 where this fluid accnmulates, waiting for its noxious 
 matters to become eliminated by the means above 
 pointed out, and both forms disappear generally upon 
 the restoration of the natural movements of the walls 
 of the chest. 
 
 Tlie reader must be warned against I'ushing upon 
 the inference here, that indiscriminate movements may 
 be employed in this disease. N'othing, in fact, is like- 
 ly to prove more harmful, in diseases of the lungs, 
 than improper use of exercises, while, if they are prac- 
 ticed in accordance with the principles and under the 
 conditions prescribed by the Movement-Cure, injurious 
 eiiects are scarcely possible. To enable us to guard 
 against these harmful results, let us analyze the respira- 
 tory process. 
 
 Respiration is composed of two distinct actions — in 
 the filling of the lungs witli air, or inspiration^ and 
 the exclusion of a portion of the air contained by these 
 organs, or expiration. 
 
 Inspiration is eftected by the contraction and con- 
 sequent depression of the diaphragm, and the simul- 
 taneous contraction of the muscles lying between and 
 covering the ribs, which elevates them and turns 
 them outward. Expiration is produced simply by 
 the relaxation of these same muscles, allowing the 
 walls of the chest to return to the position they oc- 
 cupied at the commencement of inspiration, thus nar- 
 rowing the space included in the chest, and driving 
 out the air. 
 
 These actions are properly enough compared to those 
 of a innnp j but the venous blood is exposed to similar 
 conditions with those securing the rush of air into the 
 lungs, and it of course acquires the same tendency to- 
 
296 PFLMONAEY AFFECTIOIS'S CONSUMPTION. 
 
 ward the chest, so as to meet the air which it is in- 
 tended to receive. 
 
 It follows that if the respiratory act be forced be- 
 yond a certain moderate extent, while other portions 
 of the body are at comparative rest, this tendency of 
 blood to the chest will be beyond the 2^ower of the 
 heart to control, and the pulmonary organs become 
 congested. As a consequence, various disagreeable 
 sensations are experienced about the chest, and these 
 may be followed by serious indisposition ; inflamma- 
 tion may set in, or rupture of vessels may occur. Espe- 
 cially if the pulmonary organs be weak or previously 
 diseased, the eftect of such movements thus taken may 
 be disastrous and irrej)arable. Such consequences 
 have sometimes followed the use of the inhaling-tube, 
 so often recommended to invalids of this class. 
 
 The indications for the treatment of pulmonary af- 
 fections plainly are, firsts to remove the congestion 
 that always lingers about the chest in these com- 
 plaints, and certainly to guard against the possibility 
 of its occurrence. This is easily accomplished by the 
 aid of the duplicated movements, and also, if the pa- 
 tient retain a moderate amount of strength, by the 
 single movements. The prescription, to begin with, 
 must include in its first part such movements as are 
 strongly derivative applied to the extremities, wliile 
 the central organs should be approached cautiously. 
 Only after a marked effect has been produced upon 
 the extremities should we employ such movements as 
 tend to expand the chest, because these draw the blood 
 from the extremities. A physician of tact will so 
 manao-e as to combine these effects of derivation and 
 expansion from the first, thus greatly facilitating the 
 progress of the patient. After the derivative pro- 
 
PULMONAKY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 297 
 
 scription has been continued for some time, with an 
 improvement of all the symptoms, those which in- 
 crease the size of the chest may be applied more 
 boldly, never omitting, howevei', to alternate them 
 frequently with those of the first-named kind. 
 
 It is always best for the patient, if treating himself, 
 to commence proceedings by taking accurate measure- 
 ment of his chest, both at its upper section and at its 
 lower, or across the short ribs. By repeating the 
 measurement occasionally from time to time, he will 
 be able to judge of the amount of improvement he is 
 making, and thus encourage himself more than he 
 possibly could by merely noticing the improvement 
 in his feelings, because he is impressed with the idea 
 of the permanent character of this result. In using 
 the duplicated movements, some invalids have expe- 
 rienced an increase in the circumference of the chest 
 of an inch or more for each of three or four consecu- 
 tive weeks. But even when much less than this is 
 gained, nearly all patients will attain results that will 
 be quite satisfactory and cheering, especially if com- 
 pared with the results effected by other kinds of med- 
 ical treatment. 
 
 The reader must not suppose that all the good ac- 
 complished in this way for the lungs is indicated by 
 the dilatation of the chest. The contracted and dis- 
 eased lungs are incited by the stimulus of the move- 
 ments to take on a more efficient action ; the vitalizing 
 air is made to penetrate and dilate the collapsed air- 
 cells, or to displace the secretions with which they are 
 filled. The improvement from this cause, even before 
 the circumference of the chest has perceptibly in- 
 creased, is in many cases very decided. Many re- 
 spectable phvsicians, who have examined my patients 
 
 13* 
 
2y8 PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 
 
 while under treatment, have testified to this fact very 
 emphatically, as this is the improvement that is easily 
 detected by the skillful auscultator. 
 
 For the consumptive jDatient a formula of movements 
 like the following may be employed. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PRESCRIPTIONS. 
 
 1. Stretch (weight held), backward lying, holding. 
 68. 
 
 2. Wing-walk standing, forward- knee bending and 
 stretching. Change. 14. 
 
 3. Door-way standing, walking. 58. 
 
 4. Arms angle (weight held), reclined walk-kneeling, 
 arms stretching. 43. 
 
 5. Sitting, arms sidewise raising. 47. 
 
 6. Stretch-stride kneeling, trunk transverse sway- 
 ing. 45. 
 
 7. Stretch grasp, forward fall standing, trunk bend- 
 ing and stretching. 76. 
 
 8. Half-stretch stride sitting, trunk twisting. Change. 
 37. 
 
 9. Yard-stride sitting, arms twisting. 39. 
 
 10. Trunk support half standing, leg twisting. 13. 
 
 The movements should be varied to meet the exigen- 
 cies of each particular case. If there be great feeble- 
 ness, a formula like the following would be more 
 appropriate to begin with : 
 
 1. Wing long sitting, feet rotation. 5. 
 
 2. Rack grasp standing, feet stretching. 1. 
 
 3. Standing, arm perpendicular, rotating. 73. 
 
 4. Yard kneeling, arms horizontal, swaying. 39. 
 
 5. Streteh half-walk, half-kneeling, trunk backward 
 bending. 48. 
 
 6. Step half-standing, trunk sidewise bending. i9. 
 
PULMONARY AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 299 
 
 7. Support half-standing, curtseying. 10. 
 
 8. Elbow-sup2)ort, backward fall standing, holding. 
 77. 
 
 9. Hanging, swinging. 74. 
 
 10. Hang standing, trunk rotating. 
 
 It is useful for the invalid thus practicing to apply 
 at the same time rapid and light friction over the 
 whole surface of the body, with free exposure of the 
 naked person to the air, as often as twice every day, 
 and to lave the chest thoroughly with a coarse towel 
 wetted with cold water. He should also bathe the 
 whole person in water as cool as he can well bear, say 
 80° or 90°, and he may likewise take a hip bath at 
 75°, for ten minutes, to excite the respiration ; both 
 these daily if the strength will allow. 
 
 In addition to the above the swing may be used for 
 five or ten minutes several times every day. 
 
300 PABALYSIS OF THE NEKVES OF MOTION. 
 
 PARALYSIS OF THE NERVES OF MOTION. 
 
 The Movement' Cure supplies new ho]3e to the vic- 
 tims of this peculiarly obstinate afiection. It does not 
 merely add another to the catalogue of " promising" 
 remedies, but the patient who tries it is often at once 
 convinced of its appropriateness to his condition, he is 
 inspired with a new confidence. Hundreds who had 
 become disheartened by witnessing the futility of ordi- 
 nary medical treatment have had their courage thus 
 renewed as if by magic. We reject such remedies 
 as strychnine, stimulants, galvanism, electricity, for al- 
 thougli the aj^pli cation of this class of remedies may 
 afford encouragement by their temporary effects, and 
 may seem occasionally to do a great deal of good, yet 
 experience proves that by such practice the recuper- 
 ative powers are in the end exhausted, and the case 
 becomes less amenable to treatment than it otherwise 
 would be. 
 
 The treatment of paralysis by duplicated movements, 
 by myself and by others under my observation, has 
 resulted favorably in a large majority of instances ; 
 many have had members that had become useless and 
 burdensome, partially, some entirely restored to their 
 original integrity and usefulness, while many others 
 have left my hands in the confident hope that their 
 own efforts persistently followed up would finally re- 
 sult in complete restoration. So far as I have learned, 
 
PAKALYSIS OF THE NERVES OF MOTION. 301 
 
 these patients liave continued to improve to a satisfac- 
 tory extent. One of tlie most encouraging cases on my 
 list is that of a gentleman who came to me with com- 
 plete paraplegia of over two years' standing, who after 
 thi'ce weeks' instruction i-eturned home, and applied tlie 
 knoAvledge he had acquired to such purpose, that in 
 a short time he was restored to health and the pursuit 
 of his professional avocations. We may understand 
 the j)eculiar appropriateness and success of the treat- 
 ment if we will take the pains to examine the pathology 
 of the disease. 
 
 Modern physiology explains the cause of j)aralysis to 
 be some defect in the health of nerve-centers located in 
 the spinal cord and at the base of the brain, from which 
 the incentive to muscular action proceeds. These cen- 
 ters consist of the gray substance of the cord, and they 
 hold communication by means of countless radiating 
 nerve fibers with all the muscular tissue of the body. 
 
 The actual pathological state of these nerve- centers in 
 paralysis is often a matter somewhat obscure. Some- 
 times it is found upon examination that the walls of 
 the caj)illary vessels supplying the part with nutrition 
 have been ruptured, and effusion of a clot, pressure, 
 and a sudden shock, depriving the parts or muscles con- 
 nected therewith by means of the nerve fibers, of power, 
 is the consequence. The extent of the paralysis will 
 in this case depend on the location, as those portions 
 of the body connected with the cord helow the seat of 
 disease suffer from its eftects. 
 
 Another cause may be sei'ous effusion into the mem- 
 brane inclosing the cord, wh/ch may by its pressure gra- 
 dually produce similar symptoms. Sometimes, again, 
 a disease of the substance of the cord occurs called soft- 
 ening, which destroys the function of the cord and of the 
 
302 PAKALYSIS OF THE ^EKVES OF MOTION. 
 
 parts connected with it. The reader will understand 
 from this that the muscles are not primarily affected, 
 but their action becoming suspended, they are deprived 
 of nutrition, and consequently become weak and flabby, 
 and are often greatly diminished in bulk. JS^either are 
 the nerve filaments which conduct the nerve influence 
 from its central seat necessarily implicated. They cease 
 to conduct impressions, simply because they receive 
 none in the disabled state of the central organ. 
 
 The reader may now be ready to inquire, with a 
 skeptical smile, " How can exercise of the muscles, 
 which are not the seat of the disease, restore functional 
 power to the disabled nerve ?" 
 
 The following considerations will serve to throw 
 some light upon what may perhaps appear a rather 
 dark subject. 
 
 1. Tlie spinal column is inclosed in the bony case 
 formed by the vertebral column, in Avhich, the more 
 effectually to protect it from injury from external 
 sources, it is suspended, and surrounded through its 
 entire length by fluid. By this arrangement, injury to 
 the cord from any sudden twist or shock is prevented. 
 
 But this is not all. x\long the exterior surface of 
 the column is situated the laro-est and stron2:est mus- 
 cular mass belonging to the body, which is employed 
 in sustaining and giving flexibility and mobility to the 
 trunk. Every action of these muscles necessarily af- 
 fects the cii'culation of the contained and contiguous 
 vessels, and modifies also the condition of the organs 
 contained -i^^zV/^m the vertebral canal. Xow the lateral, 
 forward, backward, and diagonal inclinations of the 
 body in the duplicated and the single movements are 
 eminently derivative for the cord itself, and serve as a 
 powerful means for relieving congestion of the spinal 
 
PARALYSIS OF THE NEKVES OF MOTION. 303 
 
 membranes and nerves, or even for removing serous 
 etfusioii. 
 
 2. But, in perhaps a majority of cases, tlie spinal le- 
 sion has been recovered from spontaneously, as the 
 result of the patient waiting which is enlbrced by the 
 very nature of the atfection ; still, the power of motion 
 is not as a consequence restored. Whether nature has, 
 after a time, effected so favorable a change in the case, 
 we can have no means of directly knowing ; we must 
 be content to wait for the results of treatment to en- 
 lighten us on this point. Whether it has or has not, 
 the paralysis generally continues, because the con- 
 ductor, having once ceased to perform its duty, contin- 
 ues inoperative even after the original source of nerve- 
 power is restored by time. It is evident that the mus- 
 cles will remain inactive so long as the nerves refuse 
 to convey motive force to them. It is inferred that 
 this state of things may often exist for the simple rea- 
 son that very frequently paralysis is speedily removed 
 by movements, while this could not possibly happen 
 if the cord itself, the source of all muscular power, re- 
 mained diseased. The cure does not, in this case, con- 
 sist so much in the removal of disease as in the restora- 
 tion of a function. This only is wanted : the power to 
 move / the germ of the power still exists ; this is to be 
 encouraged and cultivated. The disabled muscles must 
 he QROvedj and he helped to move theTnselves^ till they 
 have regained the ability to work unassisted. So are 
 children's muscles trained at the outset of life. What 
 more iiatural, simple, and philosophic ! 
 
 Thus, again, the will is enabled to send its mandates 
 like lightning from the brain to every portion of the 
 physical domain, and at once healthful and harmonious 
 action is restored to the whole economy. 
 
304 PARALYSIS OF THE NKEVES OF MOTION. 
 
 The duplicated movements affect the diseased nerves 
 often in a most favorable manner. They may be ap- 
 plied along the conrse of the conductor or over the 
 spinal centers. 
 
 The Movement-Cm-e overcomes this formidable dis- 
 ease by removing any pressure that may exist at the 
 nerve-centers, by restoring the flow of nervous force 
 to its original channels, while the general expenditure 
 of nerve-power is at the same time carefully husband- 
 ed ; by tranquilizing the whole system, and especially 
 the diseased organs ; and by re-establishing the condi- 
 tions for healthy nutrition throughout the body. The 
 Movement-Cure deprecates the employment of all 
 means whatsoever designed merely to stimulate the 
 nerves to functional activity, whether applied to the 
 general system or to diseased parts. It would evoke 
 no manifestation when there is not behind an abundant 
 capacity to sustain it, supplied through the nutrient 
 energies of the organism, the grand primary source of 
 all functional power. It discards all beverages, ex- 
 cepting simple, unadulterated water ; the use of to- 
 bacco, which observation proves to be frequently the 
 cause of the disease ; the use of condiments of all 
 kinds, which only task, never replenish, the nerve- 
 l^ower. For the same reason, it enjoins abstinence 
 from all exciting business, and everything calculated 
 to arouse the emotions or awake anxious or laborious 
 tliought ; for these things tend certainly to debilitate 
 the nervous system, and must necessarily aggravate 
 disease where it exists, and counteract, in a greater 
 or less degree, the beneficial effects of the move- 
 ments. 
 
 It is a queslioi! that deserves serious consideration, 
 whether the pre\'alence of this form of disease is not 
 
PAKALYSIS OF THE NERVES OF MOTION. 305 
 
 referable, to a mucli greater extent than the public 
 seem to be aware, to the habits of the individual. 
 Excessive venery^ every practicing physician knows to 
 be a fruitful source of this disease. The refl.ecting 
 mind, indeed, may well ]3onder how it is that so many 
 escape with only milder and comparatively tractable 
 forms of nervous disease, when it considers the self- 
 indulgent habits of so many in the community. 
 
 In the treatment of these cases the duplicated move- 
 ments are nearly indispensable in the beginning. It is 
 absolutely necessary that the patient understand the 
 various princij)les and methods of the cure^ in order 
 that as he advances in strength and in self-command he 
 may be able to take the treatment into his own hands 
 and conduct it to the desired consummation. 
 
 The prescription must embrace hendings, fallings^ 
 etc., in such positions as call the muscles of the back, 
 and especially of the neck, into active play. It should 
 also include attempts at the restoration of power in the 
 defective members. It is found that the livei' is nearly 
 always affected in cases of this disease, perhaps often as 
 a consequence of it, induced by mere inaction. It 
 should be roused into activity by regulating and re- 
 stricting the diet, together with the appropriate move- 
 ments ; many of the duplicated movements of the pas- 
 sive kind are important here, for the toning up not 
 only of defective nerves, but also of those organs whose 
 actions are limited through lack of nervous supply, as 
 well as to sooth and tranquilize the nerves themselves. 
 Snch movements are to be applied very cautiously in 
 the vicinity of nerve-centers, more freely along the 
 conductors. 
 
 It is important to direct tlie attention, and with 
 it the nerve-force, into the affected part, by means of 
 
306 PAEALYSIS OF THE NERYES OF MOTION. 
 
 attempts to move the debilitated or disabled part. 
 These attempts must be successful in order to be lene- 
 ficial^ and the lacking power must be supplied by an 
 assistant. Unless the patient sees a result accomplish- 
 ed by his own endeavors, he will be disheartened and 
 give over his efforts. If a paralytic can not, for in- 
 stance, raise his hand, he must at least try. The effort 
 will of course be fruitless till the power to raise the 
 last ounce of the weight is developed, and the invalid 
 does not hnow that he exerts any power until he has ex- 
 erted enough to accomplish his purpose. But if assisted^ 
 he can be made to feel that he overcomes a part of the 
 resistance, and is thence encouraged to continue and 
 multiply his efforts. 
 
 The paralytic invalid must be cautioned against 
 making violent efforts, or attempting quick move- 
 ments ; all his motions should be deliberate and gentle. 
 The time of the movement shoidd not only be pro- 
 longed, but the part moved should be sustained during 
 a period of rest at the terminal position. In this way 
 the object of the movement, which consists in establish- 
 ing and improving the communication between the 
 nerve-centers and muscles, is secured as far as is possi- 
 ble. It is only further necessary to repeat the same 
 movement at the same time, in the same way, daily, 
 and an increased, if not a perfect control of the weak- 
 ened part is quite certain to result. But if, on the 
 contrary, the movements be taken at irregular times, 
 or practiced rapidly, violently, or carelessly, the fund 
 of power will be exhausted rather than increased, and 
 injury will result rather than benefit to the experi- 
 menter. 
 
 These remarks apply to duplicate as well as to single 
 movements. It is only necessary to add tliat the ap- 
 
PARALYSIS OF THE NERVES OF MOTION. 307 
 
 plication of single movements is limited, but being 
 employed according to the invalid's ability in the mode 
 and with the cautions above indicated to the afflicted 
 extremity, the result will amply repay in 
 health the attention thus devoted. 
 
308 CONSTIPATION, DIARRHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 OONSTIPATIOX, DIARKHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 Among business, jDrofessional, and studious men, and 
 those engaged in sedentary avocations, no condition is 
 more common than that of constipation of the bowels, 
 and none more disregarded. With these classes of per- 
 sons constipation is the first notice given of the com- 
 mencement of a state of chronic ill health that often 
 proves permanent, rendering them miserable perhaps 
 for life. The approach of this affection is insidious, 
 and it may exist even when the subject of it is not 
 aware of the fact, for though his evacuations may be 
 regular, yet the residual matter occupies a much longer 
 time in its passage through the canal than is compat- 
 ible with health. 
 
 This symptom is often accompanied by disorder of 
 the stomach, and it is also frequently connected with 
 nervous irritability, prostration, hypochondria, etc. It 
 is apt to accompany the first stages of pulmonary dis- 
 ease, and indeed nearly all persons afiiicted with chronic 
 disorders are troubled with costiveness. 
 
 Prominent among the causes of this condition are, 
 sedentary habits^ anxiety of mind and severe thinhing^ 
 a prolonged use of improper food^ and the indulgence 
 in aperients and other drugs. Constipation may be 
 connected with other symptoms which constitute the 
 main disease, but generally it is the fruit of one, or of 
 a combination of the causes above-mentioned. Persons 
 
CONSTIPATION, DIARRHEA, AND PILES. 309 
 
 of active habits who do not undnly burden themselves 
 with the cares and anxieties of this mortal life, are not 
 apt to be afflicted in this manner. 
 
 We may easily nnderstand how the above-mentioned 
 causes operate to the production of this distressing re- 
 sult. The organs whose function it is to expel the in- 
 soluble matter of the canal, need to be acted upon by 
 the superficial muscles of the abdomen, whicli are 
 brought into play only in vigorous exercise of the 
 limbs and trunk. Of course these organs in the sed- 
 entary are denied this mechanical stimulus. Mental 
 anxiety diverts the nutritive material from the di- 
 gestive organs, and employs it in a remote portion of 
 the body, the brain, and thus robs tliese organs of the 
 nutrition necessary for a proper performance of their 
 duties. Improper food poisons, rather than nourishes 
 the body, induces congestion of the alimentary canal 
 by the irritation it sets up, and the effects upon the 
 system of the products of the chemical changes it un- 
 dergoes in that canal. Cathartic drugs are foreign to 
 tlie vital purposes, wear down the delicate vital sus- 
 ceptibility, and aggravate the disease for which they 
 are applied. The relief they afford is of the most 
 transitory and deceitful kind ; their direct and perma- 
 nent effects are entirely pathological, and tlieir contin- 
 ued use is well known to be eminently subversive of 
 the vital welfare. 
 
 Under the combined influence of improper habits 
 and aperient drugs, the invalid is apt to go on from 
 bad to worse, unless arrested in his career by some ac- 
 cident, till seized by acute, violent, and perhaps fatal 
 disease, or till he lapses into a state of nervous disor- 
 der most difficult to overcome. Many persons are con- 
 s', ant slaves to the enema^ the only substitute which 
 
310 CONSTIPATION, DIAKRHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 they know for tlie pill or bolus. This is perhaps a more i 
 harmless remedy, but it is still but an unsatisfactory ; 
 palliative at the best. Indeed, we can not well cure | 
 the disease which causes the retention of fecal matter, 
 while we confound this symptom with the disease ; 
 itself. I 
 
 As might be inferred from what has been said re- '■ 
 specting the causes of constipation, it is not usually I 
 attributable to a defect of any one part. We must look ' 
 for these causes at several distinct points, and then we ; 
 shall be able to remove them by simple means happily : 
 at our command. I will enumerate a few of these ' 
 causes : ; 
 
 1. Weakness of the muscular coat of the alimentary i 
 canal exists, in consequence of which its vermicular . 
 and expulsive power becomes insufficient. 
 
 2. There is generally defective power of the lower 
 section of the spinal cord. The defective power of ■ 
 the expulsive muscles, especially those of the inferior i 
 portion of the tube, results partly from want of nervous ^ 
 supply from this source. ,This is the natural conse- ■ 
 quence of the nervous fund being too largely drawn 
 upon from other quarters — the brain, the stomach, etc. ; 
 What is chiefly wanted to overcome this obstacle is, 
 that this draft should cease, and also that appropriate 
 means be used to give employment to the nervous ; 
 power in the part of the body where it is especially 
 needed. The lower section of the cord should be 
 roused to action chiefly by means of the muscles sup- : 
 plied from this source— sometimes also by more direct i 
 operations. 
 
 3. There frequently exists congestion of the mucous 
 Qnenihrane of the alimentary tube, in some portion of ; 
 its course, which causes a deficiency of the required i 
 
CONSTIPATION, DIAEKHEA, .VND PILES. 311 
 
 secretions. This state of the mucous membi-anes calls 
 for the exercise and development of the abdominal 
 coverings, for the purpose of drawing off the blood 
 from the congested into the acting parts, and thus 
 relieving that state. Motion applied to the mem- 
 brane, or, rather, to the organs of whicli the membrane 
 is a part, is also indicated for the purpose of assisting 
 the capillary action in the membrane. 
 
 4. The abdominal muscles, whose function it is to 
 assist the expulsive efforts, are, in constipation, flabby, 
 doughy, and weak. They fail both to maintain the 
 abdominal contents in tlie proper situation, and to act 
 with sufficient force to aid materially in the contrac- 
 tion of the tube. This state may be readily remedied 
 by such exercises as are adapted to develop these 
 muscles. 
 
 5. The liver is generally torpid and congested. Some- 
 times this state is indicated by tenderness in the region 
 of this organ. This condition manifests imperfect ox- 
 ydation of the blood, and a consequent retention of 
 matters that ought to have been reduced, through res- 
 piration, to a soluble and volatile form, and dismissed 
 from the body. These retained matters are proximate 
 elements of the bile which the liver is incapable of 
 taking up in sufficient quantity. The tissues are vrant- 
 ing in moisture ; the refuse materials of the system are 
 not thoroughly reduced, as they should be, to carbonic 
 acid and water. To remedy this state, such move- 
 ments as improve the respiratory action are demanded, 
 together with a curtailment of the amount of food 
 taken. In this way the harmonious co-operation of 
 the digestive and respiratory functions is restored. 
 
 6. In this form of disease, coldness of hands and feet 
 also exists. This results from too great a plethora of the 
 
312 CONSTIPATION, DIARRHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 large central blood-vessels. Movements for the ex- 
 tremities to draw the blood toward them, are neces- 
 sary to effect a wholesome distribution of the circu- 
 lation. 
 
 From this view of the nature of the impediments to 
 be overcome, the reader will see at a glance tlie entire 
 appropriateness of movements in the treatment of this 
 most common and troublesome affection. 
 
 Let us now briefly consider, by w^ay of contrast, the 
 Qiiodus opercvndi of an aperient medicine : 
 
 1. The drug being mixed with the homogeneous con- 
 tents of the intestinal tube, and impregnating the 
 whole of the contained mass, unfits it for the purpose 
 for which nutritive matters are designed ; the absorb- 
 ents, therefore, refuse to take up these matters thus 
 contaminated. Hence nutrition is suspended, and there 
 is for the time a general decline of strength. 
 
 2. The mass now having become offensive to the 
 organic instinct, is acted upon by the emnnctories with 
 great power, which action is the ready and only way 
 of freeing the system from impending harm. By this 
 means the whole intestinal mass, rendered partly fluid 
 by imperfect digestion, is forced rapidly through the 
 entire length of the tube. 
 
 3. Some portion of the offensive matter has been al- 
 ready absorbed into the blood, but it is directly re- 
 turned to the canal as being the appropriate way of 
 egress. This portion is mingled with serum drawn 
 from the blood, so as to dilute the noxious principle, 
 and thus prevent, in a degree, the injury resulting 
 from its immediate contact with vital parts. 
 
 4. In the operations just described, but one advan- 
 tage has been gained, and this is incidental and indi- 
 rect, and occurs in this way : While the nutrition is 
 
CONSTIPATION, DIAKRHEA, AND PILES. 313 
 
 prevented in the manner described from entering the 
 bh^od, the resinration continues as usual. It follows 
 that the effete and noxious matters of the system, 
 which are most prone to become destructive, have 
 been reduced in the ordinary way, that is, in the 'man- 
 ner in which these actions happen in health, so that 
 they have rapidly made their exit from the system. 
 
 Or, in other words, the effects produced by cathar- 
 tics are of the same kind, only inferior to those pro- 
 duced by abstinence from food. All the good effects 
 of the process are much more j^romptly, surely, and 
 easily obtained, without loss of strength, without abuse 
 of the digestive organs, by abstinence. In the cathartic 
 process nothing has been accomplished in the way of 
 removing any of the difficulties above-mentioned, and 
 which are the true cause of constipation, and by con- 
 sequence, this difficulty exists in a greater degree after 
 the operation of the medicine than before. The promi- 
 nent system has been relieved, only for the moment, 
 while the disease thus masked has acquired fresh power. 
 
 All the indications for the radical cure of constipa- 
 tion are, on the other hand, completely fulfilled by 
 movements. If the case be of great severity, the dupli- 
 cated movements are called for ; but the single move- 
 ments are competent to subdue the complaint, where 
 there are no perplexing complications, if applied with 
 due accuracy, care, and discretion. 
 
 The following formula of movements will be found 
 powerfully remedial in an ordinary case of constipa- 
 tion : 
 
 1. Wing-stride back-support standing, curtseying. 
 
 2. Wing legs angle standing, trunk vibration. 
 
 3. Wing legs angle backward lying, thighs rotation. 
 
 4. Wing backward lying, legs rotation. 
 
 14 
 
314 CONSTIPATIOA', DIAIiRIIKA, AND PILES. 
 
 5. Elbow and foot sidewise lying, liips raising. 
 
 6. Stretch kneeling, trunk sidewise swaying. 
 
 7. Forward fall, head support standing, leg raising. 
 Change. 
 
 8. Backward lying, abdomen deep kneading. 
 
 9. Forward bent support standing, chin knocking. 
 
 10. Shelter long sitting, trunk forward bending. 
 
 11. Wing stride short sitting, leg outward stretching. 
 Change. 
 
 12. Shelter backward kick lying, legs separating and 
 closing. 
 
 All the above movements affect with more or less 
 directness the abdominal and pelvic contents. There 
 are several others which act more remotely upon the 
 same parts. In making a formula of treatment, some 
 three or four of the above movements may be selected, 
 and these should be connected with such others as are 
 derivative movements for the feet and hands, of a char- 
 acter suited to the strength of the patient. 
 
 EXAMPLE 1. 
 
 1. Standing, arms swaying. 
 
 2. Wing sitting, legs twisting. 
 
 3. Half-wing, half-stretch, step standing, trunk twist- 
 ing. Change. 
 
 4. Wing, leg angle, backward lying, thigh rotation. 
 
 5. Wing-stride standing, curtseying. 
 
 6. Forward bent support standing, chin knocking. 
 
 EXAMPLE 2. 
 
 1. Arms angle kneeling, arms stretching-. 
 
 2. Support half standing, leg rotation. Change. 
 
 3. Wing kick backward lyiug, legs separation and 
 closing. 
 
CONSTIPATION, DIAEEHEA, AXD PILES. 315 
 
 4. Wing backward lying, legs rotation. 
 
 5. Leg angle swing standing, trunk perpendicular 
 vibration. 
 
 6. Backward lying, abdomen deep kneading. 
 These movements may be repeated if necessary. As 
 
 auxiliary to tlie treatment, the enema of tepid water 
 may be employed from time to time ; but its habitual 
 use should be avoided. The tepid hip-bath may also 
 be used occasionally, if found agreeable to the patient. 
 The reader will understand the futility of employing 
 movements to restore the health of the digestive organs, 
 while he is not at the same time careful to control 
 his general habits, so that his general course of living 
 shall contribute to the same end. If he is an habitually 
 careless liver he will scarcely succeed in accomj^lishing 
 much good for himself, however excellent may be the 
 curative means he may resort to, or however faithfully 
 and judiciously he may apply them, nor ought he to 
 expect it. ^Nature's laws were never made to be broken. 
 The transgressor need never hope to escape the penalty 
 of his folly. Mature pays no such premium on wrong 
 doing. Every page of the history of every race, com- 
 munity, and individual contains a warning addressed 
 in thunder tones to nature's offending children. ''The 
 day thou eatest thereof thou shalt surely die !" It is 
 terrible to think in how many men, this very day, has 
 death begun its retributive work ! 
 
 DiAKRHEA. — Several causes may be concerned in the 
 production of this symptom, and they may act either 
 singly or concurrently. 1. Debility — general relaxa- 
 tion of the tissues— is always present, and this condi- 
 tion, as we have seen, is invariably referable to some 
 imperfection of the primary actions that develop vital- 
 
316 CONSTIPATIOX, DIAEKHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 itj. 2. The presence of crude and irritating matters 
 in tlie alimentary canal, occasioning spasmodic or un- 
 certain action of the muscular coat, wliile at the same 
 time absorption of the contents is prevented by the 
 morbid state of the membrane, and the alimentary 
 mass is consequently rapidly dismissed. 3. In case of 
 sudden j^oisoning of the hlood^ either from spontane- 
 ous metamorphosis, as in cholera, or the accidental or 
 prescribed use of some injurious drug, the alimentary 
 canal furnishes the most ready outlet whereby such 
 destructive matters may be eliminated. Oftentimes 
 diarrhea is manifestly a curative operation on the 
 part of nature. In these latter cases the symptoms 
 generally amount to something more than is generally 
 understood by the term diarrhea. The flux, in these 
 cases, is generally suflicient to remove the offensive 
 cause, whereupon the health is restored. 4. An ulcer- 
 ated patch may exist in the canal, and occasion diar- 
 rhea. 5. The relaxation of the abdominal parietes and 
 contents, by the consequent pressure upon the perineum 
 and sphincter muscles, may excite action of the lower 
 bowel and occasion urgent desire to go to stool and 
 much straining — a reflex nervous effect of pressure 
 upon the sphincter. In this case there is prolapsus of 
 the bowels, either concealed or ajpparent. 
 
 In each of the above cases, except Avhere the action 
 is manifestly acute, what is needed is the production 
 of a greater tonicity of the vital structure. The vital 
 organization is depressed and incomplete, and the true 
 remedy must be something that will restore vital power 
 and activity. The fluids of the system must be con- 
 veyed from the digestive center outward to the re- 
 mote parts of the body, and so become applied to 
 normal use. The arterial action is low and requires 
 
CONSTIPATION, DIAKRIIEA, AND PILES. 317 
 
 to be energized ; there is venous plethora and feeble 
 respiration. The muscular tissue is lax and weak, 
 and all the organizing processes of the body are 
 carried on slowly and unsteadily. All these diffi- 
 culties are met and overcome by the application of 
 movements. 
 
 It is necessary that at lirst the movements ]3rescribed 
 should be of the passive sort. It is for this reason 
 that those of the duplicated kind are so efficacious. 
 Such exercises as riding, sailing, etc., are eminently 
 serviceable to move the blood in the clogged capilla- 
 ries, and thus restore their normal power. All vibra- 
 toiy movements applied to the abdomen produce good 
 effects, and the extent of these good effects are found 
 to correspond with the thoroughness and faithfulness 
 with which they are applied. One may vibrate and 
 knead his own abdomen in either or any of the sev- 
 eral ways already noticed with much benefit. At the 
 same time, it is very useful to apply movements to the 
 extremities for the purpose of drawing the blood away 
 from the central organs ; also to promote the respira- 
 tory process in order to restore the purity of this fluid. 
 If the case be one of ulceration of the bowels, long, 
 persistent, and careful constitutional treatment is re- 
 quired. Short, cold sitting-baths ought always to be 
 lesorted to frequently to aid iIil' respiration and to en- 
 courage the contractile efforts of the bowels. 
 
 Piles. — This affection consists often of a distention 
 of the veins at the posterior termination of the mucous 
 lining of the intestine. It is accompanied by a sensi- 
 tiveness caused by a sluggishness of the abdominal 
 circulation, and generally an engorgement of the liver 
 may be presumed. The condition of the liver is such 
 
318 CONSTIPATION, DIAEEHEA, AND PILES. 
 
 as to retard the flow of blood in the portal vems, 
 which return the blood to the heart from the digestive 
 tube ; hence the lower twigs of the veins that contrib- 
 ute to the portal circulation become distended — an 
 event which is greatly favored by the influence of 
 gravity, which also retards the upward flow of the con- 
 tents of these vessels. Abdominal plethora is also 
 generally present. Inflammation succeeds distention 
 of the hemorrhoidal veins, and they often become 
 hardened, nlcerated, and disposed to bleed easily. 
 Sometimes a considerable loss of blood occurs from 
 this cause. 
 
 Sometimes, also, there is prolapsus of the rectum, 
 which greatly aggravates the disorder on account of 
 the constant straining efibrts the patient is impelled to 
 make to evacuate the bowels, which drives the blood 
 down, or, rather, retards its upward flow, and the ves- 
 sels of the sphincter become strangulated. 
 
 The plain indications of treatment are, first, to re- 
 lieve the liver of congestion, and reduce the abdom- 
 inal plethora by an abstemious diet. This aids the 
 contraction of the surcharged vessels, and also removes 
 the impediment to the onward flow of the blood. Sec- 
 ondly, to draw the abdominal contents upward to re- 
 lieve the pressure upon the sphincter. Thirdly, to 
 remove the capillary congestion of the parts. 
 
 Surgical aid may sometimes be demanded, undoubt- 
 edly, in grave cases of this disease ; but after the prin- 
 ciples of the Movement-Cure have become well under- 
 stood, the proper subjects for such treatment will be 
 scarce in the land. 
 
 In lieu of the duplicated movement, single move- 
 ments may be employed for this afl'ection to great ad- 
 vantage. The object sought in their application should 
 
CONSTIPATION, DIARRHEA, AND PILES. 319 
 
 be to affect the liver and arouse the abdominal circu- 
 lation to greater activity. The following movements 
 are recommended for this purpose : 
 
 Elbow and toes lying, holding, or hips raising. 
 
 The following movement is also useful : 
 
 Wing, leg-angle backward lying, hips raising. 
 
 Also : 
 
 Stretch gmsp forward fall-standing, holding. 
 
 Stretch (weight held) backward lying, holding. 
 
320 DEFORMITIES OF THE SPINE. 
 
 DEFORMITIES OF THE SP^NE. 
 
 The application of the Movement-Cure to tlie correc- 
 tion of spinal curvatures is especially successful and 
 satisfactory. ISTot tliat the relief obtained in these 
 cases is more certain than in many others, or that the 
 difficulty to be overcome is so much greater, but be- 
 cause we are constantly furnishing to the friends of the 
 patient ocular demonstration of the good effects of the 
 treatment — effects of a kind that admit of no dispute. 
 One clearly marked instance of cure of this kind, in 
 the popular estimation, is more creditable to the skill 
 and resources of the practitioner, and redounds more 
 to his honor, than would any amount of skill and judg- 
 ment expended uj)on the more difficult task of pre- 
 venting the occurrence of these or other maladies, or 
 even in curing many other forms of diseases of less con- 
 spicuous character. 
 
 In order to arrive at just conclusions regarding the 
 treatment suitable for this class of invalids, it is neces- 
 sary, first, to inquire into the origin of spinal deformi- 
 ties. This is to be sought in the anatomical character 
 and relations of the column itself and of its supports. 
 Tlie column consists of twenty -four light, spongy bones, 
 resting by their flat surfaces upon each other, witli a 
 cushion of elastic cartilage between. This interposi- 
 tion of cartilao-e is necessarv in order to secure tlie 
 
DEFOKMITIES OF THE SPINE. 321 
 
 requisite amoimt of flexibility and elasticity, to enable 
 it to resist the shocks to which it is so often subjected, 
 and to give the trunk that pliability and freedom of 
 motion necessary in assuming the various positions and 
 performing the various actions of man's daily life. 
 
 We see at once, from the form and construction of 
 the spinal column, that of itself it could not possibly 
 maintain an erect position, but would, unless supported, 
 be falling into shapes and inclining in directions that 
 might be quite at variance with the will or wishes of 
 the individual. But in the living body this column is 
 entirely under the control of muscles wliich are at- 
 tached to it at many points, and which give a degree 
 of motion in any direction to every portion of it, and 
 are caj)able of supporting it in every position. The 
 muscular connections of the spinal column with other 
 parts are extensive and various ; the arms and legs are 
 connected with it by muscles, and consequently the 
 character of their motions is related to the positions of 
 the spine, and the movements of these members, as we 
 shall see, are to a considerable extent capable of modi- 
 fying its form. 
 
 The spinal column, in its normal condition, is far 
 from being straight ; it has several curves : one, for- 
 ward at the neck, another at the lumbar region, and 
 one backward, in its dorsal section, and another at the 
 loins. These curves increase the elasticity of the col- 
 umn, and are necessary to the symmetry of the body, 
 and are evidently intended to favor the natural action 
 of the muscles, if they are not produced thereby, as 
 some affirm. 
 
 It is manifest from this that a lateral curvature of 
 the spine is not primarily a fault of the column itself, 
 but of certain inusdes whose function it is to control 
 
 14* 
 
322 DEFORMITIES OF THE SPINE. 
 
 the movements and general posture of the trunk. If 
 the natural curves of the spine exceed their appointed 
 limit, there will result some deformity of shape ; this 
 occurs from weakness of muscles which should maintain 
 the column in a posture more nearly straight. In this 
 case the weight of the body is not well supported, and 
 the supple column yields at the weakest point. 
 
 Lateral curvatures are however more positive evi- 
 dence of muscular weakness, and form a class of cases 
 for which the movements furnish an entirely satisfac- 
 tory remedy. 
 
 Lateral curvatures may be single or double. In the 
 former case the middle portion of the column deviates 
 from the straight line, causing the body to form a more 
 convex line upon one side than upon the other ; while 
 in the latter case the shape of the column somewhat 
 resembles the italic y, deviating from the straight line 
 one way at the upper portion, and in the opposite di- 
 rection at its lower portion, the one acting as a sort of 
 counterpart to the other. In far the greater number 
 of cases the superior convexity is to the right, and the 
 inferior, or that of the lumbar region, to the left. 
 
 There is also a twisting of the trunk, the side of the 
 projecting shoulder being carried backward so that the 
 transverse plane of the chest and pelvis do not agree. 
 Spinal deformities assume very many different shapes, 
 scarcely two cases being exactly alike ; all of these re- 
 quire a competent physician to distinguish and prop- 
 erly prescribe for. The cause for the greater frequeucy 
 of right lateral curvatures is evidently connected with 
 the greater use, and consequently power, of the right 
 arm and the muscles of the right side, which causes 
 the dorsal vertebrae to be drawn with greater fi-e que ncy 
 and force in that direction. 
 
DEFORMITIES OF THE SPINE. 323 
 
 Another influence, generally unsuspected, is also 
 active in deternniiing curvatures to tiie right, and this 
 is, the greater habitual use, and consequently greater 
 development, of the right than of the left leg. There 
 exists in most persons the same disj)osition to a greater 
 proportional use of the right leg as of the right arm. 
 One puts the right leg forward oftener, and more fre- 
 quently rests upon it, than the left — a habit that is not 
 a matter of usual observation, but the ill efiects of this 
 habit in persons possessing weak muscles, though in- 
 sidious, are certain. While one is thus resting upon a 
 single leg, the horizontal plane of the pelvis is caused 
 to incline toward the side imperfectly supported ; con- 
 sequently the spinal column, which rises from the plane 
 of the pelvis at right angles, is forced to deviate from 
 the perpendicular and to incline to the same side. 
 But since this direction of the spine would soon carry 
 the center of gravity of the body beyond the base, 
 which would cause it to fall, it necessarily curves in 
 the opposite direction, and goes far enough beyond the 
 perpendicular axis of the body to compensate for the 
 deviation to the left. It will be seen that the effect of 
 this is to increase the amount of the curve in the tho- 
 racic reo-iou. 
 
 The reader will now understand that lateral curva- 
 ture of the spine is the product of one of two causes. 
 Either the weakness of the muscles is so great as to 
 leave the column unsupported, in which case it yields to 
 the weight of the superior portion of the body, or the 
 greater use and development of one side of the body 
 interferes with the harmonious action of the opposing 
 muscles of the two sides, and the different portions of 
 the column are constantly forced into opposite direc- 
 tions. In either case the change in the shape of the 
 
324 DEFOEMiriES OF THE SPrCfE. 
 
 bones must ultimately take place, and the deformity 
 mider all ordinary treatment continues, and the exe- 
 cutive power of the body is permanently impaired. 
 The character of the deformity, however, is subject to 
 mucii variation, scarcely any two cases being alike; 
 it may be modified by a variety of cu-cimistauees — 
 such, for example, as the natural shape of the body, 
 the infiuence of particular habits and postui-es, such as 
 a habit of reclining on one side, studying, writing, or 
 other occupations that employ chiefly one or the other 
 side of the body, whether in tbe sitting or standing 
 posture ; and it may even follow as the effect of dis- 
 eases of the internal organs. 
 
 Curvature of the spine may also result from the 
 scrofulous diathesis. In this case ulcerative absorp- 
 tion of some portion of the vertebral column takes 
 place, most commonly at the front in the dorsal region, 
 where the inner edges of the contiguous vertebrae are 
 subjected to the most pressure. The effect of this is to 
 cause the vertebra in which this process is going on 
 to acquire more of a wedge shape, or, perhaps, the in- 
 ner edge of the bone is quite worn away, allowing the 
 column to bend at this point and producing an unsight- 
 ly prominence or angle. In this case the cartilage 
 being removed, the bones become irremediably united, 
 or, technically speaking, anclojlofsed. 
 
 In all the above-mentioned cases, while the causes 
 here set forth continue, the deformity has a tendency 
 to increase, which it sometimes does to an extent which 
 becomes extremely prejudicial to the health. Tlie in- 
 ternal organs may, in consequence, become misplaced, 
 so much so as to prevent the performance of tlieir func- 
 tions, or the spinal cord may become compressed, pro- 
 ducing neuralgia or partial paralysis of the lower ex- 
 
DKFOIiMI'I'IKH OJ-' 'IJIK HJ'INE. 325 
 
 tremities. "No nMiic^licH Hiij>|>li(;<l 1]ir(>ij;_'-li the stomach 
 are of tlie least avail \]itw, aud generally the only re- 
 course of the physieian has Ijeen artificial supports and 
 mechanical extension. 
 
 The result of the kind of treatment liere refeiTed to, 
 usually at lirst flattering, is afterward anything but satis- 
 factory. The reason is apparent. The mechanical sup- 
 port affords relief to the fatigued parts and removes the 
 undue and j^ainful pressure on one side. But this very 
 recourse is an effectual barrier to the nutrition and de- 
 velopment of the natural muscular supjjorts, in conse- 
 quence of which their condition, instead of improving, 
 is certain to grow worse, and the disease and accom- 
 panying deformity, instead of being removed, are per- 
 petuated. The great majority of the spinal supporters 
 in vogue were contrived to take the jjlace of the muscles 
 and to do their duty, which is manifestly an impossi- 
 bility, and their influence is nnqualitiedly harmful, if 
 not actually fatal. They subject the tender and sickly 
 child or youth to a torture that is not only unneces- 
 sary, but to the last degree injurious to the general 
 health. 
 
 Spinal deformities are the fruit of muscular weakness, 
 which the reader knows is the product of imperfect 
 muscular nutrition, often relerable to a vicious stomach 
 and defective digestion. The trouble is, no doubt, often 
 aggravated, and indeed, in some eases, induced by ir- 
 regular innervation, ju-oducing spasm, ov at least a 
 rigidity and tendcMicy to spasm o\' certain muscles. 
 But in all ordinary casi^s the therapeutic indications 
 are simph>, plain, and unri|ui\ oral, and consist in 
 devtlopuKj thi' jHni\ r of I Ik (/itj(sfir<\ it)uJ csjKcially 
 of the ;y^//.^v7/A/>' .vv/.vA;//, thns enabling the latter to do 
 the duties it lias liitlicrlo Jailed \o luTlbrm. Tlie means 
 
326 DEFORMITIES OF THE SPINE, 
 
 for etrectiiig these objects do not consist in any wonder- 
 ful and nauseating decoctions to be swallowed at cer- 
 tain times of the day and night, nor in mechanical sup- 
 ports and complex modes of extension, but simply in 
 exercise under proper regulations and restrictions ; in 
 other words, in the practice of movements^ which are 
 the only proper and efficient means of calling the 
 needed nutrition into the disabled parts, so as to cause 
 their development and reinstate them in health and 
 power. 
 
 In directing the treatment of deformities by single 
 movements, it is only necessary to say that the move- 
 ments should be directed exclusively to the develop- 
 ment of the weaker parts. For instance, in right lateral 
 curvature, the movements should be directed to the left 
 side, and in the ordinary exercises of the invalid the 
 left side should always have the preference, while much 
 exertion of the muscles of the right should for a while, 
 at least, be avoided. If studious attention be paid to 
 this suggestion, the nutrition of the two sides of the 
 body will soon be equalized, and their muscular forces 
 balanced. 
 
 It is not difficult by means of duplicated, and even 
 by single, movements to improve the shape of the 
 spinal column to a certain extent in nearly every case 
 that will present itself, and if the vertebrae are in 
 sound condition, the restoration of symmetry to the 
 form will be complete. But if the vertebrse have 
 become considerably diseased and misshapen, the de- 
 gree of improvement attained will be less. In such 
 case judicious mechanical aid is useful, but this must 
 not be afforded at the expense of the muscles. This 
 assistance should be directed solely to the rectifi- 
 cation of the shape of vertebral bones, and consists 
 
DEFORMITIES OF THE SPINE. 327 
 
 simply in applying pressure to the projecting point, 
 wherever that may be. This is accomplished by means 
 of ingeniously contrived instruments, nicely adapted to 
 the purpose. But these aids are never to be used save 
 in connection witli approj^riate and vigorously applied 
 movements, for without these the artificial appliances 
 are valueless, if not harmful. 
 
 In a case of simple curvature to the right, the invalid 
 may employ such movements as the following with 
 great advantage : 
 
 1. Hanging (left arm). 
 
 2. Curtseying (left leg). 
 
 3. Left curve (weight held) wing, step standing, 
 trunk to the right bending (four times). 
 
 4. Left stretch, right wing backward lying, legs to 
 the left guiding. 
 
 5. Left stretch, right wing stride short sitting, trunk 
 to the right bending. 
 
 6. Left stretch, right wing stride sitting, trunk for- 
 ward falling. 
 
 7. Stretch grasp to the left fall standing, holding. 
 
 8. Shelter stride, to the right bent sitting, trunk ro- 
 tation. 
 
 9. Stretch right side balance lying, holding. 
 
328 FEMALE DISEASES. 
 
 FEMALE DISEASES. 
 
 The women of America, probably to a greater extent 
 than those of any other comitry, suffer from diseases 
 peculiar to the sex. I am convinced from observation as 
 well from the testimony of distinguished medical men 
 and others at home and abroad, that such diseases of 
 this class are far less common in European countries 
 than here. Diseases of this class are likewise scarcely 
 known among the rude, uncultivated people of any 
 part of the world. 
 
 There would indeed appear to be something in the 
 habits and customs of our domestic life particularly 
 calculated to engender and foster these distressing and 
 disastrous maladies. We shall hardly succeed in as- 
 certaining the causes of the prevalence of these affec- 
 tions among us by entering upon an analysis of isolated 
 facts or of the habits of the individual or of society. 
 It is probable that these causes are numerous, and of 
 such a nature that, regarded singly, they would seem 
 very unim2:)ortant. AYe are nevertheless justified in 
 making the inference from analogy as well as from 
 facts that the class of diseases under consideration, like 
 so many others, are to be regarded simply as the 
 effect of such causes as tend to restrain or impede the 
 development of the physical system and interfere with 
 its functional actions. We may enumerate as prom- 
 inent among these causes, dark rooms, rooms overheat- 
 
FEMALE DISEASES. 329 
 
 ed, illy ventilated apartinents^ luxurious iipholstery^ 
 fold air^ such labor as necessitates tlie excessive exer- 
 cise of single regions of the body, habits of indolence. 
 To these may be added others of another class, but 
 quite as important, that often co-operate with these, 
 although alone sufficient to produce the results. Tliero 
 are causes derived from the mental and nervous system / 
 of these may be mentioned, Iwusehold cares and anxie- 
 ties, the annoying whims and caprices of unruly serv- 
 ants, the foolish rivalries of fashionable and unfashion- 
 able society, the excitements of parties, balls, the theater, 
 sentimental novels, and tragical romances. 
 
 A prime cause of the universal deterioration of the 
 organic systems of our women we believe to be ascrib- 
 able largely to the undue culture and development of 
 the sensibilities resulting from their too great devotion 
 to the light literature of the day. The morbid effect 
 which this style of reading does confessedly exert upon 
 the mind must extend to the body, which it controls. 
 The extent and complexity of the sympathetic actions 
 of the female system, under the influence of this love- 
 lorn and trashy sentimentalism, can only be estimated 
 by one who has studied the feminine branch of human 
 nature in its most obscure and embarrassing phenom- 
 ena. By the means here adverted to, the nerves con- 
 nected with and controlling the most delicate and 
 sympathetic function of the female, are subjected to a 
 morbid influence, resulting but too often in grave local 
 as well as general disorder. 
 
 The symptoms attendant upon the class of diseases 
 under consideration are such as might naturally be ex- 
 pected to result from the causes above mentioned. The 
 laxity of muscular fiber in these cases is a conspicuous 
 feature. This is manifested even in the expression of 
 
330 FEMALE DISEASES. 
 
 tlie countenance and in the style of tlie carriage. There 
 is always inability to walk any considerable distance 
 without fatigue, which, as a general rule, is felt mostly 
 in the back and loins, and thence down the limbs. 
 Generally the pain in the back is very persistent. The 
 act of ascending stairs is not only laborious and diffi- 
 cult, but is followed by an aggravation of the distress- 
 ing symptoms peculiar to the complaint. There is 
 also, generally, tenderness of the lower portion of the 
 abdomen, accompanied by a dragging sensation and 
 pain, urinary derangement, sensitiveness of the lower 
 extremity of the spinal column, often by annoying dis- 
 tress in the head, and other symptoms, local and gen- 
 eral, of an extent and severity proportionate to the 
 gravity of the case. 
 
 The mental phenomena attendant upon this disease 
 are not less conspicuous than those just described. 'Ner- 
 vous excitability and irritability of mind, with fre- 
 quent depression of spirits, are among the commonest 
 symptoms. Hysterical paroxysms frequently occur 
 after unusual fatigue or mental exertion. One great 
 cause of the depression experienced is the conviction 
 the patient usually labors under, that her troubles are 
 incurable. She feels that her disease must progress, 
 and the unsatisfactory effects of the oft- tried pill and 
 powder tend strongly to confirm her in a state of de- 
 spondency and depressing irresolution. 
 
 The ordinary physician, as well as the specialist, for 
 whom the disease in question affords a grand field for 
 experiment, reaps glorious harvests from this class of 
 cases. The ill success of treatment constantly expe- 
 rienced only seems to stimulate to trials of new doctors 
 and new remedies ; and so, while the patient grows 
 worse the good doctor grows rich. 
 
FEMALE DISEASES. 331 
 
 In common medical practice, the attempt is often 
 made to sustain tlic body with mechanical supporters. 
 These are destructive to the health of the muscles, and 
 hence to that of the general system. It employs stim- 
 ulant and tonic drugs, the temporary effect of wliich 
 deceives the patient, and the ultimate effect impairs the 
 assimilative and the general vital power. It ])re- 
 soribes inactivity^ or suspension of the natural func- 
 tions, as the grand condition for recruiting the strength. 
 It employs local cauterization, which, thougli it re- 
 lieves the congested membi'fine to which it is applied, 
 yet in the end draws the circulation to the part in 
 greater amount, and hence favors the congestion it is 
 employed to relieve. It makes use of internal sup- 
 ports, which distend and irritate the parts, and disturb 
 their natural functions. These means alternately tan- 
 talize the sufferer with hopes and depress her wdtli 
 fears, and prevent both herself and her medical adviser 
 from attendino- to the real fundamental causes of her 
 misery, and from the employment of the appropriate 
 means for its radical relief. 
 
 The existence of the symptoms above enumerated do 
 not always indicate the existence of local congestion- 
 nor local disease. Even in cases where they are pres- 
 ent in a marked degree, I have often been obliged to 
 differ from physicians whose judgment I sincerely de- 
 sire to respect, in regard to the presence of organic dis- 
 ease. And even when there is ulceration of the neck 
 of the uterus, hypertrophy of that organ, leucorrhea, 
 etc., the gravity of the case does not reside in these 
 symptoms, but in the lack of mtal energy wdiich per- 
 mits these symptoms to occur. The common pi-actice 
 demonstrates every day that tliese signs continually 
 return when they have been treated by the above- 
 
332 FEMALE DISEASES. 
 
 mentioned methods. Xo reliable and permanent cure 
 can be effected wliile the disease is regarded as resid- 
 ing in the symptoms, which should be considered as 
 only proofs of its existence. 
 
 A serious objection to the ordinary practice in uterine 
 diseases is the frequently repeated examinations which 
 it necessitates. The rehned woman shrinks from these 
 as from martyrdom, and with reason. In the method 
 of cure advocated in this treatise, such examinations 
 are dispensed with, except so far as they may be neces- 
 sary in forming a diagnosis in a difficult case. 
 
 Let us now take another view of this class of diseases. 
 
 The real and essential pathology of these cases con- 
 sists in such conditions as defective muscular nutrition 
 and tone, defective peripheral circulation, central con- 
 gestion, defective innervation, heightened nervons sus- 
 ceptibility, and bad digestion, the latter three of which 
 conditions are dependent on the first three mentioned. 
 
 The condition of the muscles should not be judged 
 of by the amount of force exerted under any strong 
 mental excitement; for, with the impulsive nervous 
 habit, induced by the disease, great efforts of short 
 continuance may be put forth, but the high degree of 
 nervous action necessary to such display, proves the 
 real lack of muscular power. Such exertion is always 
 followed in these cases by exhaustion and permanent 
 debility. 
 
 The causes of the above-mentioned states, consti- 
 tuting the disease, have been already alluded to, and 
 consist of defective early (3ulture, uncorrected by sub- 
 sequent attention to the needs of both the physiologi- 
 cal and moral nature. Society consigns the conditions 
 upon which a woman's caj)acity for usefulness in life 
 mainly depends, to habitual neglect and practical con- 
 
fp:male diseases. 333 
 
 tempt. Do we wonder that women complain of weak 
 abdominal muscles ? Why should these muscles be 
 strong when so little used ? and how can they be other- 
 wise than weak when they have been subjected to 
 the constant bandaging necessitated by the prevailing 
 mode of dress ? Do any wonder that she is pale and 
 is addicted to sighing and tremors, while she sits the 
 whole day, or a great 2^art of it, at her needle-work or 
 book, or languidly reclines upon the lounge ? If she 
 takes exercise, she is very careful that the important 
 regions in question shall be disturbed thereby as little 
 as possible. If driven by ennui^ she walks / the pelvis 
 is carried as tenderly as if made of glass. We admit 
 there is a great deal to excuse the connnon aversion 
 which women feel for any descri]3tion of exercise, when 
 the affection exists in any degree of severity, for the 
 whole contents of ilie abdominal cavity which the 
 jnuscles were made to sustain are suffered to obey the 
 law of gravity, owing to the extensive relaxation and 
 weakness of these sup[)orts, and the consequences are, 
 as shown to some extent in the external appearance of 
 the abdomen, a depression of the epigastric region, and 
 a proportionate, unnatural fullness of the hypogastric 
 region. The lumbar portion of the spinal column is 
 dragged painfully forward, which displacement is com- 
 pensated by an ugly rotundity of the shoulders, which 
 gi^tses the head an aAvkward forw^ard pitch. 
 
 The muscles of tlie abdomen in all these cases are 
 soft and doughy to the touch, thin and inelastic. 
 
 The exterior shape, however, conveys but a slight 
 idea of the extent of the muscular weakness of this 
 class of invalids, for there are a number of other mus- 
 cles quite beyond the reach of direct observation, which 
 are equally important to the liealtli of these parts with 
 
334 
 
 FEMALE DISEASES. 
 
 those of the abdomen ; such as the internal muscles 
 of locomotion, the rotary muscles of the thigh, and 
 especially those of the floor of the pelvis. 
 
 The health of the pelvic organs is dependent lo the 
 same extent, as are those of the abdominal, upon tlie 
 oscillatory motion communicated by the diaphragm in 
 respiration. A decrease of this motion favors conges- 
 tion in the capillary cir- Fig. 79. 
 culation of those organs 
 which have but little mo- 
 tion from causes within 
 themselves, and which, 
 therefore, become depend- 
 ent on that received from 
 neighboring muscles. 
 
 It appears from this 
 statement that the health 
 of the pelvic organs is de- 
 pendent very much upon 
 the mechanical effects pro- 
 duced upon them by res- 
 piration. But the health 
 of the chest and that of 
 Outline of the the abdomcu are associat- 
 
 FEMALE FOEM, WITH t . ^ 
 
 WEAK MUSCLES AND ed lu auothcr mauuer. A 
 
 SYMPTOMS OF PELVIC 
 
 DISEASE. glance at the outlme cuts 
 
 shows that with the distention of the lower portion of 
 the abdominal walls, and the gravitation of the contents, 
 the diaphragm, which is the superior boundary of the 
 abdominal cavity, must also descend. The ribs neces- 
 sarily become much depressed, and the cavity of the 
 chest becomes narrowed, and the breathing capacity 
 consequently diminished, l^ow, if the ribs be elevated, 
 the diaphragm, which is connected with them, will of 
 
 OtJTLINE OF A 
 
 HEALTHFUL FEMALE 
 
 FORM. 
 
FEMALE DISEASES. 335 
 
 course be raised, and there will be nothing to force 
 from their 23lace the contents of the abdominal and 
 pelvic cavities. 
 
 We need not repeat the statement, that the proper 
 digestion of food and healthful blood are also depend- 
 ant on vigorous respiration. ]J^ow, at the bottom of 
 ;ill this general muscular weakness of the female lies 
 this faulty condition of the blood. But foul blood does 
 a worse thing than produce weakness ; it creates con- 
 gestion, and just where this congestion shall occur is 
 decided by the law of gravity ; the most depending 
 organs, especially such as enjoy no voluntary muscu- 
 lar contractility, as the uterus, are most likely to take 
 on this state. The peculiar congestion precedhig and 
 accompanying the menstrual flux may become chronic 
 from imperfection of the vital operation, and add to 
 the trouble. When we consider the universality of 
 these causes noticed, we can only wonder that so many 
 of the women of our day and country manage to escape 
 these difficulties. 
 
 Tlie remedy suited to tliis large and distressing class 
 of complaints is suggested by their pathology. Indeed, 
 it is in cases of disj^lacements of various kinds, con- 
 gestion, ulceration, etc., of the womb, and affections 
 of other organs associated with it, as the bladder and 
 ovaries, that the treatment by movements has been 
 proved efficacious far beyond any other known, whether 
 surgical or medical. JBy movements, the organs may 
 •be raised to their normal position, and their retention 
 in place is not dependent upon any mechanical ap- 
 paratus, but upon their restored powder — this, too, with- 
 out any of those indelicate manipulations being neces- 
 sary which are required by the common treatment. 
 By means of the most simple instructions relative to 
 
3m6 female diseases. 
 
 the principles and practice of movements, the condi- 
 tion of the health of the region in qnestion is placed 
 under the control of the jpatient herself. The very 
 amiable reader may donbt the propriety of thus inter- 
 fering with the doctor's business, but there must be a 
 satisfaction even to the most amiable in doing thor- 
 oughly for one's self what the most learned doctor can 
 do for her not one half so well. 
 
 The indications of treatment in these cases are gen- 
 erally the following : 
 
 1. To elevate the ribs and diaphragm, and increase 
 the space of the superior portion of the abdominal 
 cavity. 
 
 2. To contract the space of the inferior portion of 
 the same cavity by causing a permanent contraction 
 of the muscular walls of this region. 
 
 3. To develop the small muscles about the thighs 
 and those constituting the floor of the pelvis. 
 
 4. To remove the blood from the internal weak and 
 therefore congested parts to peripheral parts, abdom- 
 inal coverings, and extremities. 
 
 5. To restore health to the mental and nervous sys- 
 tems by diminishing nervous irritability. 
 
 6. To impart vital energy to the whole system that 
 sliall be radical and permanent. 
 
 The particular movements required to fulfill these 
 indications depend much upon the temperament as 
 well as the condition of the health of the patient. If 
 there be great feebleness, the duplicated movements 
 are indispensable to the successfnl treatment. At 
 least, they must be employed in its beginning. If 
 there be mnch tenderness of the abdomen, as there 
 frequently is, vibratory and other j)assive movements 
 for the central portions of the body will be intersper.^ed 
 
FEMALE DISEASES. 337 
 
 with sucli as are more active, applied to the extremi- 
 ties. After a few days the extremities will be better 
 supplied with blood, and the visceral congestion will 
 be diminished to a corresponding extent, so that press- 
 ures^ hendings^ etc., will not only be easily borne, but 
 be very grateful to the patient. After this is accom- 
 plished, the patient may carry on the cure alone if cir- 
 cumstances make it necessary ; or she may begin the 
 treatment with the single movements, if the disease be 
 not far advanced, with such as the following, for in- 
 stance, confident of speedy beneficial effects. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PRESCRIPTION. 
 
 1. Stretch (weight held) backward lying, holding. 68. 
 
 2. Elbow and toe lying, holding, or hips raising. 58. 
 
 3. Wing backward lying, legs raising. 26. 
 
 4. Wing legs angle half lying, thighs rotation. 31. 
 
 5. Wing legs angle lying, hips raising. 30. 
 Repeat — 
 
 1. Keclined arms angle kneeling, arms up stretch- 
 ing. 43. 
 
 2. Stretch long sitting, trunk forward falling. 53. 
 
 3. Stretch twist sitting, trunk oblique backward 
 falling. 34. 
 
 4. Head rest forward fall standing, leg raising. 
 Change. 22. 
 
 5. Forward bent standing, chine knocking. 32. 
 
 6. Wing long sitting, legs twisting. 24. 
 
 7. Elbow and foot side lying, hips raising. 62. 
 
 8. Wing short sitting, leg outward stretching. 16. 
 
 9. Shelter backward lying, legs rotation. 29. 
 
 10. Wing sitting, feet rotation. 5. 
 
 In selecting movements for these affections, the na- 
 ture of each case must be carefully considered. Gren- 
 
 15 
 
338 FEMALE DISEASES. 
 
 erallj, appropriate movements sliould be applied to 
 the extremities at first almost exclusively. The feebler 
 the case, the fewer the movements directly affecting 
 the central organs should be employed. The move- 
 ment should be taken once a day, and if there be suffi- 
 cient ability, 'No. 2 of the first example, or IN'os. 1 or 
 3 of the second, may be repeated, according to the 
 mode already described, several times in the course of 
 the day. 
 
 If the patient be afilicted with amenorrhea.^ the fol- 
 lowing movements are useful : 
 
 Wing chine lean stride standing, curtseying. 9. 
 
 Support half standing, curtseying. 10. 
 
 Forward fall head support standing, leg raising. 22. 
 
 Support half standing, leg rotation. Change. 23. 
 
 Half wing support standing, leg outward raising. 21. 
 
 Shelter backward lying, legs raising. 26. 
 
 Shelter trunk backward lying, legs rotation. 29. 
 
 Forward bent standing, chine knocking ; and the 
 foot and leg movements generally. 
 
 The auxiliary means are important here. The pa- 
 tient must observe a proper and healthful diet, abjure 
 all condiments and stimulants ; and all indigestible mat- 
 ters and articles, within their chemical and physiologi- 
 cal relations, may properly be styled ^6>(?r, however re- 
 cherche and costly. (See article on Diet.) She must 
 also ride and walk in the open air, without regard to 
 the humidity or disagreeable temperature of the atmos- 
 phere — should also be rubbed with the wet hand over 
 the whole cutaneous surface, and then, after drying 
 with a towel, with the dry hand, and if convenient, a 
 shower sitting-bath may be used for two minutes, once 
 or twice in the course of tlie day. 
 
 K she has anteversion, or retroversion, or otlier seri- 
 
FEMALE DISEASES. 339 
 
 ons displacements, her movements should be prescribed 
 by a competent physician. Let this be remembered. 
 
 By following the above rules and directions, the 
 woman afflicted with the diseases of this chass will gen- 
 erally, in a few days or wrecks, find her strength to be 
 greatly improving, and she will again be enabled to 
 mount stairs without difficulty, a faculty most desir- 
 able in this age of tall dwellings. She w^ill feel the 
 blessed influx of health through all the tissues of 
 her frame. She will rejoice and be glad ; and, if of a 
 grateful turn, will be very sure to sing the praises of 
 her deliverer, the Movement- Cure. 
 
 The above formulas are given as examples only, and 
 are not to be regarded as appropriate to every imag- 
 inable case. 
 
84:0 MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 Movements to Remove Fatigue. — It is not necessary 
 for one to wholly abstain from motion, in order to 
 secure rest from fatigue. On tlie contrai'v, .1 e con- 
 tinuance of exercise in many cases is more favor- 
 able to restoration than a state of total inaction 
 would be, provided always, that other than the 
 fatigued parts be called into action. Hence the ad- 
 vantage of a frequent change of occupation, especially 
 for the weakly. One can accom]3lish a vast deal 
 more in a given time by varying his work occasion- 
 ally, than by expending his strength uj^on any one 
 particular kind. All animals instinctively stretch 
 themselves, that is, cause the muscles situated remote- 
 ly from the central organs to act, in order to get relief 
 from the sense of fatigue. The oj^erators in the foreign 
 Movement-Cure institutions, instead of resting as labor- 
 ers commonly do, after two or three hours of the sever- 
 est exercise, ajpjply movements to each other^ in order to 
 become rested, selecting such portions of the body as 
 were least brought into action by their professional 
 manipulations. A favorite movement with the female 
 assistants, I observed, was that termed hachward and 
 leg lying^ holding. In this movement the legs are 
 fixed, the body in the backward lying position, while 
 the trunk is unsupported, causing powerful action of 
 the muscles of the abdomen, in consequence of vdjicli 
 
MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 311 
 
 fatigue of tlie back (from wliich they most suffer) is re- 
 moved. All patients, and especially the female por- 
 tion, testify to the readiness and permanency with which 
 habitual back-ache is thus removed. In explanation of 
 this we need only refer tlie reader to the principles laid 
 down in the first part of this work. Severe action of 
 any portion of the body is effectual in calling the circu- 
 lation, and especially the nervous influence, //'<9m other 
 portions of the body, which in the instance in question 
 are congested by the previous exercise. By causing 
 different portions of the body to act alternately, they 
 are enabled to act equally, their functions are harmon- 
 ized, and the sense of fatigue is removed. 
 
 The system of movements regards the body as a 
 reservoir of force ^ upon which every action makes a 
 a certain demand. If the demands ujDon the system 
 for expenditure be moderate^ the supply is readily kept 
 up equal to the demand by means of the unceasing 
 operations of the organizing processes. If the demand 
 caused by the exertion of power be excessive, or if it 
 proceed from several different portions of the system 
 at the same time, then the organizing processes are not 
 equal to it, 2iX\di fatigue is the consequence. Immunity 
 fi-om fatigue is experienced always in proportion to the 
 degree of perfection attained by the nutritive or organ- 
 izing processes. 
 
 It must not be inferred from the above remarks, that 
 movements are always the appropriate remedy for 
 fatigue. If the fatigue be general, absolute repose is 
 of course necessary. 
 
 To Stop ISTose-bleed. — The remedy for this affection 
 is very simple ; nothing more is generally necessary 
 than to 7'aise hoth arms to upioard stretch ])osition. 
 
3i2 MISCELLAl^EOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 The efficacy of this action for the purpose named, ad- 
 mits of easy demonstration, but why the effect follows, 
 is not, at first, so apparent. We would explain it in 
 this way. It may be observed, that if the arms be 
 raised to the perpendicular upright position, and then, 
 after remaining uplifted for a short time, be permitted 
 suddenly to dro])^ the hands will be found suffused 
 with blood. Since a much greater impediment than 
 usual is presented to flow of the blood to the uplift- 
 ed hands, occasioned by the opposition of the force of 
 gravity, the effort of the arterial vessels upon which 
 this increased labor devolves becomes necessarily 
 much greater than before ; and since the arterial press- 
 ure in direction of the arms is increased, that toward 
 the head is correspondingly lessened. When, now, the 
 impediment (consisting of gravity) is removed, while 
 the arterial impulse is continued, the blood, rushing to 
 the hands, produces a marked derivative effect upon the 
 circulation of the head, and consequently the flow from 
 the ruptured capillaries of the nasal membrane ceases. 
 Another Qnode of stopping nose-bleed, presented by 
 Branting, is as follows : The subject takes a fcdl stride 
 sitting i^osture^ the nose is grasped and rapidly vibrated, 
 while at the same instant the trunk rises, and returns 
 to the erect position. This action may be repeated 
 several times. 
 
 To Induce Yomiting. — The method of causing the 
 stomach to discharge its contents by means of irritating 
 the fauces was known long before Marshall Hall ex- 
 plained the reflex powers of the nei'vous system, upon 
 which the action of vomiting depends. This means of 
 dislodging the contents of the stomach is generally 
 adequate for the purpose, in those cases where this effect 
 
MISCELLAlfEOUS ArPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 343 
 
 is really desirable.) provided it be managed with suffi- 
 cient tact. It is nuicli better in most cases than to ir- 
 ritate the stomach with powerful drugs, which course 
 is necessarily followed by great debility of the organ, 
 even if lucky enough to escape inflammation, or more 
 serious chronic disease. 
 
 The proper method in these cases is to ply the 
 stomach with lukewarm water in large doses, and often 
 repeated, no matter how much this may be in opposi- 
 tion to the feelings and in spite of the protestations of 
 the patient. When the feeling of nausea has arisen to 
 a good degree, something (the finger will do) may 
 be applied to the back part of the mouth. This will 
 generally cause the stomach to contract spasmodically, 
 and eject its contents. Should it refuse to do so, the 
 hand of an attendant may be applied to the stomach, 
 just below the pit, and by making a sudden, but not 
 violent kneading motion in an upward direction, a 
 contractile action of the stomach is suddenly induced, 
 and its contents are discharged. 
 
 To Remove Chilblatxs. — This annoying afl:ection, in 
 ordinary cases, may be quickly removed. The ])rinciple 
 of cure is that concerned in the removal of congestion 
 of internal organs by means of vibratory movements. 
 The mode of operation is pointed out in N'o. 6, page 
 164:. Or, the leg of the afflicted foot may rest upon 
 the knee of another person, who deals rapid but light 
 blows upon the bottom of the foot, it being protected 
 by a shoe or boot. 
 
 The reason why the congestion of the capillaries con- 
 stituting the disease is dissipated by this treatment, is 
 quite obvious. The actual condition consists not only 
 of a dilatation of the capillaries, but also in a change 
 
34^1: MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 in tlie quality of the blood and the occurrence of the 
 gelatinous corpuscle^ characteristic of inflammation, 
 which, with the normal blood corpuscle, become ad- 
 herent to the walls of the capillaries, effectually clog- 
 ging the channel and preventing the onward flow. 
 The motion communicated in the manner described 
 excites the contraction of the distended walls of the 
 vessels, and at the same time detaches adhering cor- 
 puscles, which of course are carried through by the 
 current sweeping onward from the heart. The fresh 
 blood entering brings the conditions for restoring the 
 normal state of the parts. The same reasoning proba- 
 bly holds true for the application of passive vibration 
 by the duplicated movements^ in all cases of congestion, 
 and, if properly managed, of inflammation even, wher- 
 ever situated. 
 
 To Relieve Headache. — 1. Energetic friction ap- 
 plied over the longitudinal, lateral, and basilar sinuses 
 will frequently relieve this affection. The reason 
 seems to be, that contraction is thus induced in the 
 venous walls, which consequently urge the blood for- 
 ward, relieving them of their distention. Tliis may be 
 done by one's self, or by another. The 2:)rocedure is 
 as follows : partly close the hands, placing the backs 
 of the fingers in contact, raise the hands to the head, 
 placing the tips of all the fingers over the longitudinal 
 suture^ or middle line of the head. IS^ow carry the 
 fingers, thus placed, backward and forward on the mid- 
 dle line, making considerable friction upon the scalp. 
 The fingers may now divide and pass down the back 
 of the head at each side to the base, and then along the 
 base at the roots of the liair, continuing the same de- 
 gree of friction through the whole course. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 345 
 
 2. If a hand be very tightly applied about the head, 
 and, after remaining a few minutes, be suddenly re- 
 moved, a similar effect is experienced. This effect is 
 probably due to the impulse thus afforded to the circu- 
 lation in the venous sinuses. 
 
 3. Movements tending to warm the feet are always 
 useful in headache. 
 
 4. Headache is more frequently caused by a fault in 
 the quality rather than in the quantity of the blood 
 — in which case, all those means whose influence is to 
 purify or deterge the system ought to be used, and to 
 an extent corresponding with the gravity of the case. 
 In moderate cases, a long walk in the open air is suffi- 
 cient. If this is not enough, aljstinence must be prac- 
 ticed till the stomach is purified, the liver relieved of 
 the tenderness and congestion that usually in such 
 cases exists, and the secretions set free. To promote 
 vomiting, in the mode above described, is sometimes 
 necessary ; but persons liable to periodical attacks of 
 this affection should learn to avoid them by an im- 
 proved hygiene, rather than to cure them by any pro- 
 cess. Nervous headache requires rest and sleep, which 
 may be induced by duplicated movements. 
 
 Worms in Children. — These parasites feed upon 
 the imperfectly digested residual of the alimentary 
 tube, and they can never occur without the existence 
 of such food for their sustenance. It is the had diges- 
 tion^ giving rise to worms, rather than the worms them- 
 selves, that constitute the disease, and it is evident 
 that they can not exist when the cause is wanting. 
 The appetite of the child — which in these cases is al- 
 ways voracious — must be restrained, and the action of 
 the digestive organs promoted, in order that all the 
 
 15* 
 
SttG MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 
 
 food taken shall be completely disposed of. When 
 this is effected, the parasites will be expelled. The 
 abdomen of the child must be subjected to a thorough 
 hieading^ as described in a former chapter, three or 
 four times a day, ten or fifteen minutes at each time. 
 
 The abdomen, in these cases, is generally tumid, but 
 the kneading increases the natural motion of the mus- 
 cular walls of the canal, promotes absorption, and re- 
 stores a healthy tone to all the viscei-al contents. The 
 child, if possible, should also be made to ride much in 
 a springless vehicle in the open air. Worms are often 
 expelled from the bowels after a few days' practice of 
 the plan here directed, and this result should be re- 
 garded as a consequence^ rather than the cause^ of the 
 restoration to health. 
 
 Heknia. — ^This occurs generally in consequence of 
 weakness of the muscle of the lower portion of the ab- 
 domen, the hernial region. The fibers of these mus- 
 cles are liable to separate, upon a sudden muscular 
 effort being made, tlius permitting the intestine to pro- 
 trude. In many cases of this affection the truss has 
 ■» ^ -- -^.'QT^pnsed with, and the difficulty removed, through 
 tile - of the dupli- 
 
 cated movem. . ,,...,.. 
 
 The proper moveu -)}igqfVt] 
 
 Half stretch, half wing, liaii Kicxx . ^ ".;f.: '..;:,; 
 
 twisting. This movement is at first to be performed 
 with one side only, the trunk twisting toward the re- 
 laxed side, that is, the side of which the foot is raised. 
 After some progress is made, the twisting should be 
 done in the oj)posite direction. The kneeling twisting, 
 Nos. 42 and 48, also Nos. 56, 26, and 61, might be em- 
 ployed to good advantage. 
 
MISCELLANEOrS APPLICATIONS OF MOVEMENTS. 347 
 
 Frolai'sus OF THE Wo^iB AJ^D BowELs. — 111 all cascs 
 of this kind tliertj is great weakness of the muscles of 
 the chest, aMomen, jjerineicm, etc. The affection is 
 immediately relieved by practicing the movement Ko. 
 Gl. To strengthen the parts that are weak, so as to 
 prevent a return, the muscles belonging to all the re- 
 gions above mentioned require to be developed by 
 judicious practice of the movements aifecting the 
 parts. To accom]3lish this object, such movements as 
 the following are recommended : N'os. 43, 47, 48, 56, 
 36, 30, and 31. 
 
 To Kelieve Back-ache. — When caused by fatigue, 
 such movements as cause the abdomen to act are use- 
 fuh But this symptom is often caused by laxity of 
 inuscles, allowing the visceral contents to gravitate. 
 In this case the movements above recommended for 
 prolapsus will be found effectual. 
 
 Amexorkhea. — All processes tending to strengthen 
 the body, tend to overcome menstrual obstruction. 
 The movements particularly to be recommended are, 
 :N"os. 14, 18, 27, 29, 30, 31, and 32, and, indeed, such 
 movements are also useful for constipation. 
 
 To Excite Action of the Lower Bowel. — A move- 
 ment highly useful for this purpose is wide stride leg 
 angle standing, trunk vibration, E'o. 65. The position 
 for this movement is tbe same as the terminating posi- 
 tion of ISTo. 9. Also the examples I^os. 29, 31, and 32 
 are very useful, as well as kneading, ^o. ^%. 
 
348 vAEiors common exercises. 
 
 DIFFERENT EFFECTS OF VARIOUS COMMOJT EXER- 
 CISES UPON" PERSONS m HEALTH. 
 
 "Walking. — This is the most agreeable and natural 
 of all exercises. In walking, the body is free and un- 
 constrained, most parts of it are subjected to gentle 
 action with but a slight degree of expenditure of mus- 
 cular or of nervous force, these powers being econo- 
 mized to the greatest extent, and the action may con- 
 sequently be continued for a longer period than almost 
 any other that engages the will. Walking causes the 
 blood to circulate freely in the extremities, skin, and 
 lungs, to refresh, nourish, and invigorate these parts, 
 strengthens the spine, and relieves all tendency to con- 
 gestion of the internal organs and head. It also sup- 
 plies the most perfect condition for mental action and 
 enjoyment. It is almost the only exercise which in- 
 valids of nearly all classes may engage in without a 
 prescription. But it does not supply all the system 
 requires of exercise. It fails to call into sufficient 
 action either the abdominal or the breathing organs, 
 and other exercises adapted to these purposes are re- 
 quired by those who have no occasion to engage in 
 work. 
 
 Running. — A good run of a few moments is very 
 exhilarating to the spirits and stimulating to the frame. 
 It causes a great expansion of the chest, and a power- 
 
VARIOUS COMMON EXERCISES. 34:0 
 
 fill pressure of tlie blood into tlie capillaries of the gen- 
 eral system as well as those of the lungs. It rapidly 
 produces a large amount of animal heat, soon causes 
 the surface to be wet with perspiration, and increases 
 the discharge by the kidneys. Although a good tonic 
 for the well, especially for those who have a capacious 
 chest, it too rapidly exhausts the powers of the feeble, 
 and might produce unpleasant, and perhaj)S dangerous 
 pulmonary congestion in persons of narrow and feeble 
 breathing organs. 
 
 Dancing. — Tliis exercise has been employed by all 
 nations in all ages, to exhilarate the mind, and to give 
 expression to the feeling of abounding good health, 
 which there is no doubt it contributes to maintain. It 
 has the advantage over most other exercise, in being so- 
 cial. Being accompanied by music, both the mental 
 and muscular powers of all those engaged are united in 
 executing the same movements, which is consequently 
 effected without much exertion of the will, so that 
 it secures a large amount of exercise with but trifling 
 fatigue. Dancing harmonizes with the general plan 
 of the organic movements of the body, in being also 
 rythmical, so that it is here allied to the involuntary 
 movements. Dancing ought to be cultivated in every 
 family, as an antidote to the effects of the wearisome 
 toil and worry of our modern life. 
 
 Sewing. — This and many other sitting occupations 
 in wliich females engage, call chiefly into action the 
 superior portion of the body, while the trunk and 
 lower extremities are left nearly motionless. Those 
 who are thus occupied should therefore counteract 
 the ill effects flowins^ from a too co:istaiit attention 
 
350 VAKIOUS COMMON EXERCISES. 
 
 to such labors, by much walking in the open air, to 
 equalize the circulation. The health is much endanger- 
 ed in persons of naturally feeble constitutions by the 
 restraint exercised upon the action of the diajyhragm 
 and respiratory and abdominal muscles by excessive use 
 of the needle. Those who are compelled to devote 
 themselves to such labors should habitually practice 
 such movements for the lower extremities and trunk as 
 are described in this work. 
 
 Sewing with the machine^ on the contrary, affects 
 chiefly the lower extremities, and no doubt there are 
 numerous instances in w4iich the life of the feeble sew- 
 ing-woman has been preserved by this machine, through 
 its tendency to remove that incipient congestion of the 
 chest and lungs, which is the certain prelude to pul- 
 monary disease. It also affords more time to engage 
 in other and more genial occupations. This exercise 
 is, however, insufficient for the purposes of health, since 
 it does not contribute enough to the expansion of the 
 chest of the weakly female. 
 
 Agricultural Labors. — ^The healthful tendencies of 
 these employments are proverbial, when engaged in by 
 the well, and even by those slightly ailing. The ener- 
 getic action of the extremities throws the circulation into 
 these parts, while the amount of force expended neces- 
 sitates a large supply of air, and consequently a great 
 expansion of the chest. The respiration is generally 
 not materially quickened, but the air entering the lungs 
 is retained and somewhat compressed, in consequence 
 of the great exertion required by such exercises as saw- 
 ing and chopping wood, mowing, raking, pitching, 
 shoveling, and many other operations required of the 
 1'armer. Tlie health of the feeble is^ howevei, en- 
 
VAKIOUS COMMON EXERCISES. 351 
 
 daiigered by engaging in many of tliese kinds of exer- 
 cise, especially if pursued too continuously, for then tliey 
 would be likely to induce congestion of delicate parts 
 of the body. The weakly must remember that the de- 
 velopment of strength depends on a careful steady jpro- 
 cess of training^ and it is destructive for them to exert 
 more power than the system is capable of easily sup- 
 plying. Such persons must therefore undergo the 
 processes whose tendency is gradually to fit them for 
 greater exertion. 
 
 Painting, Sculptuee, Engraving. — Labor of this 
 kind generally requires the conjoint exercise of the 
 brain and sensorial nerves, as well as that of the arms 
 and chest. When these parts are used to an immoder- 
 ate degree, to the neglect of exercise of the lower ex- 
 tremities, it becomes harmful. Such occupations ought 
 therefore to be alternated with a great deal of walking, 
 and other such appropriate exercises as are described 
 in their proper place. 
 
 Study. — Tlie health enjoyed by the studious class is 
 generally conceded to be below that of the laborer. It 
 would be wrong to infer from this that study is in itself 
 unwholesome. On the contrary, the exercise of the in- 
 tellectual powers is entirely compatible with good 
 health and long life. The cause of ill health in tliese 
 cases lies in omitting to exercise the general muscular 
 system, and permitting the nervous to be almost exclu- 
 sively worked, for this disturbs the equipoise of the 
 system. 
 
 It is not enough in order that the studious may se- 
 cure the conditions of good health and long life, that he 
 occasionally relieve the fatigued brain and disturbed 
 
352 VAEIOUS CO:^EMON EXERCISES. 
 
 circulation by a forced walk. He should develop a 
 reserve force to enable him to withstand the accidents 
 that are continually occurring in life, which every 
 one is being forever unexj)ectedly called uj^on to en- 
 counter. He must resolve on the start, that life shall 
 not be a wretched ineffectual conflict with disease, 
 yielding no satisfactory experience or real profit, but a 
 hopeful, determined, steady, manly march — a stout 
 persistent contest with foes without. 
 
 Life is a race, a warfare. A man needs all his fac- 
 ulties and gifts, and they can not be too highly trained. 
 His whole intellectual, physical, and moral nature 
 should be disciplined to the highest possible degree. 
 He can not afford to dispense with a single weapon 
 that nature has furnished for his use. A man to do 
 much good in the world must have a good stomach, 
 and a long wind, and a stout grip, as well as staunch 
 principles and a shrewd brain. He must expand and 
 invigorate his narrow and feeble chest ; the relaxed 
 diaphragm must be toned up ; the weak abdominal 
 muscles energized ; the liver, and kidneys, and pores 
 be made to do their duty as well as the thinking 
 organ. 
 
MOVEMENTS ADAPTED TO SCHOOLS. 353 
 
 CIiHjttr ®tocitt}j-tljrce. 
 
 MOVEMENTS ADAPTED TO THE USE OF SCHOOLS. 
 
 'No argument would, seem to be requisite to convince 
 tlie world of the importance of physical culture for 
 children and youth, while that of mental culture is so 
 generally acknowledged as the basis of civilization and 
 the condition of progress. Why the former has been 
 so much left to chance, or whim, or to charlatanry, 
 while so much attention is paid to the latter, is quite 
 unaccountable. This inconsistency has been long ap- 
 parent to the instructors of you^i, and various attempts 
 have been made, in modern times, to develop all the 
 powers and faculties of the human system equally and 
 in connection. These endeavors have met with but 
 moderate success — a success probably far inferior to 
 that realized by the ancients. 
 
 The prevalence of incorrect ideas on this subject 
 which characterizes the times, makes it necessary that 
 something should be done to attract the attention of 
 the people to ih.om princijyles which have been so long 
 and so studiously ignored. 
 
 The difficulties in the way of the successful training 
 of the mind and body together, have been both prac- 
 tical and theoretical. The faults in the ordinary prac- 
 tice of gymnastics have been pointed out (page 124). 
 Besides being heterogeneous, disorderly, liable to abuse, 
 and injurious to weak organs, such exercises require 
 expensive apparatus, much space, and denumd more 
 
354 MOVEMENTS ADAPTED TO SCHOOLS. 
 
 time for their successful practice than can always be 
 conveniently devoted to them. 
 
 Well qualified teachers are also necessary. The 
 l^hysical powers of the child can no more properly be 
 directed without care and study than can the mental ; 
 and the consequences of misdirection are far more 
 likely to be permanently injurious in the former than 
 in the latter case. 
 
 Calisthenics, for the reason that they have not been 
 considered obnoxious to some of the above objections, 
 have occasionally been used in schools ; but the class 
 of exercises bearing this name really are scarcely less 
 objectionable, for they, too, require a greater propor- 
 tional action of the nerves than of the muscles; and 
 hence, though the respiration and circulation may 
 thereby be driven up to a higher degree of activity, 
 yet the nerve-forces, already overtasked by study, are 
 thus too rapidly ex23ended. (See page 112, et seq.) 
 
 The government of the kingdom of Sweden and 
 Norway, with great wisdom, long ago directed the use 
 of gymnastics in all the common schools throughout 
 the realm. The intention of this decree has never 
 been satisfactorily realized, owing to causes that we 
 have explained. Prof. Branting, Director of the Cen- 
 tral Gynmastic Institute, pupil and successor of Lmg, 
 has attempted to introduce there wdiat he terms the 
 Sitting Gymiiasiic Exercises. To this end, he has pub- 
 lished a formula of movements intended to be per- 
 formed in the intervals of the lessons, without appa- 
 ratus of any kind, noiselessly, and even sometimes 
 without the pupils leaving their seats. Tliese move- 
 ments may be resorted to at any time, as, wdien the 
 school has been long confined, or sufiTeriiig froin too 
 severe and continuous application. These exercises 
 
MOVEMENTS ADAPTED TO SCHOOLS. 
 
 355 
 
 are entirely accordant with the principles advocated 
 in the present work, and consist, ih the main, of move- 
 ments analogous to examples herein given. The Swe- 
 dish movements are not, however, exactly adapted to 
 our use on account of the diflerence in the arrangement 
 of seats in the schools of the two countries. I would 
 therefore propose a formula slightly difi'erent from the 
 Swedish, but essentially the same, which it is hoped 
 will be found not only practicable, but salutary. 
 
 ORDER OF COMMAND FOR THE FREE-SITTING MOVEMENTS. 
 
 No. 
 
 Nnme of MoveiriL-iitci. 
 
 Woids of Command. 
 
 I. 
 
 Primary Sit- 
 
 To movements attend. 
 
 
 ting Position. 
 
 
 
 n. 
 
 Half Stretch, 
 
 1. 
 
 Left hip— hold. 
 
 
 Half Wing 
 
 2_ 
 
 Right arm — upward stretch. 
 
 
 Sitt'g, Trunk 
 
 3'. 
 
 To the right— turn. 
 
 
 T^VISTING. 
 
 4. 
 
 Forward — turn. 
 
 
 
 5. 
 
 Change position of arms. 
 
 
 
 6. 
 
 To th'e left— turn. 
 
 
 
 7. 
 
 Forward — turn. 
 
 
 
 8. 
 
 Arms downward — stretch. 
 
 m. 
 
 Heel Rest Sit- 
 
 1. 
 
 Hips — hold. 
 
 
 ting, Ankle 
 
 2. 
 
 Knees — stretch. 
 
 
 Stretching 
 
 3. 
 
 Ankle stretch--bend, one ! two ! 
 
 
 AND Bending. 
 
 4. 
 
 Rest. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Stretch Stride 
 
 1. 
 
 Arms upward stretch, one ! two ! 
 
 
 Sitting, Head 
 
 
 
 Head backward bend, forward bend, one ! two ! 
 
 
 Forward and 
 
 3.' 
 
 Head upward stretch. 
 
 
 Backward 
 
 4. 
 
 Arms downward stretch, one ! two ! 
 
 
 Bending. 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Wing Stride 
 
 1. 
 
 Hips — hold. 
 
 
 SiTTLNG, KkEE 
 
 2, 
 
 Left leg— raise. 
 
 
 Stretchlxg. 
 
 ?K 
 
 Left knee— stretch. 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Knee — bend — stretch, one ! two ! 
 
 
 
 5. 
 
 Change position of legs. 
 
 
 
 6. 
 
 Right knee— stretch— bend, one ! two 
 
 
 
 7. 
 
 Rest. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Stride Sithng, 
 
 1. 
 
 Arms forward — stretch. 
 
 
 Arms Upward 
 
 2. 
 
 Arms upward — raise, one ! two ! 
 
 
 AND B.\ckw'd 
 
 3. 
 
 Arms downward — stretch. 
 
 
 Raising. 
 
 
 
 \ai. 
 
 Stretch Stride 
 
 1. 
 
 Arms upward stretch. 
 
 
 Sitting, Head 
 
 2. 
 
 Head turn to right, to left, one ! two ! 
 
 
 Rotation. 
 
 
 
356 MOVEMENTS ADAPTED TO SCHOOLS. 
 
 ORDER OF COMMAND— Continued : 
 
 No. 
 
 Name of Movements. 
 
 Words of Command. 
 
 vni. 
 
 Stretch Stride 
 
 1. 
 
 Arms upward stretch. 
 
 
 Sitt'g, Trunk 
 
 2 
 
 Ti-unk to left— bend. 
 
 
 Side WISE 
 
 ;T 
 
 To the right bent, one ! two ! 
 
 
 Bending. 
 
 4. 
 
 Rest. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Shelter Stride 
 
 1. 
 
 Hands to the head — grasp. 
 
 
 Sitt'g, Trunk 
 
 «) 
 
 Trunk to left— turn. 
 
 
 Twisting. 
 
 t 
 
 To right— turn, one ! two ! 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Rest. 
 
 X. 
 
 Wing Stride 
 
 1. 
 
 Hips— hold. 
 
 
 Sitting, Legs 
 
 2. 
 
 Knees — stretch. 
 
 
 Twisting. 
 
 3. 
 
 Legs inward — turn. 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 Outward — turn, one ! two ! 
 
 
 
 5. 
 
 Rest. 
 
 In executing the above movements, the scholars re- 
 main in their seats. At the first word of command 
 they drop their books, and proceed to imitate the slow 
 movements of the teacher, who stands in front, in full 
 view of all the pupils. At the signal, one/ two! a 
 vocal exercise commences. At the word rest^ the 
 hands of each pupil fall to his sides, and the body re- 
 turns to its natural sitting posture. 
 
 The intelligent teacher will be able to change the 
 formula from time to time as occasion may seem to 
 require, or form entirely new ones, by selecting appro- 
 priate examples from Part II. of this book. In this 
 way he may be always supplied with a variety, and 
 avoid wearying his pupils with a monotonous routine. 
 
PART IV- 
 
 H Y G I E ^^ E . 
 
 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 By the term Hygiene we mean, simply, tliat assem- 
 blage of rules and regulations applied to our conduct 
 and mode of living which teaches us what in our 
 modes and practices is right and what wrong — what 
 is and what is not conformable to physiological law. 
 Of the importance of knowing something about this 
 matter, we do not feel called upon to give any formal 
 demonstration. 
 
 The absurdity of employing medical treatment for the 
 cure of disease, while at the same moment a dozen dis- 
 ease-producing causes are in active operation, needs no 
 proof. The inconsistency of such procedure seems still 
 greater when the remedial treatment consists in a special 
 ajyjMcation of Hygiene^ such as the Movement-Cure has 
 been explained to be. Hence a work like the present, 
 designed for popular instruction on a particular branch 
 of Hygiene, would be incomplete and almost useless 
 if the importance of attendiog to the subject in all its 
 particulars and relations, both as i\, preventive of disease 
 and as a remtcly^ were not pointed out and enforced. 
 
 We take it for granted that a compliance witli tbe 
 
358 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 conditions of health is within the ability of every indi- 
 vidual ; and further, that such compliance is spon- 
 taneous and intuitive in a natural and unperverted 
 condition of the system. For it would be monstrous 
 to suppose that God, who is the great and all-wise 
 Friend of his creatures, should so impress his original 
 constitution as to bias him at the outset in the direction 
 of error and misery. Such a supposition would be 
 compounded of absurdity and blasphemy in about 
 equal parts. 
 
 Food^ drink ^ ah\ temjperature^ lights exercise^ and 
 mental pursuits are subjects that have entered more 
 or less- into previous discussions, but it is due to their 
 importance that a portion of them, at least, should re- 
 ceive some more especial attention in this place. 
 
 Food. — That is food, which, being introduced into 
 the stomach, is capable of sustaining the vital actions 
 of the system. We may consider food in relation to 
 quantity^ quality^ modes of 'preparation^ times of eat- 
 ing^ etc. It fails to serve its purposes in proportion as 
 it deviates in the above particulars from a correct 
 standard. 
 
 Quantity. — ^The matters which serve nutritive pur- 
 poses are removed from the system through the instru- 
 mentality of oxygen ; consequently, the quantity proper 
 to be used is limited by respiration and those causes 
 which influence this act. We are wholly unconscious 
 of the rate, and even of the existence, of the oxydizing 
 processes going on w^ithin the body by which its con- 
 stituents are removed, and so are guided, in our use of 
 food, almost entirely by our sensations. The necessi- 
 ties of the system, indeed, are absolute, but the sensa- 
 
THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 359 
 
 tions are subject to variation and modification from 
 many, and different, and ever- varying causes ; so that 
 to decide as to the proper quantity of food to be eaten 
 at a given time may be a matter of nmch difficulty, 
 especially in those persons whose gastric nervous sys- 
 tems have become deranged. 
 
 Errors in quautity are liable to occur from the fol- 
 lowing causes : 
 
 1. In disease, whether acute or chronic, the amount 
 of oxydized products eliminated from the system is 
 much reduced, and the amount of food taken should be 
 correspondingly diminished. In acute disease, the re- 
 sults of lessened affinity of the blood for oxygen are 
 rendered conspicuous in the character of the urine, the 
 fur of the tongue, and the quickened pulse and respira- 
 tion — which latter is an attempt to compensate for this 
 lessened affinity. In either case no restoration is pos- 
 sible while there continues an excess of food over 
 respiration. 
 
 2. Bodily inactivity reduces the need of the system 
 for food, and the ill eflect of partaking of the same 
 amount as when actively employed, soon becomes ap- 
 parent in lessened vigor of health. 
 
 3. Elevated temperature necessarily diminishes the 
 amount of carbonic acid and water produced in the 
 system, and consequently the amount of food required 
 is less than is demanded at low temperatures. 
 
 4. Confinement in close rooms, out of the reach of 
 currents of air, diminishes the amount of air taken 
 into the system both by skin and lungs, and conse- 
 quently less food is needed. 
 
 5. Anything taken into the stomach that unduly 
 stimulates it, such as spices, sweets, and the various 
 condiments, as well as drugs prescribed for the pur- 
 
360 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 pose, perverts and blunts the sensibility of tlie or- 
 gan, and inclines it to solicit an undue quantity of 
 food. 
 
 All that portion of alimentary material taken into 
 the system over and above its wants, must be regarded 
 as so much foreign matter over which the organism 
 can at best exercise an imperfect control. 
 
 Xo absolute rule can be given in regard to the 
 amount of food which the system requires. To attempt 
 to give any such rule would not only require a super- 
 human acquaintance with all the internal and invisible 
 present actions and relations of the system, but also 
 the ability to anticipate those changes in its condition 
 that, under the influence of accidental circumstances, 
 may within a brief period occur to it. But while the 
 digestive powers are unperverted by bad habits or by 
 disease, there is little occasion for concern in regard to 
 this matter, since the sensations intended to control 
 the alimentary process aiford a reliable indication of 
 what the needs of the system are. When, however, the 
 sensations and instincts are blunted or perverted by 
 the above-mentioned causes, there is always great lia- 
 bility to err in this matter. 
 
 Quality. — Food consists in part of material capable 
 of being organized or transformed into the vital struc- 
 ture — in part of matters which are not imbued with 
 this vital quality, but are only oxydized in the body, 
 and thereby reduced to a form easy of elimination. 
 The former class contains nitrogen — the latter does not. 
 The nitrogenized class is of uniform composition, rep- 
 resented by albumen^ and by its modifications, ^'^/'^Vz-, 
 gluten^ casein^ etc. No other substances containing 
 nitrogen are capable of being transformed by vital 
 
THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 361 
 
 operations into tlie instruments of life. The non-nitro- 
 genized class is represented by starchy 8ugar, vegetable 
 acids ^ etc. 
 
 Certain saline matters, forming the ash of food, are 
 equally indispensable in the organizing processes of the 
 body as the others named. 
 
 The errors common in the quality of food are chiefly 
 the following : 
 
 1. The distinction between food proper and other 
 matters destined to oxydation in the system, is fre- 
 quently lost sight of. In this way such substances as 
 alcohol, and its various mixtures, have come to be con- 
 sidered as food. 
 
 2. A good proportion of the saline constituents of 
 food is generally lost in the mechanical separation 
 effected by the miller. This is a great error, for which 
 the system must suffer. As well might an abundant 
 harvest be expected to spring up from a worn-out soil 
 as that the organizing processes of the system shall be 
 perfectly conducted while a portion of the elements 
 essential to the process is deficient. 
 
 3. The habitual use, especially by the sedentary, of 
 much soluble food — of food soluble in water — is a fruit- 
 ful source of evil. The system provides secretions in 
 pro2)ortion to its need for nourisJiment. ]N"ow if food 
 be taken already dissolved, or soluble in water, it must 
 pass into the circulation, though it may prove exceed- 
 ingly injurious, and the system has no means of pro- 
 tecting itself against it. 
 
 Ordinary food is not soluble except by these secre- 
 tions, and therefore, if eaten in proportion beyond the 
 need of the system, is cast off in a disguised form, and 
 is not liable to produce injury, even though in excess 
 as to some of its elements. 
 
 16 
 
362 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 4. Yerj common is the erroneous supposition that 
 the spices, etc., that are added to food are essential or 
 useful parts of it. Such matters only detract from the 
 nutritive vahie of food, and do harm by forcing the 
 system to labor in their elimination. 
 
 5. A disproportion in the nutritive elements received 
 into it to the needs of the system, is a common error. 
 Indulgence in sweets, while it loads the blood with 
 hydro-carbons, diminishes the relative proportion of the 
 nitrogcEized and organizable constituents of food — 
 therefore renders it poorer in quality. 
 
 Salt. — Physiologists agree that the salt of the 
 animal fluids does not require constant replenishing, 
 but is retained by the blood to serve its purpose in the 
 economy over and over again. Accordingly, the lower 
 animals require salt only occasionally. That which 
 appears in the excretions is therefore mainly but the 
 excess of the needs of the system, and, if given in large 
 quantity, it can not but overtask and diminish the vital 
 power. Christison regards salt as poison, and gives 
 several cases of poisoning by it. 
 
 The common practice of employing preparations of 
 the alkalies, soda, potash, etc., to a large extent in 
 food, is extremely prejudicial to health. These are 
 potent chemicals, and can not act otherwise, when in 
 excess, than to deteriorate the quality of the blood. 
 Alkalies have an affinity for fibrin, and destroy its 
 coagulating property, and by their strong affinities 
 they oppose the vital force and detract from its influ- 
 ence, and hence supply an important condition of dis- 
 ease. The excessive use of saline substances, whole- 
 some enough in the natural and proper quantity, is the 
 gravest error in modern dietetics. 
 
THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 363 
 
 The various causes above emimerated tend power- 
 fully to modify the regular vito-chemical actions of the 
 system, frequently arresting the oxydizing process at 
 some point short of the final, in which the materials 
 which have served the vital chemistry are prepared for 
 dismission from the system. These modifications and 
 this retention are the origin of morbid matter, and are 
 the causes of disease. 
 
 What the system needs is such a mixture'^ of the difier- 
 ent elementary ingredients of food as shall correspond 
 with that characterizing those edible plants upon which 
 all herbivorous animals depend for their sustenance. 
 
 Pkeparation of Food — Cooking. — Man has been call- 
 ed the cooking animal. This does not indicate that his 
 nutritive wants, considered in a physiological light, 
 difi"er from those common to all animals, but that, by 
 the use of his reason, he may husband his expenditures 
 for the purely animal wants, and so gain time and 
 opportunities for the cultivation of his intellectual and 
 moral capacities. The object of cooking, then, is not 
 to change the intrinsic chemical qualities of edible 
 substances. So far as such changes are produced in 
 the processes of cooking, the nutritive qualities of the 
 food are not benefited, but rather injured. A few in- 
 stances may be excepted, where noxious qualities be- 
 longing to plants are destroyed by the elevated temper- 
 ature required for cooking. The legitimate province 
 
 * " It seems placed beyond a doubt by these experiments, that the proportions in 
 which these factors of nutrition are mixed in the food, exert the most decided in- 
 fluence on the welfare of the organism, and that the intermixture of the different 
 factors of nutrition is essential for the metamorphosis of matters. Great as are the 
 fluctuations which nature allows In these proportions, an undue preponderance 
 of one, or other of the fictors ahcayx acts injuriously upon the due course of the 
 processes of nutrition. No single part of this process can go on without the concur- 
 rence of all these factors."— Ze/iwaM?^ 
 
364 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 of cooking may, in general, be regarded as confined to 
 overcoming the mechanical impediments to digestion, 
 so as to render the nutritive properties of the substance 
 promptly available to the digestive organs. This is 
 efiected by the aid of heat and moisture. By this 
 means the areolar structure of meats (composed of gela- 
 tin) is softened or dissolved, starch granules are open- 
 ed, woody fiber divided and rendered soft, gluten 
 swollen and rendered porous and pervious to the diges- 
 tive fluids, and the mechanical labor of the digestive 
 organs reduced to the lowest practicable point. In this 
 way the nutritive elements existing in food are all 
 turned to an immediate account, and the powers of the 
 stomach are not exhausted by mechanical eftorts, or its 
 nerves irritated by the same cause. 
 
 The errors of cooking are chiefly the following : 
 
 1. By long custom we come to prefer food which has 
 been subjected to too high a degree of heat^ which, by 
 decomposing it, injures its nutritive properties, and it is 
 thus made to perform the part of a spice. Bread, for 
 instance, is toasted, and the juices of meats burned, to 
 gratify an acquired taste, greatly to the detriment of 
 their quality. 
 
 2. Injurious additions are made to food in cooking, 
 the effects of which have been previously described. 
 Sugar, oily matters, alkalies, etc., are commonly added 
 to edible preparations, in utter disregard of the propor- 
 tions of these elements really demanded by the system. 
 
 3. Food is also injured by rendering it so porous 
 and soft, that it is swallowed without due mastication, 
 which deprives it of a portion of the saliva so necessary 
 to its proper digestion. 
 
 Peopek Times fok Eating. — It is diflicult to lay down 
 
THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIEKE. 365 
 
 rules upon tliis subject. People engaged in business 
 are generally compelled to take their food after long 
 intervals, and if these intervals are not so lengthy as 
 to transgress natural law, thus inducing alternate ex- 
 haustion and repletion, the health is apt to be favored 
 thereby rather than otherwise. 
 
 In sedentary life, especially with invalids, whose 
 thoughts are too much occupied with the questions, 
 what they shall eat and what they shall drink, the 
 temptations to take nourishment are more frequent and 
 urgent because not tempered by wholesome occupa- 
 tions. To guard the reader against errors that are often 
 very damaging, it may be remarked ; 
 
 1. That in a diseased state of the stomach or system 
 in which physiological actions are either perverted or 
 retarded, generally both, the demand upon the diges- 
 tive organs for a supply of nutritive material thereby 
 lessens, and the digestive process itself is conducted 
 with less energy, and so the need for food is experi- 
 enced less frequently. In such condition for one to 
 take food as often as in health, must necessarily operate 
 disadvantageously. A good rule to observe in these 
 cases is, to take no food into the stomach while a re- 
 sidual of the preceding meal remains. The presence of 
 the residual, acting as a ferment, hinders the succeed- 
 ing digestive effort. It is even necessary, in many 
 cases, that the distance between meals for a time be 
 greatly extended, in order to effect a wholesome puri- 
 fication of the solvent fluids. 
 
 2. In a state of health the digestive process requires 
 ti7ne for its thorough accomplishment. It proceeds by 
 stages, and an introduction of food at the wrong time 
 tends to arrest the process and render it abortive. 
 
366 THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 
 
 Dkinks. — Tliere is in nature but one substance which 
 performs in the system the purpose of a wholesome 
 beverage, and this is water. All artificial drinks con- 
 sist of various mixtures, infusions, or solutions of other 
 matters, either solid or liquid, with water, which has 
 become simply the medium of conveying these to the 
 system. Thus, tea, coifee, vinous and sj3irituous liquors 
 are beverages only on account of the water they contain. 
 To consider the physiological relations of these drinks 
 is to investigate the efiect of the potential chemicals in 
 question upon the vital structures. These effects have 
 been shown, in another place, to consist, not of nutrition, 
 but of irritation, stimulation, and destruction of organ- 
 ized substance, in various modes and degrees. Their 
 use, in any form, then, is reasonably inferred to be in- 
 compatible with any remedial treatment, although it 
 may be consistent with the palliation of certain dis- 
 tressing symptoms, generally first sought by the drug 
 method of medical treatment. All drinks save water 
 are therefore proscribed in a strict and consistent 
 hygienic practice. 
 
 Milk. — This fluid is frequently drunk by adults as 
 well as by children, for whom alone it is intended by 
 nature. It consists of about 80 per cent, of water, 
 holding about twenty per cent, of solid matter in solu- 
 tion, the largest portion of which becomes immediately 
 precipitated upon reaching the stomach. This propor- 
 tion of dry solid to the watery portion is scarcely less 
 than is found in potatoes, and is much greater than ex- 
 ists in edible fruits and roots. It is hence seen, that 
 though milk may be drank when fresh, it is not properly 
 a beverage, in the strict sense of this term, and the in- 
 ference is legitimate, that to use it as such, is at best 
 
THE PHILOSOPHY OF HYGIENE. 367 
 
 but to clog the system, by loading it with nutritive 
 matter, under the pretense of quenching thirst. This, 
 to be sure, may be of little consequence to the growing 
 or laboring person, but will become a source of ill 
 health to the sedentary, and is quite incompatible with 
 a systematic employment of Remedial Hygiene. 
 
TEMPERATURE. 
 
 Physiological Effect of Cold and Heat. — To un- 
 derstand the real relations that the thermometric and 
 barometric changes of the atmosphere bear to the sys- 
 tem, wonld relieve men of much of the anxiety they 
 habitually experience in regard to their effects upon the 
 health. Invalids, especially, are fond of ascribing their 
 depressed spirits to the state of the weather, and often 
 attempt to get rid of a disagreeable sense of personal 
 responsibility by persuading themselves that their 
 symptoms are attributable to some uncontrollable at- 
 mospheric cause. Tliis is convenient ; but I am per- 
 suaded that a correct understanding of the intentions 
 of nature toward us in these changes would lead us to 
 regard them, severe and untoward as they seem to us, 
 when we sedulously unfit ourselves for their effects, as 
 really most friendly to us, and wisely and mercifully 
 adapted to maintain, and even to restore the health. 
 
 The average temperature of the air in this climate is 
 not far from 55° Fahr. — the temperature of our bodies 
 98° ; hence the average difference between the heat of 
 the body and that of surrounding things is not far 
 from 43° ; but the thermometer sometimes falls con- 
 siderably below zero, effecting a great increase of this 
 difference, from which it is apparent that it is the in- 
 tention of nature that the animal body should be sub- 
 jected not only to a high or a low, but to a variable tem- 
 
TEMPERATURE. 369 
 
 j)eratiire. It is the nature of lieat to be forever seeking 
 an equilibrium. Hence all bodies, whether animate 
 or inanimate, having a temperature cihoi^e that of the 
 atmosphere, soon lose their excess, unless constantly 
 replenished. The rapidity with which an object loses 
 heat depends on the amount of difference between its 
 temperature and that of contiguous objects. But the 
 living animal body loses more heat in a given time 
 than an inanimate body of the same size, weight, and 
 temperature, because it not only, like the stone, parts 
 with its heat by radiation to surrounding things, and 
 by contact with them, but in other ways peculiar to 
 itself. The surface of the animal body is always moist, 
 and evaporation from it is a most potent cooling agent. 
 The body also parts with its heat through the action 
 of several excretory organs, and a great deal is carried 
 off by the large body of air which is constantly being 
 warmed in the lungs. 
 
 The loss of heat which the body is thus compelled 
 to sustain is perpetual, but is exceedingly variable in 
 degree. The temperature of the atmos]:)here not only 
 has its yearly and daily, its regular and tlierefore its ex- 
 pected vicissitudes, but it is also subject to hourly and 
 unexpected ones. We never know that the tempera- 
 ture will not rise or fall in a few hours a number of de- 
 grees above or below the average point for the season. 
 This uncertainty and variableness of temperature ob- 
 tains to a greater or less degree in all climates, and 
 may be considered as ordained by the Creator for the 
 benefit of his creatures ; and we may suppose that a 
 uniformity of temperature would, contrary to the usual 
 opinions of the invalid, be prejudicial to the health. 
 
 Let us look now to the arrangements of the human 
 system with reference to temperature, that we may the 
 
 16^ 
 
370 TEMPER ATUKE. 
 
 more easily understand those hygienic principles that 
 relate thereto. 
 
 All atmospheric changes so impress the system as 
 to modify its vital and its vito-chemical actions. All 
 parts of the body are pervaded by sensory nerves, 
 which receive such impressions and convey them in 
 every direction. When the surface of the body, or any 
 portion of it, receives an impression of external temper- 
 ature, every part of the organism related to it in any 
 way is immediately affected thereby. 
 
 That function of the body which is directly related 
 to external impressions of temperature, is the Jieat- 
 mahing process. The point of temperature at which 
 vital actions take place being fixed, and the bodily 
 heat being dependent upon its own resources, it follows 
 that the production of heat is accelerated or retarded 
 to an extent exactly proportionate to the loss experi- 
 enced — the process undergoing an amount of variation 
 just about equal to that to w4iich the sensory system 
 is subjected. 
 
 This regulation of the bodily temperature is connect- 
 ed with the employment of the materials which are 
 necessary to the production of vital phenomena. Tlie 
 system is thus relieved of any surplus of heat which it 
 may have acquired by means of an increased evapo- 
 ration from the surface^ while the want of heat that is 
 felt stimulates the respiratory organs to greater activ- 
 ity. Thus it appears that imjDressions from without are 
 as sure to affect the production of heat, either to lessen 
 or to augment it, as pressure upon the key of the piano 
 to elicit a musical sound. The slio:htest observation 
 verifies these statements. To place the hand, or foot, 
 or any portion of the warm surface of the person, in 
 contact w^ith a very cold substance, as a ^^iece of ice. 
 
TEMPERATURE. 371 
 
 instantaneously causes an expansion of the ribs and a 
 depression of the diaphragm, and consequently an uti- 
 usually 2)rofound inspiration^ which is involuntarily 
 continued till the heat that is thus lost he fully restored. 
 The heat of the body, or of any part, may for a short pe- 
 riod be depressed without injury, because it requires 
 time for the physiological changes now described to com- 
 plete their eliects upon the economy. No artificial sup- 
 ply of heat is required in order healtlifully to maintain 
 the bodily temperature ; and when, by our fine civilized 
 modes of life we depress the heat-producing operations 
 of the body, we must remember that at the same time 
 we are impairing the respiratory acts, and are doing 
 ourselves more or less harm in proportion to the extent 
 of our misbehavior in this respect. 
 
 We may now understand some of the consequences 
 of inattention to the relations borne by the system to 
 temperature. In hot weather, and in hot climates, the 
 respiratory stimulus being less, respiration is conse- 
 quently diminished, and then results a retention of the 
 materials that should be excluded from the system 
 through this agency. Such materials are not cotfi- 
 pletely reduced to carbonic acid water and urea, but 
 the process is arrested at an intermediate point, and 
 the state popularly termed Vdiousness^ which implies 
 the presence in the blood of the proximate elements of 
 bile, inevitably succeeds, unless the person so exposed 
 becomes very cautious as to his diet. 
 
 Origin of Colds. — The symptom or the form of dis- 
 ease styled " a cold" can never occur except in the con- 
 dition of the system above described. But it further 
 requires that the body part with its heat under con- 
 ditions which do not produce a corresponding increase 
 
372 TEMPERATURE. 
 
 of respiration. In this case, tlie blood, loaded with the 
 materials to be discharged from the system, fills the 
 capillaries of the respiratory membranes, and not meet- 
 ing with the requisite oxygen is necessarily retained, 
 causing congestion of the membranes in question, and 
 those other very unpleasant and annoying consequences 
 familiar to every one. A prolonged exposure to a 
 cold atmosphere would, in all of these cases, render the 
 respiratory effect more profound and efficient, comj^lete 
 the physico-chemical change designed and commenced, 
 but now incomplete, and would effectually prevent the 
 occurrence of the symptom in question. The disease is 
 called a cold., from the popular fancy that low temper- 
 ature is the occasion of it, while the truth is, no means 
 are so effectual as this for its cure ; for by cold, just 
 those physiological effects are secured which are re- 
 quired to relieve the system of the injurious cause. 
 
 The conditions essential to the production of the dis- 
 order in question may now be stated : 
 
 1. There must be a surplus of materials in the sys- 
 tem requiring a certain quantity of oxygen for their 
 elimination. 
 
 2. These are moved forward to the respiratory pas- 
 sages by the normal stimulus, which, however, is in- 
 sufficient to effect its purpose. 
 
 This view of the cause readily suggests the remedy. 
 A more free and abundant exposure to low atmospheric 
 temperature, aided by abundant exercise, is the best 
 protection against colds, and the best remedy Avhen tlie 
 disorder is once contracted. 
 
 "When we say that cool air is the most natural 
 and important condition of health, it is not implied 
 that those arts of civilization which protect us against 
 its impressions are utterly useless or mischievous. It 
 
TEMPEKATURE. ^ 373 
 
 is onlj the abiise or the excess of these apph'ances that 
 we need to fear. The objects of life, in the pliysiolog- 
 ical point of view, are attained in the development of 
 the greatest possible amount of the available force. 
 The arts of civilization can serve us only as they econ- 
 omize our powers, not as they impair or prodigally 
 waste them. 
 
 It is, then, vicissitude of temperature, and not that 
 avoiding of it that is attempted by means of our heated 
 dwellings and our thick and impenetrable clothing, 
 which the human constitution requires to preserve its 
 integrity and force; and we shall see that, to restore 
 the health, alternations of heat and cold, artificially 
 brought about, are among the most potent instru- 
 mentalities at our command. 
 
 Effect of CoNTmrED and Great Extremes. — In 
 both very high and very low latitudes the physiolog- 
 ical necessities imposed on man by climate are not 
 favorable to the development of his nobler powers, but 
 he becomes the slave of his climatic- condition, as he 
 often does, in temperate latitudes, to his sensorial facul- 
 ties. In cold climates, because the system loses much 
 heat, it must produce much, and man becomes an 
 apparatus for the combustion of carbon ; while in hot 
 climates the system is compelled to supply much water 
 to the surface for evaporation, and becomes accord- 
 ingly an hydraulic machine. In both cases the due 
 physiological balance essential for the development 
 of the highest powers is wanting. But, on the other 
 hand, the frequent changes of temperature which 
 our systems experience in temperate climates, is most 
 compatible with health and the highest development 
 of the bodily powers. 
 
374 TEMPEKATUKK. 
 
 Impoetanoe of Cold. — Chronic invalids are gen- 
 erally tlie victims of the falsest notions respecting 
 temperature. They have become, by long habits of 
 eifeminacy, incapable of bearing the amount of cold 
 fitted to the respiratory needs of the body. They ex- 
 hibit the greatest suspicion and fear of the most benefit 
 cent designs of nature. They shrink from the very influ- 
 ence which elicits and vivifies their powers, and so they 
 continue to repress and cramp their already weakened 
 faculties. The importance of developing to a suitable 
 and healthy extent the heat-making faculty is quite 
 equal to that of exercise, and is among the first things 
 to which the attention of the chronic invalid should be 
 directed. 
 
 The propriety of subjecting the system to the influ- 
 ence of cold is not always to be decided by the sensa- 
 tions, for these, except in perfect health, are not to be 
 trusted unless corroborated by the other faculties. The 
 eflect of cold is to infuse into the system an agreeable 
 vigor and elasticity ; but in a weakened state of the 
 system and perverted condition of the nerves, the sen- 
 sations, being abnormally acute, will often rebel. This 
 indicates the need of discipline, the very process re- 
 quired to reinstate the healtli. It is only under cir- 
 cumstances when the withdrawal of heat from the 
 system is not attended with a corresponding increase 
 of respiration, that exposure to cold can be in any de- 
 gree hurtful ; for it is only then that the refuse matter 
 of the system is retained to be subjected to that spon- 
 taneous chemical action which will of course conflict 
 with the vital processes. 
 
 The "VVatkr-Cuee. — A medical pi4ctice, of exten- 
 sive reputation for its empirical success, has been 
 
TEMPERATURE. 375 
 
 founded upon the use of temperature as a remedial 
 means. The Water-Cm^e, though a special, is a legit- 
 imate practice, because based on important, tlioiigh 
 perhaps as practiced, insufficient number, of the plain 
 principles of physiology. The practice consists in 
 causing an artificial demand to be laid upon the 
 system, or some limited portions of it, to produce 
 heat^ and also in repressing the natural production of 
 heat in various parts by withdrawing the incentive 
 thereto. In this way the most important clianges may 
 be induced in the circulation, innervation, and nutrition 
 of various portions of the body, often sufficient, when 
 skillfully managed, to restore the harmony and health 
 of the organism. 
 
 In this j)ractice, water^ instead of air, is employed, 
 because it furnishes the means of applying temperature 
 quickly, vigorously, and extensively, and is thus emi- 
 nently adapted to meet the emergencies of sickness, 
 especially of acute disease. In bathing, it is the tem- 
 perature of the water, rather than the water itself, 
 which is to be regarded as the source of the effects 
 which we often realize by the operation. 
 
 The Cold Bath. — This may be either general^ ap- 
 plied to the whole surface, or locals applied to some 
 portion of the body, as the hands, feet, seat, etc. ; in 
 either case the general effect is similar, though the par- 
 ticular effects may be widely different. The first im- 
 pression of the cold, to whatever part the water may 
 be applied, acting through the sensory nerves, causes 
 the ribs to become everted, and a profound inspiratory 
 effort to be made. The respiration continues thus 
 exalted so long as the body, or any portion of it, is 
 parting with an unusual amount of heat. Nor does 
 
376 TEMPERATURE. 
 
 even this cease immediately, for if heat be not pro- 
 duced as rapidly as it is being abstracted by the artifi- 
 cial method in question, it continues to be produced 
 through the influence of greater respiration till the 
 equilibrium is restored. 
 
 The practical effect of such a process is very ap- 
 parent, and is susceptible of demonstration. The water 
 coming in contact with the warm body has acquired 
 heat, all of which is compensated by increased respira- 
 tion and increased respiratory effect upon the blood. 
 A sitting bath, the temj)erature of which is elevated 
 two degrees, will have caused the absorption by the 
 blood of the oxygen from four or five cnbic feet of 
 air, enough to raise a half-pint of water from the 
 freezing to the boiling point, and will have elimi- 
 nated from the system more than a half ounce of its 
 solid material. 
 
 The Warm Bath. — Wlien the temperature of the 
 air is considerably below that of the body, we know 
 that it receives heat from it at only a very moderate 
 rate ; but water does not feel warm to us till its temper- 
 ature approximates very nearly our own. At 98^ it 
 ceases to receive heat from us, and therefore, when the 
 body is submerged in a bath of that temperature, the 
 ordinary incentive to the production of heat ceasing to 
 act, all tJie physiological processes are retarded, respi- 
 ration becomes slow and difiicult, and the sj^stem soon 
 suffers from retained matters. If there has been pain, 
 the bath affords oftentimes a delightful sense of relief, 
 and frequently checks morbid action. These effects 
 become less appai-ent at slightly lower temperatures; 
 and when still further reduced, the effects exj)erienced 
 are those of the cold bath to a moderate degree. 
 
TEMPERATURE. 377 
 
 The Hot Bath. — In a bath of this sort, heat is im- 
 parted to the body, the eiFect of which is to compel it 
 to take on a reciprocal action and return what it has 
 received, by producing moisture at the surface, to bo 
 evaporated. The skin, under the influence of the hot 
 bath, breaks out in a copious perspiration, this effect 
 following with a rapidity proportioned to the temper- 
 ature. A¥hen this eflect is produced, the superficial 
 capillaries are filed with blood, and central portions 
 of the body consequently relieved from their engorge- 
 ment, often, especially in severe internal congestion, to 
 the temjDorary relief of the complaint. The effeet here 
 described can not long be continued, for obvious rea- 
 Bons, without serious detriment to tlie organism. 
 
 The reader will note an important and radical differ- 
 ence between the efl:ects of cold and those of warm 
 bathing. Cold baths, on account of their efi'ects on 
 respiration, are an agency for the removal from the 
 body of its solid materials ^ while warm and hot baths, 
 by the effort they assist the system in making to relieve 
 itself of heat, remove fluid and saline matters there- 
 from. In many cases of disease both of these agents 
 are required. 
 
 Local Baths. — The application of the bath to a lim- 
 ited portion of the body is governed by the same gen- 
 eral principles as govern its application to the whole 
 surface. But the response made by the system to the 
 impression of the local bath is peculiar. If the bath 
 be cold, the process causes the heat of the body to 
 depart from it through a circumscribed surface. Now, 
 since the heat is supplied to the cold part through the 
 blood which flows thitherward, the process of local 
 bathing becomes one of calling, or deriving the circula- 
 
378 tempekaturp:. 
 
 tion from the general system in the direction of the cold 
 part. This effect is eminently useful in aiding similar 
 effects produced by movements for the removal of 
 visceral congestions. 
 
 Effect on the Nerves. — It will be noticed that tem- 
 perature, especially a low degree of it, acts primarily 
 upon the nerves, and it is through the intervention of 
 these that its effects upon the circulation, respiration, 
 nutrition, etc., are chiefly wrought. The great majority 
 of people, whose sensory surface is too little exposed, 
 are greatly benefited by the stimulation and vigorous 
 tone that is afforded by the daily morning bath. It 
 counteracts in the sedentary the ill effects of warm air 
 confined next to the person by clothing, and for all 
 who are not constantly out of doors, is an important 
 means for maintaining the health. But serious ill effects 
 may, and very frequently do^ arise from too much, 
 and injudicious bathiug. The abuse here alluded to 
 arises from an ignoring of the principles relating to 
 the harmony of function, insisted on in this volume. It 
 will be understood that all impressions made upon ex- 
 ternal sensory nerves are accompanied by corresponding 
 action of the nerve-centers situated in the brain, spinal 
 cord, and especially those of the trunk, at the seat of 
 the nerves of organic life. Stimulant impressions, if 
 habitually resorted to, induce hypernutrition, and con- 
 sequent excited and unbalanced action of the nervous 
 system, which is utterly incompatible with health. 
 Persons who, for a length of time, subject themselves 
 frequently to repeated and intense impressions of heat 
 or cold, by means of water bathing, abuse themselves 
 in a way that will certainly be followed by irregular 
 nervous action, and the various grades of nervous dis- 
 
TEMPEKATURE. 379 
 
 ease — excitability, depression of spirits, neuralgia, liyp- 
 ocliondria, etc. Great caution should be used that this 
 mode of stimulation be not made a substitute for the 
 more common nerve stimulants which Hygiene con- 
 demns. The Water-Oure^ so called, is sometimes prac- 
 ticed in the reprehensible manner here pointed out, 
 considerably more to the detriment than to the benefit 
 of many patients. 
 
 . Compresses. — ^These consist of linen or cotton cloth, 
 several times folded, thoroughly wetted, and applied to 
 some j^art of the body. If wrung out from hot water, the 
 application is termed a fomentation. This is a very 
 grateful application to painful parts, and affords relief 
 on the principle before mentioned. If cold, it soon 
 acquires the temperature of the body, and produces an 
 effect upon the parts analogous to that of the warm bath. 
 Wet compresses also supply the conditions for osmo- 
 sis^ or interchange of fluids between the different struc- 
 tures of the body. They hence become exceedingly 
 useful in congestions^ because the absorption of fluid 
 through the capillary w^alls into the vessels detaches 
 the corpuscles which in this case are apt to adhere to the 
 walls, and aids the escape of the clogged blood from the 
 point of congestion. Compresses also remove the sur- 
 plus heat of the part, and thus supply an important 
 condition for the normal vital activities. The com- 
 press should be continued 'upon any one part only a 
 portion of the time, otherwise its good effects will be 
 counteracted. 
 
 PARTICULAK DIRECTIONS FOR BATHING. 
 
 The Am Bath. — ^This consists simply in a full ex- 
 posure of the whole body, divested of clothing, to the 
 
380 TEMPERATURE. 
 
 air at the ordinaiy temperature, after the manner rec- 
 ommended bj Dr. Franklin. This may be continued 
 a moderate length of time, and should be accompanied 
 by light, rapid friction over the whole surface of the 
 body with bare hands, or with a few of the examples 
 of movements contained in Part II. The rubbing 
 necessitates much useful bending and stretching of the 
 body in all directions. The skin is greatly refreshed 
 by this process. A good time for it is on going to bed, 
 
 The Cold General Bath. — This should never be 
 employed while the stomach has food in it, nor when 
 the system is fatigued by exercise ; neither should it 
 be taken while the body is cold from previous ex- 
 posure. If cold from internal causes, exercise to in- 
 crease the respiration should precede it, and it should 
 be, moreover, of very short continuance. 
 
 A serious mistake prevails in regard to the proper 
 manner of taking a bath. The directions usually are, 
 to begin by wetting the head and face. This direction 
 arises from ignorance in regard to the true physiology 
 ical effect of bathing, and of the conditions of the sys- 
 tem, for the regulation of which it is useful. 
 
 A valuable lesson on this subject may be learned by 
 observation of nature. The dog, cow, and ox, etc., 
 whom instinct (a better reason than belongs to some 
 conceited bipeds) teaches to bathe, stand first in the 
 water for a while, to cool off the feet^ before making 
 a general plunge. Our feet, even, in spite of effemi- 
 nate precautions, are much exposed to the damp, cold 
 earth. The effect of this is, to counteract the tendency 
 of afflux of the circulation to the head, which is that 
 portion of the body which employs the most blood, and 
 
TEMPERATURE. 381 
 
 most continuously. To obviate this tendency, the feet 
 and lower extremities should be bathed first, longest, 
 and most. Baths of all temperatures below that of 
 the body shoukl be taken by commencing at the feet. 
 
 It is sometimes said that bathing or showering the 
 head affords relief, implying an effect in opposition to 
 the principle above stated. In this case the temporary 
 stimulus is evidently mistaken for a permanent effect, 
 and if the observation be extended, the result will be 
 found to be opposite that supposed. 
 
 Reaction. — After a time, greater or less according 
 to the vigor of the system, the heat abstracted from the 
 body by the bath is fully restored to it. This is pop- 
 ularly termed reaction. The real beginning of this 
 process is at the first moment, when the nerves are im- 
 pressed v^ith the sensation of cold. Reaction is often 
 carried to a point beyond the limits of a healthful 
 activity, producing irritability and tendencies to dis- 
 ease, if not positive inflammation. 
 
 The term, want of reaction^ simply implies that the 
 complete restoration of heat is slowly accomplished. 
 In such cases, the effect desired is more promptly and 
 thoroughly secured by the employment of movements. 
 
 Baths should al\vays be taken deliberately, and not 
 with nervous haste, as this occasions fatigue, and tends 
 to defeat the end desired. 
 
 Shower and Douche Baths. — ^These are highly use- 
 ful as local applications, readily inducing derivative 
 effects in visceral organs, and at the same time exert- 
 ing the same general influence as has been previously 
 described. The shower is unfit for the delicate, be- 
 cause it operates too severely upon the nerves. A 
 
382 TEMPERATURE. 
 
 small douche is more manageable and milder. In 
 these baths, the mechanical impression made upon the 
 surface by the running water adds to the stimulating 
 effect. In every case, anything like sliock should be 
 sedulously avoided as harmful for the ordinary chronic 
 invalid. 
 
LIGHT. 383 
 
 LIGHT. 
 
 The fact that light lias powerful hygienic, and even 
 remedial properties, is one too much overlooked. Light 
 is well known to be a most potent chemical agent, both 
 in nature and in the arts. It arouses the vegetable 
 world into life and perfects its products, aiid without 
 it all animate nature would soon perish for lack of sus- 
 tenance. In the arts, modern science has wonderfully 
 economized its powers, and makes it serve the most 
 important uses. It is a most potent agent for deter- 
 mining the chemical state of bodies, readily decompos- 
 ing numerous chemical compounds, and re-combining 
 their elements in new forms. 
 
 That peculiar property of light whereby it is render- 
 ed a most important hygienic agent, is manifested in 
 its power to destroy noxious vaporous bodies existing 
 in the atmosphere. The surface of the earth, covered 
 with vegetable and animal matter in a state of decay, 
 sends forth under the influence of heat and moisture an 
 abundance of gaseous matter, which, mingling with the 
 air, enters the lungs to poison the blood, and produces 
 various forms of disease. Though existing in quanti- 
 ties too minute to aifect the senses, or any known 
 chemical test, yet, through the lungs, these parti- 
 cles are constantly being conveyed into the system, 
 where they accumulate and exert their chemical power 
 in full force, in opposition to the conditions of health. 
 
384 LIGHT. 
 
 It is well known that in those localities characterized 
 by a degree of heat and moisture favorable to the most 
 rapid vegetable decomposition, fevers of various kinds 
 abound. These effects can occur only when the nox- 
 ious j)i'oducts in question are produced more rapidly 
 than they can be destroyed by the agency of sunlight. 
 
 We receive the most injury from insidious and dis- 
 regarded causes. We seldom give a thought what 
 may be the consequences of denying to the rooms in 
 which we dwell, the wholesome and vivifying influ- 
 ence of sunlight, but on the contrary take the most 
 unwearied pains to exclude it. In the absence of light, 
 the invisible causes of disease, entering by the windows 
 and doors, or generated from the gaseous matters elim- 
 inated from our bodies, operate with all their force. 
 It is useless to try to counteract the effects flowing 
 from these causes with drugs, or to combat them in any 
 other way, while the causes themselves are operating 
 in full force. Commonly the air and light are shut 
 out together, which is much worse than if the air, newly 
 acted on by the strong light, were freely admitted. 
 
 The influence on the constitution of this custom of 
 living in darkness is most favorable to the production 
 of that condition of the blood and of the vital habit 
 from which springs scrofula. The pale and dusky 
 complexions, eruptive skins, flabby and weak muscles, 
 and general sickly aspect, which are so frequently wit- 
 nessed in }Oung children, are, in many instances, mostly 
 attributable to this cause. Of course, light is a most 
 important agent to be employed in the cure of affec- 
 tions of this class. It is wonderful and delightful to 
 see how soon a pale, attenuated, miserable child, after 
 being freely exposed to the sunlight for several hours 
 every day, will begin to improve, and the symptoms 
 
LIGHT. 385 
 
 here described to disappear. Even scrofulous swell- 
 ing of the glands of the neck, or other parts of the body, 
 will quickly succumb under the magical influence of 
 sunlight and pure air. 
 
 Xursing mothers, especially, r ' ^ these hygienic in- 
 fluences to maintain the purity and vigor of their sys- 
 tem, that they may not lay the foundation for lasting 
 disease in their oftspring, for the child is sure to suflfer, 
 even sooner than the mother, the grievous conse- 
 quences of her physiological errors. 
 
 Is it necessary that the parlors and sitting-rooms of 
 our dwellings should be kept so dark and unwhole- 
 some ? The first reason always assigned by the house- 
 keeper is, that only in this way can she preserve the 
 colors of her carpeting and upholstery, as if the color 
 of a carpet or a curtain was more precious than that of 
 the cheek and lip. In a hygienic point of view, one is 
 led to feel that these household comforts and elegancies 
 do more harm than good, that their advantages are 
 rather more than balanced by their ill effects. How- 
 ever beautiful and costly, they are necessarily uncleanly. 
 However well kept, they are the inevitable receptacles 
 of impalpable dust, which yield invisible clouds at every 
 touch, besides, being the reservoirs of air contaminated 
 in the way we have noticed. Carpets, so common a 
 luxury here, are but little used in Europe, except in 
 England, and it would undoubtedly greatly promote 
 the health of our own people were they to be abolished 
 by statute from every habitation in the land. 
 
 17 
 
386 MENTAL HYGIENE. 
 
 MENTAL HYGIENE. 
 
 The different states of the mind, whether in its de- 
 partments of thought or feeling, are well known to 
 exert a powerful influence upon the physiological 
 manifestations ; but unfortunately the consideration of 
 these relations has been too generally left to a class of 
 writers whose aim is to astonish and amuse rather than 
 to effect any practical good by their disquisitions. 
 
 We hear it constantly asserted by invalids, that some 
 peculiar mental trouble, disappointment, or excitement 
 of feeling was the original cause of their ill health ; 
 but how very few think of looking for relief, or are led 
 to look for it, in a restoration of order and harmouy to 
 the disturbed mind. How few seem to know that the 
 forces that exercise such potent control over the organ- 
 ism for the production of disease, may be made equally 
 available for the restoration of health ! The ordinary 
 practice of medicine inculcates the notion that the busi- 
 ness of the physician is simply to endeavor to supply 
 and regulate certain material conditions, by meajis of 
 pill and powder, and that when that is accomplished, 
 all has been done that lies within the limits of hum,an 
 ability. 
 
 The truth is, the influence of the mind over the 
 body is equally great in health and in disease. 'No 
 thoughtful observer can doubt this. We have seen 
 that voluntary muscular action gives language to our 
 
MENTAL UYUIENE. 387 
 
 ideas^ and that no part of the frame-work of the body is 
 exempt from the duties of aiding in the performance of 
 this interesting and wonderful function. The passions, 
 especially, put into requisition the action of almost 
 every muscle of the body for their expression. Says a 
 German writer,"^" ''Who is unacquainted with the spark- 
 ling eye, the free respiration, the glowing color, and the 
 serene brow of the joyous? Who is not familiar with 
 the trembling aspect, the hesitating utterance, the cold 
 ruffled skin, the bristling hair, the palpitating heart, 
 the impeded respiration, the paleness, the low pulse, 
 and the thousand other signs of fear? The slow, op- 
 pressed breathing, interrupted by sobs, the cold, pallid, 
 w^rinkled skin, the slow tottering gait, and the weak 
 pulse of the despairing? The deep broad blush of 
 shame, or the pallor of miserable envy ? The beaming 
 countenance of requited love, or the anguished ex- 
 pression of disappointed affection? The spasmodic 
 constriction of throat and chest which accompanies 
 jealousy ? The gnawing pain which torments the heart 
 of devilish hate ? The storm in the veins of the angry 
 man, his inflamed countenance, his gasping breath, 
 his bounding pulse, and wild swollen countenance ?" 
 All these external manifestations depend upon certain 
 changes effected among the invisible elements of matter. 
 IS'ow the extraordinary states into which the system 
 may be thrown soon subside, and are directly suc- 
 ceeded by the ordinary states, and whether the im- 
 pressions thus made be wholesome or unwholesome, 
 the effects are not necessarily permanent. But if these 
 conditions be continued for any considerable length of 
 time, the consequences must be serious, and may be 
 
 * Dr. Feuchtersleben. 
 
388 MENTAL HYGIENE. 
 
 even fatal. The continued indulgence of malicious 
 feelings by a person, for example, will surely so modify 
 all the internal invisible functional acts of his system as 
 to check and overcome finally its vital power ; and thus 
 any latent tendencies to chronic disease that may belong 
 to him will pretty certainly be quickened into active life. 
 A grave difficulty to be encountered in overcoming 
 states of chronic disease by ordinary medical means is 
 now seen. Diseases are perpetuated, if not produced, 
 by causes over which mere chemical influences can 
 not be presumed to exercise any positive control. Tliis 
 fact may be, often is, tacitly acknowledged by the 
 physician, but he declines to investigate its relations 
 so as to be able to turn them to useful account. He is 
 unwilling to acknowledge in practice, although he may 
 admit confidentially, that the headache, the nervous- 
 ness, the heart disease, or the dyspejDtic qualms which 
 he is called upon to remedy, are only indications of 
 some peculiar Tnorbid state of the mind or of the emo- 
 tional nature of the sufferer^ which it becomes him to 
 meet directly, rather than to torment his patient with 
 an eternal round of palliatives. In these cases, every 
 medical prescription must be totally irrelevant (though 
 written in the best Latin) unless it recognizes the ope- 
 ration of causes existing in a sphere quite beyond the 
 reach of the most potent drug. What fatal mistakes 
 may not result when stimuli are substituted for encour- 
 agement^ and j)^^ysic for rational ideas ; when the in- 
 valid is advised to try the resources of an inex- 
 haustible pharmacy, instead of bringing common sense 
 to a controlling sway in the organism ! JS'either physi- 
 cian nor patient can afibrd any longer to devote his 
 attention exclusively to the superficial and deceptive 
 signs of disease, nor to ignore the fact, that the body 
 
MENTAL HYGIENE. 389 
 
 is but the incarnate expression of the interior, invisible, 
 imperishable spirit, which is the man. 
 
 We can not get rid of the sequences of the import- 
 ant fact, that in the human organism spirit governs 
 matter, by brutishly ignoring it ; nor can we inno- 
 cently treat it as an unimportant matter. Science, 
 like true religion, is learning every day to live more 
 by faith and less by sight. 
 
 The jests that used to be hurled at the defenseless 
 head of the practitioner who dared to suggest that the 
 thoughts, and feelings and mental habits of the inva- 
 lid might need rectifying as well as his bile and blood, 
 are fast losing their point. We are all beginning to sus- 
 pect that perhap-s, after all, a disease may not be the less 
 a disease because its source happens to lie in an unruly 
 imagination, or in excessive activity, or wrong modes 
 of thought. And gradually — very slowly, to be sure 
 — yet really, we think people are waking ujd to the 
 conviction that these intangible causes are not irreme- 
 diable. They are beginning to see and understand 
 that by this close union and co-operation of the mate- 
 rial and immaterial natures, remedial agents may pos- 
 sibly find access to either or both through avenues 
 that otherwise could have no existence. We have 
 faith to believe that the time is near at hand when the 
 mental aspects and relations of disease will receive an 
 amount of attention equal to that which has always 
 been given to the pulse and tongue, the temperature 
 of the skin, and color and consistence of the excre- 
 tions. 
 
 Blessed will be the day when science shall purge 
 her soul of the dishonor of leaving this interesting and 
 vital subject to ignorance and charlatanry. But even 
 the devil should liave his due. As much as we detest 
 
390 MENTAL HYGIENE. 
 
 quackery, it can not be denied that many quacks meet 
 with a success in the treatment of some diseases that 
 would be very puzzlmg if we could not refer it in 
 great measure to the mental control they contrive to 
 exert over their patients. In this respect, in practice, 
 the pretender has a positive and oftentimes an immense 
 advantage over the real man of science. He stimu- 
 lates his patient's imagination, awakens his hope, gains 
 his confidence, whereby the perturbed mind is re- 
 stored to a condition of tranquillity, and thus a state 
 of the system is induced most conducive to that spon- 
 taneous restoration of its harmony and power which is 
 often mistaken for the effect of medicine. 
 
 A wholesome co-operation of the mental, emotional, 
 and material forces of the invalid is, indeed, the grand 
 desideratum, and if the charlatan can secure it, he is 
 certainly entitled to the credit of doing what his betters 
 so often and so lamentably fail in their efforts to accom- 
 plish. 
 
 Every one knows what benefit is frequently de- 
 rived from a simple change of doctors ; this benefit 
 is generally much greater than the difference in the 
 courses of treatment will account for. We all know 
 how salutary are the influences of cheerful society, 
 change of scene, and exciting incidents, in some condi- 
 tions of the system. It is very strange that the abun- 
 dant experiences of men in this direction should not 
 long ago have convinced them of the existence of a 
 principle so important and fundamental. 
 
 We shall make no attempt here at giving specific 
 directions in regard to the best manner of bringing the 
 principles of mental hygiene to bear upon particular 
 cases. We can only direct en passant the attention 
 of invalids and physicians to this important subject. 
 
MENTAL HYGIENE. 391 
 
 We believe that while some benefit may be derived 
 from discussion of this great question, in the enlighten- 
 ment of idle public mind, no extensive practical advan- 
 tage will be reaped until these principles are taught in 
 our schools and incorporated into our medical science. 
 The mind itself must be regarded as an available 
 force capable of being aroused and managed in such 
 a manner as efiectually to oppose the tendencies of the 
 body toward disease. 
 
 It should be understood that the eflorts of the physi- 
 cian must be seconded by the patient ; and that this 
 concurrence must not be faint and faltering, but deter- 
 mined and earnest. If his energies, or what remains 
 of them, can be thus enlisted in his own behalf, the 
 victory is already half gained. The only hopeless 
 invalid is he who has no resolution — in whose soul 
 faith and courage have utterly died out. 
 
 A man may bestow the greatest care upon what he 
 eats and drinks ; may regulate ever so nicely his pe- 
 riods of exercise and of repose ; learn by heart whole 
 treatises on the art of living long ; reflect profoundly 
 on the relation of his feelings, his will, and his thoughts 
 to his general well-being. But more than this is de- 
 manded of him. He must learn to govern^ as well as 
 to Icnow^ himself. Does the reader say, "Oh, I am 
 incapable of such efforts as are necessary for this." I 
 answer : Your duty in the premises is demonstrable. 
 God, who succors the raven so tenderly, is not a hard 
 master. " You can do what you should do." 
 

APPENDIX. 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 Laurent JouBERT. . .Treatise on Laughter, containing its Essence, 
 Paris, 1550. Causes, and Marvelous Effects — being Curious 
 
 Researches, Reasonings, and Observations. 
 
 J. F. ScALiGER The Art of Gymnastics. 
 
 Lyons, 1561. 
 
 Leonard Fuchs Movements and Repose. 
 
 Tubingen, 1565. 
 
 Ambrose Rare On Movements and Repose. 
 
 Paris, 1575. 
 Jules Alessandrini . The Art of Preserving Health ;" in twenty-three 
 Cologne, 1575. Books. 
 
 Jean A. Borelli Animal Mechanics. 
 
 Rome, 1680. 
 Pierre Brisseau. . ., Treatise on Sympathetic Movements, with an Ex- 
 Valenciennes, planation of such as take place in various Ner- 
 1682. vous Diseases. 
 
 S. F. Paulline Curious Account of how Blows will often Cure, 
 
 Frankfort, 1698. promptly and well, all kinds of Chronic Diseases, 
 
 nearly incurable : the whole Proved and Illus- 
 trated by Agreeable and Pleasant Anecdotes, and 
 by Particular Remarks and Interesting Notes by 
 the Author. 
 
 Geo. E. Stahl Active and Passive Commotions of the Blood — Of 
 
 Halle, 1698 to Horseback Riding, a new Method of Curing 
 
 1736. Lung Diseases — Of the Medical Use of Volun- 
 
 tary Movements— Of Movements, Diet, and Cold 
 Water, the simplest Remedies— Several other 
 Works on the same subjects. 
 
 De Sauvages Rational Mechanics in Medicine. 
 
 Leyden, 1703. 
 
 9 
 
394 APPENDIX. 
 
 Fredeeick Hoffman . Dissertations on Medical Physics, relating to 
 La Hague, 1708. Health. 
 
 Paul-Jean Burette. . The Gymnastics of the Ancients, and several other 
 Paris, 1717. Works. 
 
 Nicholas Axdry. . . . Orthopoedy ; the Art of Preventing and Correcting 
 Paris, 1741. Deformities of the Body in Children by means at 
 
 the command of Parents, and those having Chil- 
 dren in charge. 
 
 FucHNER On several kinds of Passive Movements, appro- 
 Halle, 1746 to 1748. priate to certain Diseases — On the Danger of Cor- 
 poreal Movements, when inappropriately Applied 
 — Basis of Physiology, deduced from Physical and 
 Mechanical Principles — Basis of General Pathol- 
 ogy, deduced from the Principles of Anatomy, 
 Physics, and Mechanics. 
 
 C. J. TissoT Surgical and Medical Gymnastics. 
 
 Paris, 1780. 
 
 Guts Muths Exercises for Youth. 
 
 Paris, 1793. 
 
 Charles Loxde Medical Gymnastics ; or Exercise Applied to the 
 
 Paris, 1821. Organs of the Body according to the Laws of 
 
 Physiology, Hygiene, and Therapeutics. 
 
 Ed. Webbe Mechanism of the Organs of Locomotion : Re- 
 
 Leipsic, 1836. searches Anatomical and Physiological. 
 
 J. A. L. Werner . . .Medical Gymnastics ; or, the Art of Correcting 
 Vices of the Bodily Formation, and of Re-estab- 
 lishing the Form and Proportions of the Human 
 Body according to the Principles of Anatomy 
 and Physiology. 
 
 Peter Henry Ling. . Treatise on Gymnastics, without Apparatus. 
 1836. 
 
 1838 Treatise on Sword and Bayonet Exercise. 
 
 1840 Treatise on the General Principles of Gymnastics. 
 
 J. F. LoESCHKE Gymnastics in Lunacy. 
 
 Leipsic, 1840. 
 
 G. Indebetoe Therapeutic Manipulation. 
 
 London, 1842. 
 
 H. RoTHSTEiN GjTnnastics in Sweden, and the Gymnastic System 
 
 1841. of Ling. 
 
 G. Resmer Regular Exercises in Relation to the Physical De- 
 
 Leipsic, 1843. velopment of the Young. 
 
 Walker Manly Exercises. 
 
 London. 1845. 
 
APPENDIX. 395 
 
 Hartwig The Therapatetic Curative Method ; or, the Treat- 
 
 Dusscldorf, 1847. ment of Diseases by Movements. 
 
 Adolf Spiers Manual of Gymnastics for Schools. 
 
 Basle, 18i7. 
 
 G. M. ScHREBER Medical Gymnastics — Directions for a Healthy and 
 
 Long Life. 
 
 Georgii Kinesitherapie, or Treatment of Diseases by Move- 
 Paris, 1847. ments, according to Ling's Method. 
 
 G. Friedrich Gymnastics, as a means of Preserving the Health 
 
 Kentley, 1847. and Curing the Diseases of both Sexes. 
 
 KoTHSTEiN Gymnastics of the System of the great Northern 
 
 Berlin, 1850. Gymnasiarch, P. H. Ling. 
 
 M. Roth Prevention and Cure of Many Chronic Diseases. 
 
 London, 1851. 
 
 E. A. RiCHTER Organon of Physiological Therapeutics. 
 
 Leipsic, 1850. 
 
 J. C. Werner Basis of Scientific Orthopcedie. 
 
 Berlin, 1851. 
 
 RoTHSTEiN Journal of the Gvmnastic "World. 
 
 1852. 
 
 VoN Medicin The Medical Power of Certain Movements in Ad- 
 
 Leipsic, 1852. vanced Age, as a Means of Radically Curing 
 
 Obstinate Hypochondria, Gout, Rheumatism, 
 Oppression of the Chest, Stomach Affections, 
 Hemorrhoids, and several other Diseases. 
 
 ScHREBBB Method of Medical Gymnastics, for the Use of 
 
 Leipsic, 1852. Physicians and Others, deduced from Experience. 
 
 Eulenburg The Swedish Curative Gymnastics. 
 
 Berlin, 1853. 
 
 A. C. Neumann Curative Gymnastics. 
 
 Berlin, 1853. 
 
 C. J. Heldler Vibrations Considered as a Means of Diagnosis and 
 
 Braunschwig, 1853. Cure. 
 
 RoTHSTEiN Free Gymnastic Exercises. 
 
 Berlin, 1855. 
 
 RiCHTER ■ Organon of Physiological Therapeutics. 
 
 R. W. Idler Manual of Hygiene for the Friends of Long Life. 
 
 Berlin, 1855. 
 
 ScHREBER Medical Gymnastics for the Chamber ; being Rep- 
 
 1855. resentations and Descriptions of Movements, 
 
 without Apparatus or Assistance, and Suitable 
 to Perform at all Times, and in all Places, and 
 for all Ages — applied to various Affections. 
 
^^^ APPENDIX. 
 
 SpTic *1855 ^T^^^*« f«^ Females ; an Educational Means 
 
 l^ipsic, 1855. of Developmg Health and Beauty ; with Advice 
 
 to Parents and Teachers 
 
 ^^^«^ Manly Exercises. 
 
 London, 1855. 
 
 "on^: 1851. ^i:r:nr ^"^ °"^ "' ^''-■^^ "^--« 'y 
 
 ]^^l^ Hand-Book of the Movement-Cure. 
 
 p' ^Jnl' Cinesie, or Science of Movements. 
 
 i aris, 185 (■ . 
 
 ^* ^ISeo'^''^ ^^^"""^ ^""^ ^"^""^'''^ ""^ *^^ Movement-Cure. 
 
"BOOK.8 6E.NT, PkEPAID, BY MaIL, TO ANY ru8T-OFF10« IN THB UnITKD StATBS." 
 
 A LIST OF WOllKS 
 
 FOWLER AND WELLS, 308 BROADWAY, NEW YORK. 
 
 In order to accommodaie " the people" residing iu all parts of the United States, the I'uli- 
 lishers will forward, by return of the first mail, auj book named in the following list, llu! 
 postage will be pre-paid at the l>ew York office. The price of each work, including pogtagi-, 
 is given, so that the exact amount may be remitted. Letters containing orders should bo 
 post-paid, and directed as follows : FoWLER AND VVelLS 
 
 30& Bboadwat, New Yoek. 
 
 WORKS ON PHRENOLOGY. 
 
 Co:mbe's Lectures on Phke- 
 
 .N01.OOY. A complete course. Bouud in muslin, $1 25. 
 
 Chaet for Recording various 
 
 Uevi-lopmeuU. Designed for rhrouolosists. 6 cents. 
 
 Constitution of Man. ~ By 
 
 Ueo. Combe. Authorized edithin, with Illustrations, 
 embraciug his Portrait. 62 cents ; musliu, 87 cents. 
 
 Defence of Phrenology, 
 
 Arguments and Testimony. By Dr. Boardman. A 
 work lor Doubters. 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 Domestic Life, Thoughts on ; 
 
 its Concord and Discord. By N. Sizer. 15 cents. 
 
 Education Complete. Em- 
 
 bia-cing Pliysiology, Animal and Mental, Self-Culture, 
 and Memory. One vol. By 0. S. Fowler. $2 50. 
 
 Education, founded on the ISTa- 
 
 ture of Man. By Dr. Spurzheim. Muslin, S7 cents. 
 
 Familiar Lessons on Phre- 
 
 KOLOGT and Physiolooy. An ex-ellent work for 
 Children. Beautilully Illustrated. $1 25. 
 
 Love AND Parentage and Am- 
 
 ATIVENK3S J applied to the liuproVbment of Offspring. 
 By 0. S. Fowler. 75 cents. 
 
 Marriage; its History and 
 
 Piiilosophy, with directions for Happy Marriages. 
 Bouud iu i^per, 50 cents ; musliu, 75 cents. 
 
 Matrimony; or, Phrenology 
 
 and Physiologv applied to the Selection of Congenial 
 Companions for Life. By 0. S. Fowler. 30 ceats. 
 
 Memory and Intellectual 
 
 iMPBOVKMKNT ; applied to Self-Education. By O. S. 
 Fowler. Paper, 62 cents ; musliu, 87 ceut*. 
 
 Moral and Intellectual Sci- 
 
 KNCE. By Combe, Gregory, and Others. Siusllii, Ji JO. 
 
 Mental Science, Lectures on, 
 
 according to the Philosophy of Phrenology. By Kev. 
 G. S. Weaver. Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, b7 cents. 
 
 Phrenology Proved, Ilhis- 
 
 trated, and Applied. Tliirty-eeventh edition. A 
 sttiudard work on the science. Muslin, $1 25. 
 
 Phrenological Journal, 
 
 American, Monthly. Quarto, Illustrated. A year, $1. 
 
 Phrenology and the Scrii»- 
 
 TUUES. By Eev. John Pieipont. 15 cents. 
 
 Phrenological Guide. Dc- 
 
 signed for the Use of Students. 15 cents. 
 
 Phrenological Almanac. 11- 
 
 lustrated with numerous engravings. 6 cents. 
 
 Phrenological Bust : design- 
 ed especially for Lcarnei 8. showing the exact loeation 
 of all the Organs of the Biain fully developed. Price, 
 Incluiling box for packiu',-, $1 25. [Not mailable.] 
 
 Phrenological Specimens for 
 
 Societies and Private Cabinets. 40 casts ; nett, $25. 
 
 Self-Culture and Perfection 
 
 OF Chakactek. Paper, 62 cents; niuHlIn, S7cent.^. 
 
 Self-Instructor in Phrenol- 
 ogy and Physiology. Illustrated with one hunilr.-.l 
 enirravings. Paper, 30 cents ; muslin, 50 cents. 
 
 Symbolical Head and PI ire- 
 
 nological Chai t. In map form, showing the Natural 
 L.iuguage of tiie Phrenological Organs. 30 cents. 
 
 Works of Gall on Phrenol- 
 ogy, o v.ols., $7. 
 
 THB PUBI.18MBB would tespectfully refer Strwigerg, Agents, and Country Dealers to the p.^cJpal Publltb«« 
 m New York, Philadelphia, Boston, or other cities, for evidence of their ability to fuldU all contracts. They bar. 
 been many years before the public, engaged in the i)ublishlns business in the ci 
 
 iif New Yoilc. 
 
Fowler and Wells' Publications. 
 
 HYDROPATHY; OH, WATER-CURE. 
 
 Ik the psople can be thoronghly Indoctrinated In the general principles of Dtdbopatht, and make them- 
 selves acquainted with the Laws of Licb and Hsalth, they will well-nigh emancipate tbemselTes from all 
 need of doctors of any sort.— Dr..Tball. 
 
 By no other way can men approach nearer to the gods than by conferring health on men.— Oicseo. 
 
 Accidents and Emergencies. 
 
 By Alfred Smee. Notes by TralL Illustrated. 15 cents. 
 
 Children ; their Hydropathic 
 
 Manageiaent in Health and Disease. Dr. Shew. $125. 
 
 Cholep?a ; its Causes, Preven- 
 
 tion, and Cure, and all other Bowel Complaints. 30 c. 
 
 Consumption ; its Causes, Pre- 
 vention and Cure. Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 Cook Book, Htdkopathic. 
 
 With New Recipes. Illustrated. By R. T. Trail, M.D. 
 Paper, 62 Cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 Domestic Practice of Hy- 
 
 i>noPATHY,wltn 15 engraved illustrations of important 
 subjects from drawings. By E Johnson, 5I.D. $1 50. 
 
 Experience in Water-Cure in 
 
 Acute and other Diseases. By Mrs, Nichols. 30 cts. 
 
 Faiviily Physician, Hydro- 
 
 pathic. By Dr. Shew. A uew and invaluable work 
 for home practice. Profusely illustrated. $2 50. 
 
 Hydropathic Encyclopedia. 
 
 A Complete System of Hydropathy and Hyeiene. Il- 
 lustrated. By K. T. Trail, M.l). In one large vol- 
 ume, with nearly 8 tlmusand puges. Price, $3. 
 
 Hydropathy ; oi. Water- Cure. 
 
 Principles and Modes ot i I ej.traent. Dr. Shew. $125. 
 
 Home Treativient for Sexual 
 
 Abuses, with Hydropathic Manasf raent. A practical 
 treatise for botii sexes. By Dr. Tiall. 30 cents. 
 
 Introduction to the Water- 
 
 CusK. With First Principles. 15 cents. 
 
 MlDWU'ERY AND THE DISEASES 
 
 OF Women. A practical work. By Dr. Shew. Jl 25. 
 
 Parents' Guide and Child- 
 
 BIRTH Made East. By Mrs. H. Pendleton. CO cts. 
 
 Philosophy of Water-Cure. 
 
 By J. Balblrnie, M.D. A work for beginners. 30 c. 
 
 Practice of Water-Cure. By 
 
 Drs. Wilson and Gully. A handy, popular work. 30 c. 
 
 Pregnancy and Childbirth; 
 
 Water-Cuie for Women, with cases. 30 cents. 
 
 Results of Hydropathy; 
 
 Water-Cure in Chronic Dis- 
 eases ; an exposition of the Causes, Progress, and Ter 
 minations of Vaiious Chronic Diseasts. By Dr. .1. Jl. 
 Gully. An imiioi tant work. $150. 
 
 Water and Yegetable Diet 
 
 In Sciofula, Cancel, Asthma, etc. By Dr. Lamb. Notes 
 by Dr. Shew. 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 Water-C itre in E yery Known 
 
 Disease. By J. H. Rausse. 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cts. 
 
 WATEi?-CuRE Manual. A 
 
 popular work OC Hydropathy. 62 cts. ; musltn, 87 cts. 
 
 Water-Cure Ali>ianac. Con- 
 taining much Important matter for all classes. 6 cts. 
 
 Water-Cure Journal and 
 
 Heralu op Refobms. Devoted to Hydropathy and 
 Medical Reform. Piabltohed Monthly, at $1 a year. 
 
 PowLm AND Wells hare all worki on Htdbopathy, Phtbiolosy, and the Natural Sciences g«nes-»ny. B«)k 
 sellers supplied on the moit liberal tei-ms. Agents wanted In every State, County, and Town. These works axe 
 universally popular, and tti^nsands might be sold where they have never yet been Introduced. Letters and Orders 
 •honldbe post-paid, and directed to the Publishers, as follows : 
 
 FOWIiER AND WELIiS, 
 
 [name the Post «fflce, County, and State.] 808 BeOADWAT, NeW Yoek-. 
 
FoNvr.Ki? AND Wells' Puklicatiok.s. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY, MESMERISM, AND PSYCHOLOGY. 
 
 ON PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 Alcohol and the Constitu- 
 
 TioN OF Man. Illustiated by a Diiigram. By Prof. 
 Tdiunaus. 30 ceuts. 
 
 Alcoholic Controversy. A 
 
 Kevlewo!" the Westminster lieview ou the Pkvstological 
 Eiiorts of Toetotalism. By Dr. Trail. 30 cents. 
 
 Amativeness ; or, Evils and 
 
 Kenieiliesof Excesiive and Perverted Sexuality, with 
 Advice to the Manied aud Sinjcle. 1.". cents. 
 
 Chastity, in a Course of Lee- 
 
 tures to Youus Jlen. By Dr. Graham. SO coiits. 
 
 Chronic Diseases, especially 
 
 Nervous Diseases of Women. Important work. 30 cts. 
 
 Combe's Physiology, applied 
 
 to the Improvement of Mental and Phyeical Educa- 
 tion. Notes by Fowler. 62 cents ; muslin, i>7 cents. 
 
 Digestive, Physiology of. 
 
 The Principles of Dietetics. By Andrew Oombe. 30 cts. 
 
 Family Gymnasium. "With 
 
 numeioud illustrations; Containing the most im- 
 proved methods of ajiplying -iymnastic, Calistheuic, 
 Kinesipalhic, aud vocal exercises to the development 
 of the bodily organs, the iuvigoratlun of their fui\c- 
 tions, the preservation of health, and cure of dis- 
 eases and deformities. By B. T. Trail, JI.D. $1 25. 
 
 Family Dentist; a Popular 
 
 Treatise on the Teeth. By D. C. Warner, M.D. 87 cts. 
 
 Food and Diet ; containing an 
 
 Analysis of every kind of Food aud Drink. By Dr. J. 
 I'ereira. Muslin, $1 25. 
 
 Fruits and Farinacea the 
 
 Proper Food of Man. With Notes and engraved Il- 
 lustrations. By K. T. Trail. M.D. Muslin, $1 25. 
 
 Generation, Philosophy of; 
 
 its Abuses, Causes, Prevention, and Cure. 30 cents. 
 
 Hereditary Descent : its Laws 
 
 and Facts applied to Human Improvetnent. 0. S. P. 
 New Edition. Paper, 62 cents j muslin, ^7 cents. 
 
 Infancy; or, the Physiologi- 
 
 cal and Moral Management of Children. Illustiated. 
 By Dr. Coii-be. Paper, *62 cents ; muslin, ;^" cents. 
 
 Love and Parentage ; applied 
 
 to the improvement of OlTspring. 30 cenis. 
 
 Maternity ; or, the Bearing 
 
 and Nursing of Children, including Female Educa- 
 tion. 0. S. Fowler. 62 cents ; muslin, £,7 cents. 
 
 J^ATURAL Laws of Man. By 
 
 Dr. Spurzheim. A good work. 30 cents. 
 
 Philosophy of Sacred Histo- 
 
 KY, considered In Kelallon to Human Ailment and the 
 Wines ol Scripture. By Sylvester Uiahain. fi. 
 
 Physiology, Animal and Men- 
 
 tal addled to lU-alth of Body and Power of Mind. By 
 O. S. Fowler. Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 Sexual Diseases; their 
 
 Causes, Prevention, and Cure on Physiological Prln- 
 ciplts. Including practical directions for homo treat- 
 ment. $1 2.">. 
 
 Sober and Temperate Life; 
 
 with Notes and Illustrations by Louis Coriiaro. 30 cts. 
 
 Syringes, Patent Injectinp-Li- 
 
 Struments, best in market. $3. 
 
 The Science of Human Life. 
 
 By Sylvi-ater Giaham, Bl.D. With a Portrait „nd Bi- 
 ographical Sketcli of the Author. $2 r.O. " 
 
 Tea and Coffee ; their Physi- 
 cal, intellectual, and Mor,aiKtrect9. ByAlcott. iJctB. 
 
 Teeth; their Structure, Dis- 
 
 ease, and Management, with Engravings. 15 cents. 
 
 Tobacco, Works on : compris- 
 ing E-ssays by Trail, Shew, Alcott, Baldwin, Burdtll, 
 Fowler, Greeley, and others. Complete In 1 vol. 62 c. 
 
 Uterine Diseases and Dis- 
 placements. A Practical Treatise on the various 
 Diseases, .Malpositions, ■#!id Structural Derangements 
 of the Uterus and its Ai)pendaeHa. By Dr. Trail, il- 
 lustrated with colored eugiavlugs, $5 ; not colored, %1. 
 
 Yegetable Diet, as sanctioned 
 
 by Medical Men and Experience In all Ages. ]!j Dr. 
 Alcott. Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 MESMEEISM-PSYCHOLOGY. 
 
 Electrical Psychology, Phi- 
 losophy of, in Twelve lectures. By Dr. J. B. Dods. 
 Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, 87 ceuts. 
 
 Fascination ; or, the Philoso- 
 
 phy of Charming (Magnetlsrai. Illustrating the Prin- 
 ciples of Lite. Paper, 50 cents : muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 Library of Mesmerism and 
 
 PSYCHOLOST. With Bultahle Illustrations. In two 
 large volumes of about 900 pages. Price, $3. 
 
 Macrocosm and Microcosm ; 
 
 or, the Universe Without and the UniveiKe Within. Bv 
 Fishbough. Scientific Work. 62 cts. ; muslin, »7 els. 
 
 Philosophy of Mes5ierism and 
 
 Clairvoyanck. Six Lectures. With Instruction. 30 c. 
 
 Psychology ; or, the Science- 
 
 of the Soul. By Haddock. Illustrated. 30 cents. 
 
 ElTasB of these worki may be ordered and received by return of the Pirst M.ml, postage prepaid by the Pub- 
 Ilflh«r» Please addresi all letters, post-paid, to FOWIiEU AKT* ■WEIjIjS, 
 
 N. B.— Name your Post Office, County, and State. 308 BeOADWAT, New Yokk. 
 
FowLEK, AJs'D Wells' Publicatiois's. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC AND MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 Wheu single copies of these works are wanted, the amount, in postage stamps, small chauge, or bank-notes, 
 may be inclosed la a letter and sent to the Publishers, who will forward the books by return of the Fikst Mail. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS. 
 
 ^ViMs AND Aids foe Gikls and 
 
 YouN(» Women. By Kev. G. S. Weaver. Price, 67 c 
 
 Chemistry, applied to Physi- 
 ology, Agriculture, ana commerce. By Liebig. 25 cts. 
 
 Dejiands of the Age on Col- 
 
 I.KUKS. An Oration. By Horace Mann. 25 cents. 
 
 Delia's Doctors ; or, a Glance 
 
 Behind the Scenes. By Misa Hannah Gardner Creamer. 
 F.ir the Family. Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, S7 cents. 
 
 Domestic Animals : A Man- 
 
 ual of Cattle, Sheep, and Horse Husbandry ; or, How 
 to Breed, Rear, and Manage the Tenants of the barn- 
 yard. Paper, 30 cents ; muslin 50 cents. 
 
 Fruit Culture for the Mill- 
 
 ION- ; or, Hand-Book for the Cultivation and Mauage- 
 uient of Fiuit Trees. Illustrated with Ninety En- 
 Kraiings by Thomas Gregj.. Paper, 30 cents j mus- 
 lin, 50 cents. 
 
 Hints towar© »Keforms, in 
 
 Lt'Ctures, Addresses, and other Writings. By H. 
 Gj-eeley. Second edition, with Crystal Palace. $1 25. 
 
 HoiiE FOR All ; the Gravel 
 
 Wall, a New, Ch^ap, an.' Superior Mode of Building, 
 with Engravings, Plans, Views, etc. 6" cents. 
 
 Hopes and Helps for the 
 
 YouNB OF Both Sexes. By Kev. 6. S. Weaver. An 
 excellent work. Paper, 62 cents ; muslin, S" cents. 
 
 How TO Write; A Pocket 
 
 Manual of Composition 
 
 uable to the young. Paper, 30 cents 
 
 How TO Talk ; A Pocket 
 
 Manual of Conversation and Debate, with more than 
 Five Hundred Ccjnimon Mistakes In Speaking, Cor- 
 rected. Paper, 30 cents ; muslin, 50 cents. 
 
 How TO Behave; A Pocket 
 
 Manual of Republican Etiquette, and Guide to Correct 
 Personal Habits, with Rules for Debating Societies 
 and Deliberative Assemblies. 30 cts.; muslin, 50 cts. 
 
 How TO Do BusLNEss ; A Pock- 
 
 et Slaimal of Practical Atfaiis, and a Guide to Success 
 in Life, with a Collection of Legal and Coinmeicial 
 Fornif. Suitable for all. 30 cents ; muslin, 50 cents. 
 
 EIand-Books for Home Im- 
 
 VKOVEMENT (Educational) ; comprising " How to 
 Wiile," "How to Talk," "How to Behave," and 
 '• How to Do Business," in one laige volume. ?1 50. 
 
 boiORTALiTT Triumphant. — 
 
 The Existence of a God, with the Evidence. By Rev. 
 J. B. Dods. Paper. 62 cents ; muslin, 87 cents. 
 
 E^NZAs Region; Embracing 
 
 Desciiptlons of Scenery, Climate, Productions, Soil, 
 and Resources of the TeiTitoiy. Interspersed with 
 Incidents ol Travel. By Max Greene. 30 cents. 
 
 Life Illustrated. A Kew 
 
 First-Class Pictorial Weekly Family Newspaper, de 
 voted to News, Literature, Science, the Arts, etc. 
 Per year, llj advance, f2 j half a year, Jl. 
 
 Lectures on the Science of 
 
 Human Life. By Sylvester Graham, M J). $2 00. 
 
 Population, Theory of. The 
 
 L.iw of Animal Fertility. Introduction by Trail. 15 ct*. 
 
 The Farm : A Manual of 
 
 Practical Agriculture ; or. How to Cultivate all the 
 Field Crops, with a most valuable Essay on Farm 
 Management. Paper, 30 cents ; muslin, £0 cents. 
 
 The Garden: A Manual of 
 
 Horticulture ; or, How to Cultivate Vegetables, Fruits, 
 and Flowers. Paper, 30 cents ; muslin, 50 cents. 
 
 The House: A Manual of 
 
 Rural Architecture ; or. How to Build Dwellings, 
 Barns, and Out-Houses generally. Paper, SO cents ; 
 muslin, 60 cents. 
 
 Rural Manuals; comprising 
 
 "The House," "The Farm." "The Gardea," and 
 "Domestic Animals," intone large volome. $1 M, 
 
 Ways of Life; the Right Way 
 
 ind the Wrong Way. By Rev. G. S. Weaver. A cap- 
 ital work. Paper, 50 cents ; muslin, 60 cents. 
 
 ON PHONOGRAPHY. 
 
 Hand-Book of Standard or 
 
 Amkbican Phonography. By Andrew J. Graham. 
 Muslin, ?1 50. 
 
 The Manual of Phonography. 
 
 By Pitman. A new and comp.ieheusive exposition 
 of Phonography, with copious illustratious and exer- 
 cises. 60 cents. 
 
 American Manual of Pho- 
 
 KOORAPHY ; being a complete guide to the acquisition 
 of Short-Hand. By Elias Longley. 50 cents. 
 
 Phonographic Teacher; be- 
 
 Ing an Inductive Exposition of Phonography, with 
 Insti notions to those who liave not the assistance of 
 an Oral Teacher. By E. Webster. In boards. 40 cts. 
 
 Phonographic Copy-]3ook, of 
 
 Ruled Pai>er, for the nse of Phonographic students. 
 12 cents. 
 All works on Phonography will be furnished to order. 
 
 These works may be ordered in large or small quantities. A liberal discount ■vrlll be made to Agkxts, and othen, 
 who buy to sell again. They may be sent by Express or as Freight, ty Railroad, or otherwise, to any place in the 
 United States, the Canadas, Europe, or elsewlieie. Checks or drafts, for large amounts, on New York, Philadelphia, 
 or Boston, always preferred. We pay cost of exchange. All letters should be post-paid, and addressed as follows : 
 
 FOWIiER AND WEIiliS, 
 
 [N»Di« the roitoace, Connty, and Stale.] 803 BeoADWAY, New YoKK. 
 
THIS BOOK IS DTJB ON THE LAST DATE 
 
 STAMPED BELOW | 
 
 RETURN BIOLOGY LIBRARY 
 
 TO— i^ 3503 Life Sciences BIdg. 642-2531 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 
 2 3 
 
 ' l-MON 
 
 [f H-MON<^GRAPH 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 Renewed books ore subject to immediate recall 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 immediately 
 
 
 
 ' ^?^ 
 
 87 
 
 V*7 
 
 
 , vk^ 18131 
 
 J/ 
 
 
 "BlOInRv ' iR^' 
 
 ^y 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' f i- . * , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 FORM NO. DD4 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
 
 
 
U,C, BERKFI Pv 
 
 laaMmmT' 
 
 ^o^J.377a" 
 
 8435/ 
 
 It I 
 
 rs 
 
 BIOLOGY 
 LIBRARY 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
I ' 
 
 ./ 1